High Voltage Shareware

home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search

/ High Voltage Shareware / high1.zip / high1 / DIR8 / WP60DOSM.ZIP / PRODUCT.ASC < prev next >

Wrap

Text File | 1993-09-22 | 2MB | 49,223 lines

Product Commands Index ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── A ─────── Advance AdvanceDlg AFCEditBegin AFCEditEnd AFCEditFont AltEqual AltHome AltKeySelectsMenuBar AppendFilenameDlg AppendToFile AttributeAppearanceOff AttributeAppearanceOn AttributeAppearanceToggle AttributeNormal AttributePosition AttributePositionToggle AttributeRelativeSize AttributeRelativeSizeToggle AttributeSizeRatios AutoCodePlacement B ─────── BackTab Backup BackupDlg BackupMinutes BackupOriginalDoc BarcodePOSTNET BaselinePlacement BaselinePlacementSetup BeepOnError BeepOnHyphenation BeepOnSearchFailure BeepOptionsDlg Binding BlockDelete BlockKey BlockOff BlockOn BlockProtect BlockRectangle BlockSave BlockTabularColumn BoldKey BookmarkBlock BookmarkCreate BookmarkDelete BookmarkDlg BookmarkFind BookmarkMove BookmarkRename BorderBottomLine BorderColor BorderCornerRadius BorderDropShadow BorderFillColor BorderInsideSpacing BorderLeftLine BorderOutsideSpacing BorderRightLine BorderSeparatorLine BorderSetSpacing BorderStyleCopy BorderStyleCreate BorderStyleDelete BorderStyleDlg BorderStyleEdit BorderStyleEditDlg BorderStyleEnd BorderStyleName BorderStyleRetrieve BorderStyleSave BorderTopLine BorderUseBorderColor BoxAttachTo BoxBorderDlg BoxBorderStyle BoxCaptionEdit BoxCaptionInitialStyle BoxCaptionNumberStyle BoxCaptionOptionsDlg BoxCaptionPosition BoxCaptionRotation BoxCaptionWidth BoxChangeLineHeight BoxChangeStyle BoxCharPositionDlg BoxContentEdit BoxContentOptionsDlg BoxContentPosition BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio BoxContentType BoxCounter BoxCreate BoxCreateDlg BoxDelete BoxDlg BoxEdit BoxEditByCounter BoxEditDlg BoxEditNext BoxEditPrevious BoxEnd BoxEquationDefaultFont BoxEquationFilename BoxEquationFont BoxEquationSave BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic BoxEquationSettingsDlg BoxExactPositionDlg BoxFillStyle BoxHeight BoxHorizontalAlignment BoxHorizontalPosition BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold BoxImageBrightness BoxImageContrast BoxImageDitherMethod BoxImageFill BoxImageFlipX BoxImageFlipY BoxImageHalftoneOptions BoxImageInvertColors BoxImagePresentations BoxImageMonochrome BoxImageMove BoxImageRetrieve BoxImageRotate BoxImageSave BoxImageScaling BoxImageSettingsDlg BoxImageShowBackground BoxOverlap BoxPagePositionDlg BoxParagraphPositionDlg BoxResetBorder BoxResetCaption BoxResetContent BoxResetContentRender BoxResetCounter BoxResetFill BoxResetPosition BoxResetTextFlow BoxSizeDlg BoxStaysOnPage BoxStyleCopy BoxStyleCreate BoxStyleDelete BoxStyleDlg BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleEditDlg BoxStyleEnd BoxStyleName BoxStyleRetrieve BoxStyleSave BoxTextAngle BoxTextDefaultStyle BoxTextFilename BoxTextFlow BoxTextFlowContour BoxTextFlowSquare BoxTextSettingsDlg BoxVerticalAlignment BoxVerticalPosition BoxWidth ButtonBar ButtonBarPosition ButtonBarSelect ButtonBarSetupGraphics ButtonBarSetupText ButtonBarStyle C ─────── CancelKey CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsEnd CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont CartridgesAndFontsQuantity Center CenterCurrentPage CenterPages CGAFastText ChapterNumber ChapterNumberDecrement ChapterNumberDisplay ChapterNumberIncrement ChapterNumberMethod ClearDoc ClipboardAppendTo ClipboardRetrieve ClipboardSaveTo ClipboardSetNumber Close CloseDlg ColorAdd ColorDelete ColorDlg ColorModify ColorPaletteCreate ColorPaletteDelete ColorPaletteDlg ColorPaletteRename ColorPaletteSelect ColorSchemeAssign ColorSchemeCopy ColorSchemeCreate ColorSchemeDelete ColorSchemeSelect ColorUnits ColumnsDefinition ColumnsDefinitionDlg ColumnsDefinitionSimple ColumnsOff ColumnsTablesDlg CommentConvert CommentCreate CommentEdit CommentsDisplaySetup ComposeDlg CompressedPrintForList ConditionalEndOfPage ConvertCaseDlg ConvertCaseInitialCaps ConvertCaseLowercase ConvertCaseUppercase ConvertCodePage Copy CopyAndPaste CounterBoxNumberingDlg CounterCreate CounterDecrement CounterDelete CounterDisplay CounterDlg CounterEditLevel CounterEditLevelMethod CounterEditLevelName CounterEditMethod CounterEditName CounterIncrement CounterSetMethod CounterSetValue CreateSummaryOnSaveExit CrossRefBothReference CrossRefBothTarget CrossRefEnterSubstructure CrossRefMarkBothDlg CrossRefMarkReference CrossRefMarkReferenceDlg CrossRefMarkTarget CrossRefMarkTargetDlg CtrlDelKey CtrlInsKey CtrlNumPlus CursorSpeed Cut CutAndPaste D ─────── DateCode DateDlg DateFormat DateFormatDlg DateText DecimalAlignmentCharacter DelayCodes DelayCodesDlg DeleteAppend DeleteAppendFilenameDlg DeleteCharNext DeleteCharPrevious DeleteToBeginningOfWord DeleteToEndOfLine DeleteToEndOfPage DeleteToEndOfPageDlg DeleteToEndOfWord DeleteWord DirectoryCreate DirectoryDefault DirectoryRemove DisplayListMode DisplayMode DisplayOnStatusLine DisplayPitch DisplayRewrite DisplaySetupDlg DisplayUnits DisplayZoom DisplayZoomSetup DocCharacterMap DocCharacterMapDefault DocCharacterMapDefaultDlg DocCharacterMapDlg DocCompare DocCompareDlg DocCompareRemoveRedline DocCompareRemoveRedlineDlg DocInformation DocInitialFont DocSummaryDelete DocSummaryDescriptiveTypeSetup DocSummaryDlg DocSummaryExtract DocSummaryField DocSummaryFieldOrder DocSummaryPrint DocSummarySave DocSummarySetupDlg DOSCommand DotLeader DoubleSidedPrint DownArrow E ─────── EndCenterOrAlignment EndField EndFieldKey EndnoteCreate EndnoteEdit EndnoteEditDlg EndnoteMinimum EndnoteNewNumber EndnoteNumberDecrement EndnoteNumberDisplay EndnoteNumberIncrement EndnoteNumberMethod EndnoteOptionsDlg EndnotePlacement EndnotePlacementDlg EndnoteSetNumberDlg EndnoteStyleDlg EndnoteStyleInDocDlg EndnotesSpaceBetween EnterKey EnvelopeAddressEnd EnvelopeAddressPosition EnvelopeBarcode EnvelopeBarcodeSetup EnvelopeBegin EnvelopeDlg EnvelopeEnd EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin EnvelopeOmitReturnAddress EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin EnvelopeSaveAddressAsDefault EnvelopeSize EnvelopeSizeSetup EnvironmentSetupDlg ExitDlg ExitWordPerfect ExitWordPerfectDlg ExtendedBackwardSearchDlg ExtendedReplaceDlg ExtendedSearchDlg F ─────── FastSave Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxEnd FaxError FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin FaxScheduleEnd FaxStatusBegin FaxStatusEnd FileCopy FileDelete FileListDlg FileManagerDlg FileManagerSetupDlg FileManagerSortBySetup FileManagerSortDescending FileMoveRename FileNew FileOpen FileOpenDlg FileRetrieve FileRetrieveDlg FileSave FileSaveDefaultFormat FileSaveDlg FillColors FillSetGradient FillSetWPG2 FillStyleCopy FillStyleCreate FillStyleDelete FillStyleDlg FillStyleEdit FillStyleEditDlg FillStyleEnd FillStyleName FillStyleRetrieve FillStyleSave FirstLineIndent FloatingCellBegin FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellCreateDlg FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellEditDlg FloatingCellEnd FloatingCellFormula FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency FloatingCellNumberDateFormat FloatingCellNumberDecDigits FloatingCellNumberFormat FloatingCellNumberNegNumber FloatingCellNumberRound FloatingCellNumberUseCommas FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency FlushRight Font FontDlg FontMatchBegin FontMatchEnd FontMatchTable FontSize FooterA FooterB FooterSeparationDistance FootnoteContinuedMessage FootnoteCreate FootnoteEdit FootnoteEditDlg FootnoteMinimum FootnoteNewNumber FootnoteNumberDecrement FootnoteNumberDisplay FootnoteNumberIncrement FootnoteNumberMethod FootnoteOptionsDlg FootnotePosition FootnoteRestartEachPage FootnoteSeparatorLine FootnoteSetNumberDlg FootnoteStyleDlg FootnoteStyleInDocDlg FootnotesSpaceBetween ForcePage FormatCharacterDlg FormatDlg FormatDocDlg FormatForDefaultPrinter FormatLineDlg FormatMarginsDlg FormatOtherDlg FormatPageDlg FramedWindowSetup G-H ──────── GenerateDlg GenerateDoc GoToDlg GoToDos GoToKey GoToMail GoToShell Grammatik GraphicsColorsAssign GraphicsColorsCopy GraphicsColorsCreate GraphicsColorsDelete GraphicsColorsSelect GraphicsDlg GraphicsFontsActivate GraphicsFontsPathsDlg GraphicsFontsSelectBegin GraphicsFontsSelectEnd GraphicsFontsMarkFont GraphicsFontsUpdate GraphicsLineColor GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineDelete GraphicsLineDlg GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEditNext GraphicsLineEditPrevious GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition GraphicsLineLength GraphicsLineSpacing GraphicsLineStyle GraphicsLineThickness GraphicsLineType GraphicsLineUseColor GraphicsLineVerticalPosition GraphicsScreenAutoselect GraphicsScreenOptionsDlg GraphicsScreenSelect HardColumnBreak HardPageBreak HardPageBreakKey HardReturn HardReturnDisplayCharacter HardSpace HeaderA HeaderB HeaderFooterWatermarkDlg HeaderSeparationDistance Help HiddenText HiddenTextDlg HiddenTextShowAll HomeKey HorizontalBarSetup HorizontalBarSetupGraphics HorizontalBarSetupText Hypertext HypertextCreate HypertextDelete HypertextDlg HypertextEdit HypertextJumpRun HypertextNext HypertextPrevious HypertextReturnFrom Hyphenation HyphenationIgnore HyphenationPrompt HyphenationSoftReturn HyphenationZoneLeft HyphenationZoneRight I-K ─────── Indent IndentLeftRight IndexDefinition IndexDefinitionDlg IndexMark IndexMarkDlg InitialCodesDoc InitialCodesDocDlg InitialCodesSetup InitialCodesSetupDlg InsertFilename InsertFilenameWithPath ItalicsKey ItemDown ItemLeft ItemRight ItemUp Justification Kerning KeyboardCopy KeyboardCreate KeyboardDelete KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardOriginal KeyboardRename KeyboardSelect L ─────── LabelsDefine LabelsDelete LabelsDisplay LabelsFileCreate LabelsFileDescription LabelsFileSelect LabelsOff LabelsSelect Language LanguageSelectDlg Leading LeftArrow LineCreateDlg LineDrawArrow LineDrawChange LineDrawDlg LineDrawSolidCharacter LineEditDlg LineHeight LineNumbering LineNumberingMethod LineNumberSet LineSegmentColor LineSegmentCreate LineSegmentDelete LineSegmentEdit LineSegmentEnd LineSegmentSetUser LineSegmentSetUserData LineSegmentSetUserEnd LineSegmentSetWPG2 LineSegmentSpacing LineSegmentWidth LineSpacing LineStyleCopy LineStyleCreate LineStyleDelete LineStyleDlg LineStyleEdit LineStyleEditDlg LineStyleEnd LineStyleName LineStyleRetrieve LineStyleSave ListDefinition ListDefinitionCreate ListDefinitionDelete ListDefinitionDlg ListDefinitionEditBox ListDefinitionMode ListDefinitionRename ListDefinitionRetrieve ListDefinitionStyle ListEditPageFormat ListKey ListMark ListMarkDlg LocationOfBackupFiles LocationOfDocFiles LocationOfDRSFile LocationOfFilesDlg LocationOfGraphicsFiles LocationOfGraphicsFontsFiles LocationOfMacroKeyboardFiles LocationOfPrinterFiles LocationOfQuickFinderFiles LocationOfSharedGraphicsFiles LocationOfSharedMacroKbdFiles LocationOfSharedPrinterFiles LocationOfSharedQFinderFiles LocationOfSharedSprFiles LocationOfSharedStyleFiles LocationOfSprFiles LocationOfStyleFiles LocationOfSupWritingTools LocationOfWritingTools M-O ─────── MacroAssignVariableDlg MacroCommandsDlg MacroControlDlg MacroPlayDlg MacroRecordDlg MarginAdjustLeft MarginAdjustRight MarginBottom MarginLeft MarginRight MarginTop MarkTextDlg MasterDocCondense MasterDocCondenseDlg MasterDocExpand MasterDocExpandDlg Math MathCalculate MathColumn MathDefinitionDlg MathDefinitionEnd MathDefinitionStart MenuBarRemainsVisible MergeBlankField MergeCode MergeCodesDisplayEdit MergeCodesDisplayRun MergeCodesDisplaySetup MergeCodesDlg MergeCodesListDlg MergeCondition MergeDataFile MergeEnvelope MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd MergeFieldDelimiter MergeFieldEncapsulateCharacter MergeFileAssociate MergeFileType MergeMark MergePageBreak MergePrintText MergeRecordDelimiter MergeRepeat MergeRun MergeRunDlg MergeSelect MergeSortDlg MergeStripCharacters MinusSign MouseAccelerationFactor MouseAutoselect MouseDoubleClick MouseInitialize MouseLeftHanded MousePort MouseSelect MouseSetupDlg MouseUnSelect MoveDlg MoveModeCancel MoveModeEnd NotesDlg OutlineBarSetup OutlineBeginNew OutlineBeginNewDlg OutlineBodyText OutlineBottom OutlineChangeToBodyText OutlineDlg OutlineDown OutlineEditKey OutlineEnd OutlineFamilyCopy OutlineFamilyCut OutlineFamilyDemote OutlineFamilyDown OutlineFamilyDragDown OutlineFamilyDragUp OutlineFamilyHide OutlineFamilyLeft OutlineFamilyMove OutlineFamilyPromote OutlineFamilyRight OutlineFamilySelect OutlineFamilyShow OutlineFamilyUp OutlineHideShowingBodyText OutlineNumberToggleKey OutlineParagraphCopy OutlineParagraphDelete OutlineParagraphDemote OutlineParagraphDragDown OutlineParagraphDragUp OutlineParagraphMove OutlineParagraphNumber OutlineParagraphNumberDrag OutlineParagraphPromote OutlineParagraphSelect OutlineRight OutlineSetParagraphNumber OutlineShow OutlineStyleCopy OutlineStyleCreate OutlineStyleDelete OutlineStyleDescription OutlineStyleDlg OutlineStyleEditBegin OutlineStyleEditEnd OutlineStyleLevel OutlineStyleNumberFormat OutlineStyleNumbersOnly OutlineStyleRename OutlineStyleRetrieve OutlineStyleSave OutlineStyleSelect OutlineTop OutlineUp OutputOption OutputOptionsOffsetJogger OverstrikeCreate OverstrikeCreateDlg OverstrikeEdit OverstrikeEditDlg P ─────── PageDown PageNumber PageNumberDecrement PageNumberDisplay PageNumberDisplayFormat PageNumberFormat PageNumberIncrement PageNumberMethod PageNumberPosition PageUp PaperSize PaperSizeDelete PaperSizeSelect ParagraphDown ParagraphSpacing ParagraphUp PasswordAddChange PasswordRemove Paste PosBlockBeg PosBlockBottom PosBlockTop PosCharacter PosCharNext PosCharPrevious PosColBottom PosColDown PosColFirst PosColLast PosColNext PosColNextWP51 PosColPrevious PosColPreviousWP51 PosColTop PosColUp PosDocBottom PosDocTop PosDocVeryBottom PosDocVeryTop PosFunction PosGoPrevious PosLineBeg PosLineDown PosLineEnd PosLineUp PosLineVeryBeg PosLineVeryEnd PosPage PosPageBottom PosPageNext PosPagePrevious PosPageTop PosScreenDown PosScreenLeft PosScreenRight PosScreenUp PosSelectBottom PosSelectTop PosTableBeg PosTableBlockBeg PosTableCell PosTableCellBottom PosTableCellDown PosTableCellNext PosTableCellPrevious PosTableCellTop PosTableCellUp PosTableColBottom PosTableColTop PosTableEnd PosTableGoPrevious PosTableRowBeg PosTableRowEnd PosTableScreenDown PosTableScreenLeft PosTableScreenRight PosTableScreenUp PosTableTopCellNext PosTableTopCellPrevious PosWordNext PosWordPrevious PreviewGraphicsInBlackWhite PreviewTextInBlackWhite PrintBlock PrintCopies PrintCopiesBy PrintCopiesBySetup PrintCopiesSetup PrintDlg PrintDocOnDisk PrinterAdd PrinterColorConfigured PrinterCommand PrinterControlCancel PrinterControlCancelImmediate PrinterControlDlg PrinterControlGo PrinterControlNetworkQueue PrinterControlRush PrinterControlRushImmediate PrinterControlStop PrinterCopy PrinterDelete PrinterDescription PrinterFont PrinterFontDirectory PrinterInitialize PrinterOtherDirectory PrinterPause PrinterPortCOM PrinterPortFilename PrinterPortHardware PrinterPortLPT PrinterPortNetworkQueue PrinterSelect PrinterSelectPrs PrinterSheetFeeder PrinterUpdate PrintFullDoc PrintGraphicsJob PrintGraphicsQuality PrintGraphicsQualitySetup PrintInkColor PrintInkColorSetup PrintMultiplePages PrintNetworkBanner PrintNetworkBannerSetup PrintNetworkForm PrintNetworkFormSetup PrintPage PrintPCL4PointSize PrintPreview PrintPreviewButtonBar PrintPreviewButtonBarEdit PrintPreviewButtonBarOptions PrintPreviewCancel PrintPreviewDownArrow PrintPreviewEnd PrintPreviewExit PrintPreviewFacingPages PrintPreviewFileMenu PrintPreviewFullPage PrintPreviewGoToPage PrintPreviewHelpMenu PrintPreviewHome PrintPreviewInvert PrintPreviewLeftArrow PrintPreviewMenu PrintPreviewNextPage PrintPreviewPageDown PrintPreviewPagesMenu PrintPreviewPageUp PrintPreviewPreviousPage PrintPreviewReferencePage PrintPreviewRightArrow PrintPreviewScreenDown PrintPreviewScreenUp PrintPreviewSetup PrintPreviewThumbnails1 PrintPreviewThumbnails2 PrintPreviewThumbnails32 PrintPreviewThumbnails4 PrintPreviewThumbnails8 PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther PrintPreviewUpArrow PrintPreviewViewMenu PrintPreviewZoom100 PrintPreviewZoom200 PrintPreviewZoomArea PrintPreviewZoomIn PrintPreviewZoomOut PrintPreviewZoomReset PrintSelection PrintSetupDlg PrintTextQuality PrintTextQualitySetup PullDownDlg Q-R ─────── QuickFinderDelete QuickFinderDefine QuickFinderDirectoryPattern QuickFinderDirPatternDelete QuickFinderDlg QuickFinderGenerate QuickFinderMark QuickFinderMarkAll QuickFinderOptions QuickFinderRename QuickFinderSelect QuickListUpdate QuickmarkBlock QuickmarkDelete QuickmarkFind QuickmarkMove QuickmarkSet QuickmarkSetOnSave RedlineCharacter RedlineCharacterSetup RedlineMethod RedlineMethodSetup RepeatDlg RepeatSet RepeatValue ReplaceBackward ReplaceConfirm ReplaceDlg ReplaceForward ReplaceLimitNumberOfMatches ReplaceString ReselectLastBlock ReselectLastSelection RevealCodes RevealCodesDisplayDetail RevealCodesKey RevealCodesWindowSize RevealCodesWindowSizeSetup RewriteKey RibbonSetup RibbonSetupGraphics RibbonSetupText RightArrow S ─────── Save SaveTempDoc ScreenDlg ScreenMatchBegin ScreenMatchEnd ScreenMatchTable ScreenSetupDlg SearchBackwardDlg SearchCaseSensitive SearchDlg SearchFindWholeWordsOnly SearchInSelection SearchNext SearchPrevious SearchString SecondaryPageNumber SecondaryPageNumberDecrement SecondaryPageNumberDisplay SecondaryPageNumberIncrement SecondaryPageNumberMethod SelectDelete SelectOff SelectOn SelectRectangle SelectTabularColumn SetupDlg SetupKey SetupSave ShellDlg ShiftTabKey SoftHyphen Sort SortAction SortCaseOrder SortDlg SortKeys SortSelectString SortType SoundAddDlg SoundClipAddInstance SoundClipCreate SoundClipDelete SoundClipEditDescription SoundClipPlay SoundClipPlayNextDlg SoundClipRecordDlg SoundClipSave SoundFilePlay SoundPlayDlg SoundRecordDlg SoundRecordingQuality SoundRecordingQualityDlg SoundSelect SoundSetInterrupt SoundSetIOAddress SoundSetMasterVolume SoundSetSynthesizerPort SoundSetupDlg SoundStopPlay SoundUnSelect SpaceDisplayCharacter SpecialCodesDlg SpecificDeleteStringBegin SpecificReplaceStringBegin SpecificSearchStringBegin SpecificStringEnd SpellerDlg SpellerDoc SpellerEditSupDictionary SpellerPage SpellerWord SpellGrammatikDisable SpreadsheetCreateLink SpreadsheetCreateLinkDlg SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform SpreadsheetEditLink SpreadsheetEditLinkDlg SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform SpreadsheetImportDlg SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportPerform SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg SpreadsheetShowLinkCode SpreadsheetUpdateLinks SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve StartProgram StatusLineUnits StyleCodes StyleCopy StyleCreate StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary StyleDefaultSharedLibrary StyleDelete StyleDescription StyleDlg StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd StyleEnterKeySetting StyleLinkTo StyleOff StyleOn StylePersonalLibrary StyleRename StyleRetrieve StyleSave StyleSharedLibrary StyleSystemOn StyleType SubdividePage SubdividePageOff SubdocDlg SubdocInclude SubdocRename SubjectSearchText SubstructureCancel SubstructureExit Suppress SwitchDlg SwitchDoc SwitchKey T ─────── Tab TabAdd TabCenter TabDecimal TabDelete TabDlg TabKey TableAttributeOff TableAttributeOn TableAutoFormulaEntry TableBlockOff TableBlockOn TableBorder TableBorderEditBegin TableBorderEditEnd TableCalculate TableCalculateAll TableCellAttributeOff TableCellAttributeOn TableCellCopy TableCellCopyDlg TableCellFillColors TableCellFillStyle TableCellFormatDlg TableCellIgnoreCalculation TableCellJustification TableCellLine TableCellLineColor TableCellLock TableCellNumberAlignCurrency TableCellNumberDateFormat TableCellNumberDecimalDigits TableCellNumberFormat TableCellNumberNegativeNumber TableCellNumberRound TableCellNumberSelectCurrency TableCellNumberUseCommas TableCellNumberUseCurrency TableCellsJoin TableCellUseColumnAttribute TableCellUseColumnJust TableCellUseColumnNumberType TableCellUseLineColor TableCellVerticalAlignment TableColumnAttributeOff TableColumnAttributeOn TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits TableColumnDecimalAlignDist TableColumnFixedWidth TableColumnFormatDlg TableColumnJustification TableColumnMarginLeft TableColumnMarginRight TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency TableColumnNumberDateFormat TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits TableColumnNumberFormat TableColumnNumberNegNumber TableColumnNumberRound TableColumnNumberSelCurrency TableColumnNumberUseCommas TableColumnNumberUseCurrency TableColumnsFixedWidth TableColumnWidth TableColumnWidthGrow TableColumnWidthShrink TableConvertFrom TableCopy TableCreate TableCreateDlg TableDecimalAlignmentDigits TableDecimalAlignmentDistance TableDefaultLine TableDefaultLineColor TableDeleteBlock TableDeleteColumn TableDeleteRow TableDlg TableEdit TableEditDlg TableFill TableFormatDlg TableFormatJustification TableFormatWidths TableFormula TabLeft TableHardColumnBreak TableHardRow TableHeader TableInsertColumn TableInsertRow TableJoin TableLinesDlg TableMarginLeft TableMarginRight TableMove TableMoveCopyDlg TableMoveModeCancel TableMoveModeEnd TableNameAdd TableNameBlockDlg TableNameCellDlg TableNameCellsDlg TableNameChange TableNameColumnDlg TableNameDelete TableNameDlg TableNameListDlg TableNameRowDlg TableNameTableDlg TableNumberAlignCurrency TableNumberDateFormat TableNumberDecimalDigits TableNumberFormat TableNumberNegativeNumber TableNumberRound TableNumberSelectCurrency TableNumberUseCommas TableNumberUseCurrency TablePosition TableRetrieve TableRowHeight TableRowMarginBottom TableRowMarginTop TableRowNumberOfLines TableSplit TableSplitColumn TableSplitRow TableTextToFormula TableUndelete TableUseDefaultLinesColor TabRight TabSet TextBorderCreate TextBorderCustomizeDlg TextBorderDlg TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd TextBorderFillStyle TextBorderStyle TextColor TextScreenAutoselect TextScreenOptionsDlg TextScreenSelect TextShade Thesaurus ThousandsSeparator ToACombinePageNumbers ToADefinition ToADefinitionCombine ToADefinitionCreate ToADefinitionDelete ToADefinitionDlg ToADefinitionMode ToADefinitionRename ToADefinitionRetrieve ToADefinitionStyle ToADefinitionUnderline ToAEditFullForm ToAEditFullFormDlg ToAEditPageFormat ToAEditSection ToAEditShortForm ToAMark ToAMarkFullFormDlg ToAMarkShortForm ToAMarkShortFormDlg ToAUnderlining ToCDefinition ToCDefinitionDlg ToCMark ToCMarkDlg Type TypeChar Typeover TypeoverKey U-Z ─────── Undelete UndeleteDlg UnderlineKey UnderlineSpaces UnderlineTabs Undo UpArrow VerticalBarSetup VerticalBarSetupGraphics VerticalBarSetupText VolumeNumber VolumeNumberDecrement VolumeNumberDisplay VolumeNumberIncrement VolumeNumberMethod WatermarkA WatermarkB WidowOrphan WindowCascade WindowDlg WindowFrame WindowMaximize WindowMinimize WindowMove WindowNext WindowPrevious WindowSize WindowTile WordLetterSpacing WordSpacingJustificationLimits WP51CursorMovement WP51Keyboard WPCharDlg WPDocsOnly WPHelpDlg WritingToolsDlg ──── ──── Advance Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Adv Syntax: Advance(Type;Amount) Parameters: Type Specifies the text advance type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ AdvanceLeft! 0 Advances left from the cursor AdvanceRight! 1 Advances right from the cursor AdvanceFromLeftEdge! 2 Advances from left edge of page AdvanceUp! 3 Advances up from the cursor AdvanceDown! 4 Advances down from the cursor AdvanceFromTop! 5 Advances from top of page ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Amount A measurement expression specifying an advance distance. See Also: AdvanceDlg ──── ──── For Example... To print text 3.5" to the right of the current cursor position, the command is: Advance(AdvanceRight!;3.5") Tell Me More... Advance positions text a specified distance from the top or left of the page or at a certain distance from the current cursor position. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Advance, and setting options. AdvanceDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AdvDlg Syntax: AdvanceDlg Parameters: None See Also: Advance ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... AdvanceDlg displays the Advance dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Advance. AFCEditBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AFCEdBeg Syntax: AFCEditBegin Parameters: None See Also: AFCEditEnd AFCEditFont ──── ──── For Example... To edit attribute Small for a Courier 10 pt. font, select a Roman font as the AFC, and save the changes to the current printer driver, the command sequence is: AFCEditBegin AFCEditFont("Courier 10";Small!;"Roman 12") AFCEditEnd(Save!;PRSAFC!) Tell Me More... AFCEditBegin initiates automatic font changes. AFCEditBegin must be used in conjunction with AFCEditFont and AFCEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, pressing Shift+F1, then choosing either Edit Automatic Font Changes for Printer Fonts or Edit Automatic Font Changes for Graphics Fonts. AFCEditEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AFCEdEnd Syntax: AFCEditEnd(State;Driver) Parameters: State Specifies whether to save automatic font changes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Do not save changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Driver Specifies a driver where an automatic font change is saved. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PRSAFC 0 Printer driver DRSAFC 1 Graphics driver ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AFCEditBegin AFCEditFont ──── ──── For Example... To edit attribute Small for a Courier 10 pt. font, select a Roman font as the AFC, and save the changes to the current printer driver, the command sequence is: AFCEditBegin AFCEditFont("Courier 10";Small!;"Roman 12") AFCEditEnd(Save!;PRSAFC!) Tell Me More... AFCEditEnd marks the end of automatic font changes to either a printer driver or a graphics driver, and saves or cancels the changes. AFCEditEnd must be used in conjunction with AFCEditBegin and AFCEDitFont. This command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel after making changes to printer fonts or graphics fonts. AFCEditFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AFCEdFnt Syntax: AFCEditFont("Font";Attribute;"AFC") Parameters: Font A character expression specifying a font to edit. Attribute Specifies an attribute to edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Edit Extra Large VeryLarge! 1 Edit Very Large Large! 2 Edit Large Small! 3 Edit Small Fine! 4 Edit Fine Superscript! 5 Edit Superscript Subscript! 6 Edit Subscript Outline! 7 Edit Outline Italics! 8 Edit Italics Shadow! 9 Edit Shadow Redline! 10 Edit Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Edit Double Underline Bold! 12 Edit Bold Strikeout! 13 Edit Strikeout Underline! 14 Edit Underline SmallCaps! 15 Edit Small Caps ASCII! 16 Edit ASCII character set BoxDrawing! 17 Edit Box Drawing character set Multinational! 18 Edit Multinational character set Phonetic! 19 Edit Phonetic character set TypographicSymbols! 20 Edit Typographic Symbols character set IconicSymbols! 21 Edit Iconic Symbols character set MathScientific! 22 Edit Math/Scientific character set MathScientificExtension! 23 Edit Math/Scientific Extension character set Greek! 24 Edit Greek character set Hebrew! 25 Edit Hebrew character set Cyrillic! 26 Edit Cyrillic character set Japanese! 27 Edit Japanese character set Arabic! 28 Edit Arabic 1 character set ArabicScript! 29 Edit Arabic Script character set UserDefined! 30 Edit User Defined character set Portrait! 31 Edit portrait fonts Landscape! 32 Edit landscape fonts ReversePortrait! 33 Edit reverse portrait fonts ReverseLandscape! 34 Edit reverse landscape fonts ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AFC (optional) A character expression specifying the AFC (automatic font change) for the attribute specified in the Attribute parameter. See Also: AFCEditBegin AFCEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit attribute Small for a Courier 10 pt. font, select a Roman font as the AFC, and save the changes to the current printer driver, the command sequence is: AFCEditBegin AFCEditFont("Courier 10";Small!;"Roman 12") AFCEditEnd(Save!;PRSAFC!) Tell Me More... AFCEditFont makes an automatic font change to the specified font and attribute. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, pressing Shift+F1, selecting either Edit Automatic Font Changes for Printer Fonts or Edit Automatic Changes for Graphics Fonts, then choosing a font, an attribute, and an AFC. AltEqual Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AltEqual Syntax: AltEqual Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... AltEqual is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Equal. This keystroke combination usually actives the menu, but the command will execute whatever Alt+Equal is designed to do in the state the program is in when the macro encounters this command. This doesn't include situations where Alt+Equal has been remapped in Keyboard Layout. AltHome Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AltHome Syntax: AltHome Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... AltHome is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Home. This command will execute whatever Alt+Home is designed to do in the state the program is in when the macro encounters this command. This doesn't include situations where Alt+Home has been remapped in Keyboard Layout. AltKeySelectsMenuBar Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AltKeySelMenuBar Syntax: AltKeySelectsMenuBar(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the Alt key selects the menu bar. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Does not select menu bar Yes! 1 Does select menu bar ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify the Alt key to select the menu bar, the command is: AltKeySelectsMenuBar(Yes!) Tell Me More... AltKeySelectsMenuBar determines whether the Alt key selects the menu bar. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, then choosing Alt key activates menus. AppendFilenameDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AppFileNameDlg Syntax: AppendFilenameDlg Parameters: None See Also: AppendToFile ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... AppendFilenameDlg displays the Append To dialog box. This dialog box specifies the name of a file to which the current document or currently blocked text will be appended. AppendFilenameDlg is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Append, To File. AppendToFile Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AppToFile Syntax: AppendToFile("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the file to which the document or currently blocked text should be appended. See Also: AppendToFilenameDlg ──── ──── For Example... To append the current document to a file named REFERENCE.DOC in the WP60 directory of drive C, the command is: AppendToFile("C:\WP60\REFERENCE.DOC") Tell Me More... AppendToFile appends the current document or currently blocked text to another file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Append, To File, and specifying a filename. AttributeAppearanceOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrAppearOff Syntax: AttributeAppearanceOff(Attribute) Parameters: Attribute Specifies the attribute(s) to turn off. AttributeAppearanceOff requires at least one attribute parameter but will accept as many attributes as you need to turn off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Outline! 7 Turns off Outline Italics! 8 Turns off Italics Shadow! 9 Turns off Shadow Redline! 10 Turns off Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Turns off DoubleUnderline Bold! 12 Turns off Bold Strikeout! 13 Turns off Strikeout Underline! 14 Turns off Underline SmallCaps! 15 Turns off Small Caps Every! 16 Turns off every attribute ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeAppearanceOn AttributeNormal ──── ──── For Example... To turn off the attributes Shadow, Underline, and Small Caps, the command is: AttributeAppearanceOff(Shadow!;Underline!;Small Caps!) Tell Me More... AttributeAppearanceOff turns off specified attribute(s) where this command is encountered. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, and selecting attributes. AttributeAppearanceOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrAppearOn Syntax: AttributeAppearanceOn(Attribute) Parameters: Attribute Specifies the attribute(s) to turn on. AttributeAppearanceOn requires at least one attribute parameter but will accept as many attributes as you need to turn on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Outline! 7 Turns on Outline Italics! 8 Turns on Italics Shadow! 9 Turns on Shadow Redline! 10 Turns on Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Turns on DoubleUnderline Bold! 12 Turns on Bold Strikeout! 13 Turns on Strikeout Underline! 14 Turns on Underline SmallCaps! 15 Turns on Small Caps Every! 16 Turns on every attribute ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeAppearanceOff AttributeNormal AttributeRelativeSize AttributeRelativeSizeToggle ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Shadow, Bold, and Small Caps, the command is: AttributeAppearanceOn(Shadow!;Bold!;Small Caps!) Tell Me More... AttributeAppearanceOn turns on the specified attributes where this command is encountered. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, and selecting attributes. AttributeAppearanceToggle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrAppearToggle Syntax: AttributeAppearanceToggle(Attribute) Parameters: Attribute Specifies the attribute(s) to toggle. AttributeAppearanceToggle requires at least one attribute parameter but will accept as many attributes as you need to toggle. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Outline! 7 Toggles Outline Italics! 8 Toggles Italics Shadow! 9 Toggles Shadow Redline! 10 Toggles Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Toggles DoubleUnderline Bold! 12 Toggles Bold Strikeout! 13 Toggles Strikeout Underline! 14 Toggles Underline SmallCaps! 15 Toggles Small Caps Every! 16 Toggles every attribute ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeAppearanceOff AttributeAppearanceOn AttributeNormal AttributeRelativeSize AttributeRelativeSizeToggle ──── ──── For Example... To toggle Italics and Redline, the command is: AttributeAppearanceToggle(Italics!;Redline!) Tell Me More... AttributeAppearanceToggle toggles an attribute on or off, usually the attributes of blocked text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font and selecting an attribute. AttributeNormal Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrNorm Syntax: AttributeNormal Parameters: None See Also: AttributeAppearanceOff AttributeAppearanceOn AttributeRelativeSize AttributeRelativeSizeToggle ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is necessary to perform the task. Tell Me More... AttributeNormal turns off all active font attributes, including size. Font attributes include bold, large, and redline, among others. This command does not reset font color changes. AttributeNormal is the equivalent of choosing Font, Normal. AttributePosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrPos Syntax: AttributePosition(Position) Parameters: Position Specifies the vertical position of subsequent or blocked text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Superscript! 5 Superscript position Subscript! 6 Subscript position NormalPosition! 7 Normal position ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeNormal AttributePositionToggle ──── ──── For Example... To set the position of subsequent or blocked text as superscript, the command is: AttributePosition(Superscript!) Tell Me More... AttributePosition positions text vertically in relation to text on the same line. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Size/Position, and selecting a position. AttributePositionToggle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrPosToggle Syntax: AttributePositionToggle(Position) Parameters: Position Specifies a position to toggle. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Superscript! 5 Toggles Superscript position Subscript! 6 Toggles Subscript position NormalPosition! 7 Toggles Normal position ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeNormal AttributePosition ──── ──── For Example... To toggle a subscript position, the command is: AttributePositionToggle(Subscript!) Tell Me More... AttributePositionToggle toggles the specified position. This command is not recordable. To use this command, it must be typed into the macro. AttributeRelativeSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrRelSize Syntax: AttributeRelativeSize(Size) Parameters: Size Specifies the relative size of subsequent or blocked text based on the currently selected font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Relative Extra Large VeryLarge! 1 Relative Very Large Large! 2 Relative Large Small! 3 Relative Small Fine! 4 Relative Fine NormalSize! 5 Relative Normal ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle AttributeSizeRatios ──── ──── For Example... To select a font size of Large, the command is: AttributeRelativeSize(Large!) Tell Me More... AttributeRelativeSize specifies a font size for subsequent or blocked text. The size of the resulting font is relative to the currently selected font. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Size/Position, and selecting a size. AttributeRelativeSizeToggle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrRelSizeToggle Syntax: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle(Size) Parameters: Size Specifies a relative size to toggle. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Toggles relative Extra Large VeryLarge! 1 Toggles relative Very Large Large! 2 Toggles relative Large Small! 3 Toggles relative Small Fine! 4 Toggles relative Fine NormalSize! 5 Toggles relative Normal ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: AttributeRelativeSize AttributeSizeRatios ──── ──── For Example... To toggle the size of Fine, the command is: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle(Fine!) Tell Me More... AttributeRelativeSizeToggle toggles the specified relative size. This command is not recordable. To use this command, it must be typed into the macro. AttributeSizeRatios Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AttrSizeRat Syntax: AttributeSizeRatios(Size;Ratio) Parameters: Size Specifies a size to edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Edits Extra Large VeryLarge! 1 Edits Very Large Large! 2 Edits Large Small! 3 Edits Small Fine! 4 Edits Fine SuperSubscript! 5 Edits Superscript or Subscript ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Ratio A numeric expression specifying the ratio of an edited size. Ratio specifies the relative size of a font selected by AttributeRelativeSize. See Also: AttributeRelativeSize AttributeRelativeSizeToggle ──── ──── For Example... To specify a ratio of 50 for the attribute Large, the command is: AttributeSizeRatios(Large!;50) Tell Me More... AttributeSizeRatios changes the ratios used to determine the size of a relative font selected by AttributeRelativeSize. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, pressing Shft+F1, choosing Size Ratios, specifying an attribute and a ratio. AutoCodePlacement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: AutoCodePlace Syntax: AutoCodePlacement(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether Auto Code Placement is on or off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Auto Code Placement is off On! 1 Auto Code Placement is on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn off Auto Code Placement, the command is: AutoCodePlacement(Off!) Tell Me More... AutoCodePlacement determines whether the Auto Code Placement feature is on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Auto Code Placement. BackTab Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BkTab Syntax: BackTab Parameters: None See Also: MarginAdjustLeft ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BackTab moves the cursor one tab stop left of the cursor position. This command is the equivalent of pressing Margin Release (Shift+Tab) or choosing Layout, Alignment, Back Tab. Backup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Bk Syntax: Backup(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether Backup is on or off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Backup is off On! 1 Backup is on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BackupDlg BackupMinutes BackupOriginalDoc ──── ──── For Example... To turn off Backup, the command is: Backup(Off!) Tell Me More... Backup specifies whether Timed Document Backup is on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Backup Options, Timed Document Backup. BackupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BkDlg Syntax: BackupDlg Parameters: None See Also: Backup BackupMinutes BackupOriginalDoc ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... BackupDlg displays the Backup dialog box to set options for Timed Document Backup, Minutes Between Backups, and Original Document Backup. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Backup Options. BackupMinutes Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BkMins Syntax: BackupMinutes(Minutes) Parameters: Minutes A numeric expression specifying the number of minutes between backups. See Also: Backup BackupDlg BackupOriginalDoc ──── ──── For Example... To set a timed backup interval of fifteen minutes, the command is: BackupMinutes(15) Tell Me More... BackupMinutes specifies the number of minutes between each Timed Backup. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Backup Options, and entering a number in the Minutes Between Backups text box. BackupOriginalDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BkOrigDoc Syntax: BackupOriginalDoc(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether Original Document Backup is on or off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Original Document Backup off On! 1 Original Document Backup on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Backup BackupDlg BackupMinutes ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Original Document Backup, the command is: BackupOriginalDoc(On!) Tell Me More... BackupOriginalDoc specifies whether Original Document Backup is on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Environment, Backup Options, and selecting Back Up Original Document (.BK!) on Save or Exit. BarcodePOSTNET Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BarcodePostnet Syntax: BarcodePOSTNET(ZIP Code;Merge Field) Parameters: ZIP Code A numeric expression specifying a five, nine or eleven-digit ZIP Code. If the ZIP Code is contained in a merge field, this parameter can be a character expression specifying the merge field to use. Merge Field (optional) Specifies whether a merge field is used to provide the ZIP Code. This parameter is necessary only when a merge field has been specified in the ZIP Code parameter. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ MergeFieldAllowed! 1 Merge field provides ZIP Code ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To enter a ZIP Code contained in a merge field named Zip, the command is: BarcodePOSTNET("Zip";MergeFieldAllowed!) Tell Me More... BarcodePOSTNET specifies a ZIP Code or a merge field containing a ZIP Code. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Bar Code, and entering the bar code contents. BaselinePlacement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlinePlace Syntax: BaselinePlacement(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Baseline Placement is on for the current document. Select an enumerated type its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Baseline Placement is off On! 1 Baseline Placement is on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BaselinePlacementSetup ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Baseline Placement, the command is: BaselinePlacement(On!) Tell Me More... BaselinePlacement determines whether the Baseline Placement for Typesetters option is on or off for the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Baseline Placement for Typesetters. BaselinePlacementSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlinePlaceSetup Syntax: BaselinePlacementSetup(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Baseline Placement is on for all documents. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Baseline Placement is off On! 1 Baseline Placement is on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BaselinePlacement ──── ──── For Example... To turn on the Baseline Placement option for all documents, the command is: BaselinePlacementSetup(On!) Tell Me More... BaselinePlacementSetup determines whether Baseline Placement for Typesetters is on for all documents. The BaselinePlacementSetup command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Setup, Baseline Placement for Typesetters. BeepOnError Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BeepOnErr Syntax: BeepOnError(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a beep sounds when an error occurs. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No beep when an error occurs. Yes! 1 Beep sounds when an error occurs. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BeepOnHyphenation BeepOnSearchFailure ──── ──── For Example... To activate a beep when an error occurs, the command is: BeepOnError(Yes!) Tell Me More... BeepOnError determines whether a beep sounds when an error occurs. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Beep Options, Beep on Error. BeepOnHyphenation Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BeepOnHyph Syntax: BeepOnHyphenation(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a beep prompts you to position the hyphen to break a word at the end of a line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No beep on hyphenation Yes! 1 Beep sounds on hyphenation ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BeepOnError BeepOnSearchFailure ──── ──── For Example... To turn off the hyphenation beep, the command is: BeepOnHyphenation(No!) Tell Me More... BeepOnHyphenation determines whether a beep prompts you to position the hyphen to break a word at the end of a line. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Beep Options, Beep on Hyphenation. BeepOnSearchFailure Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BeepOnSrchFailure Syntax: BeepOnSearchFailure(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a beep sounds when a search fails. Select and enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No beep when a search fails Yes! 1 Beep when a search fails ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BeepOnError BeepOnHyphenation ──── ──── For Example... To activate a beep when a search fails, the command is: BeepOnSearchFailure(Yes!) Tell Me More... BeepOnSearchFailure determines whether a beep sounds when a search fails. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Beep Options, Beep on Search Failure. BeepOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BeepOptsDlg Syntax: BeepOptionsDlg Parameters: None See Also: BeepOnError BeepOnHyphenation BeepOnSearchFailure ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BeepOptionsDlg displays the Beep Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Beep Options. Binding Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Bind Syntax: Binding(Edge;Offset) Parameters: Edge This parameter specifies a binding edge. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LeftEdge! 0 Binding on left edge RightEdge! 1 Binding on right edge TopEdge! 2 Binding on top edge BottomEdge! 3 Binding on bottom edge ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Offset A measurement expression specifying the Binding Offset. The measurement you provide in this parameter will be added to the margin of the edge specified in the Edge parameter. ──── ──── For Example... To set a binding offset of .75" at the top of a document, the command is: Binding(TopEdge!;.75") Tell Me More... Binding specifies the binding offset and the edge of the paper to which that offset should be applied. The offset will be added to the margin of the specified edge. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Printer Functions, Binding Offset, selecting binding options, and specifying a measurement. BlockDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkDel Syntax: BlockDelete Parameters: None See Also: SelectDelete ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BlockDelete deletes blocked text. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F4 and choosing Delete from the Move dialog box. BlockKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkKey Syntax: BlockKey Parameters: None See Also: BlockOff BlockOn PAUSEKEY ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BlockKey is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F4. BlockKey executes whatever Alt+F4 is designed to do in the state the program is in when the macro encounters this command. If Alt+F4 has been remapped in Keyboard Layout, this command executes the original function of Alt+F4. BlockOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkOff Syntax: BlockOff Parameters: None See Also: BlockOn SelectOff SelectOn ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BlockOff turns off Block. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Block when Block is on. BlockOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkOn Syntax: BlockOn(Mode) Parameters: Mode Specifies the block mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CharMode! 1 Blocks a character at a time WordMode! 2 Blocks a word at a time SentenceMode! 4 Blocks a sentence at a time ParagraphMode! 8 Blocks a paragraph at a time PageMode! 16 Blocks a page at a time RectangleMode! 32 Blocks a rectangle TabularColumnsMode! 64 Blocks tabular columns DocMode! 128 Blocks the document ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BlockOff SelectOff SelectOn ──── ──── For Example... To block page, the command is: BlockOn(PageMode!) Tell Me More... BlockOn turns on Block and is the equivalent of choosing Edit, then choosing either Block (which automatically selects character mode) or Select (which presents other block mode options). BlockProtect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkPro Syntax: BlockProtect(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Block Protect is on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Block Protect off On! 1 Block Protect on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Block Protect, the command is: BlockProtect(On!) Tell Me More... BlockProtect turns Block Protect on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Block Protect. BlockRectangle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkRect Syntax: BlockRectangle Parameters: None See Also: SelectRectangle ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BlockRectangle blocks a rectangular section of text. When Block is on, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Select, Rectangle. BlockSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkSave Syntax: BlockSave("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the filename of blocked text. See Also: AppendToFile ──── ──── For Example... To name and save blocked text with the filename BLOCK.DOC, the command is: BlockSave("BLOCK.DOC") Tell Me More... BlockSave names and saves blocked text with a filename you specify. If the filename you specify already exists, the program will ask if you want to replace it; you cannot append the block to another document using this command. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save, and entering a filename. BlockTabularColumn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BlkTabCol Syntax: BlockTabularColumn Parameters: None See Also: SelectTabularColumn ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BlockTabularColumn blocks a tabular column. With Block on, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Select, Tabular Column. BoldKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoldKey Syntax: BoldKey Parameters: None See Also: PAUSEKEY ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BoldKey is the equivalent of pressing F6. BoldKey will execute whatever F6 is designed to do in the state the program is in when the macro encounters this command. If F6 has been remapped in Keyboard Layout, this command will execute the original function of F6. BookmarkBlock Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkBlk Syntax: BookmarkBlock("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a bookmark to find. The bookmark must have already been assigned to blocked text. See Also: BookmarkCreate BookmarkDelete BookmarkDlg BookmarkFind BookmarkMove BookmarkRename ──── ──── For Example... To find a bookmark named Block This and to block the assigned text, the command is: BookmarkBlock("Block This") Tell Me More... BookmarkBlock activates the Find and Block bookmark feature which finds a bookmark and blocks the assigned text. This command is the equivalent of displaying the Mark dialog box by pressing Alt+F5, Bookmark, selecting a bookmark , and choosing Find and Block. BookmarkCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkCre Syntax: BookmarkCreate("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a Bookmark to create. See Also: BookmarkBlock BookmarkDelete BookmarkDlg BookmarkFind BookmarkMove BookmarkRename ──── ──── For Example... To create a Bookmark named Find Me, the command is: BookmarkCreate("Find Me") Tell Me More... BookmarkCreate creates a Bookmark. This command is the equivalent of displaying the Mark dialog box by pressing Alt+F5, Bookmark, Create, and entering a name. BookmarkDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkDel Syntax: BookmarkDelete("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a bookmark to delete. See Also: BookmarkBlock BookmarkCreate BookmarkDlg BookmarkFind BookmarkMove BookmarkRename ──── ──── For Example... To delete a bookmark named Last Page, the command is: BookmarkDelete("Last Page") Tell Me More... BookmarkDelete deletes a bookmark. This command is the equivalent of displaying the Mark dialog box by pressing Alt+F5, Bookmark, selecting a bookmark , Delete. BookmarkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkDlg Syntax: BookmarkDlg Parameters: None See Also: BookmarkBlock BookmarkCreate BookmarkDelete BookmarkFind BookmarkMove BookmarkRename ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... BookmarkDlg displays the Bookmark dialog box. This command is the equivalent of displaying the Mark dialog box by pressing Alt+F5, Bookmark. BookmarkFind Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkFind Syntax: BookmarkFind("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a bookmark to find. See Also: BookmarkBlock BookmarkCreate BookmarkDelete BookmarkDlg BookmarkMove BookmarkRename ──── ──── For Example... To find a bookmark named Entry, the command is: BookmarkFind("Entry") Tell Me More... BookmarkFind moves the cursor to a specified bookmark. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F5 , Bookmark, selecting a bookmark, Find. BookmarkMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkMv Syntax: BookmarkMove("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a bookmark to move to the cursor position. See Also: BookmarkBlock BookmarkCreate BookmarkDelete BookmarkDlg BookmarkFind BookmarkRename ──── ──── For Example... To move a bookmark named Read This, the command is: BookmarkMove("Read This") Tell Me More... BookmarkMove moves a bookmark from its current location in your document to the cursor. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F5, Bookmark, selecting a bookmark, Move. BookmarkRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BmarkRen Syntax: BookmarkRename("Current Name";"New Name") Parameters: Current Name A character expression specifying the name of a bookmark to rename. New Name A character expression specifying the new name of a bookmark. See Also: BookmarkBlock BookmarkCreate BookmarkDelete BookmarkDlg BookmarkFind BookmarkMove ──── ──── For Example... To rename a bookmark named Edit as Copy, the command is: BookmarkRename("Edit";"Copy") Tell Me More... BookmarkRename renames a bookmark. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F5 , Bookmark, selecting a bookmark, and entering a new name. If you type in the name of a bookmark that already exists in the current document you will receive an error. BorderBottomLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrBotLn Syntax: BorderBottomLine(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies border bottom line style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single DoubleLine! 1 Double DashedLine! 2 Dashed DottedLine! 3 Dotted ThickLine! 4 Thick ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick ThinThickLine! 6 Thick outside, thin inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button shaded top and left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button shaded bottom and right NoLine! 127 None ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderLeftLine BorderRightLine BorderSeparatorLine BorderTopLine TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a paragraph border with a double bottom border line, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderBottomLine(DoubleLine!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderBottomLine specifies the style of a bottom border line. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Lines, Bottom Line, select line style. BorderColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrClr Syntax: BorderColor("Color Name";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Color Name (optional) A character expression specifying border color. Includes custom-made colors. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of red in a selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 255. The values of a selected color are available in the Color Selection dialog box. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in the selected color. See the parameter description for "Red Value" above. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in the selected color. See the parameter description for "Red Value" above. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of the selected color. This value can range from 0 to 100. See Also: BorderStyleCreate BorderStyleEdit BorderUseBorderColor TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a Magenta paragraph border, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderColor("Magenta";255;0;255;100) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderColor specifies the color of a Paragraph, Page, or Column border. All parameters for this command are optional. If you do not fill in a particular parameter, the current program setting for that aspect of the feature will be used when the macro executes. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEnd, and BorderUseBorderColor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select a border type, Customize, Color, Choose One Color For All Lines, select color and shading. BorderCornerRadius Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrCornerRad Syntax: BorderCornerRadius(Radius) Parameters: Radius A measurement expression specifying the curve of border corners. The default for rounded corners is .325". See Also: BorderStyleCreate BorderStyleEdit TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a paragraph border with very rounded corners, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderCornerRadius(.5") TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderCornerRadius customizes the curve of rounded corners. Higher measurements produce more rounded corners. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select a border type, Customize, Corners, Rounded, specify a Corner Radius. BorderDropShadow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrDropShadw Syntax: BorderDropShadow(Location;Size;"Color Name";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Location Specifies the location of a shadow. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoShadow! 0 None UpperLeft! 1 Upper left LowerLeft! 2 Lower left LowerRight! 3 Lower right UpperRight! 4 Upper right ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Size (optional) A measurement expression specifying the size of a shadow. The default shadow size is .125". Color Name (optional) A character expression specifying shadow color, including custom-made colors. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 255 and is available in the Color Selection dialog box. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a selected color. See the description of "Red Value" above. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a selected color. See the description of "Red Value" above. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of a selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 100. See Also: BorderStyleCreate BorderStyleEdit ──── ──── For Example... To create a blue shadow on the upper right corner of a paragraph border, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderDropShadow(UpperRight!;.125";"Blue";0;0;255;100) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderDropShadow specifies the location, size, and color of a border shadow. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select a type, Customize, Shadow, select from the Shadow dialog box. BorderFillColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrFillClr Syntax: BorderFillColor("Foreground Color Name";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value;"Background Color Name";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: The first five parameters specify foreground color and the last five specify background color. Select a background color only if you have already selected a fill pattern. Color Name (Foreground/Background) (optional) A character expression specifying border fill color, including custom-made colors. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 255 and is available in the Color Selection dialog box. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a selected color. See the description of "Red Value" above. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a selected color. See the description of "Red Value" above. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of a selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 100. See Also: FillColors FillSetWPG2 TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd TextBorderFillStyle ──── ──── For Example... To create a 40% shaded fill paragraph border with a red foreground, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;Fill40!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderFillColor("Red";255;0;0;40) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderFillColor specifies the color of a border fill. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Border, select a border type, Customize, Fill, select a fill style, Foreground Color, select a color, Background Color, select a color. BorderInsideSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrInSpac Syntax: BorderInsideSpacing(Left;Right;Top;Bottom) Parameters: Left (optional) A measurement expression specifying spacing of a left inside border. Right (optional) A measurement expression specifying spacing of a right inside border. Top (optional) A measurement expression specifying spacing of a top inside border spacing. Bottom (optional) A measurement expression specifying spacing of a bottom inside border. See Also: BorderOutsideSpacing TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create inside spacing of .1" on the top and bottom of a paragraph border, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderInsideSpacing(;;.1";.1") TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderInsideSpacing specifies spacing inside a border, much as margins specify spacing on a page. This option is not available with page borders. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Spacing, Auto Spacing Off, Inside Spacing, select and specify spacing measurements. BorderLeftLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrLftLn Syntax: BorderLeftLine(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies left border line style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined line style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single DoubleLine! 1 Double DashedLine! 2 Dashed DottedLine! 3 Dotted ThickLine! 4 Thick ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick ThinThickLine! 6 Thick outside, thin inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button shaded top and left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button shaded bottom and right NoLine! 127 None ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderBottomLine BorderRightLine BorderSeparatorLine BorderTopLine TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a thick left paragraph border line, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderLeftLine(ThickLine!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderLeftLine specifies the left line style of a border. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Lines, Left Line, select line style. BorderOutsideSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrOutSpac Syntax: BorderOutsideSpacing(Left;Right;Top;Bottom) Parameters: Left (optional) This measurement expression specifies left outside border spacing. Right (optional) This measurement expression specifies right outside border spacing. Top (optional) This measurement expression specifies top outside border spacing. Bottom (optional) This measurement expression specifies bottom outside border spacing. See Also: BorderInsideSpacing TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create outside spacing of .2" on all sides of a border, the command is: BorderOutsideSpacing(.2";.2";.2";.2") Tell Me More... BorderOutsideSpacing specifies spacing outside a border. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Spacing, Auto Spacing Off, Outside Spacing, specify spacing measurement. BorderRightLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrRgtLn Syntax: BorderRightLine(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies right border line style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined line style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single DoubleLine! 1 Double DashedLine! 2 Dashed DottedLine! 3 Dotted ThickLine! 4 Thick ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick ThinThickLine! 6 Thick outside, thin inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button shaded top and left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button shaded bottom and right NoLine! 127 None ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderBottomLine BorderLeftLine BorderSeparatorLine BorderTopLine TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a Paragraph border with a dashed right line, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderRightLine(DashedLine!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderRightLine specifies the right line border style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Lines, Right Line, select line style. BorderSeparatorLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrSepLn Syntax: BorderSeparatorLine(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies the type of separator line a border will contain. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined line style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single DoubleLine! 1 Double DashedLine! 2 Dashed DottedLine! 3 Dotted ThickLine! 4 Thick ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick ThinThickLine! 6 Thick outside, thin inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button border on top left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button border on bottom right NoLine! 127 None ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderBottomLine BorderLeftLine BorderRightLine BorderTopLine TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a double-line separator in a paragraph border, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderSeparatorLine(DoubleLine!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderSeparatorLine specifies the separator line style in a paragraph or column border. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Lines, Separator Line, select line style. BorderSetSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrSetSpac Syntax: BorderSetSpacing(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the Automatic Spacing option is selected. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Automatic Spacing selected Yes! 1 Automatic Spacing not selected ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderInsideSpacing BorderOutsideSpacing TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify that Automatic Spacing is selected, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderSetSpacing(No!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderSetSpacing specifies whether or not the Automatic Spacing option is selected. If it is not selected, you can specify a border's inside and/or outside spacing. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border style, Customize, Spacing, Automatic Spacing. BorderStyleCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyCopy Syntax: BorderStyleCopy(Style Name;Current Location;Destination;"New Name") Parameters: Style Name Specifies the name of a style to copy. To copy a WordPerfect style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SpacingOnly! 0 Spacing Only SingleBorder! 1 Single Border DoubleBorder! 2 Double Border DashedBorder! 3 Dashed Border DottedBorder! 4 Dotted Border ThickBorder! 5 Thick Border ExtraThickBorder! 6 Extra Thick Border ThinThickBorder! 7 Thin Thick Border ThickThinBorder! 8 Thick Thin Border ThickTopBottomBorder! 9 Thick Top Bottom Border ButtonBorder! 10 Button Border ColumnBorderBetween! 11 Column Border (Between Only) ColumnBorderAll! 12 Column Border (Outside and Between) NoBorder! 127 No border ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Current Location Specifies location of a style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Destination Specifies the destination of a style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ New Name (optional) A character expression renaming a style to copy. Select this parameter only when placing a second copy of the style in the same location (when the contents of Current Location and Destination are the same). See Also: BorderStyleRetrieve BorderStyleSave ──── ──── For Example... To copy a style named MyStyle from a personal style library to a shared style library, the command is: BorderStyleCopy("MyStyle";PersonalLibrary!;SharedLibrary!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleCopy copies a specified style from one location to another. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, Copy, select a destination, name a style. BorderStyleCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyCre Syntax: BorderStyleCreate("Style Name") Parameters: Style Name A character expression naming a new style. See Also: BorderStyleEnd TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To give a paragraph border style the name Highlight, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderStyleCreate("Highlight") TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleCreate names a new border style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, Create, name style. BorderStyleDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyDel Syntax: BorderStyleDelete("Style Name";Location) Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying a style to delete. Location Specifies the location of the style to delete. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal style library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared style library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderStyleCopy BorderStyleRetrieve BorderStyleSave TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To delete a paragraph border style named Example in the current document, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderStyleDelete("Example";CurrentDoc!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleDelete deletes a specified style in a current document, personal, or shared style library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, select a style, Delete. BorderStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyDlg Syntax: BorderStyleDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BorderStyleDlg displays the Border Styles dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles. BorderStyleEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyEd Syntax: BorderStyleEdit(Style Name) Parameters: Style Name Names a style to edit. To edit a WordPerfect style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To edit a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SpacingOnly! 0 Spacing Only SingleBorder! 1 Single Border DoubleBorder! 2 Double Border DashedBorder! 3 Dashed Border DottedBorder! 4 Dotted Border ThickBorder! 5 Thick Border ExtraThickBorder! 6 Extra Thick Border ThinThickBorder! 7 Thin Thick Border ThickThinBorder! 8 Thick Thin Border ThickTopBottomBorder! 9 Thick Top Bottom Border ButtonBorder! 10 Button Border ColumnBorderBetween! 11 Column Border (Between Only) ColumnBorderAll! 12 Column Border (Outside and Between) NoBorder! 127 No Border ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderStyleCreate BorderStyleEditDlg BorderStyleEnd TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit the Thin Thick border line style, the command is: BorderStyleEdit(ThinThickBorder!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleEdit specifies a style to edit. It is usually followed by border modification commands such as BorderCornerRadius. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, select style, Edit. BorderStyleEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyEdDlg Syntax: BorderStyleEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: BorderStyleEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BorderStyleEditDlg displays the Edit Border Style dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, select style, Edit. BorderStyleEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyEnd Syntax: BorderStyleEnd(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the most recent changes made to a style should be saved or canceled. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To save the changes made to a border style, the command is: BorderStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleEnd indicates the end of editing or creating a border style and specifies whether to save or cancel the changes. This command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel when closing the Edit Border Style or Create Border Style dialog box. BorderStyleName Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyNm Syntax: BorderStyleName("Style Name") Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying the name of a border to rename. ──── ──── For Example... To rename a border style from Nouveau to Traditional, the command sequence is: BorderStyleEdit("Nouveau") BorderStyleName("Traditional") BorderStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleName renames a border style. This command must be used in conjunction with commands such as BorderStyleEdit and BorderStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select a border type, select a border style, choose Create or Edit, then choose Border Style Name. BorderStyleRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStyRet Syntax: BorderStyleRetrieve(Style Library;Location) Parameters: Style Library A character expression specifying a style library containing styles to retrieve. Specify both the filename and path of the library. Location Specifies where to place the retrieved styles. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal style library SharedLibary! 2 Shared style library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderStyleCopy BorderStyleSave ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve styles contained in a style library named Format into a personal style library, the command is: BorderStyleRetrieve("Format";PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleRetrieve retrieves all border style in a specified style library into the current document or a personal or shared style library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, select location, Retrieve, name style library. BorderStyleSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrStySav Syntax: BorderStyleSave("Style Library";Location) Parameters: Style Library A character expression specifying name of the style library to which the styles should be saved. Specify both the filename and path of the library. Location Specifies location of the styles to save. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal style library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared style library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderStyleCopy BorderStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To save all styles from the Shared Style Library to a style library named Designs, the command is: BorderStyleSave("Designs";SharedLibrary!) Tell Me More... BorderStyleSave saves in a current document, or personal or shared style library to a specified style library. Saving to an existing library deletes any styles it contains and replaces them with the new styles. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, Styles, select location, select style, Save, name style. BorderTopLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrTopLn Syntax: BorderTopLine(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a top border line style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single DoubleLine! 1 Double DashedLine! 2 Dashed DottedLine! 3 Dotted ThickLine! 4 Thick ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick ThinThickLine! 6 Thick outside, thin inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button shaded top and left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button shaded bottom and right lines NoLine! 127 None ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderBottomLine BorderLeftLine BorderRightLine BorderSeparatorLine TextBorderCreate ──── ──── For Example... To create a paragraph border with an extra thick top line, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderTopLine(ExtraThickLine!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderTopLine specifies the top line style of a border. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Lines, Top Line, select line style. BorderUseBorderColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BdrUseBdrClr Syntax: BorderUseBorderColor(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to use the border color option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Color will not be used Yes! 1 Color will be used ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BorderColor BorderStyleCreate BorderStyleEdit BorderStyleEnd TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To use the color border option for the current paragraph border, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleLine!;NoFill!;ParagraphBorder!) BorderUseBorderColor(Yes!) BorderColor("Magenta";255;0;255;100) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BorderUseBorderColor specifies whether the border color option is for the current border, and is used with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit, and with BorderColor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Borders, select border type, Customize, Color, Choose One Color For All Lines. BoxAttachTo Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxAttachTo Syntax: BoxAttachTo(Location) Parameters: Location Specifies where a box is attached. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Page! 2 Attach to page Paragraph! 3 Attach to paragraph Character! 64 Attach to character ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxHorizontalPosition BoxVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To attach a graphics box to a character, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxAttachTo(Character!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxAttachTo attaches a graphics box to a page, paragraph, or character. When a box is attached to a location, BoxHorizontalPosition and BoxVerticalPosition specify horizontal and vertical positions. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Attach To, selecting a position. BoxBorderDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxBdrDlg Syntax: BoxBorderDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxBorderDlg displays the Edit Graphics Box Border/Fill dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Border/Fill. BoxBorderStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxBdrSty Syntax: BoxBorderStyle(Style Name) Parameters: Style Name Specifies the border style of a graphics box. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SpacingOnly! 0 Spacing SingleBorder! 1 Single DoubleBorder! 2 Double DashedBorder! 3 Dashed DottedBorder! 4 Dotted ThickBorder! 5 Thick ExtraThickBorder! 6 Extra Thick ThinThickBorder! 7 Thick outside, thin inside ThickThinBorder! 8 Thin outside, thick inside ThickTopBottomBorder! 9 Thick top, bottom ButtonBorder! 10 Shaded button NoBorder! 127 None ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To select Extra Thick lines as the border style for a figure box, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxBorderStyle(ExtraThickBorder!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxBorderStyle specifies a border style for a current graphic box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Border/Fill, Based on Border Style, selecting style. BoxCaptionEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapEd Syntax: BoxCaptionEdit Parameters: None See Also: SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... This command has no parameters, but is used with other commands to create or edit caption contents: BoxCaptionEdit Type("Brad's Ferrari") SubstructureExit Tell Me More... BoxCaptionEdit opens a box caption. Because this command has no parameters, it is always followed by commands such as Type that furnish caption text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Create or Edit Caption, entering caption. BoxCaptionInitialStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapInitSty Syntax: BoxCaptionInitialStyle(Style) Parameters: Style Specifies the initial style for a box caption. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify Comment Style as the caption initial style, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxCaptionInitialStyle(CommentStyle!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCaptionInitialStyle specifies an initial style for a box caption. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, Create or Edit, Options, Caption Options, Caption Text Style, Initial Style, selecting style, Select. BoxCaptionNumberStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapNumSty Syntax: BoxCaptionNumberStyle(Number Style) Parameters: Number Style Specifies a number style for a box caption. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify Bullet Style as the caption numbering style, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxCaptionNumberStyle(BulletStyle!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCaptionNumberStyle specifies a numbering style for box caption. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, Create or Edit, Options, Caption Options, Caption Text Style, Number Style, selecting style, Select. BoxCaptionOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapOptDlg Syntax: BoxCaptionOptionsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxCaptionOptionsDlg opens the Caption Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Options, Captions Options. BoxCaptionPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapPos Syntax: BoxCaptionPosition(Side of Box;Relation To Border;Position;Offset From Position;Offset Direction) Parameters: Side Of Box Specifies the side of the box where the caption is located. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left side Top! 1 Top Right! 3 Right side Bottom! 4 Bottom ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Relation To Border Specifies a caption's location relative to the border. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OutsideBorder! 0 Outside of border InsideBorder! 1 Inside of border OnBorder! 2 On the border ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position (optional) Specifies the position of a caption. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Position left Top! 1 Position top Center! 2 Position center Right! 3 Position right Bottom! 4 Position bottom ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Offset From Position (optional) A numeric expression specifying the position offset. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To position a caption within the top border of a graphics box, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxCaptionPosition(Top!;InsideBorder!;;;) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCaptionPosition customizes the location of a graphics box caption. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Options, Caption Options, selecting attributes. BoxCaptionRotation Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapRot Syntax: BoxCaptionRotation(Rotation) Parameters: Rotation Specifies the rotation degree of a graphics box caption. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 No rotation Degrees90! 1 90 degrees Degrees180! 2 180 degrees Degrees270! 3 270 degrees ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To rotate a caption 90 degrees, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxCaptionRotation(Degrees90!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCaptionRotation rotates graphics box captions. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Caption Options, Caption Options, Rotation, selecting degree. BoxCaptionWidth Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCapWid Syntax: BoxCaptionWidth(Width) Parameters: Width Specifies the width of a graphics box caption. To have WordPerfect to automatically set the width based on the length of the caption, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To base the width on a current unit of measure, use a measurement expression. To base the width on a percentage of the box width, use a numeric expression. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AutoWidth! 2 Use auto width ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify a caption width of one inch, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxCaptionWidth(1") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCaptionWidth specifies the width of a graphics box caption as: a current unit of measure (inches, points, etc.), a percentage, or based on the length of a caption. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Caption Options, selecting option. BoxChangeLineHeight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxChangeLnHgt Syntax: BoxChangeLineHeight(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the graphics box will change the text line height when attached to a character position. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not change line height Yes! 1 Change line height ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To prevent the graphics box from changing the text line height, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxChangeLineHeight(No!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxChangeLineHeight specifies whether attaching a graphics box to a character position will change the text line height. The default changes the height. When a box is attached to a character position, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Position, selecting and specifying options. BoxChangeStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxChangeSty Syntax: BoxChangeStyle(Style) Parameters: Style Name Names the box style to change. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FigureBox! 0 Figure Box style TableBox! 1 Table Box style TextBox! 2 Text Box style UserBox! 3 User Box style EquationBox! 4 Equation Box style ButtonBox! 5 Button Box style WatermarkImageBox! 6 Watermark Image Box style InlineEquationBox! 7 Inline Equation Box style NoBox! 127 No Box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To change a box style from graphics to text, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxChangeStyle(TextBox!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxChangeStyle changes the style of a graphics box when creating or editing a box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, selecting style. BoxCharPositionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCharPosDlg Syntax: BoxCharPositionDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxCharPositionDlg displays the Character Box Position dialog box. After attaching a box to a character position, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Position, selecting and specifying options. BoxContentEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxContEd Syntax: BoxContentEdit Parameters: None See Also: BoxContentType SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... This command has no parameters and is used with other commands to create or edit box contents, for example: BoxContentEdit Type("Example Box") SubstructureExit Tell Me More... BoxContentEdit initiates the creation and/or editing of box contents. After specifying the contents of the box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, selecting Create Text or Select Box to Edit, then entering text. BoxContentOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxContOptDlg Syntax: BoxContentOptionsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxContentOptionsDlg displays the Content Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Options, Content Options, selecting options. BoxContentPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxContPos Syntax: BoxContentPosition(Horizontal;Vertical) Parameters: Horizontal Specifies the horizontal position of box contents. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Position left Center! 2 Position center Right! 3 Position right ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Vertical Specifies the vertical position of box contents. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Top! 1 Position top Center! 2 Position center Bottom! 4 Position bottom ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To position contents at the left and bottom of a box, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxContentPosition(Left!;Bottom!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxContentPosition positions the contents of a graphics box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Options, Content Options, selecting options. BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxContPresAspRat Syntax: BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to preserve the image width/height ratio when the size of box contents changes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not preserve Yes! 1 Preserve ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To preserve the image width/height ratio, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio specifies whether to preserve the width/height ratio when the position of box contents changes. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Options, Content Options, Preserve Image Width/Height Ratio. BoxContentType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxContType Syntax: BoxContentType(Type Name) Parameters: Type Name Specifies the type of contents in a graphics box. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Text! 1 Text contents LinkedText! 2 Linked text contents Image! 3 Image contents Equation! 4 Equation contents Presentation! 5 Presentation contents Video! 6 Video contents Macro! 7 Macro contents External! 8 External contents Empty! 127 No contents ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify box contents as a graphics image, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxContentType(Image!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxContentType specifies the content type of a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Contents, select option. BoxCounter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCount Syntax: BoxCounter(Counter Type) Parameters: Counter Type Specifies the counter type of a current graphics box or graphics box style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 No counter FigureCounter! 1 Figure TableBoxCounter! 2 Table Box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text Box UserBoxCounter! 4 User Box EquationCounter! 5 Equation ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxEditByCounter ──── ──── For Example... To assign a Text Box counter type to a graphics box or graphics box style, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxCounter(TextBoxCounter!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCounter assigns a new counter type to a current graphics box or graphics box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, (Styles if editing a style), Create or Edit, (selecting style name if editing a style), Options, Caption Options, Caption Counter, selecting counter type, Select. BoxCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCre Syntax: BoxCreate(Box Style) Parameters: Box Style Designates the type of box to create. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FigureBox! 0 Create Figure Box TableBox! 1 Create Table Box TextBox! 2 Create Text Box UserBox! 3 Create User Box EquationBox! 4 Create Equation Box ButtonBox! 5 Create Button Box WatermarkImageBox! 6 Create Watermark Image Box InlineEquationBox! 7 Create Inline Equation Box NoBox! 127 Do not create box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create an Equation Box, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(EquationBox!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxCreate creates the specified graphics box. This command must be used with BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create, select options. BoxCreateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxCreDlg Syntax: BoxCreateDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxCreateDlg displays the Create Graphics Box dialog box. This command is not recordable. To use this command, it must be typed into the macro. BoxDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxDel Syntax: BoxDelete(Box Number) Parameters: Box Number A numeric expression specifying the number of a box to delete. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To delete Equation Box 3, the command sequence is: BoxDelete(EquationBox!;3) Tell Me More... BoxDelete is recorded in Graphics or Page mode and executed in Text, Graphics, or Full Page mode. In Graphics or Page mode, this command is the equivalent of selecting a box with a mouse, Delete, Yes. BoxDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxDlg Syntax: BoxDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxDlg displays the Create Box dialog if preceded by the BoxCreate command and the Edit Box dialog if preceded by the BoxEdit command. This command must be followed by BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit. BoxEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEd Syntax: BoxEdit(Box Number) Parameters: Box Number A numeric expression specifying a box number to edit. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit graphics box 3 of a document, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(3) BoxEnd Tell Me More... BoxEdit specifies a box number to edit. This command must be used in conjunction with box editing commands and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Document Box Number, specify box number. BoxEditByCounter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEdByCount Syntax: BoxEditByCounter(Counter;Number) Parameters: Counter Specifies a box type to edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Edit by Figure Box counter TableBoxCounter! 2 Edit by Table Box counter TextBoxCounter! 3 Edit by Text Box counter UserBoxCounter! 4 Edit by User Box counter EquationCounter! 5 Edit by Equation Box counter ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Number A numeric expression specifying the number of a box type. If the edited counter has more than one level, specify each of the levels by repeating this parameter. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit text box 2.5 in a document, the command sequence is: BoxEditByCounter(TextBoxCounter!;{2;5}) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxEditByCounter specifies box type and number. This command must be used in conjunction with box editing commands and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Edit, Counter Number, specifying counter and number. BoxEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEdDlg Syntax: BoxEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxEdit BoxEditByCounter BoxEditNext BoxEditPrevious ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxEditDlg displays the Select Box To Edit dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Edit. BoxEditNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEdNext Syntax: BoxEditNext(Box Type) Parameters: Box Type Specifies a box type to edit. If a box type is not specified, the macro edits the box following the cursor, regardless of type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FigureBox! 0 Edit next Figure Box TableBox! 1 Edit next Table Box TextBox! 2 Edit next Text Box UserBox! 3 Edit next User Box EquationBox! 4 Edit next Equation Box ButtonBox! 5 Edit next Button Box WatermarkImageBox! 6 Edit next Watermark Image Box InlineEquationBox! 7 Edit next Inline Equation Box NoBox! 127 Edit no box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxEdit BoxEditByCounter BoxEditDlg BoxEditPrevious ──── ──── For Example... To edit the next occurrence of a user box, the command sequence is: BoxEditNext(UserBox!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxEditNext edits the next occurrence of a box type. This command must be used in conjunction with box editing commands and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Edit, Next Box, Edit Box. BoxEditPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEdPrev Syntax: BoxEditPrevious(Box Type) Parameters: Box Type Specifies a box type to edit. If a box type is not specified, the macro edits the box immediately previous to the cursor, regardless of type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FigureBox! 0 Edit previous Figure Box TableBox! 1 Edit previous Table Box TextBox! 2 Edit previous Text Box UserBox! 3 Edit previous User Box EquationBox! 4 Edit previous Equation Box ButtonBox! 5 Edit previous Button Box WatermarkImageBox! 6 Edit previous Watermark Image Box InlineEquationBox! 7 Edit previous Inline Equation Box NoBox! 127 Edit no box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxEdit BoxEditByCounter BoxEditDlg BoxEditNext ──── ──── For Example... To edit the previous occurrence of a button box, the command sequence is: BoxEditPrevious(ButtonBox!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxEditPrevious edits the previous occurrence of a box type. This command must be used in conjunction with box editing commands and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Edit, Previous Box. BoxEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEnd Syntax: BoxEnd(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether creating or editing changes to a graphics box will be saved or canceled. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit ──── ──── For Example... To save changes made to graphics box number 1, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(1) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxEnd saves or cancels changes made when creating or editing a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with box editing commands and BoxEdit or BoxCreate. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, creating or editing, OK or Cancel. BoxEquationDefaultFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEquDefFnt Syntax: BoxEquationDefaultFont(Size) Parameters: Size Determines whether the equation uses the document initial font and font size, or specifies a new size. ──── ──── For Example... To select the default font but specify a non-default font size of 14p, the command is: BoxEquationDefaultFont(14p) Tell Me More... BoxEquationDefaultFont selects the default font and determines whether to change the default font size. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, selecting Equation Box or Inline Equation Box, Edit, Equation Settings, Initial Font, Size, and specifying a font size. BoxEquationFilename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEquFileName Syntax: BoxEquationFilename("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of an equation file. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd FileRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To specify an equation filename STAT.DOC, the command is: BoxEquationFilename("STAT.DOC") Tell Me More... BoxEquationFilename lets you specify the name of an equation file. This command doesn't retrieve the file, it simply indicates to the program that the contents of the box is an equation. To retrieve an equation file, use FileRetrieve. To record this command, specify the box contents as an Equation, then retrieve an equation file. BoxEquationFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEquFnt Syntax: BoxEquationFont("Name";Size) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a font name. Size A numeric expression specifying a font size. ──── ──── For Example... To select 14p Helvetica, the command is: BoxEquationFont("Helvetica";14p) Tell Me More... BoxEquationFont selects a graphics box font and font size. This command must be used between BoxStyleEdit and BoxEnd. This statement is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, highlighting Equation Box or Inline Equation Box, Edit, Equation Setting, Select Font, Font, selecting options, Size, and specifying a font size. BoxEquationSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEquSave Syntax: BoxEquationSave("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of the equation file. See Also: BoxEquationFilename BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic ──── ──── For Example... To save an equation named Formula, the command is: BoxEquationSave("Formula") Tell Me More... BoxEquationSave names and saves an equation file. The file can then be used in the current graphics box or retrieved into other graphics boxes. In the equation editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save As, entering filename. BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEquSaveAsGraph Syntax: BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic("Filename";Format) Parameters: Filename A character expression naming an equation box. Format (optional) Specifies the graphic format of an equation box. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. If a format is not specified, the equation is saved in the current graphics format. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfectGraphic_10! 725 WordPerfect Graphic 1.0 format WordPerfectGraphic_20! 726 WordPerfect Graphic 2.0 format TaggedImageFileFormat! 727 TGIFF format PCPaintbrushX! 728 PC Paintbrush X format WindowsMetaFile! 729 Windows Meta File format Bitmap! 730 Bitmap format CGM! 731 CGM format AutoCAD_DXF! 732 AutoCAD DXF format EncapsulatedPostScript! 733 EPS format HewlettPackardGraphicPlotter! 734 Hewlett Packard Graphic Plotter format Macintosh_PICT! 736 Macintosh PICT format Micrografx! 737 Micrografx format Presentations_20! 738 WordPerfect Presentations 2.0 format ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxEquationFilename BoxEquationSave ──── ──── For Example... To save an equation named Calculus in Presentations 2.0 format, the command is: BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic("Calculus";Presentations_20!) Tell Me More... BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic saves an equation in a graphics file format. In the equation editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save As Image, entering filename, selecting graphics format. BoxEquationSettingsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxEquSetDlg Syntax: BoxEquationSettingsDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxContentEdit BoxEquationDefaultFont KeyboardOriginal KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxEquationSettingsDlg displays the Equation Settings dialog box, containing font, color, and keyboard options. In the equation editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Settings. BoxExactPositionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxExactPosDlg Syntax: BoxExactPositionDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxHorizontalPosition BoxVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxExactPositionDlg displays the Fixed Page Position dialog box, containing options for the horizontal and vertical position of a graphics box. This command must be preceded by BoxCreate or BoxEdit. While a graphics box is attached to a page, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Position. BoxFillStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxFillSty Syntax: BoxFillStyle(Style Name) Parameters: Specifies a graphics box fill style. To specify a WordPerfect Fill Style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. To specify a user- defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 Fill 10% style Fill20! 1 Fill 20% style Fill30! 2 Fill 30% style Fill40! 3 Fill 40% style Fill50! 4 Fill 50% style Fill60! 5 Fill 60% style Fill70! 6 Fill 60% style Fill80! 7 Fill 80% style Fill90! 8 Fill 90% style Fill100! 9 Fill 100% style FillButton! 10 Fill Button style NoFill! 127 No fill style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To select a WordPerfect fill style named 30% Shaded Fill, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxFillStyle(Fill30!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxFillStyle specifies a graphics box fill style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Border/Fill, Fill, Fill Style, select style. BoxHeight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxHgt Syntax: BoxHeight(Height) Parameters: Height Specifies a graphics box height. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent to base box height on the height of its contents. Enter a numeric expression to set the height manually. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AutoHeight! 2 Select auto height ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To set box height to four inches, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxHeight(4") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxHeight sets box height based on the height of box contents or manually specified measurements. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Size, select or specify options. BoxHorizontalAlignment Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxHorizAlign Syntax: BoxHorizontalAlignment(Alignment;Position;Offset;L eft Column;Right Column) Parameters: Alignment Specifies where a graphics box should be horizontally aligned. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AlignMargins! 1 Align to margins AlignColumns! 2 Align to columns ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position Specifies the horizontal position of a graphics box after having been aligned to margins or columns. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left align Center! 2 Center align Right! 3 Right align FullAlign! 7 Full align ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Offset (optional) A numeric expression specifying the left or right offset of a graphics box. The offset moves the image left or right of the alignment point; left offsets are negative numbers, right offsets are positive. Left Column (optional) A numeric expression specifying the left column when a box is aligned to columns. Right Column (optional) A numeric expression specifying the right column when a box is aligned to columns. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxHorizontalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To center a graphics box between two columns, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxHorizontalAlignment(AlignColumns!;Center!;0";1;2) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxHorizontalAlignment specifies the alignment of a graphics box attached to a page or paragraph. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Position, Horizontal position, choosing an option, Offset from Position, choosing an option. BoxHorizontalPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxHorizPos Syntax: BoxHorizontalPosition(Position) Parameters: Position A measurement expression specifying the horizontal position of a graphics box. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxHorizontalAlignment ──── ──── For Example... To position a graphics box two inches from the left edge of the page, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxHorizontalPosition(2.5") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxHorizontalPosition specifies the horizontal position of a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Position, Horizontal Position, Set, enter a position. BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgBlackWhiteThresh Syntax: BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold(Threshold) Parameters: Threshold A numeric expression specifying the threshold at which colors and/or grays are converted to either black or white. Colors or grays below the threshold are converted to black; those above the threshold are converted to white. Values range from 1 to 255, with 127 as the default. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageMonochrome ──── ──── For Example... To set the threshold for converting colors and/or grays to black and white to 150, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold(150) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold determines the threshold or point at which colors and/or grays in the current graphics image are converted to black and white. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Edit All, B/W Threshold. BoxImageBrightness Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgBright Syntax: BoxImageBrightness(Brightness) Parameters: Brightness A numeric expression specifying the brightness of an image color. Values range from -1.0 (all black) to 1.0 (all white). See Also: BoxImageContrast BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To set the brightness of an image color to .5, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageBrightness(0.5) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageBrightness adjusts the brightness (saturation) of a color or black and white image. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Color Adjust, Brightness. BoxImageContrast Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgContrast Syntax: BoxImageContrast(Contrast) Parameters: Contrast A numeric expression specifying the contrast or sharpness of an image. Values range from -1.0 (slight contrast) to 1.0 (substantial contrast). See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageBrightness ──── ──── For Example... To set the contrast of an image color to .7, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageContrast(.7) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageContrast determines the contrast between light and dark areas of a graphic image. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Color Adjust, Contrast. BoxImageDitherMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgDiMeth Syntax: BoxImageDitherMethod(Method;Source) Parameters: Method Specifies dither method. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Halftoning! 1 Evenly spaced dots of variable diameter OrderedDither! 2 Sort image pixels ErrorDiffusionDither! 3 Random dot pattern Default! 6 Default halftoning method ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Source Specifies dither source. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect! 0 WordPerfect as dither source Printer! 1 Printing device as dither source Default! 6 Default source External! 8 Based on your printer, WordPerfect will select either WordPerfect or your printer as the dither source ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageHalftoneOptions ──── ──── For Example... To specify Error Diffusion as the dither method and WordPerfect as the source, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageDitherMethod(ErrorDiffusionDither!;WordPerfect!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageDitherMethod specifies both the method and source of dithering. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Print Parameters, Dither Method, and Dither Source. BoxImageFill Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgFill Syntax: BoxImageFill(Fill Type) Parameters: Fill Type Specifies an image fill type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 Image is in its normal state Transparent! 1 Image is transparent so background (if one has been selected) shows through White! 2 Image is white with black lines ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To set an image fill type to transparent, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageFill(Transparent!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageFill specifies a graphic image fill type. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Fill. BoxImageFlipX Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgFlipX Syntax: BoxImageFlipX(State) Parameters: State Determines whether an image is reversed on its horizontal axis. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not reverse image Yes! 1 Reverse image ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageFlipY ──── ──── For Example... To reverse an image on its horizontal axis, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageFlipX(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageFlipX determines whether an image is reversed on its X axis. For example, if an image faces right, this command causes it to face left. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Attributes, Flip Horizontal. BoxImageFlipY Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgFlipY Syntax: BoxImageFlipY(State) Parameters: State Determines whether the image is reversed on its vertical axis. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not reverse image Yes! 1 Reverse image ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageFlipX ──── ──── For Example... To reverse an image on its vertical axis, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageFlipY(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageFlipY determines whether to reverse an image on its Y axis. In other words, this command turns an image upside down. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Attributes, Flip Vertical. BoxImageHalftoneOptions Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgHalftoneOpt Syntax: BoxImageHalftoneOptions(Source;LPI;Halftone Angle) Parameters: Source Specifies whether source of halftone options is the .PRS file or user-defined. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefaultValues! 0 Default values from .PRS file SetValues! 1 User-defined values ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LPI (optional) A numeric expression specifying the LPI. Halftone Angle (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the halftone angle. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageDitherMethod ──── ──── For Example... To specify that an image use the default halftone options defined in the .PRS file, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageHalftoneOptions(Default!;;) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageHalftoneOptions sets pre-defined halftone values from the .PRS file of the currently selected printer, or allows user- defined values. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. BoxImageInvertColors Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgInvClrs Syntax: BoxImageInvertColors(State) Parameters: State Determines whether image colors are inverted. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not invert colors Yes! 1 Invert colors ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To invert the colors of the current image, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageInvertColors(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageInvertColors determines whether the current colors of an image are inverted to their respective complementary colors. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Attributes, Invert Color. BoxImagePresentations Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgPresen Syntax: BoxImagePresentations Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BoxImagePresentations loads WordPerfect Presentations in which to edit your graphics image. This command will only execute properly if the directory containing PR.EXE has been added to the PATH command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Contents, Image or Image on Disk, Image Editor, File, WP Presentations. BoxImageMonochrome Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgMono Syntax: BoxImageMonochrome(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a color image is converted to black and white. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not converted Yes! 1 Converted ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold BoxImageFill ──── ──── For Example... To convert a color image to black and white, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageMonochrome(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageMonochrome converts a color image to black and white. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Attributes, Black and White. BoxImageMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgMove Syntax: BoxImageMove(X Position;Y Position) Parameters: X Position A numeric expression specifying the horizontal position of an image within a box. Values range from -5.0 to 5.0, with 0.0 being the default. Y Position A numeric expression specifying the vertical position of an image within a box. Values range from -5.0 to 5.0, with 0.0 centering the image. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To move an image slightly up and to the left within a graphics box, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(2) BoxImageMove(0.2;0.2) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageMove moves an image within a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Edit All, Position, Horizontal, Vertical. BoxImageRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgeRet Syntax: BoxImageRetrieve(Image Location;"Filename") Parameters: Image Location Specifies the current location of an image. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LeaveExternal! 0 Use image on Disk MakeInternal! 1 Standard retrieve UseInternal! 2 Use existing image in document ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Image Filename A character expression specifying the filename of an image to retrieve. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve an image named MOUNTAIN.WPG from the current document into another box created in the same document, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageRetrieve(UseInternal!;"Mountain.wpg") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageRetrieve retrieves a specified image from a specific location. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Contents, selecting either Image or Image on Disk, Filename, specifying a filename. BoxImageRotate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgRot Syntax: BoxImageRotate(Degree) Parameters: Degree A numeric expression specifying a degree of rotation. Value ranges from 0.0 to 359.0. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To rotate an image 90 degrees, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageRotate(90.0) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageRotate rotates a graphic image. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Edit All, Rotation, specify a degree measurement. BoxImageSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgSave Syntax: BoxImageSave("Filename";Format) Parameters: Filename A character expression naming an image. Format (optional) Specifies a graphic format. If unspecified, the image will be saved in the currently selected graphics format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfectGraphic_10! 725 WordPerfect 1.0 format WordPerfectGraphic_20! 726 WordPerfect 2.0 format TaggedImageFileFormat! 727 TIFF PCPaintbrushX! 728 PC Paintbrush X format WindowsMetaFile! 729 Windows Meta File format Bitmap! 730 Bitmap format CGM! 731 CGM format AutoCAD_DXF! 732 AutoCad DXF format EncapsulatedPostScript! 733 Encapsulated PostScript format HewlettPackardGraphicPlotter! 734 Hewlett Packard Graphic Plotter format Macintosh_PICT! 736 Macintosh PICT format Micrografx! 737 Micrografx format Presentations_20! 738 WordPerfect Presentations 2.0 format ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To save an image named Fireworks in a Presentations 2.0 format, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(3) BoxImageSave("Fireworks";Presentations_20!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageSave saves an image either with its current name or with a new name. It can also specify the graphics format. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save As, then naming the file and selecting a format. BoxImageScaling Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgScal Syntax: BoxImageScaling(Width;Height) Parameters: Width A numeric expression specifying the width to which an image is scaled. Value ranges from 0.01 to 9.99, with 1.0 being the default. Height A numeric expression specifying the height to which an image is scaled. Value ranges from 0.01 to 9.99, with 1.0 being the default. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To scale an image to a width of 1.5 and a height of 1.2, the command is: BoxEdit(2) BoxImageScaling(1.5;1.2) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageScaling scales an image within a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Edit All, Position, Scale Width and/or Scale Height, and specifying the scale. BoxImageSettingsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgSetDlg Syntax: BoxImageSettingsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxImageSettingsDlg displays the Edit All dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, Create, entering a style name, Contents, Image, Settings. BoxImageShowBackground Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxImgShowBkgrnd Syntax: BoxImageShowBackground(State) Parameters: State Determines whether image backgrounds are visible. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not visible Yes! 1 Visible ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To show an image background, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxImageShowBackground(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxImageShowBackground determines whether any background colors or gradients saved with the original image are visible. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. While in the image editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Attributes, Show Background. BoxOverlap Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxOverLap Syntax: BoxOverlap(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the box is allowed to overlap other boxes. Use an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Overlap not allowed Yes! 1 Overlap allowed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxHorizontaAlignment BoxHorizontalPosition BoxPagePositionDlg BoxParagraphPositionDlg BoxVerticalAlignment BoxVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To allow a graphics box to overlap other boxes, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxOverlap(Yes!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxOverlap specifies whether a graphics box will be allowed to overlap other boxes. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After attaching a box to either a page or paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit Position from the Edit Graphics Box dialog box, then choosing Allow Box to Overlap. BoxPagePositionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxPgPosDlg Syntax: BoxPagePositionDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxHorizontalAlignment BoxHorizontalPosition BoxOverlap BoxStaysOnPage BoxVerticalAlignment BoxVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxPagePositionDlg displays the Page Box Position dialog box. After attaching an image to a page, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit Position from the Edit Graphics Box dialog box. BoxParagraphPositionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxParaPosDlg Syntax: BoxParagraphPositionDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxHorizontalAlignment BoxHorizontalPosition BoxOverlap BoxVerticalAlignment BoxVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxParagraphPositionDlg displays the Paragraph Box Position dialog box. After attaching an image to a paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit Position form the Edit Graphics Box dialog box. BoxResetBorder Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetBdr Syntax: BoxResetBorder Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the border values of graphics box number 1, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(1) BoxResetBorder BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetBorder resets the border values for the current box to the border values for the corresponding box style. For example, border changes made to a specific figure box will reset to the default border values assigned to the Figure Box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making border changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Border Options. BoxResetCaption Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetCap Syntax: BoxResetCaption Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the caption of graphics box number 2, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(2) BoxResetCaption BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetCaption resets the caption values for the current box to the caption values for the corresponding box style. For example, caption changes made to a specific text box will reset to the default caption values assigned to the Text Box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making border changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Caption Options. BoxResetContent Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetCont Syntax: BoxResetContent Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the content values of graphics box number 1, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(1) BoxResetContent BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetContent resets the content values for the current box to the content values for the corresponding box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making border changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Content Options. BoxResetContentRender Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetContRndr Syntax: BoxResetContentRender Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the content render of graphics box 2, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(2) BoxResetContentRender BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetContentRender resets the content render values for the current box to the content render values for the corresponding box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making border changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Content Options. BoxResetCounter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetCount Syntax: BoxResetCounter Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the counter values of graphics box 3, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(3) BoxResetCounter BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetCounter resets the counter values for the current box to the counter values for the corresponding box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making border changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Counter Options. BoxResetFill Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetFill Syntax: BoxResetFill Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the box fill values of graphics box number 2, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(2) BoxResetFill BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetFill resets the fill values for the current box to the position values for the corresponding box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making fill changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Fill. BoxResetPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetPos Syntax: BoxResetPosition Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset the box position values of graphics box number 1, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(1) BoxResetPosition BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetPosition resets the position values for the current box to the position values for the corresponding box style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After making position changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Position and Size. BoxResetTextFlow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxResetTxtFlow Syntax: BoxResetTextFlow Parameters: None See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To reset text flow values of graphics box number 1, the command sequence is: BoxEdit(1) BoxResetTextFlow BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxResetTextFlow resets the text flow values for the current box to the text flow values for the corresponding box style. For example, text flow changes made to a specific user box will reset to the default text flow values assigned to the User Box style. After making text flow changes to a box, this command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Based on Box Style, Reset to Style, Text Flow Options. BoxSizeDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxSizeDlg Syntax: BoxSizeDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxSizeDlg displays the Graphics Box Size dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Size. BoxStaysOnPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStaysOnPg Syntax: BoxStaysOnPage(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the image should stay on the page to which it was attached rather than moving with the text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Moves with text Yes! 1 Stays on page ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To allow the box to move with the surrounding text, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxStaysOnPage(No!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxStaysOnPage specifies whether the image should be allowed to move with the surrounding text--even if that means moving to another page. The default setting will allow a box to move. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After attaching an image to a page, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit Position from the Edit Graphics Box dialog box, then choosing Allow Box to Move Page to Page with Text. BoxStyleCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyCopy Syntax: BoxStyleCopy(Style Name;Current Location;Destination;New Name) Parameters: Style Name Specifies the name of the style to be copied. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent to specify a style provided by WordPerfect. To copy a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FigureBox! 0 Copy Figure Box style TableBox! 1 Copy Table Box style TextBox! 2 Copy Text Box style UserBox! 3 Copy User Box style EquationBox! 4 Copy Equation Box style ButtonBox! 5 Copy Button Box style WatermarkImageBox! 6 Copy Watermark Image Box style InlineEquationBox! 7 Copy Inline Equation Box style NoBox! 127 No box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Current Location Specifies the current location of the style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current Document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared Library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Destination Specifies the destination of the style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current Document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared Library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ New Name (optional) A character expression specifying the new name to be given to the style. This parameter is only necessary if you want to place a second copy of the style in the same location. This parameter will be expected by the macro if the contents of the Current Location and Destination parameters are the same. See Also: BoxStyleCreate BoxStyleDelete BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleDlg BoxStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To copy a style you have created called MyStyle from your personal style library to your shared style library, the command sequence is: BoxStyleEdit("MyStyle") BoxStyleCopy("MyStyle";PersonalLibrary!;SharedLibrary!) BoxStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleCopy copies the specified style from one location to another. This command must be used in conjunction with commands such as BoxStyle Edit and BoxStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, Copy. BoxStyleCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyCre Syntax: BoxStyleCreate("Style Name") Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying the name of the style to create. See Also: BoxStyleDelete BoxStyleDlg BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To create a box style called NewBox, the command sequence is: BoxStyleCreate("NewBox") BoxStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleCreate specifies the name of the style to create. This command must be followed by BoxStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, Create and typing a style name. BoxStyleDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyDel Syntax: BoxStyleDelete("Style Name";Style Library) Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying the name of the style to delete. Style Library Specifies the location from which the style should be deleted. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current Document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared Library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxStyleCreate BoxStyleDlg BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To delete a box style called OldBox from the current document, the command is: BoxStyleDelete("OldBox";CurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleDelete deletes a style from the specified location. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, highlighting a style, Delete. BoxStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyDlg Syntax: BoxStyleDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxStyleCreate BoxStyleDelete BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... BoxStyleDlg displays the Graphics Box Styles dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles. BoxStyleEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyEd Syntax: BoxStyleEdit(Style Name) Parameters: Style Name Specifies the name of the style edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent to specify styles provided by WordPerfect. To edit a user-defined style, enclose the name in quotation marks. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FigureBox! 0 Edit Figure Box style TableBox! 1 Edit Table Box style TextBox! 2 Edit Text Box style UserBox! 3 Edit User Box style EquationBox! 4 Edit Equation Box style ButtonBox! 5 Edit Button Box style WatermarkImageBox! 6 Edit Watermark Image Box style InlineEquationBox! 7 Edit Inline Equation Box style NoBox! 127 No box style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxStyleCreate BoxStyleDelete BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleEnd BoxStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To edit the Watermark Image Box style to allow it to overlap other boxes, the command sequence is: BoxStyleEdit(WatermarkImageBox!) BoxOverlap(Yes!) BoxStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleEdit initiates the editing of a specified style. BoxStyleEdit is used in conjunction with style editing commands and BoxStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, highlighting the style you wish to edit, then choosing Edit. BoxStyleEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyEdDlg Syntax: BoxStyleEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxStyleEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxStyleEditDlg displays the Edit Graphics Box Style dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, highlighting a style, choosing Edit. BoxStyleEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyEnd Syntax: BoxStyleEnd(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to save or cancel changes made to the style most recently created or edited. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxStyleCreate ──── ──── For Example... To save changes to an edited Figure Box style, the command sequence is: BoxStyleEdit(FigureBox!) BoxOverlap(Yes!) BoxStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleEdit initiates the editing of a specified style. BoxStyleEnd is used in conjunction with style editing commands and BoxStyleEnd or BoxStyleCreate. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, highlighting the style you wish to edit, then choosing Edit. BoxStyleName Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyName Syntax: BoxStyleName("Style Name") Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying a new name for a style. See Also: BoxStyleEdit BoxStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To rename a style from Picture to Portrait, the command sequence is: BoxStyleEdit("Picture") BoxStyleName("Portrait") BoxStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleName renames a style. This command is used in conjunction with BoxStyleEdit and BoxStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Styles, highlighting a style, Edit, entering a new name in Box Style Name. BoxStyleRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStyRet Syntax: BoxStyleRetrieve(Style Library;Location) Parameters: Style Library A character expression specifying the style library containing the styles to be retrieved. Location Specifies the location into which the style should be retrieved. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current Document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared Library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxStyleCopy BoxStyleSave ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve all styles in a style library named Retro into your Shared Style Library, the command is: BorderStyleRetrieve("Retro";SharedLibrary!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleRetrieve retrieves the specified style into either the current document or your personal or shared style libraries. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Styles, selecting the location into which you wish to retrieve a style, Retrieve, and typing the name of a style to retrieve. BoxStyleSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxStySav Syntax: BoxStyleSave("Library Name";Location) Parameters: Library Name A character expression specifying the style library to which the styles will be saved. Location Specifies the current location of the styles. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current Document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared Library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxStyleCopy BoxStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To save all in your Shared Style library to a style library named Award, the command is: BoxStyleSave("Award";SharedLibrary!) Tell Me More... BoxStyleSave saves all styles from the current document or your personal or shared style libraries to the specified style library. If the specified style library contains styles, they will be replaced. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Styles, selecting location, select a style, Save, name style library. BoxTextAngle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtAng Syntax: BoxTextAngle(Degree) Parameters: Degree Specifies the degree to rotate the text in a graphics box. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 No rotation Degrees90! 1 90 degrees Degrees180! 2 180 degrees Degrees270! 3 270 degrees ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To rotate box text 180 degrees, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(TextBox!) BoxTextAngle(Degrees180!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxTextAngle rotates the text in a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate, BoxEdit and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Create or Edit Text from the Edit Graphics Box dialog box, pressing Alt+F9, choosing Rotate Box Contents and specifying the rotation degree. BoxTextDefaultStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtDefltSty Syntax: BoxTextDefaultStyle(Style) Parameters: Style Specifies the default style for box text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify Normal Style as the default for box text, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxTextDefaultStyle(NormalStyle!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxTextDefaultStyle determines the default style for box text. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. BoxTextFilename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtFilename Syntax: BoxTextFilename("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of the text file. See Also: FileRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To specify a text filename of Draft.fil, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(TextBox!) RetrieveFile("DRAFT.FIL") BoxTextFilename("DRAFT.FIL") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxTextFilename specifies the name of a text file. This command doesn't retrieve the file, it simply indicates to the program that the contents of the box is text. To retrieve a text file, use FileRetrieve. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. To record this command, specify the box contents as Text, then retrieve a file. BoxTextFlow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtFlow Syntax: BoxTextFlow(Direction) Parameters: Direction Specifies the location of the text flow surrounding a graphics box. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LargestSide! 0 Side with largest amount of space LeftSide! 1 Left side RightSide! 2 Right side NeitherSide! 3 Neither side BothSides! 8 Both sides Columnar! 9 Columns NoWrapping! 15 No wrapping ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To allow text to wrap around the box, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxTextFlow(BothSides!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxTextFlow specifies the flow or placement of text surrounding a graphics box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Text Flow Around Box, Text Flows. BoxTextFlowContour Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtFlowContour Syntax: BoxTextFlowContour Parameters: None See Also: BoxTextFlow BoxTextFlowSquare ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BoxTextFlowContour determines whether text should be contoured to the shape of the graphics image. Contouring applies only to text outside of the box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Text Flow Around Box, Contour Text Flow. BoxTextFlowSquare Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtFlowSqu Syntax: BoxTextFlowSquare Parameters: None See Also: BoxTextFlow BoxTextFlowContour ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... BoxTextFlowSquare determines whether text should be contoured to the square shape of the box. BoxTextFlowSquare is only necessary if you have previously used BoxTextFlowContour. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Text Flow Around Box, Contour Text Flow. BoxTextSettingsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxTxtSetDlg Syntax: BoxTextSettingsDlg Parameters: None See Also: BoxTextAngle ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... BoxTextSettingsDlg displays the Rotate Box Contents dialog box. After selecting Text as the contents of the box and choosing either Create or Edit Text, this command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F9, and choosing Rotate Box Contents. BoxVerticalAlignment Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxVertAlign Syntax: BoxVerticalAlignment(Position;Offset) Parameters: Position Specifies the vertical position of a box that has been attached to either a page or a character position. Select an enumerated type or numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Top! 1 Top of page or top of text baseline Center! 2 Center of page or center of text baseline Bottom! 4 Bottom of page or bottom of text baseline Baseline! 6 Text baseline (if attached to character position) FullAlign! 7 Full length of page (if attached to page position) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Offset (optional) A numeric expression specifying the offset from the vertical position. This parameter only applies to boxes attached to a page. An offset moving text up from the vertical position should be a negative number; an offset moving text down should be a positive number. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To vertically center a figure box that has been attached to a page, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxVerticalAlignment(Center!) BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxVerticalAlignment positions a box relative to the page or character to which it has been attached. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After attaching a box to either a page or a character, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit Position from the Edit Graphics Box dialog box, then choosing Vertical Position and/or Offset from Position. BoxVerticalPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxVertPos Syntax: BoxVerticalPosition(Position) Parameters: Position A measurement expression specifying the vertical position of a box. See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd BoxVerticalAlignment ──── ──── For Example... To position a figure box three inches from the top of the page, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxVerticalPosition(3") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxVerticalPosition specifies the vertical position of a graphics box that has been attached to either a page or a paragraph. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. After attaching a box to either a page or a paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit Position from the Edit Graphics Box dialog box, then choosing Vertical Position. BoxWidth Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BoxWid Syntax: BoxWidth(Width) Parameters: Width Specifies the width of a graphics box. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent to automatically set the width based on the width of the box contents. Use a numeric expression if you want to set the width. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AutoWidth! 2 Use automatic width ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCreate BoxEdit BoxEnd ──── ──── For Example... To set a figure box width to three inches, the command sequence is: BoxCreate(FigureBox!) BoxWidth(3") BoxEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... BoxWidth sets the box width or allows WordPerfect to set the width automatically based on the box contents. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCreate and BoxEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create or Edit, Edit Size, then choosing either Set Width, or Automatic Width. ButtonBar Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BBar Syntax: ButtonBar(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the button bar is displayed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Not displayed On! 1 Displayed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ButtonBarPosition ButtonBarSelect ButtonBarStyle ──── ──── For Example... To display the button bar, the command is: ButtonBar(On!) Tell Me More... ButtonBar determines whether the button bar is displayed. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar. ButtonBarPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BBarPos Syntax: ButtonBarPosition(Position) Parameters: Position Specifies the position of the button bar on a document window. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left side of window Top! 1 Top of window Right! 3 Right side of window Bottom! 4 Bottom of window ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ButtonBar ButtonBarSelect ButtonBarStyle ──── ──── For Example... To position the button bar at the bottom of a document window, the command is: ButtonBarPosition(Bottom!) Tell Me More... ButtonBarPosition specifies where the button bar should be positioned on your document screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar Setup, Options, then selecting a position. ButtonBarSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BBarSel Syntax: ButtonBarSelect("Button Bar") Parameters: Button Bar A character expression specifying the button bar to select. See Also: ButtonBar ButtonBarPosition ButtonBarStyle ──── ──── For Example... To select a button bar named MyMacros, the command is: ButtonBarSelect("MyMacros") Tell Me More... ButtonBarSelect selects the specified button bar. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar Setup, Select, highlighting a button bar, Select. ButtonBarSetupGraphics Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BBarSetupGraph Syntax: ButtonBarSetupGraphics(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether button bars are visible in Graphics Mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Button bars not visible On! 1 Button bars visible ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ButtonBarSetupText ──── ──── For Example... To allow button bars to be visible while in Graphics Mode, the command is: ButtonBarSetupGraphics(On!) Tell Me More... ButtonBarSetupGraphics determines whether button bars are visible while the program display is in Graphics Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Screen Options, Button Bar (Graphics). ButtonBarSetupText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BBarSetupTxt Syntax: ButtonBarSetupText(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether button bars are visible in Text Mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Button bars not visible On! 1 Button bars visible ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ButtonBarSetupGraphics ──── ──── For Example... To allow button bars to be visible while in Text Mode, the command is: ButtonBarSetupText(On!) Tell Me More... ButtonBarSetupText determines whether button bars are visible while the program display is in Text Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Screen Options, Button Bar (Text). ButtonBarStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: BBarSty Syntax: ButtonBarStyle Parameters: Style Specifies the style of the button bar. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Text! 1 Text only Icon! 2 Icon only Both! 3 Text and Icon ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ButtonBar ButtonBarPosition ButtonBarSelect ──── ──── For Example... To specify that a button bar display icons only, the command is: ButtonBarStyle(Icons!) Tell Me More... ButtonBarStyle specifies a button bar style. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar Setup, Options, then selecting a style. CancelKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CancelKey Syntax: CancelKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... It might be helpful to think of this command as the Esc key. This command displays the Undelete dialog or cancel the current dialog. CancelKey will execute whatever the Escape key is designed to do in the state the program is in when the macro encounters this command. This doesn't include situations where the Escape key has been remapped in Keyboard Layout. CartridgesAndFontsBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CartAndFntsBeg Syntax: CartridgesAndFontsBegin Parameters: None See Also: CartridgesAndFontsEnd CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont CartridgesAndFontsQuantity ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CartridgesAndFontsBegin initiates cartridge, font, and print wheel selections. This command must be used in conjunction with commands such as CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont and CartridgesAndFontsEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Cartridges/Fonts. CartridgesAndFontsEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CartAndFntsEnd Syntax: CartridgesAndFontsEnd(State;"Printer Name";".PRS filename") Parameters: State Specifies whether to save or cancel cartridge, font, and print wheel selections. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Printer Name A character expression naming the printer. .Prs Filename (optional) A character expression naming the printer file to which the selections will be saved. See Also: CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont CartridgesAndFontsQuantity ──── ──── For Example... To end and save font selections on an Apple LaserWriter IINTX to its printer file named APLW2NTX.PRS, the command sequence is: CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont("Built-In";;"New Century Schoolbook";StarMark!) CartridgesAndFontsEnd(Save!;"Apple LaserWriter IINTX";"APLW2NTX.PRS") Tell Me More... CartridgesAndFontsEnd terminates cartridge, font, and print wheel selections and specifies whether to save or cancel those selections. This command must be used in conjunction with commands such as CartridgesAndFontsBegin and CartridgesAndFontsMark. This command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel when closing the Select Fonts dialog box. CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CartAndFntsMarkFnt Syntax: CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont("Font Source";"Library Name";"Font Name";Type of Mark) Parameters: Font Source A character expression specifying a font source. Options for this parameter such as "Built-in", or "Soft Font", are displayed in the Select Cartridges/Fonts/Print Wheels dialog box. Library Name (optional) A character expression specifying the font library. This parameter must be used if marking soft fonts. Font Name (optional) A character expression naming a font to be marked. For non-scalable fonts, the font name should include point size. Type of Mark Specifies how a font is marked. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoveMark! 0 Unmark font HomeStar! 1 Mark with Home "*" HomePlus! 2 Mark with Home "+" PlusMark! 128 Mark with "+" StarPlusMark! 152 Mark with "*+" StarMark! 176 Mark with "*" ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsEnd CartridgesAndFontsQuantity ──── ──── For Example... To mark the font New Century Schoolbook with an asterisk, the command sequence is: CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont("Built-In";;"New Century Schoolbook";StarMark!) CartridgesAndFontsEnd(Save!;"Apple LaserWriter IINTX";;) Tell Me More... CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont marks fonts to be added to a printer file. This command must be used in conjunction with CartridgesAndFontsBegin and CartridgesAndFontsEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Cartridges/Fonts/Print Wheels, choosing a category, Edit, marking fonts. CartridgesAndFontsQuantity Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CartAndFntsQuan Syntax: CartridgesAndFontsQuantity("Font Source";Quantity) Parameters: Font Source A character expression specifying a font source. Options for this parameter such as "Built-in", or "Soft Font", are displayed in the Select Cartridges/Fonts/Print Wheels dialog box. Quantity A numeric expression specifying the quantity of memory, cartridge slots, or print wheels available. See Also: CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsEnd CartridgesAndFontsMarkFont ──── ──── For Example... To specify that your printer has 350K memory available for downloadable soft fonts, the command sequence is: CartridgesAndFontsBegin CartridgesAndFontsQuantity("Soft Font";350) CartridgesAndFontsEnd(Save!;"Apple LaserWriter IINTX";;) Tell Me More... CartridgesAndFontsQuantity indicates how much memory, or how many cartridge slots or print wheels are available. This command must be used in conjunction with commands such as CartridgesAndFontsBegin and CartridgesAndFontsEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Select, selecting a printer, Edit, Font Setup, Select Cartridges/Fonts/Print Wheels, choosing a font category, Quantity, specifying quantity. Center Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Cntr Syntax: Center Parameters: None See Also: CenterCurrentPage CenterPages ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Center centers one line of text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Alignment, Center. CenterCurrentPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CntrCurPg Syntax: CenterCurrentPage(State) Parameters: State Designates whether to center the contents of a current page vertically. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not center page On! 1 Center page ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Center CenterPages ──── ──── For Example... To center a current page vertically, the command is: CenterCurrentPage(On!) Tell Me More... CenterCurrentPage specifies whether to center the current page vertically. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Center Current Page. CenterPages Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CntrPgs Syntax: CenterPages(State) Parameters: State Designates whether to center all pages vertically in a current document. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not center pages On! 1 Center pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Center CenterCurrentPage ──── ──── For Example... To center all pages vertically in the current document, the command is: CenterPages(On!) Tell Me More... CenterPages specifies whether all pages in a document from the current page forward are centered vertically. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Center Pages. CGAFastText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CGAFastTxt Syntax: CGAFastText(State) Parameters: State Designates whether the CGA Fast Text option is on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 CGA Fast Text off Yes! 1 CGA Fast Text on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn the CGA Fast Text option on, the command is: CGAFastText(Yes!) Tell Me More... CGAFastText speeds up screen display on CGA monitors. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode, Screen Type/Colors, Fast Text (May cause snow on screen). ChapterNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ChapNum Syntax: ChapterNumber(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying chapter number. See Also: ChapterNumberDecrement ChapterNumberDisplay ChapterNumberIncrement ChapterNumberMethod ──── ──── For Example... To specify chapter 5, the command is: ChapterNumber(5) Tell Me More... ChapterNumber specifies a chapter number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Chapter, New Number, specify number. ChapterNumberDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ChapNumDec Syntax: ChapterNumberDecrement Parameters: None See Also: ChapterNumber ChapterNumberDisplay ChapterNumberIncrement ChapterNumberMethod ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ChapterNumberDecrement decrements a chapter number based on the previous chapter number. For example, if the previous chapter was 10, ChapterNumberDecrement decrements the next chapter to 9. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Chapter, Decrement Number. ChapterNumberDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ChapNumDisp Syntax: ChapterNumberDisplay Parameters: None See Also: ChapterNumber ChapterNumberDecrement ChapterNumberIncrement ChapterNumberMethod ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ChapterNumberDisplay types the chapter number at the cursor . This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Chapter, Display in Document. ChapterNumberIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ChapNumInc Syntax: ChapterNumberIncrement Parameters: None See Also: ChapterNumber ChapterNumberDecrement ChapterNumberDisplay ChapterNumberMethod ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ChapterNumberIncrement increments a chapter number based on the previous chapter number. For example, if the previous chapter was 1, ChapterNumberIncrement will increment the next chapter to 2. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Chapter, Increment Number. ChapterNumberMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ChapNumMeth Syntax: ChapterNumberMethod(Number Method) Parameters: Number Method Designates the numbering method for a current chapter. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Numbers LowerLetters! 1 Lowercase letters UpperLetters! 2 Uppercase letters LowerRoman! 3 Lowercase roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Uppercase roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ChapterNumber ChapterNumberDecrement ChapterNumberDisplay ChapterNumberIncrement ──── ──── For Example... To select uppercase roman numerals as the numbering method, the command is: ChapterNumberMethod(UpperRoman!) Tell Me More... ChapterNumberMethod specifies the method of numbering a chapter. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Chapters, Numbering Method, selecting method. ClearDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrDoc Syntax: ClearDoc Parameters: None See Also: Close ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ClearDoc clears a document screen without saving changes. This command is the equivalent of File, Exit, No, No. ClipboardAppendTo Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClipAppTo Syntax: ClipboardAppendTo Parameters: None See Also: ClipboardRetrieve ClipboardSaveTo ClipboardSetNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ClipboardAppendTo appends the contents of a document screen or blocked text to existing text in the clipboard. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell, Append to Clipboard. ClipboardRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClipRet Syntax: ClipboardRetrieve Parameters: None See Also: ClipboardAppendTo ClipboardSaveTo ClipboardSetNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ClipboardRetrieve retrieves the contents of a clipboard into a document screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell, Retrieve. ClipboardSaveTo Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClipSaveTo Syntax: ClipboardSaveTo Parameters: None See Also: ClipboardAppendTo ClipboardRetrieve ClipboardSetNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ClipboardSaveTo saves the contents of a document screen or blocked text to the clipboard. Current Clipboard contents will be overwritten. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell, Save to Clipboard. ClipboardSetNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClipSetNum Syntax: ClipboardSetNumber(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a clipboard number to append, save to, or retrieve from. Clipboard numbers range from 0 to 79. See Also: ClipboardAppendTo ClipboardRetrieve ClipboardSaveTo ──── ──── For Example... To specify clipboard 10, the command is: ClipboardSetNumber(10) Tell Me More... ClipboardSetNumber specifies the number of a clipboard. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell, Clipboard Number. Close Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Close Syntax: Close Parameters: None See Also: ClearDoc CloseDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Closes a document screen without saving changes. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Close, No. CloseDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CloseDlg Syntax: CloseDlg Parameters: None See Also: Close ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... CloseDlg displays the Close dialog box. This command is not recordable. To use this command, it must be typed into the macro. ColorAdd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrAdd Syntax: ColorAdd("Palette Name";Position;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;"Color Name:") Parameters: Palette Name A character expression naming a color palette. Position (optional) A numeric expression specifying the position at which the new color should appear in the list of palette colors. Red Value A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. The values for all colors are displayed in the Edit Color Printing Palette dialog box. Green Value A numeric expression representing the amount of green in the color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. See parameter description of "Red Value" above. Blue Value A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color to be added. Value ranges from 0 to 255. See parameter description of "Red Value" above. Color Name A character expression specifying the name of a color to be added. See Also: ColorAdd ColorDelete ColorModify ──── ──── For Example... To add a color named Autumn to a palette named Seasons, the command is: ColorAdd("Seasons";0;251;160;90;"Autumn") Tell Me More... ColorAdd adds a color to a color palette. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, selecting a palette, Edit, Create, specifying color name and values. ColorDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrDel Syntax: ColorDelete("Palette Name";"Color Name") Parameters: Palette Name A character expression specifying a palette from which a color is to be deleted. Color Name A character expression specifying a color to be deleted. See Also: ColorAdd ColorModify ──── ──── For Example... To delete Cyan from Crayon Palette, the command is: ColorDelete("Crayon Palette";"Cyan") Tell Me More... ColorDelete deletes a color from a color palette. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, selecting a palette, Edit, selecting a color, Delete. ColorDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrDlg Syntax: ColorDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ColorDlg displays the Color Selection dialog box. This command is for use with tables and is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create or Edit, Lines/Fill, Line Color, select a color. ColorModify Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrMod Syntax: ColorModify("Palette Name";"Current Color Name";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;"New Color Name") Parameters: Palette Name A character expression naming a color palette containing a color to be modified. Current Color Name A character expression naming the color to be modified. Red Value A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Green Value A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Blue Value A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. New Color Name A character expression renaming a color after modification. See Also: ColorAdd ColorDelete ColorModify ──── ──── For Example... To modify Black in the Crayon Palette and rename it Slate, the command is: ColorModify("Crayon Palette";"Black";51;91;91;"Slate") Tell Me More... ColorModify modifies and renames a color. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, selecting a palette, Edit, selecting a color, Edit, modifying attributes. ColorPaletteCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrPalCre Syntax: ColorPaletteCreate("Palette Name") Parameters: Palette Name A character expression naming a palette. See Also: ColorPaletteDelete ColorPaletteDlg ColorPaletteRename ColorPaletteSelect ──── ──── For Example... To create a palette named Hues of Blue, the command is: ColorPaletteCreate("Hues of Blue") Tell Me More... ColorPaletteCreate names a palette to create, usually in conjunction with palette modification commands such as ColorAdd. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, Create. ColorPaletteDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrPalDel Syntax: ColorPaletteDelete("Palette Name") Parameters: Palette Name A character expression naming a palette to delete. See Also: ColorPaletteCreate ColorPaletteDlg ColorPaletteRename ColorPaletteSelect ──── ──── For Example... To delete a palette named Hues of Blue, the command is: ColorPaletteDelete("TestOnly") Tell Me More... ColorPaletteDelete names a palette to delete. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, selecting a palette, Delete. ColorPaletteDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrPalDlg Syntax: ColorPaletteDlg Parameters: None See Also: ColorPaletteCreate ColorPaletteDelete ColorPaletteRename ColorPaletteSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ColorPaletteDlg displays the Color Printing Palettes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette. ColorPaletteRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrPalRen Syntax: ColorPaletteRename("Current Palette Name";"New Palette Name") Parameters: Current Palette Name A character expression specifying the current name of a palette. New Palette Name A character expression renaming a color palette. See Also: ColorPaletteCreate ColorPaletteDelete ColorPaletteDlg ColorPaletteSelect ──── ──── For Example... To change the name Craig Pyle's Palette to Puget Sound Blues, the command is: ColorPaletteRename("Craig Pyle's Palette";"Puget Sound Blues") Tell Me More... ColorPaletteRename renames an existing palette. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, selecting a palette, Rename, renaming palette. ColorPaletteSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrPalSel Syntax: ColorPaletteSelect("Palette Name") Parameters: Palette Name A character expression specifying a palette to select. See Also: ColorPaletteCreate ColorPaletteDelete ColorPaletteDlg ColorPaletteRename ──── ──── For Example... To select the palette called Multi-Colors, the command is: ColorPaletteSelect("Multi-Colors") Tell Me More... ColorPaletteSelect names a palette to select. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, selecting a palette, Select. ColorSchemeAssign Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrSchAssign Syntax: Parameters: See Also: ColorSchemeCopy ColorSchemeCreate ColorSchemeDelete ColorSchemeSelect ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... ColorSchemeCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrSchCopy Syntax: ColorSchemeCopy("Current Name";"New Name") Parameters: Current Name A character expression specifying the color scheme to copy. New Name A character expression specifying the new name of the color scheme. See Also: ColorSchemeAssign ColorSchemeCreate ColorSchemeDelete ColorSchemeSelect ──── ──── For Example... To make a copy of a color scheme called Sharon's with a new name of Deena's, the command is: ColorSchemeCopy("Sharon's";"Deena's") Tell Me More... ColorSchemeCopy makes a copy of a specified color scheme and gives it a new name. While in Text Mode, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, highlighting a scheme to copy, Copy, entering a new name. ColorSchemeCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrSchCre Syntax: ColorSchemeCreate("Scheme Name") Parameters: Scheme Name A character expression specifying the name of a color scheme to create. See Also: ColorSchemeAssign ColorSchemeCopy ColorSchemeDelete ColorSchemeSelect ──── ──── For Example... To create a color scheme named Eclectic Selections, the command is: ColorSchemeCreate("Eclectic Selections") Tell Me More... ColorSchemeCreate creates a color scheme. While in Text Mode, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, Create, then entering a name. ColorSchemeDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrSchDel Syntax: ColorSchemeDelete("Scheme Name") Parameters: Scheme Name A character expression specifying the color scheme to delete. See Also: ColorSchemeAssign ColorSchemeCopy ColorSchemeCreate ColorSchemeSelect ──── ──── For Example... To delete a color scheme named Mousy Browns, the command is: ColorSchemeDelete("Mousy Browns") Tell Me More... ColorSchemeDelete deletes a color scheme. While is Text Mode, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, highlighting a scheme, Delete. ColorSchemeSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrSchSel Syntax: ColorSchemeSelect("Scheme Name") Parameters: Scheme Name A character expression specifying the color scheme to select. See Also: ColorSchemeAssign ColorSchemeCopy ColorSchemeCreate ColorSchemeDelete ──── ──── For Example... To select a color scheme named London Fog, the command is: ColorSchemeSelect("London Fog") Tell Me More... ColorSchemeSelect selects a color scheme. While in Text Mode, this command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, highlighting a scheme, Select. ColorUnits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ClrUnits Syntax: ColorUnits(Unit) Parameters: Unit Specifies the color display unit for all color selections. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RGB! 0 Selects Red Green Blue display unit HLS! 1 Selects Hue Luminosity Saturation display unit CMYK! 2 Selects Cyan Magenta Yellow Black display unit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ColorSchemeAssign ColorSchemeCopy ColorSchemeCreate ColorSchemeDelete ColorSchemeSelect ──── ──── For Example... To select the Hue Luminosity Saturation display unit, the command is: ColorUnits(HLS!) Tell Me More... ColorUnits selects the specified color display unit. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Color Palette, Color Display Units, selecting a display unit. ColumnsDefinition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ColDef Syntax: ColumnsDefinition(Type of Column;Section Spacing;{Width;Fixed;...}) Parameters: Type of Column Specifies the type of column being defined. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Newspaper! 0 Newspaper columns NewspaperBalanced! 1 Evenly-spaced newspaper columns Parallel! 2 Parallel columns ParallelBlockProtect! 3 Parallel columns with Block Protect ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Section Spacing A numeric expression specifying the spacing between sections of text in Parallel Columns. Width A measurement expression that alternates between specifying the width of each column and the desired space between the columns. This parameter is always paired with the Fixed parameter. Fixed Specifies whether or not the width of the column or the space between columns is fixed. This parameter is always paired with the Width parameter. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NotFixed! 0 Columns not fixed Fixed! 1 Columns fixed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ColumnsDefinitionDlg ColumnsDefinitionSimple ColumnsOff ColumnsTablesDlg ──── ──── For Example... To define two non-fixed newspaper columns, one with a width of 2" and one with a width of 3", with 1" between them, the command is: ColumnsDefinition(Newspaper!;1.0;{2";NotFixed!;1";Fixed!;3";NotFi xed!}) Tell Me More... ColumnsDefinition defines columns. This command should be used if you want to specify the column widths or if you want to vary the space between columns. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Columns, selecting a column type, selecting number of columns, Custom Widths, Edit, then specifying the Width and the Fixed options for each column and space between columns. ColumnsDefinitionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ColDefDlg Syntax: ColumnsDefinitionDlg Parameters: None See Also: ColumnsDefinition ColumnsDefinitionSimple ColumnsOff ColumnsTablesDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ColumnsDefinitionDlg displays the Text Columns dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Columns. ColumnsDefinitionSimple Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ColDefSimple Syntax: ColumnsDefinitionSimple(Number of Columns;Type of Column;Width Between Columns;Line Spacing) Parameters: Number of Columns A numeric expression specifying the number of columns. Type Specifies the type of column being defined. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Newspaper! 0 Newspaper columns NewspaperBalanced! 1 Evenly-spaced newspaper columns Parallel! 2 Parallel columns ParallelBlockProtect! 3 Parallel columns with Block Protect ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Width Between Columns (optional) A measurement expression specifying the width between columns. Section Spacing A numeric expression specifying the spacing between sections of text in Parallel Columns. See Also: ColumnsDefinition ColumnsDefinitionDlg ColumnsOff ColumnsTablesDlg ──── ──── For Example... To define two parallel columns, with .5" between them, the command is: ColumnsDefinitionSimple(2;Parallel!;1.0;0.5") Tell Me More... This command defines columns. It should be used if you do not want to specify the column widths and if you want the same distance between all columns. This command is not recordable. To use this command, it must be typed in a macro. ColumnsOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ColOff Syntax: ColumnsOff Parameters: None See Also: ColumnsDefinition ColumnsDefinitionDlg ColumnsDefinitionSimple ColumnsTablesDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ColumnsOff turns columns off. This command is the equivalent of Layout, Columns, Off. ColumnsTablesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ColTblsDlg Syntax: ColumnsTablesDlg Parameters: None See Also: ColumnsDefinition ColumnsDefinitionDlg ColumnsDefinitionSimple ColumnsOff ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ColumnsTablesDlg displays the Columns/Tables dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F7. CommentConvert Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CmntCvt Syntax: CommentConvert Parameters: None See Also: CommentConvert CommentCreate CommentEdit CommentsDisplaySetup ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CommentConvert converts a comment to text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Comment, Convert. CommentCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CmntCre Syntax: CommentCreate Parameters: None See Also: CommentConvert CommentEdit CommentsDisplaySetup ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CommentCreate opens the Comment editing screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Comment, Create. CommentEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CmntEd Syntax: CommentEdit Parameters: None See Also: CommentConvert CommentCreate CommentsDisplaySetup ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CommentEdit opens the Comment editing screen. If a comment has not been created, a "Not Found" error is generated. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Comment, Edit. CommentsDisplaySetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CmntDispSetup Syntax: CommentsDisplaySetup(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether comments are displayed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not display comments Yes! 1 Display comments ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: CommentConvert CommentCreate CommentEdit ──── ──── For Example... To display comments, the command is: CommentsDisplaySetup(Yes!) Tell Me More... CommentsDisplaySetup specifies whether comments are displayed in documents. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Window, Display Comments. ComposeDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ComposeDlg Syntax: ComposeDlg Parameters: None See Also: WPCharDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ComposeDlg displays the Compose dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+A. CompressedPrintForList Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CompPrintForList Syntax: CompressedPrintForList(State) Parameters: State Specified whether the list of files printed from File Manager prints in a compressed font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Compressed font Yes! 1 Normal font ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DirectoryDefault ──── ──── For Example... To print the File Manager files list in a compressed font, the command is: CompressedPrintForList(Yes!) Tell Me More... CompressedPrintForList specifies whether to print the files listed in File Manager in a compressed font. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, enter a directory, Setup, Compressed Print for List. ConditionalEndOfPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CondEndOfPg Syntax: ConditionalEndOfPage(Number Of Lines) Parameters: Number of Lines A numeric expression specifying the number of lines to keep together. ──── ──── For Example... To keep ten lines of text together, the command is: ConditionalEndOfPage(10) Tell Me More... ConditionalEndOfPage protects the specified number of lines from being separated by a page break. If a page break will fall between the lines, the lines will all be moved to the next page. This command is the equivalent choosing Layout, Other, Conditional End of Page, and specifying the Number of Lines to Keep Together. ConvertCaseDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CvtCaseDlg Syntax: ConvertCaseDlg Parameters: None See Also: ConvertCaseInitialCaps ConvertCaseLowercase ConvertCaseUppercase ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ConvertCaseDlg displays the Convert Case dialog box. This dialog box will only be displayed if text is currently blocked. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of pressing Shift+F3. ConvertCaseInitialCaps Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CvtCaseInitialCaps Syntax: ConvertCaseInitialCaps Parameters: None See Also: ConvertCaseDlg ConvertCaseLowercase ConvertCaseUppercase ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ConvertCaseInitialCaps converts the currently blocked text to initial caps. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Convert Case, Initial Caps. ConvertCaseLowercase Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CvtCaseLcase Syntax: ConvertCaseLowercase Parameters: None See Also: ConvertCaseDlg ConvertCaseInitialCaps ConvertCaseUppercase ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ConvertCaseLowercase converts the currently blocked text to lowercase letters. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Convert Case, Lowercase. ConvertCaseUppercase Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CvtCaseUcase Syntax: ConvertCaseUppercase Parameters: None See Also: ConvertCaseDlg ConvertCaseInitialCaps ConvertCaseLowercase ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ConvertCaseUppercase converts the currently blocked text to uppercase letters. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Convert Case, Uppercase. ConvertCodePage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CvtCodePg Syntax: ConvertCodePage(Code Page) Parameters: Code Page A numeric expression specifying a code page. ──── ──── For Example... To convert to a Code Page of Hebrew, the command is: ConvertCodePage(862) Tell Me More... ConvertCodePage specifies a Code Page for the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Save, Code Page, highlighting a language set, Select. Copy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Copy Syntax: Copy Parameters: None See Also: Cut Paste ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Copy duplicates blocked text and is used with Paste to retrieve the duplicated text. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Copy. CopyAndPaste Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CopyAndPaste Syntax: CopyAndPaste Parameters: None See Also: CutAndPaste MoveDlg MoveModeEnd MoveModeCancel ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CopyAndPaste duplicates blocked text and is used with MoveModeEnd to copy the text. With text blocked, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Copy and Paste. CounterBoxNumberingDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountBoxNumDlg Syntax: CounterBoxNumberingDlg Parameters: None See Also: CounterDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... CounterBoxNumberingDlg displays the Counters dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering. CounterCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountCre Syntax: CounterCreate(Type;{Number}) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Number Specifies a numbering method. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Arabic numbers LowLetter! 1 Lowercase letters UpLetter! 2 Uppercase letters LowRoman! 3 Lowercase roman numerals UpRoman! 4 Uppercase roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To define a user box counter as lowercase letters, the command is: CounterCreate(UserBoxCounter!;{LowLetter!}) Tell Me More... CounterCreate specifies a graphics box reference number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, Create, entering a name, Numbering Method. CounterDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountDec Syntax: CounterDecrement(Type;Level) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box decrement TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box decrement TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box decrement UserBoxCounter! 4 User box decrement EquationCounter! 5 Equation box decrement ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Level A numeric expression specifying a level to decrement. See Also: CounterIncrement ──── ──── For Example... To decrement a figure box number at level one, the command is: CounterDecrement(FigureCounter!;1) Tell Me More... CounterDecrement decreases a counter by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, highlighting a graphics box type, Decrement. CounterDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountDel Syntax: CounterDelete(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter to delete. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To delete a user-created counter named My Counter, the command is: CounterDelete("My Counter") Tell Me More... CounterDelete specifies a counter value to delete. This command accepts either a character expression if the counter is a user- defined counter or an enumerated type. If an enumerated type is specified, the counter will be reset, not deleted. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box type, Delete. CounterDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountDisp Syntax: CounterDisplay(Type;Level) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. This parameter can either be a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Level A numeric expression specifying a level of the graphics box counter to display. ──── ──── For Example... To display a number from a user-created counter named My Counter, the command is: CounterDisplay("My Counter";1) Tell Me More... CounterDisplay displays the counter value of a graphics box or user-defined counter. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, Display in Document. If the counter is a personal counter, the equivalent keystrokes are Layout, Character, Counters, highlighting counter, Display in Document. CounterDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountDlg Syntax: CounterDlg Parameters: None See Also: CounterBoxNumberingDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... CounterDlg displays the Counter dialog box, but does not display the system counters. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Counters. CounterEditLevel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountEdLvl Syntax: CounterEditLevel(Type;Level) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value type. This can be either a character expression specifying a user- defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Level A numeric expression specifying a counter level to display. ──── ──── For Example... To specify two levels in a figure box, the command is: CounterEditLevel(FigureCounter!;2) Tell Me More... CounterEditLevel specifies the number of levels a graphics box contains. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box type, Edit, Levels, and specifying a number of levels. CounterEditLevelMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountEdLvlMeth Syntax: CounterEditLevelMethod(Type;Method) Parameters: Type Specifies a graphics box type. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Method Specifies a display type for the counter. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Arabic numbers LowLetter! 1 Lowercase letters UpLetter! 2 Uppercase letters LowRoman! 3 Lowercase roman numerals UpRoman! 4 Uppercase roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: CounterEditMethod ──── ──── For Example... To specify figure box levels as uppercase letters, the command is: CounterEditLevelMethod(FigureCounter!;UpLetter!) Tell Me More... CounterEditLevelMethod changes the graphics box numbering method for a graphics box level. This command is only available after specifying more than one level in the Edit Counter Definition dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box level, Edit, Numbering Method, and selecting a numbering method. CounterEditLevelName Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountEdLvlNm Syntax: CounterEditLevelName(Type;OldName;NewName) Parameters: Type Specifies a type of counter. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OldName A character expression specifying the name of a graphics box counter type. NewName A character expression specifying the new name of a graphics box counter type. See Also: CounterEditName ──── ──── For Example... To change the name of a user-created graphics box counter level from Level 1 to First Level for a graphics type named My Box, the command is: CounterEditLevelName("My Box";"Level 1";"First Level") Tell Me More... CounterEditLevelName renames a graphics level type. This command is only available after choosing Create in the Counters dialog box, naming a new graphics box counter type, and selecting more than one level. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box level, Edit, Name, and entering a new name. CounterEditMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountEdMeth Syntax: CounterEditMethod(Type;Method) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Method Specifies a display type for a counter. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Arabic numbers LowLetter! 1 Lowercase letters UpLetter! 2 Uppercase letters LowRoman! 3 Lowercase roman numerals UpRoman! 4 Uppercase roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: CounterEditLevelMethod ──── ──── For Example... To specify a figure box numbering method as uppercase letters, the command is: CounterEditMethod(FigureCounter!;UpLetter!) Tell Me More... CounterEditMethod changes the graphics box numbering method which can be used for a specified graphics box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box type, Edit, Numbering Method. CounterEditName Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountEdNm Syntax: CounterEditName(OldName;NewName) Parameters: OldName A character expression specifying the name of a counter value. NewName A character expression specifying the new name of a counter value. See Also: CounterEditLevelName ──── ──── For Example... To change the name of a user-created graphics box counter type from My Box to Shaded Box, the command is: CounterEditLevelName("My Box";"Shaded Box") Tell Me More... CounterEditName renames a user-created graphics type. This command is only available after choosing Create in the Counters dialog box and naming a new counter value. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box type, Edit, Name, and entering a new name. CounterIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountInc Syntax: CounterIncrement(Type;Level) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box increment TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box increment TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box increment UserBoxCounter! 4 User box increment EquationCounter! 5 Equation box increment ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Level A numeric expression specifying a counter level to increment. See Also: CounterDecrement ──── ──── For Example... To increment a first level of a table box, the command is: CounterIncrement(TableBoxCounter!;1) Tell Me More... CounterIncrement increments a specified counter by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box type, Increment. CounterSetMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountSetMeth Syntax: CounterSetMethod(Type;Level;Method) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Level A numeric expression specifying a counter level to increment. Method Specifies a display type for a counter. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Arabic numbers LowLetter! 1 Lowercase letters UpLetter! 2 Uppercase letters LowRoman! 3 Lowercase roman numerals UpRoman! 4 Uppercase roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify the second level of a text box as lowercase roman numerals, the command is: CounterSetMethod(TextBoxCounter!;2;LowRoman!) Tell Me More... CounterSetMethod specifies a numbering method for a counter. This command is the equivalent choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Numbering, selecting a graphics box type and level, Set Method, and selecting a method. CounterSetValue Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CountSetVal Syntax: CounterSetValue(Type;{Value}) Parameters: Type Specifies a counter value. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Value A numeric expression specifying the value of the highlighted counter or counter level. ──── ──── For Example... To set the figure box counter level at 5, the command is: CounterSetValue(FigureCounter!;{5}) Tell Me More... CounterSetValue sets the value of a counter. This commands is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Boxes, Create, Options, Caption Options, Counter, highlighting a counter, Set Value, and entering a value. CreateSummaryOnSaveExit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CreSumOnSaveExit Syntax: CreateSummaryOnSaveExit(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to create a document summary when saving a document. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not create a summary Yes! 1 Create a summary ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To automatically create a document summary when saving a document, the command is: CreateSummaryOnSaveExit(Yes!) Tell Me More... CreateSummaryOnSaveExit specifies whether to create a document summary when saving a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Summary, Setup, Create Summary on Exit/Save. CrossRefBothReference Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefBothRef Syntax: CrossRefBothReference(Target;Reference;Type) Parameters: Target A character expression specifying a target name. Reference Specifies a cross-reference location. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RefPage! 0 Page RefSecondaryPage! 1 Secondary page RefChapter! 2 Chapter RefVolume! 3 Volume RefParagraph! 4 Paragraph RefFootnote! 5 Footnote RefEndnote! 6 Endnote RefBox! 7 Graphics box RefCounter! 8 Counter ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Type Specifies a type counter. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To mark a page reference with a target named Next, the command is: CrossRefBothReference("Next";RefPage!) CrossRefEnterSubstructure PosPageNext SubstructureExit CrossRefBothTarget Tell Me More... CrossRefBothReference marks both a target and a reference. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross-Reference, Both, specifying a reference and entering a target name. CrossRefEnterSubstructure Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefEnterSub Syntax: CrossRefEnterSubstructure Parameters: None See Also: SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CrossRefEnterSubstructure enters the Mark Cross-Reference and Target dialog box. This command does not display the dialog box, but rather allows the macro to position the cursor in the appropriate location. This command must be used in conjunction with the SubstructureExit command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross-Reference, Both, specifying a reference type, entering a target name, OK. CrossRefMarkBothDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefMarkBothDlg Syntax: CrossRefMarkBothDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... CrossRefMarkBothDlg displays the Mark Cross-Reference and Target dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross-Reference, Both. CrossRefMarkReference Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefMarkRef Syntax: CrossRefMarkReference("Name";Type;"Counter") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a reference name. Type Specifies what to tie the reference to. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RefPage! 0 Page RefSecondaryPage! 1 Secondary page RefChapter! 2 Chapter RefVolume! 3 Volume RefParagraph! 4 Paragraph RefFootnote! 5 Footnote RefEndnote! 6 Endnote RefBox! 7 Graphics box RefCounter! 8 Counter ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Counter Specifies a counter value. This can be either a character expression specifying a user-defined counter or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None FigureCounter! 1 Figure box TableBoxCounter! 2 Table box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text box UserBoxCounter! 4 User box EquationCounter! 5 Equation box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To mark a cross-reference named "Next" and tie it to a secondary page, the command is: CrossRefMarkReference("Next";RefSecondaryPage!) Tell Me More... CrossRefMarkReference specifies a reference mark. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross-Reference, Reference, specifying a reference type, and entering a target name. CrossRefMarkReferenceDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefMarkRefDlg Syntax: CrossRefMarkReferenceDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... CrossRefMarkReferenceDlg displays the Mark Cross-Reference dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross- Reference, Reference. CrossRefMarkTarget Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefMarkTarg Syntax: CrossRefMarkTarget(Name) Parameters: Name (Optional) A character expression specifying the name of a cross-reference target. ──── ──── For Example... To define a target named Index, the command is: CrossRefMarkTarget("Index") Tell Me More... CrossRefMarkTarget names a cross-reference target. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross-Reference, Target, and entering a target name. CrossRefMarkTargetDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CrossRefMarkTargDlg Syntax: CrossRefMarkTargetDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... CrossRefMarkTargetDlg displays the Mark Cross-Reference Target dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Cross-Reference, Target. CtrlDelKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CtrlDelKey Syntax: CtrlDelKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CtrlDelKey executes Ctrl+Del and will perform whatever the Ctrl+Del key combination does in the current state of WordPerfect. This does not include situations where the key combination has been remapped in Keyboard Layout. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Del. CtrlInsKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CtrlInsKey Syntax: CtrlInsKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CtrlInsKey is used by the macro to perform the function associated with Ctrl+Ins in the current state of WordPerfect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Ins in any WordPerfect mode. CursorSpeed Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CursSpd Syntax: CursorSpeed(Speed) Parameters: Speed Specifies how fast the cursor moves across the screen when you are using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 Normal speed Cps15! 1 15 characters per second Cps20! 2 20 characters per second Cps30! 3 30 characters per second Cps40! 4 40 characters per second Cps50! 5 50 characters per second ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To set the cursor speed at 30 characters per second, the command is: CursorSpeed(Cps30!) Tell Me More... CursorSpeed specifies how fast the cursor moves across the screen. The speed is measured in characters per second. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Cursor Speed, then selecting a speed. Cut Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Cut Syntax: Cut Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Cut moves blocked text to the undelete buffer. If no text is blocked, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Cut. CutAndPaste Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: CutAndPaste Syntax: CutAndPaste Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... CutAndPaste cuts and pastes blocked text. When this command is encountered, the macro pauses, allows you to move the cursor, then pastes the blocked text when you press Enter. If no text is blocked, this command terminates the macro or redirect execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Cut and Paste. DateCode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DateCode Syntax: DateCode Parameters: None See Also: DateDlg DateText ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DateCode inserts a code that displays the current date at the cursor position. The date code updates to the current system date whenever the document is retrieved or reformatted. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Date, Code. DateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DateDlg Syntax: DateDlg Parameters: None See Also: DateCode DateText DateDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DateDlg displays the Date dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Shift+F5. DateFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DateFmt Syntax: DateFormat(String) Parameters: String Specifies an order of day, month and year codes, and time codes. See Also: DateFormatDlg ──── ──── For Example... To change a date format to read 31.July 1993, the command is: DateFormat("[Day]") Tell Me More... DateFormat specifies a date format through DateCode or DateText. This command must be recorded. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Date, Format. DateFormatDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DateFmtDlg Syntax: DateFormatDlg Parameters: None See Also: DateFormat ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DateFormatDlg displays the Date Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Date, Format. DateText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DateTxt Syntax: DateText Parameters: None See Also: DateDlg DateCode ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DateText inserts the system date at a current cursor position. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Date, Text. DecimalAlignmentCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DecAlignChar Syntax: DecimalAlignmentCharacter(Character) Parameters: Character Specifies a decimal separator character. ──── ──── For Example... To change the decimal character from a period to a comma, the command is: DecimalAlignmentCharacter(",") Tell Me More... DecimalAlignmentCharacter specifies a decimal character. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Decimal/Align Character, and entering a character. DelayCodes Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelayCodes Syntax: DelayCodes(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many pages to delay a code. See Also: DelayCodesDlg ──── ──── For Example... To delay a specified code for three pages, the command is: DelayCodes(3) Tell Me More... DelayCodes specifies how many pages to delay specified codes. After using DelayCodes, every command that follows in the macro that references a code will be delayed until a SubstructureExit command is encountered. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Delay Codes. DelayCodesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelayCodesDlg Syntax: DelayCodesDlg Parameters: None See Also: DelayCodes ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DelayCodesDlg displays the Delay Codes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Delay Codes. DeleteAppend Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelApp Syntax: DeleteAppend("Filename") Parameters: Filename (Optional) A character expression specifying the filename to append the current document or block to. See Also: DeleteAppendFilenameDlg ──── ──── For Example... To append the current block of text to a file named Horizon, the command is: DeleteAppend("Horizon") Tell Me More... DeleteAppend appends the current document or block of text to the specified filename. After appending the information, the current file or block will be deleted. This command does not have a keystroke equivalent. DeleteAppendFilenameDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelAppFilenameDlg Syntax: DeleteAppendFilenameDlg Parameters: None See Also: DeleteAppend ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DeleteAppendFilenameDlg displays the Append to Filename dialog box. This is different than choosing Edit, Append, To File. This command deletes the current document or blocked text after appending to the specified filename. DeleteCharNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelCharNext Syntax: DeleteCharNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteCharNext in Text Mode deletes the character under the cursor. In Graphics Mode, this command deletes the character to the right of the cursor. This command is the equivalent of pressing delete. DeleteCharPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelCharPrev Syntax: DeleteCharPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteCharPrevious deletes the character to the left of the cursor. This command is the equivalent of pressing backspace. DeleteToBeginningOfWord Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelToBegOfWrd Syntax: DeleteToBeginningOfWord Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteToBeginningOfWord deletes all characters to the left of the cursor in the current word. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home+Backspace. DeleteToEndOfLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelToEndOfLn Syntax: DeleteToEndOfLine Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteToEndOfLine deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the current line. This command does not delete HardReturns nor HardPageBreaks. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+End. DeleteToEndOfPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelToEndOfPg Syntax: DeleteToEndOfPage Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteToEndOfPage deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the current page. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Page Down, Yes. DeleteToEndOfPageDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelToEndOfPgDlg Syntax: DeleteToEndOfPageDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DeleteToEndOfPageDlg displays the Delete Remainder of Page dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Page Down. DeleteToEndOfWord Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelToEndOfWrd Syntax: DeleteToEndOfWord Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteToEndOfWord deletes all characters from the cursor to the beginning of the next word. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home+Delete. DeleteWord Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DelWrd Syntax: DeleteWord Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DeleteWord deletes the current word or space. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Backspace. DirectoryCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DirCre Syntax: DirectoryCreate(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a name of the directory to create. ──── ──── For Example... To create a directory named PERSONAL on the C: drive, the command is: DirectoryCreate("C:\PERSONAL") Tell Me More... DirectoryCreate creates a directory at DOS. ──── ──── DirectoryDefault Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DirDef Syntax: DirectoryDefault(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a default directory. ──── ──── For Example... To rename a default directory to C:\WP60\MACROS, the command is: DirectoryDefault("C:\WP60\MACROS") Tell Me More... DirectoryDefault temporarily changes a default directory. After exiting WordPerfect, the default returns to the directory specified in Documents in Location of Files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, and pressing the equal sign (=). DirectoryRemove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DirRem Syntax: DirectoryRemove(Name) Parameters: Name Specifies an empty DOS directory to remove. ──── ──── For Example... To remove an empty directory named C:\TEMP, the command is: DirectoryRemove("C:\TEMP") Tell Me More... DirectoryRemove removes an empty directory at DOS. DisplayListMode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DisplayListMode Syntax: DisplayListMode(State) Parameters: State Specifies a display mode for File Manager. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DOSFilenames! 1 Display DOS filenames DescriptiveNames! 2 Display descriptive names ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display descriptive names, the command is: DisplayListMode(DescriptiveNames!) Tell Me More... DisplayListMode specifies a display mode for File Manager files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, OK, Setup, Display List Mode, Descriptive Names and Types. DisplayMode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispMode Syntax: DisplayMode(State) Parameters: State Specifies a document display mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Text! 1 Text mode Graphics! 2 Graphical mode FullPage! 3 Graphical mode with headers, footer, page numbers and margins ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify a full page display, the command is: DisplayMode(FullPage!) Tell Me More... DisplayMode specifies a display mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Text Mode, Graphics Mode or Page Mode. DisplayOnStatusLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispOnStatLn Syntax: DisplayOnStatusLine(Choice) Parameters: Choice Specifies display elements for the status line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Nothing! 0 Nothing in the bottom left corner of the window Filename! 1 Filename Font! 2 Font ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display the filename of a document on the status line, the command is: DisplayOnStatusLine(Filename!) Tell Me More... DisplayOnStatusLine specifies elements to display on the left side of the status line. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Window Options, Status Line. DisplayPitch Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispPitch Syntax: DisplayPitch(State;Width) Parameters: State Specifies either an automatic or manual display pitch. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Automatic! 0 Predetermined Manual! 1 User-defined ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Width A numeric expression specifying the constant width of each character displayed on the screen. Width ranges from 0.025" to 0.5". ──── ──── For Example... To specify a manual display pitch of 0.2", the command is: DisplayPitch(Manual!;0.2) Tell Me More... DisplayPitch specifies character width on the screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Display Pitch. DisplayRewrite Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispRewrite Syntax: DisplayRewrite Parameters: None See Also: RewriteKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DisplayRewrite rewrites the document screen. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F3, Rewrite. DisplaySetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispSetupDlg Syntax: DisplaySetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DisplaySetupDlg displays the Display dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display. DisplayUnits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispUnits Syntax: DisplayUnits(State) Parameters: State Specifies a measurement mode to display numeric entries. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Inches! 0 Inches (") InchesI! 1 Inches (i) Centimeters! 2 Centimeters Millimeters! 3 Millimeters Points! 4 Points WP1200ths! 5 1200ths of an inch WP42Units! 6 80 columns by 24 rows ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StatusLineUnits ──── ──── For Example... To specify millimeters as the unit of measure for numeric entries, the command is: DisplayUnits(Millimeters!) Tell Me More... DisplayUnits specifies numeric entries such as tabs and margins to reflect the specified unit of measure. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Units of Measure, Display/Entry of Numbers. DisplayZoom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispZoom Syntax: DisplayZoom(State) Parameters: State Specifies a zoom mode to display. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ZoomMarginWidth! 0 Screen extends to match the left and right margins ZoomPageWidth! 1 Screen displays the actual margins ZoomFullPage! 2 Full page screen ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DisplayZoomSetup ──── ──── For Example... To zoom a graphic mode document screen to the current page width, the command is: DisplayZoom(ZoomPageWidth!) Tell Me More... DisplayZoom specifies the graphic display of a current document screen. This command is only available in Graphics Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Zoom, Margin Width, Page Width or Full Page. DisplayZoomSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DispZoomSetup Syntax: DisplayZoomSetup(State) Parameters: State Specifies a default zoom state to display. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ZoomMarginWidth! 0 Left and right screen edges match margins ZoomPageWidth! 1 Screen displays the actual margins within the boundaries of the document screen ZoomFullPage! 2 Full page ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DisplayZoom ──── ──── For Example... To display an entire page, the command is: DisplayZoomSetup(ZoomPageWidth!) Tell Me More... DisplayZoomSetup specifies a default graphic display. This command is not available in Text Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Zoom, and Margin Width, Page Width or Full Page. DocCharacterMap Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCharMap Syntax: DocCharacterMap(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a character map. See Also: DocCharacterMapDefault ──── ──── For Example... To specify the WordPerfect default map, the command is: DocCharacterMap("WordPerfect Default Map") Tell Me More... DocCharacterMap specifies a character map. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Character Map. DocCharacterMapDefault Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCharMapDef Syntax: DocChararacterMapDefault(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a default character map. See Also: DocCharacterMap ──── ──── For Example... To specify the WordPerfect default map, the command is: DocCharacterMapDefault("WordPerfect Default Map") Tell Me More... DocCharacterMapDefault specifies a default character map. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Character Map, Setup. DocCharacterMapDefaultDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCharMapDefDlg Syntax: DocCharacterMapDefaultDlg Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DocCharacterMapDefaultDlg displays the Character Map Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Character Map, then pressing Shift+F1. DocCharacterMapDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCharMapDlg Syntax: DocCharacterMapDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DocCharacterMapDlg displays the Character Map dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Character Map. DocCompare Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocComp Syntax: DocCompare(Filename;Type) Parameters: Filename Specifies the name of an original document to which a current document is compared. Type Specifies the scope of comparison between the specified document and the document on-screen. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Phrase! 0 Phrase changes Word! 1 Word changes Sentence! 2 Sentence changes Paragraph! 3 Paragraph changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DocCompareDlg ──── ──── For Example... To compare a current document with a document named ORIGINAL sentence for sentence, the command is: DocCompare("ORIGINAL";Sentence!) Tell Me More... DocCompare compares the current document with a specified document using redline and strikeout to mark changes. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Compare Documents, Add Markings, entering a filename and specifying a comparison type. DocCompareDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCompDlg Syntax: DocCompareDlg Parameters: None See Also: DocCompare ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DocCompareDlg displays the Compare Documents dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Compare Documents, Add Markings. DocCompareRemoveRedline Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCompRemRedln Syntax: DocCompareRemoveRedline(Choice) Parameters: Choice Specifies whether to remove text contained within strikeout and redline codes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoveAll! 0 Remove the strikeout codes and text and redline codes; retain redline text LeaveRedline! 1 Retain redline codes and text ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DocCompareRemoveRedlineDlg ──── ──── For Example... To remove redline and strikeout codes and strikeout text, the command is: DocCompareRemoveRedline(RemoveAll!) Tell Me More... DocCompareRemoveRedline either removes strikeout and redline codes as well as strikeout text; or removes strikeout codes and text, retaining redline codes. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Compare Documents, Remove Markings, specifying the codes to remove. DocCompareRemoveRedlineDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocCompRemRedlnDlg Syntax: DocCompareRemoveRedlineDlg Parameters: None See Also: DocCompareRemoveRedline ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DocCompareRemoveRedlineDlg displays the Remove Markings dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Compare Documents, Remove Markings. DocInformation Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocInfo Syntax: DocInformation Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DocInformation displays document information for the current document or block of text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Document Information. DocInitialFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocInitFnt Syntax: DocInitialFont(Name;Size;Family;Attributes;Weight; Width;Source;Type) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a font name. Size (Optional) A numeric expression specifying a font point size. Family (Optional) Specifies a font family. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ FamilyITCBenguiat! 256 ITCBenguiat FamilyTimesRoman! 2304 TimesRoman FamilyITCGaramond! 4352 ITCGaramond FamilyCenturySchoolbook! 6400 CenturySchoolbook FamilyBodoni! 8448 Bodoni FamilyITCLubalinGraph! 10496 ITCLubalinGraph FamilyAlbertus! 12544 Albertus FamilyCourier! 14592 Courier FamilyHelvetica! 16640 Helvetica FamilyITCRonda! 18688 ITCRonda FamilyMicrostyle! 20736 Microstyle FamilyOptima! 22784 Optima FamilyLetterGothic! 24832 LetterGothic FamilyBrush! 26880 Brush FamilyParkAvenue! 28928 ParkAvenue FamilySignetRoundhand! 30976 SignetRoundhand FamilyTekton! 33024 Tekton FamilyUncial! 35072 Uncial FamilyOldEnglish! 37120 OldEnglish FamilyITCZapfDingbats! 39168 ITCZapfDingbats FamilyBroadway! 41216 Broadway FamilyComputer! 43264 Computer FamilyPTBarnum! 45312 PTBarnum FamilyPonderosa! 47360 Ponderosa FamilyMadrone! 49408 Madrone FamilyHobo! 51456 Hobo FamilyRevue! 53504 Revue FamilyAestheticOrnamented! 55552 AestheticOrnamented ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Attributes (Optional) Specifies font attributes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ FontMatchNormal! 0 Normal FontMatchItalic! 1 Italic FontMatchOutline! 2 Outline FontMatchShadow! 4 Shadow FontMatchSmallCaps! 8 Small caps ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Weight (Optional) Specifies font weight. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ WeightUnknown! 0 Unknown WeightUltraThin! 1 UltraThin WeightUltraLight! 8 UltraLight WeightExtraThin! 16 ExtraThin WeightThin! 24 Thin WeightExtraLight! 32 ExtraLight WeightLight! 48 Light WeightDemiLight! 64 DemiLight WeightSemiLight! 80 SemiLight WeightBook! 88 Book WeightRegular! 96 Regular WeightRoman! 104 Roman WeightMedium! 112 Medium WeightDemiBold! 128 DemiBold WeightSemiBold! 136 SemiBold WeightBold! 144 Bold WeightExtraBold! 160 ExtraBold WeightHeavy! 176 Heavy WeightExtraHeavy! 192 ExtraHeavy WeightBlack! 208 Black WeightExtraBlack! 224 ExtraBlack WeightUltraHeavy! 240 UltraHeavy WeightUltraBlack! 248 UltraBlack WeightMaximum! 254 Maximum ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Width (Optional) Specifies font width. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ WidthUnknown! 0 Unknown WidthUltraCondensed! 16 Ultra condensed WidthExtraCompressed! 32 Extra compressed WidthCompressed! 48 Compressed WidthExtraCondensed! 64 Extra condensed WidthCondensed! 80 Condensed WidthSemiCondensed! 96 Semi condensed WidthNormal! 112 Normal WidthSemiExpanded! 128 Semi expanded WidthExpanded! 144 Expanded WidthExtraExpanded! 160 Extra expanded WidthUltraExpanded! 176 Ultra expanded WidthDoubleWide! 192 Double wide WidthTrippleWide! 224 Tripple wide ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Source (Optional) Specifies a font file. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PRSFile! 16 .PRS file DRSFile! 20 .DRS file ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Type Specifies a font type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Speedo! 134 Speedo Intellifont! 135 Intellifont Type1! 138 Type 1 TrueType! 139 True Type ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Set Specifies a WordPerfect Character set. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ FontMatchASCII! 0 Ascii FontMatchMultinatinal1! 1 Multinational 1 FontMatchMultinatinal2! 2 Multinational 2 FontMatchBoxDrawing! 3 Box drawing FontMatchTypographicSymbols! 4 Typographic Symbols FontMatchIconicSymbols! 5 Iconic Symbols FontMatchMath! 6 Math FontMatchMathExtension! 7 Math Extension FontMatchGreek! 8 Greek FontMatchHebrew! 9 Hebrew FontMatchCyrillic! 10 Cyrillic FontMatchJapaneseKana! 11 Japanese Kana FontMatchUserDefined! 12 User-defined FontMatchArabic! 13 Arabic FontMatchArabicScript! 14 Arabic Script ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To select CG Times 12pt as a document default font, the command is: DocInitialFont("CG Times";12) Tell Me More... DocInitialFont specifies a default document font. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Initial Font, selecting a font and point size. DocSummaryDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumDel Syntax: DocSummaryDelete Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DocSummaryDelete deletes the document summary of a current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Summary, Delete, Yes. DocSummaryDescriptiveTypeSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumDescTypeSetup Syntax: DocSummaryDescriptiveTypeSetup(String) Parameters: String Specifies a default descriptive type for all subsequent document summaries. ──── ──── For Example... To define "Personal Primary Files" as the default descriptive type, the command is: DocSummaryDescriptiveTypeSetup("Personal Primary Files") Tell Me More... DocSummaryDescriptiveTypeSetup defines a default descriptive type for all subsequent document summaries. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Summary, Setup, Default Descriptive Type. DocSummaryDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumDlg Syntax: DocSummaryDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DocSummaryDlg displays the Document Summary dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Summary. DocSummaryExtract Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumCapt Syntax: DocSummaryExtract Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DocSummaryExtract extracts the document summary from the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Summary, Extract, Yes. DocSummaryField Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumFld Syntax: DocSummaryField(Field;"Text") Parameters: Field Defines a document summary field. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Abstract! 1 Abstract field Account! 2 Account field Address! 3 Address field Attachments! 4 Attachments field Author! 5 Author field Authorization! 6 Authorization field BillTo! 7 Bill to field BlindCopy! 8 Blind copy field CarbonCopy! 9 Carbon copy field Category! 10 Category field CheckedBy! 11 Checked by field Client! 12 Client field Comments! 13 Comments field CreationDate! 14 Creation date field DateCompleted! 15 Date completed field Department! 16 Department field DescriptiveName! 17 Descriptive name field DescriptiveType! 18 Descriptive type field Destination! 19 Destination field Disposition! 20 Disposition field Division! 21 Division field DocumentNumber! 22 Document number field Editor! 23 Editor field ForwardTo! 24 Forward to field Group! 25 Group field Keywords! 26 Keywords field Language! 27 Language field MailStop! 28 Mail stop field Matter! 29 Matter field Office! 30 Office field Owner! 31 Owner field Project! 32 Project field Publisher! 33 Publisher field Purpose! 34 Purpose field ReceivedFrom! 35 Received from field RecordedBy! 36 Recorded by field RecordedDate! 37 Recorded date field Reference! 38 Reference field RevisionDate! 39 Revision date field RevisionNotes! 40 Revision notes field RevisionNumber! 41 Revision number field Section! 42 Section field Security! 43 Security field Source! 44 Source field Status! 45 Status field Subject! 46 Subject field TelephoneNumber! 47 Telephone number field Typist! 48 Typist field VersionDate! 49 Version date field VersionNotes! 50 Version notes field VersionNumber! 51 Version number field ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Text A character expression defining the contents of the specified document summary field. See Also: DocSummaryFieldOrder ──── ──── For Example... To specify a Typist field as JD, the command is: DocSummaryField(Typist!;"jd") Tell Me More... DocSummaryField defines a field. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Summary, adding text to fields. DocSummaryFieldOrder Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumFldOrd Syntax: DocSummaryFieldOrder(Documents;Fields) Parameters: Documents Specifies documents to contain changed field order. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDocument! 1 Current document NewDocuments! 2 Subsequent documents only Both! 3 Current and new documents ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fields Specifies fields and the order in which they are displayed in a document summary. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Abstract! 1 Abstract field Account! 2 Account field Address! 3 Address field Attachments! 4 Attachments field Author! 5 Author field Authorization! 6 Authorization field BillTo! 7 Bill to field BlindCopy! 8 Blind copy field CarbonCopy! 9 Carbon copy field Category! 10 Category field CheckedBy! 11 Checked by field Client! 12 Client field Comments! 13 Comments field CreationDate! 14 Creation date field DateCompleted! 15 Date completed field Department! 16 Department field DescriptiveName! 17 Descriptive name field DescriptiveType! 18 Descriptive type field Destination! 19 Destination field Disposition! 20 Disposition field Division! 21 Division field DocumentNumber! 22 Document number field Editor! 23 Editor field ForwardTo! 24 Forward to field Group! 25 Group field Keywords! 26 Keywords field Language! 27 Language field MailStop! 28 Mail stop field Matter! 29 Matter field Office! 30 Office field Owner! 31 Owner field Project! 32 Project field Publisher! 33 Publisher field Purpose! 34 Purpose field ReceivedFrom! 35 Received from field RecordedBy! 36 Recorded by field RecordedDate! 37 Recorded date field Reference! 38 Reference field RevisionDate! 39 Revision date field RevisionNotes! 40 Revision notes field RevisionNumber! 41 Revision number field Section! 42 Section field Security! 43 Security field Source! 44 Source field Status! 45 Status field Subject! 46 Subject field TelephoneNumber! 47 Telephone number field Typist! 48 Typist field VersionDate! 49 Version date field VersionNotes! 50 Version notes field VersionNumber! 51 Version number field ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DocSummaryField ──── ──── For Example... To change the document summary fields of the current document to the following order, the command is: DocSummaryFieldOrder(CurrentDocument!;{Account!;Abstract!;Keyword s!; Author!;Subject!;Descriptive Name!;Typist!;Creation Date!;Descriptive Type!;Revision Date!}) Tell Me More... DocSummaryFieldOrder changes the sequence of document summary fields. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Summary, Select Fields, highlighting fields, then selecting Move, Remove, or Add. DocSummaryPrint Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumPrint Syntax: DocSummaryPrint(Filename) Parameters: Filename (optional) A character expression specifying a file document summary to print. If this parameter is omitted, the document summary of the current file is printed. ──── ──── For Example... To print the document summary of a file named SUMMARY, the command is: DocSummaryPrint("C:\WP60\SUMMARY") Tell Me More... DocSummaryPrint prints a file document summary. If no file is specified, the summary of the current document is printed. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Summary, Print, Yes. DocSummarySave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumSav Syntax: DocSummarySave(Filename;Choice;Source) Parameters: Filename Specifies the name of a document containing a document summary. Choice Specifies options if a specified file already exists. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Append! 0 Appends summary to existing file Replace! 1 Replaces existing file with document summary ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Source (Optional) Specifies a file containing a document summary. If this parameter is omitted, the source file is a current document. ──── ──── For Example... To append the document summary of a current document to a file named SUMMARY, the command is: DocSummarySave("SUMMARY";Append!) Tell Me More... DocSummarySave saves a document summary as a file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Summary, Save, Yes, entering a filename, and selecting Replace or Append if the file already exists. DocSummarySetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DocSumSetupDlg Syntax: DocSummarySetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... DocSummarySetupDlg displays the Document Summary Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Summary, Setup. DOSCommand Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DOSCommand Syntax: DOSCommand(Command) Parameters: Command A character expression specifying a DOS command. ──── ──── For Example... To list all files in C:\, the command is: DOSCommand("dir c:\") Tell Me More... DOSCommand initiates a DOS command from within WordPerfect. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell, DOS Command and entering a DOS command. DotLeader Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DotLead Syntax: DotLeader(Character;Spaces) Parameters: Character Specifies a dot leader character. Spaces Specifies a number of spaces between visible dot leader characters. ──── ──── For Example... To specify a comma (,) dot leader character with 5 spaces between each character, the command is: DotLeader(",";5) Tell Me More... DotLeader specifies a dot leader character and a number of spaces between each character. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Dot Leader Character, entering a character, and entering a number for the number of spaces between consecutive characters. DoubleSidedPrint Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DblSidPrint Syntax: DoubleSidedPrint(Print) Parameters: Print Determines whether to turn on double-sided Printing, and selects a binding edge. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 None LongEdge! 1 Long Edge ShortEdge! 3 Short Edge ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn on double-sided printing and select a short edge for binding, the command is: DoubleSidedPrint(ShortEdge!) Tell Me More... DoubleSidedPrint turns on or off Double-sided Printing, and selects a binding edge. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Double-sided Printing, and selecting a binding edge (or none). DownArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: DnArr Syntax: DownArrow Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... DownArrow moves an equation down in the View Equation Window. This command is the equivalent of pressing Down Arrow () while in the View Equation Window. EndCenterOrAlignment Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EndCntrOrAlign Syntax: EndCenterOrAlignment Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndCenterOrAlignment places an End Centering/Alignment code at the cursor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, End Centering/Alignment. EndField Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EndFld Syntax: EndField Parameters: None See Also: MergeCode ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndField places an ENDFIELD merge code at the cursor. This command is the equivalent of pressing F9. EndFieldKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EndFldKey Syntax: EndFieldKey Parameters: None See Also: MergeCode ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndFieldKey places an ENDFIELD merge code at the cursor. This command is the equivalent of pressing F9. This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. EndnoteCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteCre Syntax: EndnoteCreate Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndnoteCreate displays an Endnote editing screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Create. EndnoteEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteEd Syntax: EndnoteEdit (Endnote Number) Parameters: Endnote Number (optional) A numeric expression specifying an endnote to edit. If this parameter is not specified, the next endnote is edited. See Also: EndnoteCreate ──── ──── For Example... To edit the second endnote of a document, the command is: EndnoteEdit(2) Tell Me More... EndnoteEdit displays the Endnote editing screen. If no endnote number is specified, the first endnote to the right of the cursor is edited. If no endnote is found to the right, a Not Found condition is generated. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Edit, specifying an endnote number. EndnoteEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteEdDlg Syntax: EndnoteEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EndnoteEditDlg displays the Endnote Number dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Edit. EndnoteMinimum Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteMin Syntax: EndnoteMinimum(Measurement) Parameters: Measurement A measurement expression specifying the amount of endnote text to keep together. The default is .5". See Also: EndnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To keep at least .75" of endnote text together on each page, the command is: EndnoteMinimum(.75") Tell Me More... EndnoteMinimum specifies the amount of endnote text to keep together. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Options, Minimum Amount of Endnote to Keep Together, and specifying an amount. EndnoteNewNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteNewNum Syntax: EndnoteNewNumber(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a new starting endnote number. See Also: EndnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To start endnote numbering at 7, the command is: EndnoteNewNumber(7) Tell Me More... EndnoteNewNumber specifies a new starting number for endnotes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, New Number, New Number, and entering a new number. EndnoteNumberDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteNumDec Syntax: EndnoteNumberDecrement Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteNewNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndnoteNumberDecrement decreases the endnote number by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, New Number, Decrement Number. EndnoteNumberDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteNumDisp Syntax: EndnoteNumberDisplay Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteNewNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndnoteNumberDisplay copies the current endnote number into a document at the cursor position. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, New Number, Display in Document. EndnoteNumberIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteNumInc Syntax: EndnoteNumberIncrement Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteNewNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EndnoteNumberIncrement increases the endnote number by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, New Number, Increment Number. EndnoteNumberMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteNumMeth Syntax: EndnoteNumberMethod(Numbering Method;"Character") Parameters: Numbering Method Specifies an endnote numbering method. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Numbers LowerLetters! 1 Lowercase letters UpperLetters! 2 Uppercase letters LowerRoman! 3 Lowercase Roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Uppercase Roman numerals Characters! 5 Characters ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Character (optional) A character expression specifying a character(s) to use as the endnote numbering method. Used when Characters! is used in the first parameter. See Also: EndnoteNewNumber ──── ──── For Example... To specify the asterisk (*) as an endnote numbering method, the command is: EndnoteNumberMethod(Characters!;"*") Tell Me More... EndnoteNumberMethod selects an endnote numbering method. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, New Number, Numbering Method, and selecting a numbering method. EndnoteOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteOptDlg Syntax: EndnoteOptionsDlg Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteMinimum EndnotesSpaceBetween ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EndnoteOptionsDlg displays the Endnote Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Options. EndnotePlacement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnotePlace Syntax: EndnotePlacement(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to reset endnote numbering and where to start printing endnotes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not reset Yes! 1 Reset ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: EndnotePlacementDlg ──── ──── For Example... To reset endnote numbering, the command is: EndnotePlacement(Yes!) Tell Me More... EndnotePlacement marks the location where an endnote list is generated and determines whether to reset numbering for subsequent endnotes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Placement, and selecting yes or no. EndnotePlacementDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnotePlaceDlg Syntax: EndnotePlacementDlg Parameters: None See Also: EndnotePlacement GenerateDoc ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EndnotePlacementDlg displays the Restart endnote numbering dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Placement. EndnoteSetNumberDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteSetNumDlg Syntax: EndnoteSetNumberDlg Parameters: None See Also: EndnoteNumberDecrement EndnoteNumberIncrement EndnoteNewNumber EndnoteNumberDisplay EndnoteNumberMethod ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EndnoteSetNumberDlg displays the Set Endnote Number dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, New Number. EndnoteStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteStyDlg Syntax: EndnoteStyleDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EndnoteStyleDlg dislays the Endnote Style in Note dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Edit Style in Note. This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. ──── ──── EndnoteStyleInDocDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteStyInDocDlg Syntax: EndnoteStyleInDocDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EndnoteStyleInDocDlg displays the Endnote Style In Document dialog box. This command is not recordable. To use this command, it must be typed into your macro. EndnotesSpaceBetween Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnoteSpaceBet Syntax: EndnoteSpaceBetween(Spacing) Parameters: Spacing A measurement expression specifying the amount of blank space between endnotes. The default is .167". See Also: EndnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To specify .25" blank space between endnotes, the command is: EndnotesSpaceBetween(.25") Tell Me More... EndnoteSpaceBetween sets the amount of blank space between endnotes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Endnote, Options, Spacing Between Endnotes, and specifying a measurement. EnterKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnterKey Syntax: EnterKey Parameters: None See Also: HardReturn ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EnterKey performs the same functions as Enter. This command is the equivalent of pressing Enter. EnvelopeAddressEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvAddrEnd Syntax: EnvelopeAddressEnd Parameters: None See Also: EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin EnvelopeBegin EnvelopeEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EnvelopeAddressEnd is the closing command of the EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin-EnvelopeAddressEnd statement, or the EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin-EnvelopeAddressEnd statement. The first command of these statements should be followed by Type commands with address information. These statements must be used between EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd commands and are the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, and entering return and mailing address information. EnvelopeAddressPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvAddrPos Syntax: EnvelopeAddressPosition(Return Address Horizontal; Return Address Vertical; Mailing Address Horizontal; Mailing Address Vertical; Envelope Name) Parameters: Return Address Horizontal A measurement expression specifying the position of a return address from the left edge of an envelope. Return Address Vertical A measurement expression specifying the position of a return address from the top edge of an envelope. Mailing Address Horizontal A measurement expression specifying the position of a mailing address from the left edge of an envelope. Mailing Address Vertical A measurement expression specifying the position of a mailing address from the top edge of an envelope. Envelope Name A character expression specifying an envelope name. See Also: EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin ──── ──── For Example... To position a return address .25" from the top of an envelope and .25" from the left side, and the mailing address 3" from the top of an envelope and 2.5" from the left side, and to specify a standard 9.5" x 4.13" envelope, the command is: EnvelopeAddressPosition(.25";.25";3";2.5";"Envelope (COM 10)") Tell Me More... EnvelopeAddressPosition sets the position of both a return address and a mailing address. This command is used between EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, Setup, Envelope Size, Highlighting an Envelope, Address Positions, and specifying positions. EnvelopeBarcode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvBarcode Syntax: EnvelopeBarcode("Digits";Merge Field) Parameters: Digits A character expression specifying digits of a custom bar code. A barcode of 5, 9, or 11 digits is allowed. Merge Field (optional) Determines whether the name or number of a merge field is allowed as a barcode. If so, 1, 2, or 3 digits or characters are allowed. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ MergeFieldAllowed! 1 Merge field allowed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: EnvelopeBarcodeSetup ──── ──── For Example... To create a bar code for the ZIP code 12345, the command is: EnvelopeBarcode("12345") Tell Me More... EnvelopeBarcode creates a US Postal bar code. This command is used between EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, POSTNET Bar Code, and entering 5, 9, or 11 digits, or choosing Merge, Data File options, Generate an Envelope, and specifying a ZIP code or field name/number. EnvelopeBarcodeSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvBarcodeSetup Syntax: EnvelopeBarcodeSetup(Setup) Parameters: Setup Determines whether to create a bar code. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CreateBarcode! 0 Create barcode DoNotCreateBarcode! 1 Do not create barcode RemoveBarcodeOption! 2 Remove barcode option ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: EnvelopeBarcode ──── ──── For Example... To remove the POSTNET Barcode Field from an envelope setup, the command is: EnvelopeBarcodeSetup(RemoveBarcodeOption!) Tell Me More... EnvelopeBarcodeSetup determines whether to create a bar code automatically, manually, or remove the option. This command is used in conjunction with other commands, such as EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, Setup, Bar Code Creation, and selecting an option. EnvelopeBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvBeg Syntax: EnvelopeBegin Parameters: None See Also: EnvelopeEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EnvelopeBegin is the opening command of the EnvelopeBegin- EnvelopeEnd statement. EnvelopeBegin should be followed by envelope format commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, and selecting options. Use EnvelopeEnd to close the statement. EnvelopeDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvDlg Syntax: EnvelopeDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EnvelopeDlg displays the envelope dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope. EnvelopeEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvEnd Syntax: EnvelopeEnd(Type; Close) Parameters: Type Determines whether to cancel an envelope command, send it to the current printer, or display it as part of a document. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ EnvelopeCancel! 0 Cancel EnvelopeClose! 1 Close EnvelopeInsert! 2 Insert EnvelopePrint! 3 Print ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Close (Optional) Closes the Envelope dialog box, discarding the envelope but saving the return address as default if that option has been specified in the dialog box. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ EnvelopeClose! 1 Close dialog box ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To print an envelope, the command is: EnvelopeEnd(EnvelopePrint!) Tell Me More... EnvelopeEnd is the closing command of the EnvelopeBegin- EnvelopeEnd statement. After choosing Layout, Envelope, and selecting the envelope command options, EnvelopeEnd is the equivalent of selecting Print, Insert, Close, or Cancel. EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvMailAddrBeg Syntax: EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin Parameters: None See Also: EnvelopeAddressEnd EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin is the opening command of the EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin-EnvelopeAddressEnd statement. This statement is used between EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd commands. EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin should be followed by Type commands with address information. This statement is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, and entering mailing address information. EnvelopeOmitReturnAddress Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvOmitRetAddr Syntax: EnvelopeOmitReturnAddress(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to omit a return address. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not omit Yes! 1 Omit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To omit a return address, the command is: EnvelopeOmitReturnAddress(On!) Tell Me More... EnvelopeOmitReturnAddress determines whether to omit a return address. This command is used between EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd commands. EnvelopeOmitReturnAddress is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, Omit Return Address. EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvRetAddrBeg Syntax: EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin Parameters: None See Also: EnvelopeAddressEnd EnvelopeMailingAddressBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin is the opening command of the EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin-EnvelopeAddressEnd statement. This command is used between EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd commands. EnvelopeReturnAddressBegin should be followed by Type commands with address information. This statement is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, and entering return and mailing address information. EnvelopeSaveAddressAsDefault Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvSaveAddrAsDef Syntax: EnvelopeSaveAddressAsDefault(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to save the current return address as the default return address. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not save Yes! 1 Save ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To make a return address the default, the command is: EnvelopeSaveAddressAsDefault(Yes!) Tell Me More... EnvelopeSaveAddressAsDefault determines whether to save a return address as the default. This command is used in conjunction with the commands EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, Save Return Address as Default. EnvelopeSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvSize Syntax: EnvelopeSize(Envelope Name) Parameters: Envelope Name A character expression selects an envelope name. See Also: EnvelopeAddressPosition EnvelopeSizeSetup ──── ──── For Example... To select a standard 9.5" x 4.13" envelope, the command is: EnvelopeSize("Envelope (COM 10)") Tell Me More... EnvelopeSize selects an envelope name. This command is used in conjunction with the commands EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, Envelope Size, and selecting an envelope. EnvelopeSizeSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvSizeSetup Syntax: EnvelopeSizeSetup("Envelope Name") Parameters: Envelope Name A character expression specifying the default envelope. See Also: EnvelopeAddressPosition EnvelopeSize ──── ──── For Example... To specify a standard 9.5" x 4.13" envelope as the default in the Envelope dialog box, the command is: EnvelopeSizeSetup("Envelope (COM 10)") Tell Me More... EnvelopeSizeSetup changes the default envelope name displayed in the Envelope dialog box. This command is used in conjunction with the commands EnvelopeBegin and EnvelopeEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Envelope, Setup, Envelope Size, and selecting an envelope. EnvironmentSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: EnvironSetupDlg Syntax: EnvironmentSetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... EnvironmentSetupDlg displays the Environment dialog This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment. ExitDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ExitDlg Syntax: ExitDlg Parameters: None See Also: ExitWordPerfect ExitWordPerfectDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ExitDlg displays a prompt to save your work before exiting a WordPerfect document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Exit. ExitWordPerfect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ExitWP Syntax: ExitWordPerfect Parameters: None See Also: ExitDlg ExitWordPerfectDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ExitWordPerfect exits WordPerfect documents and program without prompting you to save your work. Use this command with caution! Before using this command, you may want to set the macro to check for the existence of any modified documents. ExitWordPerfectDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ExitWPDlg Syntax: ExitWordPerfectDlg Parameters: None See Also: ExitDlg ExitWordPerfect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ExitWordPerfectDlg prompts you to specify files to save before exiting WordPerfect. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Exit WP. ExtendedBackwardSearchDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ExtBackSrchDlg Syntax: ExtendedBackwardSearchDlg Parameters: None See Also: ExtendedSearchDlg ExtendedReplaceDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ExtendedBackwardSearchDlg displays the Search dialog box, including any previously specified search string. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, entering a search string, Backward Search, Extended Search (Hdrs, Ftrs, etc.), or pressing Home+F2. ExtendedReplaceDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ExtReplDlg Syntax: ExtendedReplaceDlg Parameters: None See Also: ExtendedBackwardSearchDlg ExtendedSearchDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ExtendedReplaceDlg displays the Search and Replace dialog box and any previously specified search string. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, entering search and replace strings, Extended Search (Hdrs, Ftrs, etc.), or pressing Home+F2. ExtendedSearchDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ExtSrchDlg Syntax: ExtendedSearchDlg Parameters: None See Also: ExtendedBackwardSearchDlg ExtendedReplaceDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ExtendedSearchDlg displays the Search dialog box and any previously specified search string. With the Extended Search option selected, this command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, entering a search string, Extended Search (Hdrs, Ftrs, etc.), or pressing Home+F2. FastSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FastSav Syntax: FastSave(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a document is formatted for printing when it is saved. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not formatted Yes! 1 Formatted ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To format a document for printing when it is saved, the command is: FastSave(No!) Tell Me More... FastSave determines whether a document is formatted for printing when it is saved. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save, Setup, Fast Save (unformatted). Fax Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Fax Syntax: Fax Parameters: None See Also: FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Fax displays the Fax Services dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Fax Services. FaxBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxBeg Syntax: FaxBegin Parameters: None See Also: Fax FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... To send a fax, the command sequence is: FaxBegin FaxStatusBegin FaxRasterize(;"LATEST.FAX";FXStandard!) FaxScheduleBegin FaxFile("LATEST.FAX";FaxOnly!;Yes!;FXStandard!) FaxDestination("5556407";;"Jennifer Wong") FaxParameters("03-05-93";"09:23a";;"DEFAULT";"";"Kurt Krieger") FaxScheduleEnd FaxStatusEnd FaxEnd Tell Me More... FaxBegin designates the beginning of the fax sending process. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxDestination Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxDest Syntax: FaxDestination(Fax Number;Voice Number;Recipient; Route;Billing) Parameters: Fax Number A character expression specifying the recipient's fax number. Voice Number A character expression specifying the recipient's voice number. Recipient A character expression specifying the recipient's name. Route A character expression specifying the fax route. Use of this parameter is determined by the fax service you are using. Billing A character expression specifying fax billing information. Use of this parameter is determined by the fax service you are using. See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxDestination specifies key information about the fax recipient. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxEnd Syntax: FaxEnd Parameters: None See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxEnd designates the end of the fax sending process. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxError Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxErr Syntax: FaxError("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the filename of the file to which errors are logged. See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... To specify FAXERROR.LOG as the fax error file, the command is: FaxError("FAXERROR.LOG") Tell Me More... FaxError specifies the name of the file to which fax error messages are appended. FaxFile Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxFile Syntax: FaxFile(Filename;File Mode;Delete;Resolution Mode) Parameters: Filename Specifies the filename of formatted fax file to be sent. File Mode Specifies the fax sending mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FaxOnly! 0 Send as a Fax only BFTOnly! 1 Send as a binary file only PeerFax! 2 Send as a binary file; if there is an error, send as a Fax. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Delete Designates whether to delete the file after the fax is sent. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not delete the fax after sending Yes! 1 Delete the fax after sending ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Resolution Mode Specifies the resolution mode of the fax. If FaxRasterize was used, this resolution must match the rasterize resolution. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FXStandard! 0 Standard Resolution (204 x 98 dpi) FXFine! 1 Fine Resolution (204 x 196 dpi) FX300DPI! 2 300 x 300 dpi FX400DPI! 3 400 x 400 dpi ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxFile specifies the characteristics of a fax file. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxParameters Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxParam Syntax: FaxParameters(Date;Time;Priority;Coversheet;Subjec t;From) Parameters: Date Character expression specifying the date to send the fax. Time Character expression specifying the time to send the fax. Priority Character expression specifying the priority of the fax being sent. Use of this parameter is determined by the fax service you are using. Coversheet Character expression specifying the coversheet to be used with the fax. Subject Character expression specifying the text to be used on the Subject line of the fax. From Character expression specifying the text to be used on the From line of the fax. See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxParameters specifies the coversheet and scheduling information for a fax. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxRasterize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxRast Syntax: FaxRasterize(Source;Destination;Resolution Parameters: Source Character expression specifying the filename of the source document. Destination Character expression specifying the filename of the converted fax file. Resolution Specifies the rasterize resolution. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FXStandard! 0 Standard Resolution (204 x 98 dpi) FXFine! 1 Fine Resolution (204 x 196 dpi) FX300DPI! 2 300 x 300 dpi FX400DPI! 3 400 x 400 dpi ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxRasterize converts a source document to a bitmap fax format. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxScheduleBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxSchedBeg Syntax: FaxScheduleBegin Parameters: None See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxScheduleBegin designates the beginning of the fax scheduling process. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxScheduleEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxSchedEnd Syntax: FaxScheduleEnd Parameters: None See Also: Fax FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxScheduleEnd designates the end of the fax scheduling process. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxStatusBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxStatBeg Syntax: FaxStatusBegin Parameters: None See Also: FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxStatusBegin designates the beginning of a fax process. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FaxStatusEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FaxStatEnd Syntax: FaxStatusEnd Parameters: None See Also: FaxBegin FaxDestination FaxFile FaxParameters FaxRasterize FaxScheduleBegin FaxStatusBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FaxStatusEnd designates the end of a fax process. This command must be used in conjunction with other fax commands. FileCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileCopy Syntax: FileCopy("Source File"; "Destination File"; Subdocs) Parameters: Source File A character expression specifying a file to copy. Destination File A character expression specifying a file to which a source file is copied. Subdocs (optional) Determines whether to copy subdocuments with a master document. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Subdocs! 1 Copy subdocuments ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileDelete FileMoveRename ──── ──── For Example... To copy a master document OLD.DOC and its subdocuments to another directory, the command is: FileCopy("C:\WP60\OLD.DOC";"C:\WP60\DATA\NEW.DOC";Subdocs!) Tell Me More... FileCopy copies a source file to a destination file, and, optionally, copies subdocuments. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, selecting a directory, selecting a file or files to copy, Copy. FileDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileDel Syntax: FileDelete("File Name"; Subdocs) Parameters: File Name A character expression specifying a file to delete. Subdocs (optional) Determines whether to delete subdocuments. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Subdocs! 1 Delete subdocuments ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileCopy FileMoveRename ──── ──── For Example... To delete a master document "OLD.DOC" but not its subdocuments, the command is: FileDelete("C:\WP60\OLD.DOC") Tell Me More... FileDelete deletes a file, and, optionally, deletes subdocuments. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, specifying a directory, selecting a file or files to delete. FileListDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileListDlg Syntax: FileListDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FileListDlg displays the File Manager dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, specifying a directory of files to list, then pressing Enter. FileManagerDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileManDlg Syntax: FileManagerDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FileManagerDlg displays the Specify File Manager List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager. FileManagerSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileManSetupDlg Syntax: FileManagerSetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FileManagerSetupDlg displays the File Manager Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, selecting a directory, Setup. FileManagerSortBySetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileManSortBySetup Syntax: FileManagerSortBySetup(Sort) Parameters: Sort Specifies how to sort files. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Filename! 1 Filename Extension! 2 Extension DateTime! 3 Date and time Size! 4 Size DescrName! 5 Description name DescrType! 6 Description type NoSort! 7 No sorting ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileManagerSetupDlg ──── ──── For Example... To sort files by filename, the command is: FileManagerSortBySetup(Filename!) Tell Me More... FileManagerSortBySetup specifies how to sort a list of files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, selecting a directory, Setup. FileManagerSortDescending Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileManSortDescend Syntax: FileManagerSortDescending(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to perform a descending sort. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not descending sort Yes! 1 Descending sort ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileManagerSetupDlg ──── ──── For Example... To perform a descending sort, the command is: FileManagerSortDescending(Yes!) Tell Me More... FileManagerSortDescending determines whether the sort is descending or ascending. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, selecting a directory, Setup, Descending Sort. FileMoveRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileRen Syntax: FileMoveRename("Source File"; "Destination File"; Subdocs) Parameters: Source File A character expression specifying the name of a file to move and/or rename. Destination File A character expression specifying the name of a file to which the source file will be moved and/or renamed. Subdocs (optional) Determines whether to move subdocuments with a master document. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Subdocs! 1 Move subdocuments ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileCopy FileDelete ──── ──── For Example... To move and rename OLD.DOC, the command is: FileMoveRename("C:\WP60\OLD.DOC";"C:\WP60\DATA\NEW.DOC") Tell Me More... FileMoveRename moves and/or renames a source file to a destination file, and, optionally, moves subdocuments. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, selecting a directory, selecting a file or files to move and/or rename, Move/Rename. FileNew Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileNew Syntax: FileNew Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FileNew opens a new document screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, New. FileOpen Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileOpen Syntax: FileOpen("Filename"; File Format) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name and location of a file to open. File Format (optional) Specifies a file format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect_42! 1 WordPerfect_50! 2 WordPerfect_51! 3 WordPerfect_60! 4 WordStar_33! 30 WordStar_331! 31 WordStar_34! 32 WordStar_40! 33 WordStar_50! 34 WordStar_55! 35 WordStar_60! 36 WordStar2000_10! 50 WordStar2000_20! 51 WordStar2000_30! 52 WordStar2000_35! 53 MicroSoftWord_30! 60 MicroSoftWord_31! 61 MicroSoftWord_40! 62 MicroSoftWord_50! 63 MicroSoftWord_55! 64 WordForWindows_10! 70 WordForWindows_11! 71 WordForWindows_1A! 72 WordForWindows_20! 73 RFT! 80 FFT! 81 DisplayWrite_40! 82 DisplayWrite_42! 83 DisplayWrite_50! 84 WITA_10! 90 WITA_20! 91 MultiMate_33! 100 MultiMateAdvantage_36! 101 MultiMateAdvantageII_10! 102 MultiMate_40! 103 ProfessionalWrite_10! 110 ProfessionalWrite_20! 111 ProfessionalWrite_21! 112 ProfessionalWrite_22! 113 OfficeWriter_60! 120 OfficeWriter_61! 121 OfficeWriter_611! 122 OfficeWriter_62! 123 WordPerfectMerge! 130 VolksWriterDeluxe_22! 140 VolksWriterDeluxePlus! 141 VolksWriter_3! 142 VolksWriter_4! 143 TotalWord! 146 RTF! 150 ASCIIStandard! 160 DelimitedText! 163 ASCIIStripped! 165 ASCIISRt! 166 NavyDIF! 175 Enable_20! 180 Enable_215! 181 Enable_30! 182 Enable_40! 183 XyWriteIIIPlus_355! 190 XyWriteIIIPlus_356! 191 XyWriteIIIPlus_40! 192 AmiPro_10! 310 AmiPro_12! 311 AmiPro_12A! 312 AmiPro_12B! 313 AmiPro_20! 314 SpreadsheetDIF! 800 Excel_21! 805 Excel_30! 806 Excel_40! 807 Lotus123_1A! 815 Lotus123_20! 816 Lotus123_23! 817 Lotus123_24! 818 Lotus123_30! 825 Lotus123_31! 826 Quattro! 835 QuattroPro_30! 836 QuattroPro_40! 837 PlanPerfect_30! 845 PlanPerfect_50! 846 PlanPerfect_51! 847 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To open WP.DOC, saved as a WordPerfect 4.2 document, the command is: FileOpen("C:\WP42\WP.DOC";WordPerfect_42!) Tell Me More... FileOpen opens a file into a new document window, and, optionally, identifies the file format. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Open, and entering a filename. FileOpenDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileOpenDlg Syntax: FileOpenDlg Parameters: None See Also: FileOpen ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FileOpenDlg displays the Open Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Open. FileRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileRet Syntax: FileRetrieve("Filename"; File Format) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of a file to retrieve. File Format (optional) Specifies a file format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect_42! 1 WordPerfect_50! 2 WordPerfect_51! 3 WordPerfect_60! 4 WordStar_33! 30 WordStar_331! 31 WordStar_34! 32 WordStar_40! 33 WordStar_50! 34 WordStar_55! 35 WordStar_60! 36 WordStar2000_10! 50 WordStar2000_20! 51 WordStar2000_30! 52 WordStar2000_35! 53 MicroSoftWord_30! 60 MicroSoftWord_31! 61 MicroSoftWord_40! 62 MicroSoftWord_50! 63 MicroSoftWord_55! 64 WordForWindows_10! 70 WordForWindows_11! 71 WordForWindows_1A! 72 WordForWindows_20! 73 RFT! 80 FFT! 81 DisplayWrite_40! 82 DisplayWrite_42! 83 DisplayWrite_50! 84 WITA_10! 90 WITA_20! 91 MultiMate_33! 100 MultiMateAdvantage_36! 101 MultiMateAdvantageII_10! 102 MultiMate_40! 103 ProfessionalWrite_10! 110 ProfessionalWrite_20! 111 ProfessionalWrite_21! 112 ProfessionalWrite_22! 113 OfficeWriter_60! 120 OfficeWriter_61! 121 OfficeWriter_611! 122 OfficeWriter_62! 123 WordPerfectMerge! 130 VolksWriterDeluxe_22! 140 VolksWriterDeluxePlus! 141 VolksWriter_3! 142 VolksWriter_4! 143 TotalWord! 146 RTF! 150 ASCIIStandard! 160 DelimitedText! 163 ASCIIStripped! 165 ASCIISRt! 166 NavyDIF! 175 Enable_20! 180 Enable_215! 181 Enable_30! 182 Enable_40! 183 XyWriteIIIPlus_355! 190 XyWriteIIIPlus_356! 191 XyWriteIIIPlus_40! 192 AmiPro_10! 310 AmiPro_12! 311 AmiPro_12A! 312 AmiPro_12B! 313 AmiPro_20! 314 SpreadsheetDIF! 800 Excel_21! 805 Excel_30! 806 Excel_40! 807 Lotus123_1A! 815 Lotus123_20! 816 Lotus123_23! 817 Lotus123_24! 818 Lotus123_30! 825 Lotus123_31! 826 Quattro! 835 QuattroPro_30! 836 QuattroPro_40! 837 PlanPerfect_30! 845 PlanPerfect_50! 846 PlanPerfect_51! 847 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FileOpen ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a file named TEST.DOC saved as a WordPerfect 5.0 document, the command is: FileRetrieve("c:\WP50\TEST.DOC";WordPerfect_50!) Tell Me More... FileRetrieve retrieves a file into the current document window, and, optionally, identifies a file format. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Retrieve, and specifying a file to retrieve. FileRetrieveDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileRetDlg Syntax: FileRetrieveDlg Parameters: None See Also: FileRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FileRetrieveDlg displays the Retrieve Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Retrieve. FileSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileSave Syntax: FileSave("Filename"; File Format) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of a document to save. File Format (optional) Specifies a file format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect_42! 1 WordPerfect_50! 2 WordPerfect_51! 3 WordPerfect_60! 4 WordStar_33! 30 WordStar_331! 31 WordStar_34! 32 WordStar_40! 33 WordStar_50! 34 WordStar_55! 35 WordStar_60! 36 WordStar2000_10! 50 WordStar2000_20! 51 WordStar2000_30! 52 WordStar2000_35! 53 MicroSoftWord_30! 60 MicroSoftWord_31! 61 MicroSoftWord_40! 62 MicroSoftWord_50! 63 MicroSoftWord_55! 64 WordForWindows_10! 70 WordForWindows_11! 71 WordForWindows_1A! 72 WordForWindows_20! 73 RFT! 80 FFT! 81 DisplayWrite_40! 82 DisplayWrite_42! 83 DisplayWrite_50! 84 WITA_10! 90 WITA_20! 91 MultiMate_33! 100 MultiMateAdvantage_36! 101 MultiMateAdvantageII_10! 102 MultiMate_40! 103 ProfessionalWrite_10! 110 ProfessionalWrite_20! 111 ProfessionalWrite_21! 112 ProfessionalWrite_22! 113 OfficeWriter_60! 120 OfficeWriter_61! 121 OfficeWriter_611! 122 OfficeWriter_62! 123 WordPerfectMerge! 130 VolksWriterDeluxe_22! 140 VolksWriterDeluxePlus! 141 VolksWriter_3! 142 VolksWriter_4! 143 TotalWord! 146 RTF! 150 ASCIIStandard! 160 DelimitedText! 163 ASCIIStripped! 165 ASCIISRt! 166 NavyDIF! 175 Enable_20! 180 Enable_215! 181 Enable_30! 182 Enable_40! 183 XyWriteIIIPlus_355! 190 XyWriteIIIPlus_356! 191 XyWriteIIIPlus_40! 192 AmiPro_10! 310 AmiPro_12! 311 AmiPro_12A! 312 AmiPro_12B! 313 AmiPro_20! 314 SpreadsheetDIF! 800 Excel_21! 805 Excel_30! 806 Excel_40! 807 Lotus123_1A! 815 Lotus123_20! 816 Lotus123_23! 817 Lotus123_24! 818 Lotus123_30! 825 Lotus123_31! 826 Quattro! 835 QuattroPro_30! 836 QuattroPro_40! 837 PlanPerfect_30! 845 PlanPerfect_50! 846 PlanPerfect_51! 847 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To save NEW.DOC in WordPerfect 5.1 format, the command is: FileSave("C:\WP60\NEW.DOC";WordPerfect_51!) Tell Me More... FileSave saves the active document, and optionally, specifies a file format. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save. FileSaveDefaultFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileSaveDefFmt Syntax: FileSaveDefaultFormat(File Format) Parameters: File Format Specifies the default file format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect_42! 1 WordPerfect_50! 2 WordPerfect_51! 3 WordPerfect_60! 4 WordStar_33! 30 WordStar_331! 31 WordStar_34! 32 WordStar_40! 33 WordStar_50! 34 WordStar_55! 35 WordStar_60! 36 WordStar2000_10! 50 WordStar2000_20! 51 WordStar2000_30! 52 WordStar2000_35! 53 MicroSoftWord_30! 60 MicroSoftWord_31! 61 MicroSoftWord_40! 62 MicroSoftWord_50! 63 MicroSoftWord_55! 64 WordForWindows_10! 70 WordForWindows_11! 71 WordForWindows_1A! 72 WordForWindows_20! 73 RFT! 80 FFT! 81 DisplayWrite_40! 82 DisplayWrite_42! 83 DisplayWrite_50! 84 WITA_10! 90 WITA_20! 91 MultiMate_33! 100 MultiMateAdvantage_36! 101 MultiMateAdvantageII_10! 102 MultiMate_40! 103 ProfessionalWrite_10! 110 ProfessionalWrite_20! 111 ProfessionalWrite_21! 112 ProfessionalWrite_22! 113 OfficeWriter_60! 120 OfficeWriter_61! 121 OfficeWriter_611! 122 OfficeWriter_62! 123 WordPerfectMerge! 130 VolksWriterDeluxe_22! 140 VolksWriterDeluxePlus! 141 VolksWriter_3! 142 VolksWriter_4! 143 TotalWord! 146 RTF! 150 ASCIIStandard! 160 DelimitedText! 163 ASCIIStripped! 165 ASCIISRt! 166 NavyDIF! 175 Enable_20! 180 Enable_215! 181 Enable_30! 182 Enable_40! 183 XyWriteIIIPlus_355! 190 XyWriteIIIPlus_356! 191 XyWriteIIIPlus_40! 192 AmiPro_10! 310 AmiPro_12! 311 AmiPro_12A! 312 AmiPro_12B! 313 AmiPro_20! 314 SpreadsheetDIF! 800 Excel_21! 805 Excel_30! 806 Excel_40! 807 Lotus123_1A! 815 Lotus123_20! 816 Lotus123_23! 817 Lotus123_24! 818 Lotus123_30! 825 Lotus123_31! 826 Quattro! 835 QuattroPro_30! 836 QuattroPro_40! 837 PlanPerfect_30! 845 PlanPerfect_50! 846 PlanPerfect_51! 847 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To set the default save format as WordPerfect 5.1, the command is: FileSaveDefaultFormat(WordPerfect_51!) Tell Me More... FileSaveDefaultFormat specifies the default save format. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save, Setup, Default Save Format, and selecting a format. FileSaveDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FileSaveDlg Syntax: FileSaveDlg Parameters: None See Also: FileSave ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FileSaveDlg displays the Save Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save. FillColors Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillClr Syntax: FillColors("Foreground Color"; Red Value; Green Value; Blue Value; Shading Value; "Background Color"; Red Value; Green Value; Blue Value; Shading Value) Parameters: The first five parameters specify foreground color and the last five specify background color. Foreground/Background Color (optional) A character expression specifying foreground and background colors. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in the selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 255. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in the selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 255. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in the selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 255. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of shading in the selected color. The value ranges from 0 to 100. See Also: FillSetWPG2 BorderFillColor ──── ──── For Example... To specify black and white colors with 40 percent foreground shading, the command is: FillColors("Black";0;0;0;40;"White";255;255;255;100) Tell Me More... FillColors specifies foreground and background colors, and the amount of red, blue, and green in the selected colors. FillColors is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, Create or Edit, and selecting options. FillSetGradient Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillSetGrad Syntax: FillSetGradient(Type;Position;Steps) Parameters: Type Determines the type of gradient. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LinearGradient! 0 Linear RadialGradient! 1 Radial RectangularGradient! 2 Rectangular ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position A numeric expression specifying a degree of rotation and horizontal and vertical offset positions. Steps Determines whether to automatically calculate steps in the gradient. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not calculate steps CalculateSteps! 1 Calculate steps ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To rotate a linear gradient 45 degrees and automatically calculate the steps, the command is: FillSetGradient(LinearGradient!;45.0;0.0;0.0;CalculateSteps!) Tell Me More... FillSetGradient customizes a gradient fill. This command is used between FillStyleEdit or FillStyleCreate and FillStyleEnd commands. After choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, Edit (or Create), selecting a style, and selecting Gradient from Fill Type options, this command is the equivalent of choosing Fill Pattern and selecting and entering options. FillSetWPG2 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillSetWPG2 Syntax: FillSetWPG2(Pattern Set; Pattern) Parameters: Pattern Set A numeric expression specifying a pattern set. Currently only pattern set 0 is available. Pattern Specifies a pattern. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WPG2_Solid! 0 WPG2_50Gray! 1 WPG2_25Gray! 2 WPG2_12Gray! 3 WPG2_Crosshatch1! 4 WPG2_Crosshatch2! 5 WPG2_Crosshatch3! 6 WPG2_Crosshatch4! 7 WPG2_Lines1! 8 WPG2_Lines2! 9 WPG2_Lines3! 10 WPG2_Lines4! 11 WPG2_Lines5! 12 WPG2_Lines6! 13 WPG2_Lines7! 14 WPG2_Lines8! 15 WPG2_Checkboard1! 16 WPG2_Checkboard2! 17 WPG2_Bricks1! 18 WPG2_Bricks2! 19 WPG2_Fishscale! 20 WPG2_Honeycomb! 21 WPG2_Patio! 22 WPG2_Chainlink! 23 WPG2_Weave! 24 WPG2_Plaid! 25 WPG2_Balls! 26 WPG2_Mesh! 27 WPG2_Crosses! 28 WPG2_Triangles! 29 WPG2_Waves! 30 WPG2_Arch! 31 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To select pattern set 0 and pattern WPG2_Arch, the command is: FillSetWPG2(0;WPG2_Arch!) Tell Me More... FillSetWPG2 specifies both a pattern set and a pattern from the set. Only pattern set 0 is available in the current version of WordPerfect.) This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, Create or Edit, Fill Type, Pattern, Fill Pattern, and selecting an option. FillStyleCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyCopy Syntax: FillStyleCopy(Style; Source; Destination; "Style Name") Parameters: Style Specifies a style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a character expression naming a user-created style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 Fill20! 1 Fill30! 2 Fill40! 3 Fill50! 4 Fill60! 5 Fill70! 6 Fill80! 7 Fill90! 8 Fill100! 9 FillButton! 10 NoFill! 127 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Source Specifies the source of a style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Destination Specifies the destination of a style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Style Name (optional) A character expression specifying the name of the style if source and destination are the same. ──── ──── For Example... To copy Fill50! from Document to Personal Library, the command is: FillStyleCopy(Fill50!;CurrentDoc!;PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... FillStyleCopy copies Fill Styles between Document, Personal Library, and Shared Library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, Copy. FillStyleCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyCre Syntax: FillStyleCreate("Style Name") Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying the name of a new style. ──── ──── For Example... To create a style named Button Fill, the command is: FillStyleCreate("Button Fill") Tell Me More... FillStyleCreate creates a new fill style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, Create, and entering a name for the new style. FillStyleDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyDel Syntax: FillStyleDelete("Style Name"; Source) Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying the name of a style to delete. Source Specifies the source of a style name. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 PersonalLibrary! 1 SharedLibrary! 2 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ For Example... To delete a style named My Style, the command is: FillStyleDelete("My Style";PersonalDoc!) Tell Me More... FillStyleDelete deletes a style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, selecting a style, Delete. FillStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyDlg Syntax: FillStyleDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FillStyleDlg displays the Fill Styles dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles. FillStyleEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyEd Syntax: FillStyleEdit("Style Name") Parameters: Style Name A character expression specifying the name of the style to edit. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 Fill20! 1 Fill30! 2 Fill40! 3 Fill50! 4 Fill60! 5 Fill70! 6 Fill80! 7 Fill90! 8 Fill100! 9 FillButton! 10 NoFill! 127 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FillStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit the fill style named My Button, the command is: FillStyleEdit("My Button") Tell Me More... FillStyleEdit is the opening command of a FillStyleEdit- FillStyleEnd statement; this statement contains style commands. The FillStyleEdit command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, selecting a style, Edit. FillStyleEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyEdDlg Syntax: FillStyleEditDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... This command displays the Fill Style Edit dialog box. This command must be used between FillStyleEdit and FillStyleEnd commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, selecting a style, Edit. FillStyleEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyEnd Syntax: FillStyleEnd(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to save changes after creating or editing a style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Do not save changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FillStyleCreate FillStyleEdit ──── ──── For Example... To save changes after creating a new style, the command is: FillStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... FillStyleEnd saves or cancels changes after creating or editing a style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, selecting a style, Create (entering a style name) or Edit, Close. FillStyleName Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyNm Syntax: FillStyleName("New Name") Parameters: New Name A character expression renaming a user-create fill style. ──── ──── For Example... To rename a user-created fill style New Style, the command is: FillStyleName("New Style") Tell Me More... FillStyleName renames a user-created fill style. This command must be used between FillStyleEdit and FillStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, highlighting a user-created style, Edit, Fill Style Name, and entering a name. FillStyleRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStyRet Syntax: FillStyleRetrieve("Name";Location) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a fill style to retrieve. Location(Optional) Specifies the location of a fill style to retrieve. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FillStyleSave ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a fill style named My Style from the current document, the command is: FillStyleRetrieve("My Style";CurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... FillStyleRetrieve retrieves a fill style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, selecting a style, Retrieve. FillStyleSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FillStySav Syntax: FillStyleSave Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a fill style to save. Location(Optional) Specifies the location of a fill style to save. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal Library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FillStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To save a fill style named My Style in the current document, the command is: FillStyleSave("My Style";CurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... FillStyleSave saves a fill style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Fill Styles, selecting a style, Save. FirstLineIndent Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FirstLnInd Syntax: FirstLineIndent(Amount) Parameters: Amount A measurement expression specifying an amount to indent the first line of a new paragraph. ──── ──── For Example... To indent the first line of each new paragraph 1.5", the command is: FirstLineIndent(1.5") Tell Me More... FirstLineIndent indents the first line of a new paragraph relative to the left margin. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, First Line Indent, and specifying a measurement. FloatingCellBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellBeg Syntax: FloatingCellBegin Parameters: None See Also: FloatingCellEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FloatingCellBegin moves the cursor to the beginning of the current floating cell. While in a floating cell, this command is the equivalent of pressing Shift+Tab. FloatingCellCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellCre Syntax: FloatingCellCreate Parameters: None See Also: FloatingCellCreateDlg FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FloatingCellCreate creates a floating cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell. FloatingCellCreateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellCreDlg Syntax: FloatingCellCreateDlg Parameters: None See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FloatingCellCreateDlg displays the Edit Floating Cell dialog box. This command creates a new floating cell and cannot be used to edit an existing floating cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell. FloatingCellEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellEd Syntax: FloatingCellEdit Parameters: None See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellCreateDlg FloatingCellEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FloatingCellEdit specifies that a floating cell is to be edited. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands that specify a name, formula, or number type for the cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit Floating Cell. FloatingCellEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellEdDlg Syntax: FloatingCellEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellCreateDlg FloatingCellEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FloatingCellEditDlg displays the Edit Floating Cell dialog box. This command edits a floating cell and cannot be used to create a new floating cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit Floating Cell. ──── ──── FloatingCellEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellEnd Syntax: FloatingCellEnd Parameters: None See Also: FloatingCellBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FloatingCellEnd moves the cursor to the code just following the current floating cell. While in a floating cell, this command is the equivalent of pressing Tab. FloatingCellFormula Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellForm Syntax: FloatingCellFormula(Formula) Parameters: Formula A character expression specifying a formula to place in a floating cell. See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellCreateDlg FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... To create a floating cell containing a formula to add the values of two other floating cells, the command sequence is: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellFormula("FloatingCell_A + FloatingCell_B") Tell Me More... FloatingCellFormula specifies a formula used in the current floating cell. This command must be used in conjunction with FloatingCellCreate or FloatingCellEdit. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Formula, and entering a formula. FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumAlignCur Syntax: FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency(Align) Parameters: Align Designates whether to align currency symbols. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not align symbol Yes! 1 Align symbol ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To create a floating cell that formats numbers as currency and aligns the currency symbols the command sequence is: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellNumberFormat(Currency!) FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency specifies whether to align currency symbols. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Options, Align Currency Symbol. FloatingCellNumberDateFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumDateFmt Syntax: FloatingCellNumberDateFormat(Format) Parameters: Format Specifies a date format. Select a numeric equivalent. Numeric Description Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ 1 March 5, 1993 2 3/5/93 3 Mar 5, 1993 4 5 March 1993 5 Friday, March 5, 1993 6 4:18 pm 7 05Mar93 8 March 5, 1993 (4:18pm) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To edit a floating cell and specify the date format mm/dd/yy, the command sequence is: FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberDateFormat(2) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberDateFormat specifies a floating cell date format. This command must be used in conjunction with FloatingCellCreate or FloatingCellEdit. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Select Date Format, and selecting a format. FloatingCellNumberDecDigits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumDecDgt Syntax: FloatingCellNumberDecDigits(Number) Parameters: Number Specifies the number of digits to display after a decimal point. See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To edit a floating cell and display two digits after the decimal point, the command sequence is: FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberDecDigits(2) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberDecDigits specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point in a floating cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Digits After Decimal, and specifying a number. FloatingCellNumberFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumFmt Syntax: FloatingCellNumberFormat(Format) Parameters: Format Specifies the format of a number in floating cells. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ General! 0 General Integer! 1 Integer Fixed2! 2 Fixed Point Percent! 3 Percent Currency! 4 Currency Accounting! 5 Accounting Commas! 6 Commas Scientific! 7 Scientific Notation DateFormat! 8 Date Format TextOnly! 9 Text Only ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit ──── ──── For Example... To create a floating cell in the scientific notation format, the command sequence is: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellNumberFormat(Scientific!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberFormat specifies a number format for floating cells. This command is equivalent to choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, and selecting a format. FloatingCellNumberNegNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumNegNum Syntax: FloatingCellNumberNegNumber(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies the display of negative numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Minus! 0 Minus sign Parentheses! 1 Parentheses CRDR! 2 Credit/Debit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To edit a floating cell and display negative numbers in parentheses, the command sequence is: FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberNegNumber(Parentheses!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberNegNumber specifies how to display negative numbers in a floating cell. This command is equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Negative Numbers, and selecting a display method. FloatingCellNumberRound Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumRound Syntax: FloatingCellNumberRound(Round) Parameters: Round Designates whether to round numbers to calculate. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not round numbers Yes! 1 Round numbers ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To edit a floating cell and round numbers for calculation, the command sequence is: FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberRound(Yes!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberRound determines whether to round numbers for calculation in a floating cell. This command is equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Round for Calculation. FloatingCellNumberUseCommas Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumUseCommas Syntax: FloatingCellNumberUseCommas(Commas) Parameters: Commas Designates whether to use commas in numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use commas Yes! 1 Use commas ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To create a floating cell that displays numbers with commas, the command sequence is: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellNumberUseCommas(Yes!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberUseCommas determines whether to display commas in floating cell numbers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Use Commas. FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumUseCur Syntax: FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency(Use) Parameters: Use Determines whether to use a currency symbol. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use symbol Yes! 1 Use symbol ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency FloatingCellNumberFormat FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To create a floating cell that displays currency symbols, the command sequence is: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency determines whether to use a currency symbol in a floating cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, On. FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FloatCellNumSelCur Syntax: FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency(Symbol) Parameters: Symbol Specifies a currency symbol or country where the currency is used. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Dollar! 1 Dollar Peso! 2 Peso FrenchCanada! 3 Dollar Canada! 4 Dollar Brazil! 5 Cruzeiro Denmark! 6 Danish Krone Peseta! 7 Peseta Croatia! 8 Croatia CzechRepublic! 9 Koruna SlovakRepublic! 10 Koruna Finland! 11 Markka FinlandIntl! 12 Markka France! 13 Franc Germany! 14 Deutsche Mark Greece! 15 Drachma Hungary! 16 Forint Iceland! 17 Krona Italy! 18 Lira Japan! 19 Yen Netherlands! 20 Guilder Norway! 21 Krone NorwayIntl! 22 Krone Ruble! 23 Ruble RussianRuble! 24 Ruble SouthAfrica! 25 Rand Sweden! 26 Krona Turkey! 27 Lira UnitedKingdom! 28 Pound Switzerland! 29 Swiss Franc Austria! 30 Schilling Belgium! 31 Belgian Franc Ecuador! 32 Sucre ElSalvador! 33 Colón Guatemala! 34 Quetzal Honduras! 35 Lempira Paraguay! 36 Guaraní Venezuela! 37 Bolívar Poland! 38 Zoty Slovenia! 39 Tolar ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FloatingCellCreate FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency FloatingCellNumberFormat FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To edit a cell and specify the dollar sign ($) as the currency symbol, the command sequence is: FloatingCellEdit FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency(Dollar!) Tell Me More... FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency specifies a currency symbol for floating cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create Floating Cell or Edit Floating Cell, Number Type, Currency Symbol, Select, and selecting a currency symbol. FlushRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FlshRgt Syntax: FlushRight Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FlushRight aligns text flush against the right margin. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Alignment, Flush Right. Font Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Fnt Syntax: Font("Name";Font Family) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a font. Font Family (optional) Specifies the typeface family of a selected font. Select an enumerated type or it numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FamilyITCBenguiat! 256 FamilyTimesRoman! 2304 FamilyITCGaramond! 4352 FamilyCenturySchoolbook! 6400 FamilyBodoni! 8448 FamilyITCLubalinGraph! 10496 FamilyAlbertus! 12544 FamilyCourier! 14592 FamilyHelvetica! 16640 FamilyITCRonda! 18688 FamilyMicrostyle! 20736 FamilyOptima! 22784 FamilyLetterGothic! 24832 FamilyBrush! 26880 FamilyParkAvenue! 28928 FamilySignetRoundhand! 30976 FamilyTekton! 33024 FamilyUncial! 35072 FamilyOldEnglish! 37120 FamilyITCZapfDingbats! 39168 FamilyBroadway! 41216 FamilyComputer! 43264 FamilyPTBarnum! 45312 FamilyPonderosa! 47360 FamilyMadrone! 49408 FamilyHobo! 51456 FamilyRevue! 53504 FamilyAestheticOrnamented! 55552 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To select the font named Courier 10 Roman (Speedo), the command is: Font("Courier 10 Roman (Speedo)") Tell Me More... Font selects a font. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, and selecting a font. FontDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FntDlg Syntax: FontDlg Parameters: None See Also: Font ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FontDlg displays the Font dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font. FontMatchBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FntMatchBeg Syntax: FontMatchBegin Parameters: None See Also: FontMatchEnd FontMatchTable ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FontMatchBegin is the opening command of a FontMatchBegin- FontMatchEnd statement; this statement contains the FontMatchTable command. This statement is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Edit Document Font Mapping Table. FontMatchEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FntMatchEnd Syntax: FontMatchEnd(State;"Printer";Type) Parameters: State Determines whether to save or cancel changes to the Font Mapping Table. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancels changes Save! 1 Saves changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Printer(Optional) A character expression specifying the current printer font. Type (Optional) Determines whether to match a font to a printer font or a graphics font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PRSFile! 16 Printer font DRSFile! 20 Graphics font ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To end a FontMatchBegin-FontMatchTable-FontMatchEnd statement where an Apple LaserWriter IINTX is the current printer and the current font is mapped to a graphics font, and to save the changes, the command is: FontMatchEnd(Save!;"APLW2NTX.PRS", DRSFile!) Tell Me More... FontMatchEnd is the closing command of a FontMatchBegin- FontMatchTable-FontMatchEnd statement. After choosing Font, Font, Setup, Edit Document Font Matching Table, and specifying options, this command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel. FontMatchTable Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FntMatchTbl Syntax: FontMatchTable("Typeface";"Attribute";"Group";"For mat";Size;Type;"Name"; Remove) Parameters: Typeface A character expression specifying the name of a font to be matched. Attribute (Optional) A character expression specifying the attribute of a font to be matched. Group (Optional) A character expression specifying the group (such as Speedo) of a font to be matched. Format (Optional) A character expression specifying the format (such as ASCII) of a font to be matched. Size (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the size of a font to be matched in points or characters per inch (cpi). Type Determines whether the matching font is a printer font or a graphics font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PRSFile! 16 Printer font DRSFile! 20 Graphics font ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Name (Optional) A character expression naming the matching font. Remove (Optional) Removes font mapping. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoveMapping! 1 Remove font mappings ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To match a Courier 10pt Bold font with a graphics font, the command is: FontMatchTable("Courier";"Bold";DRSFile!;"Courier 10 Bold (Speedo)") Tell Me More... FontMatchTable specifies attributes of a font and determines whether the matching font is a printer font or a graphics font. This command must be used between FontMatchBegin and FontMatchEnd, and is equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Edit Document Font Mapping Table, and entering options. FontSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FntSz Syntax: FontSize(Point Size; Cpi) Parameters: Point Size A measurement expression specifying font size in points. Cpi (optional) A measurement expression specifying font size in characters per inch for monospaced fonts. See Also: Font ──── ──── For Example... To set the font size to 14p, the command is: FontSize(14p) Tell Me More... FontSize sets the font size of a selected font. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Size. FooterA Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FtrA Syntax: FooterA(Footer; Pages) Parameters: Footer Determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Footer A. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Cancel Create! 1 Create Edit! 2 Edit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pages (optional) Specifies pages on which Footer A prints. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OddPages! 1 Odd pages EvenPages! 2 Even pages AllPages! 3 All pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To create Footer A and print it on odd pages, the command is: FooterA(Create!;OddPages!) Tell Me More... FooterA determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Footer A, and whether to mark it for printing on odd, even, or all pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Footers, Footer A, and selecting Footer A options. FooterB Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FtrB Syntax: FooterB(Footer; Pages) Parameters: Footer Determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Footer B. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Cancel Create! 1 Create Edit! 2 Edit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pages (optional) Specifies pages on which Footer B prints. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OddPages! 1 Odd pages EvenPages! 2 Even pages AllPages! 3 All pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To Edit Footer B and print it on even pages, the command is: FooterB(Edit!;EvenPages!) Tell Me More... FooterB determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Footer B, and whether to mark it for printing on odd, even, or all pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Footers, Footer B, and selecting Footer B options. FooterSeparationDistance Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FtrSepDist Syntax: FooterSeparationDistance(Spacing) Parameters: Spacing A measurement expression specifying an amount of blank space above a footer. The default is .167". ──── ──── For Example... To specify .5" of blank space above footers, the command is: FooterSeparationDistance(0.5") Tell Me More... FooterSeparationDistance specifies an amount of blank space above footers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Footers, Space Above Footer, and specifying a measurement. FootnoteContinuedMessage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteContMes Syntax: FootnoteContinuedMessage(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to print a continued message when a footnote is split between two pages. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No message Yes! 1 Continued message ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FootnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To print a continued message, the command is: FootnoteContinuedMessage(Yes!) Tell Me More... FootnoteContinuedMessage determines whether to print "(continued...)" when a footnote is split between two pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options, Print Continued Message. FootnoteCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteCre Syntax: FootnoteCreate Parameters: Note See Also: FootnoteEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FootnoteCreate displays a Footnote editing screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Create. FootnoteEdit 3512Show Me An Example... 3513Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteEd Syntax: FootnoteEdit(Footnote Number) Parameters: Footnote Number (optional) A numeric expression specifying a footnote to edit. If this parameter is not specified, the next footnote is edited. See Also: FootnoteCreate ──── ──── For Example... To edit the third footnote of a document, the command is: FootnoteEdit(e) Tell Me More... FootnoteEdit displays the Footnote editing screen. If no footnote number is specified, the first footnote to the right of the cursor is edited. If no footnote is found to the right, a Not Found condition is generated. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Edit, specifying a footnote number. FootnoteEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteEdDlg Syntax: FootnoteEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: FootnoteEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FootnoteEditDlg displays the Footnote Number dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Edit. FootnoteMinimum Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteMin Syntax: FootnoteMinimum(Amount) Parameters: Amount A measurement expression specifying the minimum amount of footnote text to keep together. The default is .5". See Also: FootnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To keep 1" of footnote text together, the command is: FootnoteMinimum(1") Tell Me More... FootnoteMinimum specifies the minimum amount of footnote text to keep together on a page. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options, Amount of Footnote to Keep Together, and specifying a measurement. FootnoteNewNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteNewNum Syntax: FootnoteNewNumber(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a starting number. ──── ──── For Example... To start footnote numbering at 3, the command is: FootnoteNewNumber(3) Tell Me More... FootnoteNewNumber specifies a starting number for footnotes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, New Number, New Number, and entering a new number. FootnoteNumberDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteNumDec Syntax: FootnoteNumberDecrement Parameters: None See Also: FootnoteSetNumberDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FootnoteNumberDecrement decreases a footnote number by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, New Number, Decrement Number. FootnoteNumberDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteNumDisp Syntax: FootnoteNumberDisplay Parameters: None See Also: FootnoteSetNumberDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FootnoteNumberDisplay copies the current footnote number into a document at the cursor position. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, New Number, Display in Document. FootnoteNumberIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteNumInc Syntax: FootnoteNumberIncrement Parameters: None See Also: FootnoteSetNumberDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... FootnoteNumberIncrement increases a footnote number by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, New Number, Increment Number. FootnoteNumberMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteNumMeth Syntax: FootnoteNumberMethod(Numbering Method; "Character Method") Parameters: Numbering Method A numeric expression specifying a footnote numbering method. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Numbers LowerLetters! 1 Lowercase letters UpperLetters! 2 Uppercase letters LowerRoman! 3 Lowercase Roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Uppercase Roman numerals Characters! 5 Characters ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FootnoteSetNumberDlg ──── ──── For Example... To specify the asterisk (*) as the footnote numbering method, the command is: FootnoteNumberMethod(characters!;"*") Tell Me More... FootnoteNumberMethod selects a footnote numbering method. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, New Number, Numbering Method, and selecting a numbering method. Including the optional second parameter with this command is the equivalent of choosing Characters from the Set Footnote Number dialog box, and entering up to five characters. FootnoteOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteOptDlg Syntax: FootnoteOptionsDlg Parameters: None See Also: FootnoteContinuedMessage FootnoteMinimum FootnotePosition FootnoteRestartEachPage FootnoteSeparatorLine FootnotesSpaceBetween ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FootnoteOptionsDlg displays the Footnote Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options. FootnotePosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnotePos Syntax: FootnotePosition(Position) Parameters: Position Determines whether footnotes will be printed at the bottom of the page or just below the last line of text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ BottomOfPage! 0 Bottom of page AfterText! 1 After text ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FootnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To position footnotes at the bottom of the page, the command is: FootnotePosition(BottomOfPage!) Tell Me More... FootnotePosition specifies where footnotes will be printed. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options, Footnotes at Bottom of Page. FootnoteRestartEachPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteRestsrtEachPg Syntax: FootnoteRestartEachPage(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to restart footnote numbering on every page. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not restart Yes! 1 Restart ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: FootnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To restart footnote numbering on every page, the command is: FootnoteRestartEachPage(Yes!) Tell Me More... FootnoteRestartEachPage determines whether to restart footnote numbering on every page. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options, Restart Footnote Numbers each Page. FootnoteSeparatorLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteSepLn Syntax: FootnoteSeparatorLine(Separator Line; Space; Alignment; Width; Position) Parameters: Separator Line Specifies the type of separator line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 DoubleLine! 1 DashedLine! 2 DottedLine! 3 ThickLine! 4 ExtraThickLine! 5 ThinThickLine! 6 ThickThinLine! 7 ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 TableDefaultLine! 126 NoLine! 127 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Space A measurement expression specifying the amount of space above a separator line. Alignment Specifies how the separator line is justified. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Full! 1 Center! 2 Right! 3 SetPosition! 4 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Width (optional) A measurement expression specifying the width of a separator line. Position (optional) A measurement expression specifying the distance of a separator line from the left edge of the page. See Also: FootnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To create a separator line with .5" of space above the line and .25" below, 2" from the left edge of the paper, and 3" in length, the command is: FootnoteSeparatorLine(DoubleLine!;.5";.25";SetPosition!;3";2") Tell Me More... FootnoteSeparatorLine specifies the characteristics of a separator line between text and footnotes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options, Footnote Separator Line, and selecting options. FootnoteSetNumberDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteSetNumDlg Syntax: FootnoteSetNumberDlg Parameters: None See Also: FootnoteNumberDecrement FootnoteNumberIncrement FootnoteNewNumber FootnoteNumberDisplay FootnoteNumberMethod ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FootnoteSetNumberDlg displays the Set Footnote Number dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, New Number. FootnoteStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteStyDlg Syntax: FootnoteStyleDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FootnoteStyleDlg displays the Footnote Style In Note dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Edit Style in Note. FootnoteStyleInDocDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteStyInDocDlg Syntax: FootnoteStyleInDocDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FootnoteStyleInDocDlg displays the Footnote Style In Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Edit Style in Doc. FootnotesSpaceBetween Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FnoteSpaceBet Syntax: FootnoteSpaceBetween(Spacing) Parameters: Spacing A measurement expression specifying the amount of blank space between footnotes. The default is .167". See Also: FootnoteOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To specify .25" blank space between footnotes, the command is: FootnotesSpaceBetween(.25") Tell Me More... FootnoteSpaceBetween specifies the amount of blank space between footnotes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Footnote, Options, Spacing Between Footnotes, and specifying a measurement. ForcePage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ForcePg Syntax: ForcePage(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a page number is odd or even. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Even! 0 Odd! 1 New! 2 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To insert a blank page, forcing an even page number to odd, the command is: ForcePage(Odd!) Tell Me More... ForcePage specifies that a certain page will always have an odd or even number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Force Page, and selecting Even, Odd, or New. FormatCharacterDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtCharDlg Syntax: FormatCharacterDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatCharacterDlg displays the Character Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character. FormatDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtDlg Syntax: FormatDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatDlg displays the Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Format (Shift+F8). FormatDocDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtDocDlg Syntax: FormatDocDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatDocDlg displays the Document Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document. FormatForDefaultPrinter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtForDefltPrinter Syntax: FormatForDefaultPrinter(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a retrieved document is formatted for the default printer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Yes! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To format a document for the default printer, the command is: FormatForDefaultPrinter(Yes!) Tell Me More... FormatForDefaultPrinter determines whether a retrieved document is formatted for the default printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Format Retrieved Documents for Default Printer. FormatLineDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtLnDlg Syntax: FormatLineDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatLineDlg displays the Line Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line. FormatMarginsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtMarDlg Syntax: FormatMarginsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatMarginsDlg displays the Margin Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins. FormatOtherDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtOthDlg Syntax: FormatOtherDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatOtherDlg displays the Other Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other. FormatPageDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FmtPgDlg Syntax: FormatPageDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... FormatPageDlg displays the Page Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page. FramedWindowSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FramedWinSetup Syntax: FrameWindowSetup(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a document window is displayed in a frame. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 On! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display a document window in a frame, the command is: FrameWindowSetup(Yes!) Tell Me More... FrameWindowSetup determines whether a current document window is displayed in a frame or as a full window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Frame (to display a document window in a frame); or Window, Maximize (to display a document window as a full window). GenerateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GenDlg Syntax: GenerateDlg Parameters: None See Also: GenerateDoc ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... GenerateDlg displays the Generate dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Generate. GenerateDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GenDoc Syntax: GenerateDoc(State) Parameters: State (optional) Specifies whether changes to individual subdocuments in a master document are saved. This parameter is not necessary if you are not generating in a master document. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DontSave! 0 Don't save subdoc's Save! 1 Save subdoc's ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GenerateDlg ──── ──── For Example... To generate a document and save subdocuments, the command is: GenerateDoc(Save!) Tell Me More... GenerateDoc generates Endnotes, Indexes, Tables of Contents, Lists, Cross References, Tables of Authorities, and Master Documents. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Generate, selecting or unselecting Save Modified Subdocuments. GoToDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GoToDlg Syntax: GoToDlg Parameters: None See Also: GoToKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... GoToDlg displays the Go To dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Go To. GoToDos Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GoToDos Syntax: GoToDos Parameters: None See Also: GoToShell ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GoToDos takes you to a DOS prompt and allows you to perform DOS commands. Once at a DOS prompt, typing Exit returns you to WordPerfect, and macro execution continues. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go to Shell, Go to DOS. GoToKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GoToKey Syntax: GoToKey Parameters: None See Also: GoToDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GoToKey performs the same function as the GoToDlg command unless you are in the Equation Editor. If you execute this command in the Equation Editor when the View Equation window has focus, this command forces the equation to fit in the window. GoToKey either enlarges or reduces the display size of the equation to fit in the View Equation window. In the Equation Editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing View, Zoom Fill. GoToMail Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GoToMail Syntax: GoToMail Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GoToMail executes your mail program. GoToShell Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GoToShell Syntax: GoToShell Parameters: None See Also: GoToDos ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GoToShell takes you from WordPerfect to the shell or the menu from which you executed WordPerfect. Macro execution continues once you return to WordPerfect. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell, Active Programs, Shell Grammatik Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Grammatik Syntax: Grammatik Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... The Grammatik command executes Grammatik, a grammar checking program. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Grammatik. GraphicsColorsAssign Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphClrAssign Syntax: GraphicsColorsAssign("Name";Type;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value) Parameters: Name A character expression naming a color scheme to be modified . Type Specifies a screen element to modify. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ DlgBackground! 0 Change dialog background DlgBorder! 1 Change dialog border DlgUpperLightReflection 2 Changes border reflection DlgDarkShadow! 3 Changes border shadow of an active dialog DlgLightShadow! 4 Changes border shadow of an inactive dialog DlgActiveTitle! 5 Changes active title bar DlgInactiveTitle! 6 Changes inactive title bar CheckBoxBackground! 7 Changes check box background CheckBoxActive! 8 Changes check mark ComboButtonBackground! 9 Changes combo button ScrollBarFill! 10 Changes scroll bar DlgTextColor! 11 Changes dialog text DlgBoldTextColor! 12 Changes available options DlgInactiveTextColor! 13 Changes unavailable options PullDownBackground! 14 Changes pull-down menu color PullDownBorder! 15 Changes pull-down border ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Red Value A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Green Value A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Blue Value A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. See Also: GraphicsColorsCopy GraphicsColorsCreate GraphicsColorsDelete GraphicsColorsSelect ──── ──── For Example... To modify a check box background color in a color scheme named My Colors, the command is: GraphicsColorsAssign("My Colors";CheckBoxBackground!;255;207;191) Tell Me More... GraphicsColorsAssign modifies screen element colors in a color scheme. You cannot use this command to modify color schemes which shipped with this program. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, selecting a color scheme, Edit, selecting a screen element, Color, selecting a color, Select. GraphicsColorsCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphClrCopy Syntax: GraphicsColorsCopy("Color Scheme Name";"Color Scheme Name") Parameters: Color Scheme Name A character expression naming a color scheme to be copied. Color Scheme Name A character expression containing the name of a color scheme to which you are copying. See Also: GraphicsColorsAssign GraphicsColorsCreate GraphicsColorsDelete GraphicsColorsSelect ──── ──── For Example... To copy colors from a color scheme named A Colors to a color scheme named B Colors, the command is: GraphicsColorsCopy("A Colors";"B Colors") Tell Me More... GraphicsColorsCopy copies colors from one color scheme to another. This command is the equivalent choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, Copy. GraphicsColorsCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphClrCre Syntax: GraphicsColorsCreate("Color Scheme Name") Parameters: Color Scheme Name A character expression naming a color scheme to be created. See Also: GraphicsColorsAssign GraphicsColorsCopy GraphicsColorsDelete GraphicsColorsSelect ──── ──── For Example... To create a color scheme named My Colors, the command is: GraphicsColorsCreate("My Colors") Tell Me More... GraphicsColorsCreate creates a color scheme in the Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, Create, enter a color scheme name . GraphicsColorsDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphClrDel Syntax: GraphicsColorsDelete("Color Scheme Name") Parameters: Color Scheme Name A character expression naming a color scheme to be deleted. See Also: GraphicsColorsCreate LABEL ONNOTFOUND ──── ──── For Example... To delete a color scheme named My Colors, the command is: GraphicsColorsDelete("My Colors") Tell Me More... GraphicsColorsDelete deletes a color scheme in the Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors dialog box. If the color scheme specified does not exist, this command generates a Not Found condition and terminates the macro or redirects macro execution to the LABEL specified by an ONNOTFOUND command. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, selecting a color scheme, Delete. GraphicsColorsSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphClrSel Syntax: GraphicsColorsSelect("Color Scheme Name") Parameters: Color Scheme Name A character expression naming a color scheme to be selected. See Also: GraphicsColorsAssign GraphicsColorsCopy GraphicsColorsCreate GraphicsColorsDelete LABEL ONNOTFOUND ──── ──── For Example... To select a color scheme My Colors, the command is: GraphicsColorsSelect("My Colors") Tell Me More... GraphicsColorsSelect selects a color scheme in the Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors dialog box. If the color scheme specified does not exist, this command generates a Not Found condition and terminates the macro or redirects macro execution to the LABEL specified by an ONNOTFOUND command. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, Color Schemes, selecting a color scheme, Select. GraphicsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphDlg Syntax: GraphicsDlg Parameters: None See Also: ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... GraphicsDlg displays the Graphics dialog box which allows you to create and customize graphics boxes, graphics lines, graphics styles, and borders. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F9 GraphicsFontsActivate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphFntAct Syntax: GraphicsFontsActivate(Type;State) Parameters: Type Specifies a graphic font type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Speedo! 134 Bitstream Speedo fonts Bullet! 135 Bullet fonts Type1! 138 Type 1 fonts TrueType! 139 True Type fonts ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ State Determines whether to activate a font type. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not activate Yes! 1 Activate ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To deactivate the Bitstream Speedo screen fonts, the command is: GraphicsFontsActivate(Speedo!;No!) Tell Me More... GraphicsFontsActivate toggles screen font types on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Graphics Fonts Data Files, Activate. GraphicsFontsPathsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphFntPathsDlg Syntax: GraphicsFontsPathsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... GraphicsFontsPathsDlg displays the Graphics Fonts Data Files dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Graphics Fonts Data Files. GraphicsFontsSelectBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphFntSelBeg Syntax: GraphicsFontsSelectBegin Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsFontsSelectEnd GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GraphicsFontsSelectBegin is the opening command of the GraphicsFontsSelectBegin-GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont- GraphicsFontsSelectEnd statement; this statement contains graphics font information. This statement is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Select Graphic Fonts, and selecting graphics fonts. GraphicsFontsSelectEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphFntSelEnd Syntax: GraphicsFontsSelectEnd(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to save graphics font selections. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancels selections Save! 1 Saves selections ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsFontsSelectBegin ──── ──── For Example... To save font selections, the command is: GraphicsFontsSelectEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... GraphicsFontsSelectEnd is the closing command of the GraphicsFontsSelectBegin-GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont- GraphicsFontsSelectEnd statement; this statement contains graphics font information. This statement is the equivalent of selecting OK or Cancel in the Select Graphic Fonts dialog box. GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphFntSelMarkFnt Syntax: GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont("Font"; Mark) Parameters: Mark A character expression specifying a graphics font. Font Determines whether the font in the first parameter is marked as a graphics font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DRSMark! 0 Mark Font DRSUnmark! 1 Unmark Font ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsFontsUpdate GraphicsFontsSelectBegin GraphicsFontsSelectEnd ──── ──── For Example... To mark the Swiss 721 Roman (Speedo), the command is: GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont("Swiss 721 Roman (Speedo)";DRSMark!) Tell Me More... GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont designates which fonts can be used as graphic fonts. This command is used in conjunction with GraphicsFontsSelectBegin and GraphicsFontsSelectEnd commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Select Graphic Fonts, and marking or unmarking graphics fonts with an asterisk. GraphicsFontsUpdate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GrphFntUpdate Syntax: GraphicsFontsUpdate Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsFontsSelectMarkFont ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GraphicsFontsUpdate updates graphic fonts (generates new Automatic Font Changes for WP.DRS). This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Update Graphic Fonts. GraphicsLineColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnClr Syntax: GraphicsLineColor("Color Name";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Color Name (optional) A character expression specifying graphics line color. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of a color. Value ranges from 0 to 100. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineUseColor GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To make the color of a graphics line red, the command is: GraphicsLineColor("Red";255;0;0;100) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineColor specifies the color of a graphics line. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Color, Choose Color, and selecting a color. GraphicsLineCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnCre Syntax: GraphicsLineCreate Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsLineColor GraphicsLineDlg GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition GraphicsLineSpacing GraphicsLineStyle GraphicsLineThickness GraphicsLineType GraphicsLineVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GraphicsLineCreate creates a graphics line. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineEnd. GraphicsLineCreate creates a horizontal line unless otherwise specified by GraphicsLineType. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create. GraphicsLineDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnDel Syntax: GraphicsLineDelete(Graphics Line Number) Parameters: Graphics Line Number A numeric expression specifying a graphics line number to delete. ──── ──── For Example... To delete graphics line 3, the command is: GraphicsLineDelete(3) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineDelete deletes a graphic line. This command is the equivalent of selecting a graphic line code in Reveal Codes [Graph Line:n], Delete. GraphicsLineDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnDlg Syntax: GraphicsLineDlg Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... GraphicsLineDlg displays the Create Graphics Line (or Edit Graphics Line) dialog box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit. GraphicsLineEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnEd Syntax: GraphicsLineEdit(Graphics Line Number) Parameters: Graphics Line Number A numeric expression specifying a graphics line to edit. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineDlg GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit graphics line 1 , the command is: GraphicsLineEdit(1) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineEdit specifies the number of a graphic to edit. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Edit, Graphics Line Number, entering a line number, Edit Line. GraphicsLineEditNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnEdNext Syntax: GraphicsLineEditNext Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsLineEditPrevious GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GraphicsLineEditNext must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineEnd, to edit the first graphics line to the right of the cursor. If the cursor is resting on a graphics line code, the graphics line on which the cursor is resting is edited. After editing, the cursor is repositioned to the right of the edited graphics line code. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Edit, Next Graphics Line, Edit Line. GraphicsLineEditPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnEdPrev Syntax: GraphicsLineEditPrevious Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsLineEditNext GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GraphicsLineEditPrevious must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineEnd, to edit the first graphics line to the left of the cursor. After editing, the cursor is repositioned to the right of the edited graphics line code. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Edit, Previous Graphics Line, Edit Line. GraphicsLineEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnEnd Syntax: GraphicsLineEnd(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether modifications made to the graphics line will be saved or canceled. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancels changes Save! 1 Saves changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEditNext GraphicsLineEditPrevious ──── ──── For Example... To end a series of commands modifying a graphics line and save changes, the command is: GraphicsLineEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineEnd ends a series of commands modifying the appearance of a graphics line and specifies whether the changes will be saved or canceled. GraphicsLineEnd must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineEdit or GraphicsLineCreate. This command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel in the Create Graphics Line or Edit Graphics Line dialog box. GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnHorizPos Syntax: GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition(Location;Position;C olumn Number) Parameters: Location Specifies the horizontal location of a graphics line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Positions line to the left Center! 2 Centers line Right! 3 Positions line to the right FullAlign! 7 Line spans width of page Set! 8 Sets an exact page position BetweenColumns 9 Position line between columns. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position (optional) A measurement expression which specifies the exact position on a page to place the graphics line. Use this parameter if you specified Set as the Location parameter. Column Number (optional) A numeric expression which specifies which column to place the graphics line to the right of. Use this parameter if you specified BetweenColumns! as the Location parameter. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To center a graphic line horizontally on a page, the command is: GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition(Center!) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition positions a graphics line horizontally. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Horizontal Position, and selecting position. GraphicsLineLength Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnLen Syntax: GraphicsLineLength(Length) Parameters: Length A measurement expression specifying the length of a graphics line. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineDlg GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition GraphicsLineVerticalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To create a 2.5" graphics line, the command is: GraphicsLineLength(2.5") Tell Me More... GraphicsLineLength modifies the length of graphics lines. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. To use this command, the horizontal or vertical position of the graphics line may not be set to Full in the Create Graphics Line (or Edit Graphics Line) dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Length, and specifying length. GraphicsLineSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnSpac Syntax: GraphicsLineSpacing(Amount Above Line;Amount Below Line) Parameters: Amount Above Line A measurement expression specifying the amount of space above a horizontal graphics line or to the left of a vertical graphics line between the line and text. Amount Below Line (optional) A measurement expression specifying the amount of space below horizontal graphics line or to the right of a vertical graphics line between the line and text. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify .25" space above and below a graphics line, the command is: GraphicsLineSpacing(.25";.25") Tell Me More... GraphicsLineSpacing specifies the amount of white space between a graphics line and text. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. GraphicsLineSpacing is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Spacing, and specifying amount. GraphicsLineStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnSty Syntax: GraphicsLineStyle(Style) Parameters: Style Specifies a graphics line style. This command may be either a character expression specifying a user-defined graphics line style, or it can be one of the predefined types listed below. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent to specify a pre-defined type. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single line style DoubleLine! 1 Double line style DashedLine! 2 Dashed line style DottedLine! 3 Dotted line style ThickLine! 4 Thick line style ExtraThickLine 5 Extra Thick line style ThinThickLine! 6 Thin Thick line style ThickThinLine! 7 Thick Thin line style ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button Top Left line style ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button Bottom Right line style TableDefaultLine! 126 Table Default line style NoLine! 127 No line ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a dotted graphics line, the command is: GraphicsLineStyle(DottedLine!) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineStyle modifies the style of a graphics line. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. GraphicsLineStyle is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Line Style, and selecting style. GraphicsLineThickness Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnThick Syntax: GraphicsLineThickness(Width) Parameters: Width A measurement expression specifying the thickness of a graphics line. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AutoThickness! 2 WordPerfect auto selects line thickness ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To make a graphics line .75" thick, the command is: GraphicsLineThickness(.75") Tell Me More... GraphicsLineThickness specifies the width or thickness of a graphics line. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Thickness, Auto or Set; if Set, specify thickness. GraphicsLineType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnType Syntax: GraphicsLineType(Orientation) Parameters: Orientation Specifies whether a graphics line is horizontal or vertical. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Horizontal! 0 Horizontal graphics line Vertical! 1 Vertical graphics line ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a vertical graphics line, the command is: GraphicsLineType(Vertical!) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineType specifies whether a graphics line is horizontal or vertical. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Line Orientation, Horizontal or Vertical. GraphicsLineUseColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnUseClr Syntax: GraphicsLineUseColor(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether a graphics line uses a predefined line style color. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use predefined line style color. Yes! 1 Use predefined line style color ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: GraphicsLineColor GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To format a graphics line with the predefined line style color, the command is: GraphicsLineUseColor(Yes!) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineUseColor determines whether a graphics line uses the predefined line style color. When the State parameter is set to NO!, you may choose a color using GraphicsLineColor. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineColor, GraphicsLineCreate, and GraphicsLineEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, Color, Use Line Style Color or Choose Color. GraphicsLineVerticalPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphLnVertPos Syntax: GraphicsLineVerticalPosition(Location;Position) Parameters: Location Specifies the vertical location of a graphics line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Top! 1 Position line at top of page Center! 2 Center line on page Bottom! 4 Position line at bottom of page Baseline! 6 Position line at bottom of current line. FullAlign! 7 Line spans width of page Set! 8 Sets line at a precise position on page ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position (optional) A measurement expression specifying the exact position of a graphics line. Use this parameter if you specified Set! as the Location parameter. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition ──── ──── For Example... To position a vertical line at the top of a page, the command is: GraphicsLineVerticalPosition(Top!) Tell Me More... GraphicsLineVerticalPosition specifies the vertical position of a graphics line. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as GraphicsLineCreate and GraphicsLineEnd. GraphicsLineVerticalPosition is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create or Edit, and selecting a position. GraphicsScreenAutoselect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphScrAutoSel Syntax: GraphicsScreenAutoSelect Parameters: None See Also: GraphicsScreenOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... GraphicsScreenAutoSelect allows WordPerfect to select a graphics screen driver. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, Screen Type, Auto Select. GraphicsScreenOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphScrOptDlg Syntax: GraphicsScreenOptionsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... GraphicsScreenOptionsDlg displays the Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors. GraphicsScreenSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: GraphScrSel Syntax: GraphicsScreenSelect(Filename;General Type;Specific Type) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of a graphics driver. General Type A character expression specifying the name of a general screen type. Specific Type A character expression specifying the name of a specific screen type. See Also: TextScreenSelect ──── ──── For Example... To select an IBM VGA 80x25 16 color screen type, the command is: TextScreenSelect("TIBM.VRS";"IBM VGA (& compatibles)";"IBM 80x25 16 Color") Tell Me More... GraphicsScreenSelect selects a screen type for graphics mode display. This command must be used in conjunction with SetupSave. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Graphics Mode Screen Type/Colors, Screen Type, highlighting a general screen type, Select, highlighting a specific screen type, Select. HardColumnBreak Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HrdCol Syntax: HardColumnBreak Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HardColumnBreak ends a column before the bottom of a page, and moves the cursor to the top of the next column. With columns On, this command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Alignment, Hard Page. HardPageBreak Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Hpg Syntax: HardPageBreak Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HardPageBreak inserts a hard page break at the cursor position. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Alignment, Hard Page. HardPageBreakKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HpgKey Syntax: HardPageBreakKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HardPageBreakKey inserts a hard page break at the cursor position. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Alignment, Hard Page, or pressing Ctrl+Enter. HardReturn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Hrt Syntax: HardReturn Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HardReturn ends a line. This command is the equivalent of pressing Enter. HardReturnDisplayCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HrtDispChar Syntax: HardReturnDisplayCharacter("Character") Parameters: Character A character expression specifying the character to display at each hard return. ──── ──── For Example... To display a dollar sign ($) at each hard return, the command is: HardReturnDisplayCharacter("$") Tell Me More... HardReturnDisplayCharacter identifies a character to display at each hard return. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Display Characters, and entering a character. HardSpace Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HSpace Syntax: HardSpace Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Words separated by a HardSpace command are kept together on one line. This command is the equivalent of pressing Hard Space (Home, Space Bar). HeaderA Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HdrA Syntax: HeaderA(Header; Pages) Parameters: Header Determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Header A. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Cancel Create! 1 Create Edit! 2 Edit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pages Specifies pages on which Header A prints. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OddPages! 1 Odd pages EvenPages! 2 Even pages AllPages! 3 All pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To edit Header A and print it on even pages, the command is: HeaderA(Edit!;EvenPages!) Tell Me More... HeaderA determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Header A; and whether to print it on odd, even, or all pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Headers, Header A, and selecting Header A options. HeaderB Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HdrB Syntax: HeaderB(Header; Pages) Parameters: Header Determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Header B. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Cancel Create! 1 Create Edit! 2 Edit ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pages Specifies the pages on which Header B prints. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OddPages! 1 Odd pages EvenPages! 2 Even pages AllPages! 3 All pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To create Header B and print it on even pages, the command is: HeaderB(Create!;EvenPages!) Tell Me More... HeaderB determines whether to create, edit, or cancel Header B; and whether to print it on odd, even, or all pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Headers, Header B, and selecting Header B options. HeaderFooterWatermarkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HdrFtrWmarkDlg Syntax: HeaderFooterWatermarkDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... HeaderFooterWatermarkDlg displays the Header/Footer/Watermark dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark. HeaderSeparationDistance Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HeaderSepDist Syntax: HeaderSeparationDistance(Spacing) Parameters: Spacing A measurement expression specifying the amount of blank space below a header. The default is .167". ──── ──── For Example... To specify .5" blank space below headers, the command is: HeaderSeparationDistance(.5") Tell Me More... HeaderSeparationDistance sets the amount of blank space below headers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Headers, Space Above Header, and specifying a measurement. Help Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Hlp Syntax: Help Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Help displays the Help dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Help, Contents. This command is not recordable. To use this command, you must type it into the macro. HiddenText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HideTxt Syntax: HiddenText(State) Parameters: State Toggles the Hidden Text option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Not hidden text On! 1 Hidden Text ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: HiddenTextShowAll ──── ──── For Example... To create hidden text, the command is: HiddenText(On!) Tell Me More... HiddenText turns the Hidden Text option on or off. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F5 and choosing Hidden Text, Hidden Text. HiddenTextDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HideTxtDlg Syntax: HiddenTextDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... HiddenTextDlg displays the Hidden Text dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F5, Hidden Text. HiddenTextShowAll Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HideTxtShowAll Syntax: HideTextShowAll(State) Parameters: State Toggles the Show All Hidden Text option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Hides hidden text On! 1 Shows hidden text ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: HiddenText ──── ──── For Example... To show hidden text, the command is: HiddenTextShowAll(On!) Tell Me More... HiddenTextShowAll shows or hides hidden text. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F5 and choosing Hidden Text, Show All Hidden Text. HomeKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HomeKey Syntax: HomeKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... The HomeKey command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. Although Home, Right Arrow moves the cursor to the right side of the screen, the macro facility records the PosScreenRight command. The same is true of other directional commands using the HomeKey. HorizontalBarSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HorizBarSetup Syntax: HorizontalBarSetup(State) Parameters: State (optional) Determines whether to turn on the horizontal bar. If you do not specify this parameter, HorizontalBarSetup works as a toggle. To specify whether the horizontal bar is on or off, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Bar not displayed On! 1 Bar displayed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display the horizontal bar, the command is: HorizontalBarSetup(Yes!) Tell Me More... HorizontalBarSetup toggles the horizontal bar on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Horizontal Scroll Bar. HorizontalBarSetupGraphics Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HorizBarSetupGraph Syntax: HorizontalBarSetupGraphics(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the horizontal scroll bar is visible in Graphics Mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Horizontal scroll bar not visible On! 1 Horizontal scroll bar visible ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: HorizontalBarSetupText ──── ──── For Example... To allow the horizontal scroll bar to be visible while in Graphics Mode, the command is: HorizontalBarSetupGraphics(On!) Tell Me More... HorizontalBarSetupGraphics determines whether the horizontal scroll bar is visible while the program display is in Graphics Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Window Options, Hor. Scroll Bar (Graphics). HorizontalBarSetupText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HorizBarSetupTxt Syntax: HorizontalBarSetupText(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the horizontal scroll bar is visible in Text Mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Horizontal scroll bar not visible On! 1 Horizontal scroll bar visible ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: HorizontalBarSetupGraphics ──── ──── For Example... To allow the horizontal scroll bar to be visible while in Text Mode, the command is: HorizontalBarSetupText(On!) Tell Me More... HorizontalBarSetupText determines whether the horizontal scroll bar is visible while the program display is in Text Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Window Options, Hor. Scroll Bar (Text). Hypertext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HypTxt Syntax: Hypertext(State) Parameters: State Determines whether hypertext is active. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Inactive! 0 Hypertext not active Active! 1 Hypertext active ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To activate hypertext, the command is: Hypertext(Active!) Tell Me More... Hypertext activates all hypertext links. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Hypertext is Active. HypertextCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HypTxtCre Syntax: HypertextCreate(Hypertext Link; "Document/Macro Link"; "Current Document Link"; Hypertext Identifier) Parameters: Hypertext Link Determines whether to jump to a bookmark or run a macro. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ GoToBookmark! 0 Jump to bookmark RunMacro! 1 Run macro ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Document/Macro Link A character expression specifying the name of a macro or document where a bookmark is located. Current Document Link A character expression specifying the name of a bookmark within a current document. Hypertext Identifier Determines whether a hypertext link is displayed highlighted or as a button. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ HighlightedText! 0 Highlighted Button! 1 Button ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: HypertextJumpRun ──── ──── For Example... To create a hypertext link to a bookmark named Test Link in a document named TEST.DOC, and display the link as a button, the command is: HypertextCreate(GoToBookmark!;"C:\WP60\TEST.DOC";"Test Link";Button!) Tell Me More... HypertextCreate identifies a hypertext link type, the location of a bookmark, and whether to identify the hypertext link as highlighted text or as a button. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Create Link, selecting options, and entering a Bookmark or Macro name. HypertextDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HypTxtDel Syntax: HypertextDelete Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HypertextDelete deletes a hypertext link. With the cursor on the link, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Delete Link(s). HypertextDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HypTxtDlg Syntax: HypertextDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... HypertextDlg displays the Hypertext dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext. HypertextEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HypTxtEd Syntax: HypertextEdit(Hypertext Link; "Document/Macro Link"; "Current Document Link"; Hypertext Identifier) Parameters: Hypertext Link Determines whether the hypertext link to edit is to a bookmark or a macro. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ GoToBookmark! 0 Bookmark RunMacro! 1 Macro ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Document/Macro Link A character expression specifying the name of a macro or document where a bookmark is located. Current Document Link A character expression specifying the name of a bookmark. Hypertext Identifier Determines whether a hypertext link is highlighted or is displayed as a button. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ HighlightedText! 0 Display as highlighted text Button! 1 Display as a button ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To edit a hypertext link named Test Link in a document named TEST.DOC, the command is: HypertextEdit(GoToBookmark!;"C:\WP60\TEST.DOC";"Test Link"; Button!) Tell Me More... HypertextEdit identifies the type of hypertext link to edit, the location of its bookmark, and whether to identify the hypertext link as highlighted text or as a button. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Edit Link, and editing options. HypertextJumpRun Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HypTxtJumpRun Syntax: HyperTextJumpRun Parameters: None See Also: HypertextCreate ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HypertextJumpRun jumps from a link to a bookmark, or runs a macro. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Jump/Run. HypertextNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyptxtNext Syntax: HypertextNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HypertextNext advances to the next hypertext link in a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Go to Next Link. HypertextPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyptxtPrev Syntax: HypertextPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HypertextPrevious returns to the previous hypertext link in a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Go to Previous Link. HypertextReturnFrom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyptxtRetFrom Syntax: HypertextReturnFrom Parameters: None See Also: HypertextJumpRun ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HypertextReturnFrom returns from a bookmark to the bookmark's hypertext link. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Hypertext, Return from Jump. Hyphenation Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Hyph Syntax: Hyphenation(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to turn on hyphenation. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Hyphenation Off On! 1 Hyphenation On ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: HyphenationIgnore ──── ──── For Example... To turn hyphenation on, the command is: Hyphenation(On!) Tell Me More... Hyphenation determines whether to turn on hyphenation. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Hyphenation. HyphenationIgnore Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyphIgn Syntax: HyphenationIgnore Parameters: None See Also: Hyphenation ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HyphenationIgnore determines whether to cancel hyphenation for a particular word. This command is the equivalent of moving to the first letter of a word, pressing Home, and then typing Slash (/). HyphenationPrompt Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyphPrompt Syntax: HyphenationPrompt(Prompt) Parameters: Prompt Specifies a hyphenation prompt. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Never! 0 Do not prompt WhenRequired! 1 Prompt when required Always! 2 Prompt always ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To stop at each word to be hyphenated, and display the prompt "Position Hyphen; Press ESC", the command is: HyphenationPrompt(Always!) Tell Me More... HyphenationPrompt specifies the prompt action when a word is hyphenated. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Prompt for Hyphenation, and selecting options. HyphenationSoftReturn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyphSRt Syntax: HyphenationSoftReturn Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... HyphenationSoftReturn inserts an Invisible Soft Return at the cursor position. It indicates where a line is broken when the Invisible Soft Return is within the hyphenation zone. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Enter. HyphenationZoneLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyphZoneLft Syntax: HyphenationZoneLeft(Left Zone) Parameters: Left Zone A numeric expression specifying the lower limit of a hyphenation zone. See Also: HyphenationZoneRight ──── ──── For Example... To set the lower limit of a hyphenation zone to 10%, the command is: HyphenationZoneLeft(10) Tell Me More... HyphenationZoneLeft sets the lower limit of a hyphenation zone; the zone specifies where a word is to be hyphenated. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Hyphenation Zone, and specifying a percentage. HyphenationZoneRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: HyphZoneRgt Syntax: HyphenationZoneRight(Right Zone) Parameters: Right Zone A numeric expression setting the upper limit of a hyphenation zone. See Also: HyphenationZoneLeft ──── ──── For Example... To set the upper limit of a hyphenation zone to 4%, the command is: HyphenationZoneRight(4) Tell Me More... HyphenationZoneRight sets the upper limit of a hyphenation zone; the zone specifies where a word is to be hyphenated. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Hyphenation Zone, and specifying a percentage. Indent Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Indent Syntax: Indent Parameters: None See Also: IndentLeftRight ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Indent indents all lines in a paragraph without changing the current margin settings. This command is the equivalent of pressing Indent (F4). IndentLeftRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: IndentLftRgt Syntax: IndentLeftRight Parameters: None See Also: Indent ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... IndentLeftRight indents both left and right margins of all lines in a paragraph. This command is the equivalent of pressing Indent (Shift-F4). IndexDefinition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: IndDef Syntax: IndexDefinition(Heading Style;Subheading Style;Numbering Mode;Combine Sequential Page Numbers;Concordance Filename;Page Number Format) Parameters: Heading Style Specifies the style of an index heading. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Subheading Style Specifies the style of an index subheading. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. See the table under Heading Style above for a list of enumerated types. Numbering Mode Specifies the method of displaying a page number after a heading. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefNone! 0 No number DefFollows! 1 Follows heading DefParentheses! 2 In parentheses DefFlushRight! 3 Flush Right DefLeader! 4 Flush Right with dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Combine Sequential Page Numbers Designates whether sequential page numbers are combined (for example, 51-53) or remain separate (for example, 51, 52, 53). Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoCombine! 0 Does not combine numbers Combine! 1 Combines numbers ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Concordance Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the filename of a concordance file. Page Number Format (optional) A character expression specifying an index page number format. If you leave this parameter blank, page numbers are formatted as they are in your document. See Also: IndexMark IndexMarkDlg ──── ──── For Example... To define an index with normal heading styles, numbers flush right, sequential numbers combined, without a concordance filename, and page numbering format the same as the document, the command is: IndexDefinition(Index1Style!;Index2!Style;DefFlushRight!;Combine! ) Tell Me More... IndexDefinition specifies an index format. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Index, Define, and selecting options. IndexDefinitionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: IndDefDlg Syntax: IndexDefinitionDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... IndexDefinitionDlg displays the Define Index dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Index, Define. NEST Show Me An Example... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── NEST temporarily transfers control from the current macro to another macro. The transfer occurs when this command is encountered in the current macro. When the nested macro is complete, control returns to the parent macro and continues. Syntax: NEST("Macro") Parameters: Macro A character expression specifying the macro to nest. The path and .WPM extension are optional. See Also: CHAIN ──── ──── IndexMark Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: IndMark Syntax: IndexMark(Heading;Subheading) Parameters: Heading (optional) Specifies an index heading. Subheading (optional) Specifies an index subheading. See Also: IndexDefinition IndexMarkDlg ──── ──── For Example... To insert an index code for "Ham, baked," the command is: IndexMark("Ham";"baked") Tell Me More... IndexMark marks text to index. This command is equivalent of choosing Tools, Index, Mark, and entering a heading and subheading. IndexMarkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: IndMarkDlg Syntax: IndexMarkDlg Parameters: None See Also: IndexDefinition IndexMark ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... IndexMarkDlg displays the Mark Index dialog box. This command is equivalent of choosing Tools, Index, Mark. InitialCodesDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: InitCodesDoc Syntax: InitialCodesDoc Parameters: None See Also: InitialCodesDocDlg InitialCodesSetup InitialCodesSetupDlg SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... To change the document paper size to Letter (Landscape) in Initial Codes, the command sequence is: InitialCodesDoc PaperSizeSelect("Letter (Landscape)") SubstructureExit Tell Me More... InitialCodesDoc designates the beginning of the Initial Codes for a document. All codes between InitialCodesDoc and SubstructureExit are placed in the Initial Codes section of the document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Document Initial Codes. InitialCodesDocDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: InitCodesDocDlg Syntax: InitialCodesDocDlg Parameters: None See Also: InitialCodesDoc InitialCodesSetup InitialCodesSetupDlg SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... InitialCodesDocDlg displays the Initial Codes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Document Initial Codes. InitialCodesSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: InitCodesSetup Syntax: InitialCodesSetup Parameters: None See Also: InitialCodesDoc InitialCodesDocDlg InitialCodesSetupDlg SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... To insert a LineSpacing(2.0) command in Setup Initial Codes, the command sequence is: InitialCodesSetup LineSpacing(2.0) SubstructureExit Tell Me More... InitialCodesSetup designates the beginning of the Initial Codes Setup codes. All codes between InitialCodesSetup and SubstructureExit are stored as part of the Initial Codes Setup. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Initial Codes Setup. InitialCodesSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: InitCodesSetupDlg Syntax: InitialCodesSetupDlg Parameters: None See Also: InitialCodesDoc InitialCodesDocDlg InitialCodesSetup SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... InitialCodesSetupDlg displays the Initial Codes Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Initial Codes Setup. InsertFilename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: InsFilename Syntax: InsertFilename Parameters: None See Also: InsertFilenameWithPath ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... InsertFilename inserts the current filename at the cursor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, InsertFilename, InsertFilename. InsertFilenameWithPath Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: FilenameWithPath Syntax: InsertFilenameWithPath Parameters: None See Also: InsertFilename ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... InsertFilenameWithPath inserts the current filename and path at the cursor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Insert Filename, Insert Path and Filename. ItalicsKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ItalicsKey Syntax: ItalicsKey Parameters: None See Also: AttributeAppearanceOn AttributeAppearanceOff ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ItalicsKey turns italics on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing Fonts, Italics. ItemDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ItemDn Syntax: ItemDown Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ItemDown moves the cursor down one section or cell in tables and paragraph numbering. This command is the equivalent of pressing Item Down (Alt+Down Arrow). ItemLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ItemLft Syntax: ItemLeft Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ItemLeft moves the cursor left one section, column, or cell in tables and paragraph numbering. This command is the equivalent of pressing Item Left (Alt+Left Arrow). ItemRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ItemRgt Syntax: ItemRight Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ItemRight moves the cursor right one section, column, or cell in tables and paragraph numbering. This command is the equivalent of pressing Item Right (Alt+Right Arrow). ItemUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ItemUp Syntax: ItemUp Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ItemUp moves the cursor up one section or cell in tables and paragraph numbering. This command is the equivalent of pressing Item Up (Alt+Up Arrow). Justification Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Just Syntax: Justification(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies text justification. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left Full! 1 Full Center! 2 Center Right! 3 Right FullAll! 4 Full, All Lines DecAlign! 5 Decimal Align ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To center all subsequent lines of text, the command is: Justification(Center!) Tell Me More... Justification aligns text on right or left margins, both margins, or centered between margins. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Justification, and selecting a type. Kerning Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Kern Syntax: Kerning(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to turn on or turn off Kerning. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Turns kerning off On! 1 Turns kerning on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn kerning on, the command is: Kerning(On!) Tell Me More... Kerning reduces the space between some printed characters if a kerning table exists for the current font. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Printer Functions, Kerning. KeyboardCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdCopy Syntax: KeyboardCopy("From";"To") Parameters: From A character expression specifying the filename of a keyboard file to copy from. To A character expression specifying the filename of a keyboard file to copy to. See Also: KeyboardCreate KeyboardDelete KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardOriginal KeyboardRename KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... To copy a keyboard file named MYKEYBRD to a file named NEWKYBRD, the command is: KeyboardCopy("MYKEYBRD";"NEWKYBRD") Tell Me More... KeyboardCopy creates a copy of a keyboard file. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard Layout, selecting a layout, and choosing Copy. KeyboardCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdCre Syntax: KeyboardCreate(filename) Parameters: Filename A character expression naming a new keyboard file. See Also: KeyboardCopy KeyboardDelete KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardOriginal KeyboardRename KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... To create a keyboard file named MYKEYBRD, the command is: KeyboardCreate("MYKEYBRD") Tell Me More... KeyboardCreate creates a keyboard file. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard Layout, Create, and entering a name. KeyboardDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdDel Syntax: KeyboardDelete(Filename) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying a keyboard file to delete. See Also: KeyboardCopy KeyboardCreate KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardOriginal KeyboardRename KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... To delete a keyboard file named MYKEYBRD, the command is: KeyboardDelete("MYKEYBRD") Tell Me More... KeyboardDelete deletes a keyboard file. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard Layout, selecting a layout, and choosing Delete. KeyboardLayoutDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdLayoutDlg Syntax: KeyboardLayoutDlg Parameters: None See Also: KeyboardCopy KeyboardCreate KeyboardDelete KeyboardOriginal KeyboardRename KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... KeyboardLayoutDlg displays the Keyboard Layout dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard Layout. KeyboardOriginal Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdOrig Syntax: KeyboardOriginal(Equation) Parameters: Equation (Optional) Selects the original keyboard definition as the Equation Editor keyboard. Select Equation! or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Equation! 4 Equation Editor keyboard ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: KeyboardCopy KeyboardCreate KeyboardDelete KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardRename KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... To select the original keyboard definition as the normal keyboard, the command is: KeyboardOriginal To select the original keyboard definition as the Equation Editor keyboard, the command is: KeyboardOriginal(Equation!) Tell Me More... KeyboardOriginal selects the original keyboard definition as the normal keyboard or the Equation Editor keyboard. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard Layout, and selecting the original keyboard definition; or, choosing File, Settings, Keyboard and selecting the original keyboard definition in the Equation Editor. KeyboardRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdRen Syntax: KeyboardRename(From;To) Parameters: From A character expression specifying the original filename of a keyboard file to rename. To A character expression specifying the new filename of a keyboard file to rename. See Also: KeyboardCopy KeyboardCreate KeyboardDelete KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardOriginal KeyboardSelect ──── ──── For Example... To rename a keyboard file named MYKEYBRD to NEWKYBRD, the command is: KeyboardRename("MYKEYBRD";"NEWKYBRD") Tell Me More... KeyboardRename renames a keyboard. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard Layout, highlighting a keyboard, Rename, entering a new name. KeyboardSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: KbdSel Syntax: KeyboardSelect(Filename;Equation) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the filename of a keyboard file to select. Equation (optional) Specifies a keyboard definition for the Equation Editor keyboard. Select Equation! or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Equation! 4 Equation Editor keyboard ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: KeyboardCopy KeyboardCreate KeyboardDelete KeyboardLayoutDlg KeyboardOriginal KeyboardRename ──── ──── For Example... To select a keyboard file named MYKEYBRD for the normal keyboard, the command is: KeyboardSelect("MYKEYBRD") To select a keyboard file named MYKEYBRD for the Equation Editor, the command is: KeyboardSelect("MYKEYBRD";Equation!) Tell Me More... KeyboardSelect selects a keyboard file for the normal keyboard or Equation Editor keyboard. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Keyboard, and selecting a keyboard definition for the normal keyboard; or choosing File, Settings, Keyboard and selecting a keyboard definition in the Equation Editor. LabelsDefine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblDef Syntax: LabelsDefine("Filename";"Labels Name";Label Type;Page Width;Page Length;Columns;Rows;Label Width;Label Length;Left Offset;Top Offset;Between Rows;Between Columns;Left Margin;Right Margin;Top Margin;Bottom Margin) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying an existing filename where customized labels are saved. Labels Name A character expression specifying a label's name. Label Type A character expression which determines whether the labels displayed in the Labels dialog box are for laser or tractor-feed printers, or both. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Laser! 1 Display only laser labels TractorFed! 2 Display only tractor-fed labels LaserAndTractorFed! 3 Display both types of labels ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Page Width A measurement expression specifying the width of a page of labels. Page Length A measurement expression specifying the length of a page of labels. Columns A numeric expression specifying the number of label columns on a page. Hint: Columns run down the page and are counted across the page. Rows A numeric expression specifying the number of label rows on a page. Hint: Rows run across the page and are counted down the page. Label Width A measurement expression specifying the width of an individual label. Label Length A measurement expression specifying the length of an individual label. Left Offset A measurement expression specifying the distance between the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first column of labels. Top Offset A measurement expression specifying the distance from the top edge of the page to the top edge of the first row of labels. Between Rows A measurement expression specifying the distance between rows of labels. Between Columns A measurement expression specifying the distance between columns of labels. Left Margin A measurement expression specifying the left margin of each individual label. Right Margin A measurement expression specifying the right margin of each individual label. Top Margin A measurement expression specifying the top margin of each individual label. Bottom Margin A measurement expression specifying the bottom margin of each individual label. See Also: LabelsDisplay LabelsFileDescription LabelsSelect ──── ──── For Example... To create a labels paper size/type named My Labels with 3 columns and 10 rows on an 8.5" x 11" sheet, the command is: LabelsDefine("WP_WP_US.LAB";"My Labels";Laser!; 8.5";11";3;10;2.63";1";0.188";0.5";0.125";0";0";0";0";0") Tell Me More... LabelsDefine creates a customized labels definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, Create, entering a label description, specifying measurements, and selecting label type. LabelsDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblDel Syntax: LabelsDelete("Filename";"Labels Name") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying a labels file containing a labels definition to delete. Labels Name A character expression specifying the name of labels to delete. ──── ──── For Example... To delete a labels definition named My Labels, the command is: LabelsDelete("WP_WP_US.LAB";"My Labels") Tell Me More... LabelsDelete deletes a labels definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, and selecting a labels definition in the Labels list box, Delete. LabelsDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblDisp Syntax: LabelsDisplay(Label Type) Parameters: Label Type Specifies the type of labels to display in the Label File dialog box. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Laser! 1 Display only laser labels TractorFed! 2 Display only tractor-fed labels LaserAndTractorFed! 3 Display both types of labels ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display only tractor-fed labels in the Labels dialog box, the command is: LabelsDisplay(TractorFed!) Tell Me More... LabelsDisplay specifies the type of labels displayed in the Labels dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, choosing between Display Laser, Display Tractor-Fed, or Display Both. LabelsFileCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblFileCre Syntax: LabelsFileCreate("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the full path of a new label file. See Also: LabelsFileDescription LabelsFileSelect ──── ──── For Example... To create a labels file named CUSTOM.LAB in the C:\WP60 directory, the command is: LabelsFileCreate("C:\WP60\CUSTOM.LAB") Tell Me More... LabelsFileCreate creates a labels file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, Label File, Create, and entering a filename. LabelsFileDescription Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblFileDesc Syntax: LabelsFileDescription("Filename";"Description") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the full pathname of a labels file. If the label file specified does not exist, a Not Found condition is generated. Description A character expression specifying a description to add to a labels file. See Also: LabelsFileCreate LabelsFileSelect ──── ──── For Example... To add the description Label Library to a labels file named CUSTOM.LAB, the command is: LabelsFileDescription("C:\WP60\CUSTOM.LAB";"Label Library") Tell Me More... LabelsFileDescription adds a description to an existing labels file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, Label File, selecting a labels file, Edit, and entering a description. LabelsFileSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblFileSel Syntax: LabelsFileSelect("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the complete pathname of a labels file to select. See Also: LabelsFileDescription ──── ──── For Example... To select a labels file named CUSTOM.LAB, the command is: LabelsFileSelect("C:\WP60\CUSTOM.LAB") Tell Me More... LabelsFileSelect selects a labels file. The label definitions contained in the labels file are displayed in the Labels list box in the Labels dialog box. If the filename specified does not exist, this command has no effect. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, Label File, highlighting a labels file, Select. LabelsOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblOff Syntax: LabelsOff Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... LabelsOff discontinues the labels definition, starts a new page, and selects an 8.5" x 11" portrait paper size/type. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, Labels Off. LabelsSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LblSel Syntax: LabelsSelect("Filename";"Labels Name") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the full pathname of a label definition to select. Labels Name A character expression specifying the name of the label definition selected. ──── ──── For Example... To select a label definition named My Labels from the default WordPerfect labels file named WP_WP_US.LAB, the command is: LabelsSelect("C:\WP60\WP_WP_US.LAB";"My Labels") Tell Me More... LabelsSelect selects a label definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Labels, highlighting a label definition paper size/type from the Labels list box, Select. Language Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Lang Syntax: Language("Language Code") Parameters: Language Code A two-character character expression specifying the language of a document or section of text. ──── ──── For Example... To specify Spanish as the language of a section of text, the command is: Language("ES") Tell Me More... Language specifies the language used for a document or section of text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Language, and selecting a language. LanguageSelectDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LangSelDlg Syntax: LanguageSelectDlg Parameters: None See Also: Language ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LanguageSelectDlg displays the Select Language dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Language. Leading Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Leading Syntax: Leading(Amount) Parameters: Amount A measurement expression specifying leading adjustment. ──── ──── For Example... To specify a leading adjustment of 0.1", the command is: Leading(0.1") Tell Me More... Leading specifies leading adjustment. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Printer Functions, Leading Adjustment, and specifying a leading adjustment. LeftArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LftArr Syntax: LeftArrow Parameters: None See Also: RightArrow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... LeftArrow moves an equation left in the View Equation window of the Equation Editor. This command is the equivalent of pressing the left arrow key () while focus is on the View Equation window in the Equation Editor. This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type is in the macro. LineCreateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnCreDlg Syntax: LineCreateDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LineCreateDlg displays the Create Graphics Line dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Create. LineDrawArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnDrawArr Syntax: LineDrawArrow(Key) Parameters: Key Specifies a key or key combination to draw a line segment. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UpArrow! 23 Line segment drawn one space up. RightArrow! 24 Line segment drawn one space to the right. LeftArrow! 25 Line segment drawn one space to the left. DownArrow! 26 Line segment drawn one space down. End! 85 Line segment drawn to end of line HomeUpArrow! 87 Line segment drawn to top of screen. HomeRightArrow! 88 Line segment drawn to right page margin, cell margin, or column margin. HomeLeftArrow! 89 Line segment drawn to left of page margin, cell margin, or column margin. HomeDownArrow! 90 Line segment drawn to bottom of screen. HomeHomeUpArrow! 151 Line segment drawn to top of document. HomeHomeRightArrow! 152 Line segment drawn to end of line after codes. HomeHomeLeftArrow! 153 Line segment drawn to beginning of line before codes. HomeHomeDownArrow! 154 Line segment drawn to beginning of line before codes. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LineDrawChange LineDrawDlg ──── ──── For Example... To draw a line from the cursor position to the right margin, the command is: LineDrawArrow(HomeRightArrow!) or LineDrawArrow(88) Tell Me More... LineDrawArrow draws a line segment using Line Draw. This command is the equivalent of pressing End, an arrow key, or Home+Arrow Key combination in Line Draw. LineDrawChange Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnDrawChange Syntax: LineDrawChange(Mode;Type) Parameters: Mode Specifies the current line draw mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ModeInsert! 0 Insert Mode ModeMove! 2 Cursor can move without drawing a line. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Type Specifies a line draw character. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Erase! 0 Erases a line segment Single! 1 Draws a single line Double! 2 Draws a double line Solid! 255 Draws a line using a character ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To draw a double line using Line Draw, the command is: LineDrawChange(ModeInsert!;DoubleLine!) Tell Me More... LineDrawChange specifies a line draw character. LineDrawDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnDrawDlg Syntax: LineDrawDlg Parameters: None See Also: LineDrawArrow LineDrawChange ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LineDrawDlg displays the Line Draw dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Line Draw. LineDrawSolidCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnDrawSolidChar Syntax: LineDrawSolidCharacter("Character") Parameters: Character A character expression specifying a character with which a line is drawn. See Also: LineDrawChange ──── ──── For Example... To specify the pound sign as a line draw character, the command is: LineDrawSolidCharacter(" ──── ──── For Example... To specify the pound sign as a line draw character, the command is: LineDrawSolidCharacter("#") Tell Me More... LineDrawSolidCharacter specifies which character Line Draw uses when drawing lines. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Line Draw, Change, and selecting an option. LineEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnEdDlg Syntax: LineEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: LineCreateDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with thte steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LineEditDlg displays the Select Graphics Line To Edit dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Edit. LineHeight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnHgt Syntax: LineHeight(Height) Parameters: Height A measurement expression specifying a fixed line height. You may also let WordPerfect decide the line height based on the current font by using Auto. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Auto! 0 WordPerfect auto- selects line height ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify a line height of .275", the command is: LineHeight(.275") Tell Me More... LineHeight specifies line height. Line height is measured from baseline to baseline in single-spaced text. Auto line height configures line height as the point size of the font you are using, plus two points. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Line Height, Fixed, and specifying a measurement. LineNumbering Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnNum Syntax: LineNumbering(State;Restart;Blank Lines; Columns;Relative Position; Position;First Printed Number;Interval;Values; Font;Point Size;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value;{Attributes}) Parameters: State Determines whether line numbering is on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Line Numbering Off On! 1 Line Numbering On Restart (optional) Determines whether line numbering is continuous or restarted on each page. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DontRestartNumbersEachPage! 0 RestartNumbersEachPage! 1 Blank Lines (optional) Determines whether blank lines are counted in line numbering. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DontCountBlankLines! 0 CountBlankLines! 1 Columns (optional) Determines whether lines in newspaper columns are numbered. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DontNumberAllNewspaperColumns! 0 NumberAllNewspaperColumns! 1 Relative Position (optional) Determines whether the measurement given in the Position parameter is measured from the left edge of a page or the margin. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PosNumberFromLeftEdgeOfPage! 0 PosNumberRelativeToText! 1 Position (optional) A measurement expression specifying where the line number prints. First Printed Number (optional) A numeric expression specifying the first line number to print. Interval (optional) A numeric expression specifying the numbering interval. Values (optional) Determines whether a line numbering font uses a document's initial font attributes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UseDefaultValues! 0 DontUseDefaultValues! 1 Font (optional) A character expression specifying the line number font. Used only when the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Point Size (optional) A measurement expression specifying the point size of a line number font. Used only when the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Used only when the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. The values of a selected color are available in the Color Selection dialog box. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a color. See the parameter description for "Red Value" above. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color. See the parameter description for "Red Value" above. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of a color. Value ranges from 0 to 100. Used only when the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Attributes Specifies attributes and relative size of a font. Attributes are separated by semicolons and enclosed in a pair of braces ({}). Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 VeryLarge! 1 Large! 2 Small! 3 Fine! 4 Superscript! 5 Subscript! 6 Outline! 7 Italics! 8 Shadow! 9 Redline! 10 DoubleUnderline! 11 Bold! 12 Strikeout! 13 Underline! 14 SmallCaps! 15 Every! 16 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LineNumberSet LineNumberingMethod ──── ──── For Example... To number lines with an extra large, shadowed, double underlined, bold font, the command is: LineNumbering(On!;;;;;;;;DontUseDefaultValues!;;;;;;; {ExtraLarge!;Shadow!;DoubleUnderline!;Bold!}) or LineNumbering(1;;;;;;;;1;;;;;;;{0;9;11;12}) Tell Me More... LineNumbering turns on Line Numbering. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Line Numbering, and selecting options in the Line Numbering Format dialog box LineNumberingMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnNumMeth Syntax: LineNumberingMethod(Numbering Method) Parameters: Numbering Method Specifies a numbering method for Line Numbering. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Use numbers to number lines LowerLetters! 1 Lower-case letters UpperLetters! 2 Upper-case letters LowerRoman! 3 Lower-case roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Upper-case roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LineNumberSet LineNumbering ──── ──── For Example... To specify uppercase letters as the Line Numbering method, the command is: LineNumberingMethod(UpperLetters!) Tell Me More... LineNumberingMethod specifies a numbering method for Line Numbering. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Line Numbering, Numbering Method, selecting an option. LineNumberSet Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnNumSet Syntax: LineNumberSet(Starting Number) Parameters: Starting Number A numeric expression specifying a beginning line number. See Also: LineNumbering LineNumberingMethod ──── ──── For Example... To have line numbering consider the first line on the page line 5, the command is: LineNumberSet(5) Tell Me More... LineNumberSet specifies the beginning line number on a page. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Line Numbering, Starting Line Number, and entering a number. LineSegmentColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegClr Syntax: LineSegmentColor("Color";Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Color A character expression specifying the name of a color. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Value ranges from 0 to 255. The values of a selected color are available in the Color Selection dialog box. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a color. See the parameter description for "Red Value" above. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color. See the parameter description for "Red Value" above. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of a color. Value ranges from 0 to 100. See Also: LineSegmentCreate LineStyleEdit LineSegmentEnd LineStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify a blue line segment, the command is: LineSegmentColor("Blue";0;0;255;100) Tell Me More... LineSegmentColor specifies the color of a table line segment. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineSegmentCreate and LineSegmentEnd. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F9, Graphics Lines, Styles, selecting a Line Style, Edit, Color, and selecting a color. LineSegmentCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegCre Syntax: LineSegmentCreate(Position) Parameters: Position A numeric expression specifying where a line segment is created or stacked. The first (inside) position is 0. See Also: LineSegmentDelete LineStyleEdit TableEdit LineSegmentEnd ──── ──── For Example... To stack a line in the first (inside) position, the command is: LineSegmentCreate(0) Tell Me More... LineSegmentCreate creates a line segment with multiple lines, or a stacked line style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineStyleCreate and LineStyleEdit. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F9, Graphics Lines, Styles, Lines/Fill; and selecting and specifying line style options. LineSegmentDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegDel Syntax: LineSegmentDelete(Position) Parameters: Position A numeric expression specifying where to delete a stacked line. The first (inside) position is 0. See Also: LineSegmentCreate LineStyleEdit LineStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To delete an inside stacked line of a border, the command is: LineSegmentDelete(0) Tell Me More... LineSegmentDelete deletes a stacked line segment. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineStyleEdit and LineSegmentEnd. This command is the equivalent of Alt+F9, Graphics Lines, Styles, selecting a Line Style, Edit, Delete. LineSegmentEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegEd Syntax: LineSegmentEdit(Position) Parameters: Position A numeric expression specifying a line to edit. The first (inside) position is 0. See Also: LineSegmentColor LineSegmentEnd LineSegmentSpacing LineSegmentWidth ──── ──── For Example... To edit an inside stacked line, the command is: LineSegmentEdit(0) Tell Me More... LineSegmentEdit edits a table line segment. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineSegmentEnd. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F9, Graphics Lines, Styles, and selecting a Line Style, Edit. LineSegmentEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegEnd Syntax: LineSegmentEnd(State) Parameters: State Determines whether changes to a line segment are saved. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Don't save changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LineSegmentCreate LineSegmentEdit ──── ──── For Example... To save changes made to a line segment, the command is: LineSegmentEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... LineSegmentEnd ends a series of commands modifying a line segment. This command is used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineSegmentCreate. This command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel in the Edit Line Styles (or Create Line Styles) dialog box. LineSegmentSetUser Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegSetU Syntax: LineSegmentSetUser(Dash/Space) Parameters: Dash/Space A numeric expression specifying a number of dash/space lengths in a custom line segment. See Also: LineSegmentSetUserData LineSegmentSetUserEnd LineSegmentSetWPG2 ──── ──── For Example... To create a line segment with one dash length and one space length, the command sequence is: LineSegmentSetUser(2) LineSegmentSetUserData(0.2") LineSegmentSetUserData(O.1") LineSegmentSetUserEnd Tell Me More... LineSegmentSetUser specifies a number of dash/space lengths in a custom line segment. This command must be followed by the number of LineSegmentSetUserData tokens for the number of dash/space lengths specified. LineSegmentSetUserData Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegSetUD Syntax: LineSegmentSetUserData(Length) Parameters: Length A measurement expression specifying a dash or space length in a custom line pattern. See Also: LineSegmentSetUser LineSegmentSetUserEnd LineSegmentSetWPG2 ──── ──── For Example... To create a line segment with one dash length and one space length, the command sequence is: LineSegmentSetUser(2) LineSegmentSetUserData(0.2") LineSegmentSetUserData(O.1") LineSegmentSetUserEnd Tell Me More... LineSegmentSetUserData specifies a dash or space length in a custom line pattern. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineSegmentSetUser, and LineSegmentEnd. LineSegmentSetUserEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegSetUE Syntax: LineSegmentSetUserEnd Parameters: None See Also: LineSegmentSetUser LineSegmentSetUserData LineSegmentSetWPG2 ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... LineSegmentSetUserEnd marks the end of a custom line pattern command sequence. LineSegmentSetWPG2 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegSetW Syntax: LineSegmentSetWPG2(Pattern Set;Line Pattern Number) Parameters: Pattern Set A numeric expression specifying a pattern set. Currently, the only valid entry for this parameter is 0. Line Pattern Number Specifies which line pattern for the selected set to use. See Also: LineSegmentSetUser LineSegmentSetUserData LineSegmentSetUserEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... LineSegmentSetWPG2 sets a pattern of a line segment to one of the predefined WPG2 line patterns. LineSegmentSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegSpac Syntax: LineSegmentSpacing(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying a distance between line segments. ──── ──── For Example... To set the distance between line segments at 0.5", the command is: LineSegmentSpacing(0.5") Tell Me More... LineSegmentSpacing sets the distance between line segments. LineSegmentWidth Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSegWid Syntax: LineSegmentWidth(Width) Parameters: Width A measurement expression specifying the width or thickness of a graphics line segment. See Also: LineSegmentCreate LineSegmentEdit LineSegmentEnd ──── ──── For Example... To set the width of a line segment at 0.2", the command is: LineSegmentWidth(0.2") Tell Me More... LineSegmentWidth specifies the width or thickness of a graphics line segment. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineSegmentCreate and LineSegmentEnd. When creating or editing tables, graphics, graphics lines, or borders, this command is the equivalent of specifying thickness in the Edit Line Styles (or Create Line Styles) dialog box. LineSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnSpac Syntax: LineSpacing(Spacing) Parameters: Spacing A numeric expression specifying line spacing. ──── ──── For Example... To specify single-spaced line spacing, the command is: LineSpacing(1.0) Tell Me More... LineSpacing specifies the vertical spacing between lines in your document. When this command is recorded, the tenths position is used; when entering this command in a macro, tenths is optional. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Line Spacing, and specifying a line spacing. LineStyleCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyCopy Syntax: LineStyleCopy(Line;Source Library;Recipient Library;"New Name") Parameters: Line Specifies a line to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Copy a single line DoubleLine! 1 Copy a double line DashedLine! 2 Copy a dashed line DottedLine! 3 Copy a dotted line ThickLine! 4 Copy a thick line ExtraThickLine! 5 Copy an extra thick line ThinThickLine! 6 Copy a thin thick line ThickThinLine! 7 Copy a thick thin line ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Copy a button top left line ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Copy button bottom right line TableDefaultLine! 126 Copy table default line NoLine! 127 No line Source Library Specifies a library from which to copy a line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Copies from current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Copies from a personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Copies from a shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Recipient Library Specifies a library to which a line is copied. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Copies to the current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Copies to a personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Copies to a shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ New Name (optional) A character expression specifying a new name of a line. See Also: GraphicsLineCreate GraphicsLineEdit GraphicsLineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To copy the attributes of a line named Single Line in a personal library to a newly created line named New Line in the current document, the command is: LineStyleCopy(SingleLine!;PersonalLibrary!;CurrentDoc!;"New Line") Tell Me More... LineStyleCopy copies attributes from one line to another. This command is the equivalent of copying in a Line Styles dialog box. This feature is available in Tables, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. LineStyleCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyCre Syntax: LineStyleCreate("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression naming a new line style. See Also: LineStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a line style named Custom, the command is: LineStyleCreate("Custom") Tell Me More... LineStyleCreate creates a line style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of creating a line style in a Line Styles dialog box. This feature is available in Tables, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. LineStyleDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyDel Syntax: LineStyleDelete("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a line style to delete. ──── ──── For Example... To delete a line style named Custom, the command is: LineStyleDelete("Custom") Tell Me More... LineStyleDelete deletes a line style. This command is the equivalent of deleting a line style in a Line Styles dialog box. You may not delete Line styles which shipped with the program. The Lines Styles dialog box is available in Tables, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. LineStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyDlg Syntax: LineStyleDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LineStyleDlg displays the Line Styles dialog box. Changes made in this dialog box effect line styles available in Tables, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Styles. LineStyleEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyEd Syntax: LineStyleEdit(Line) Parameters: Line Specifies a line style to edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Edit a single line style DoubleLine! 1 Edit a double line style DashedLine! 2 Edit a dashed line style DottedLine! 3 Edit a dotted line style ThickLine! 4 Edit a thick line style ExtraThickLine! 5 Edit an extra thick line style ThinThickLine! 6 Edit a thin thick line style ThickThinLine! 7 Edit a thick thin line style ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Edit a top left line style ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Edit a button bottom right line style TableDefaultLine! 126 Edit the table default line style NoLine! 127 No line ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LineStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit the Thick Line style, the command is: LineStyleEdit(ThickLine!) Tell Me More... LineStyleEdit edits a line style. This command is used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Styles, Edit. LineStyleEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyEdDlg Syntax: LineStyleEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: LineStyleEdit LineStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LineStyleEditDlg displays the Edit Line Styles dialog box. This command must be used in conjunction with the commands LineStyleEdit and LineStyleEnd. Changes made in the Edit Line Styles dialog box effect Tables, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics, Graphics Lines, Styles, Edit. LineStyleEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyEnd Syntax: LineStyleEnd(State) Parameters: State Determines whether line style changes are saved. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LineStyleCreate LineStyleEdit ──── ──── For Example... To save line style changes, the command is: LineStyleEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... LineStyleEnd is required to end series of commands changing a line style. This command is used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineStyleCreate or LineStyleEdit. This command is the equivalent of selecting OK or Cancel in the Edit Line Styles (or Create Line Styles) dialog box. These dialog boxes are available in Tables through the Layout menu, and in Graphic Boxes and Graphics Lines through the Graphics menu. LineStyleName Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyNm Syntax: LineStyleName("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression naming a line style. See Also: LineStyleCreate LineStyleEdit LineStyleEnd ──── ──── For Example... To rename a line style named Custom, the command is: LineStyleName("Custom") Tell Me More... LineStyleName renames a line style. Line styles shipped with the program cannot be renamed. This command is used in conjunction with other commands, such as LineStyleCreate and LineStyleEnd. This command is the equivalent of naming a line style in the Edit Line Styles (or Create Line Styles) dialog box. These dialog boxes are available in Tables through the Layout menu, and in Graphics Boxes and Graphics Lines through the Graphics menu. LineStyleRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStyRet Syntax: LineStyleRetrieve("Name";Library) Parameters: Name A character expression naming a filename containing a line style to be retrieved. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Retrieve line style from current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Retrieve line style from personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Retrieve line style from shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a line style named CUSTOMLN into a personal library, the command is: LineStyleRetrieve("CUSTOMLN";PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... LineStyleRetrieve retrieves a line style into a library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Retrieve in the Line Styles dialog box. This feature is available in Tables, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. LineStyleSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LnStySav Syntax: LineStyleSave("Filename";Library) Parameters: Filename A character expression naming the filename in which the line style library is saved. Library The line style library to save. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Save line style to current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Save line style to personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Save line style to share library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To save a current document line style library with the filename CURRENT, the command is: LineStyleSave("CURRENT";CurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... LineStyleSave saves a line style library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Save in the Line Styles dialog box. This feature is available in Table, Graphics Boxes, and Graphics Lines. ListDefinition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDef Syntax: ListDefinition("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression naming or renaming a selected list definition. See Also: ListDefinitionCreate ListDefinitionDlg ──── ──── For Example... To select a list definition named Subject List, the command is: ListDefinition("Subject List") Tell Me More... ListDefinition selects a list definition and defines the page on which the list is generated. The item must exist in the defined lists or be created by ListDefinitionCreate before it can be selected. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, selecting a list definition, Select. ListDefinitionCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefCre Syntax: ListDefinitionCreate("Name";List Style;Numbering Mode;Graphics;Page Numbering;)Parameters: Name A character expression naming a new list definition. List Style Specifies a list style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbering Mode Specifies a numbering method the list uses when it is generated. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefNone! 0 No numbering method specified DefFollows! 1 Number follows entry DefParentheses! 2 Number in parentheses DefFlushRight! 3 Number flush right DefLeader! 4 Number preceded by dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Graphics Determines whether to include graphics in a generated list. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 No graphic FigureCounter! 1 Figure TableBoxCounter! 2 Table Box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text Box UserBoxCounter! 4 User Box EquationCounter! 5 Equation ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Page Numbering (optional) A character expression specifying a type of page numbering used in the list pages. If this parameter is not used, page numbering on list pages will be the same format as in the main document. See Also: ListDefinition ListDefinitionDlg ──── ──── For Example... To create a list definition named Subject List which specifies a List style and numbering with dot leaders following entries, includes figure boxes, and specifies a different page numbering method than the main document, the command is: ListDefinitionCreate("Subject List";ListStyle!;DefLeader!; FigureCounter!; "List Page ]") Tell Me More... ListDefinitionCreate creates a list definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, Create, and selecting options in the Create List dialog box. ListDefinitionDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefDel Syntax: ListDefinitionDelete("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression naming a list definition to delete. ──── ──── For Example... To delete a list definition named Old List, the command is: ListDefinitionDelete("Old List") Tell Me More... ListDefinitionDelete deletes a list definition in the Define List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, selecting a list definition, Delete. ListDefinitionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefDlg Syntax: ListDefinitionDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ListDefinitionDlg displays the Define List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define. ListDefinitionEditBox Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefEditBox Syntax: ListDefinitionEditBox("Name";Graphics) Parameters: Name A character expression naming a list definition to edit. Graphics Specifies which type of graphics box the list definition now includes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 No graphics FigureCounter! 1 Figure TableBoxCounter! 2 Table Box TextBoxCounter! 3 Text Box UserBoxCounter! 4 User Box EquationCounter! 5 Equation ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To change a list definition named List 1 to include figure boxes, the command is: ListDefinitionEditBox("List 1";FigureCounter!) Tell Me More... ListDefinitionEditBox changes the type of graphics box the specified list will include when generated. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, selecting a list definition, Edit, Include Graphics, selecting a graphics box type. ListDefinitionMode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefMode Syntax: ListDefinitionMode("Name";Numbering Mode) Parameters: Name A character expression naming a list definition to edit. Numbering Mode Specifies which numbering mode a list definition uses. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefNone! 0 No numbers DefFollows! 1 Number follows entry DefParentheses! 2 Number in parentheses DefFlushRight! 3 Number flush right DefLeader! 4 Number preceded by dot leaders ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To change the numbering mode to flush right in a list definition named List 2, the command is: ListDefinitionMode("List 2";DefFlushRight!) Tell Me More... ListDefinitionMode changes the method of numbering or numbering mode in a list definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, selecting a list definition, Edit, selecting a Numbering Mode. ListDefinitionRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefRen Syntax: ListDefinitionRename("Name";"New Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a list definition to rename. New Name A character expression specifying the new name of a list definition. ──── ──── For Example... To rename a list definition named List 1 to List One, the command is: ListDefinitionRename("List 1";"List One") Tell Me More... ListDefinitionRename renames a list definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, selecting a list definition, Edit, Name, and entering a new name. ListDefinitionRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefRet Syntax: ListDefinitionRetrieve("Filename";"List Name")Parameters: Filename A character expression naming the document which contains a list to retrieve. List Name A character expression specifying the list definition to retrieve. ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a list definition named List One from a document named MYFILE, the command is: ListDefinitionRetrieve("MYFILE";"List One") Tell Me More... ListDefinitionRetrieve retrieves a list definition from a document. To retrieve more than one list definition from a document, use more than one ListDefinitionRetrieve command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, Retrieve, specifying a document name, and marking a list to retrieve. ListDefinitionStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListDefSty Syntax: ListDefinitionStyle("Name";New Style) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a list definition to edit. New Style Specifies which list style the list definition now uses. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ListEditPageFormat ──── ──── For Example... To change the list style to Index 2 of a list definition named List One, the command is: ListDefinitionStyle("List One";Index2Style!) Tell Me More... ListDefinitionStyle edits a list definition and changes the list style that definition uses. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, Selecting a List Definition, Edit, Style, Select, Selecting a List Style. ListEditPageFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListEdPgFmt Syntax: ListEditPageFormat("Name";"Page Numbering") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a list definition to edit. Page Numbering A character expression specifying a page numbering style. If nothing is placed between the quotation marks in this parameter, the same page numbering style used in the main document will be used in the generated list. See Also: ListDefinitionStyle ──── ──── For Example... To change a page numbering format to be the same as the main document page numbering format in a list definition named List One, the command is: ListEditPageFormat("List One";"") Tell Me More... ListEditPageFormat edits the page numbering format of a list definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Define, selecting a list definition, Edit, Page Number Format, and specifying a page number format. ListKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListKey Syntax: ListKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ListKey displays the Specify File Manager List dialog box. In some dialog boxes this command can perform the redo function. This command is the equivalent of pressing F5. ListMark Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListMark Syntax: ListMark("List Name") Parameters: List Name A character expression naming a new list. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ListMarkDlg ──── ──── For Example... To mark selected text to be added to a list named List One, the command is: ListMark("List One") Tell Me More... ListMark marks selected text to add to a list when a document is generated. If no text is selected, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Mark, and specifying a list name. ListMarkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ListMarkDlg Syntax: ListMarkDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ListMarkDlg displays the Mark Text For List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, List, Mark. LocationOfBackupFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfBkFiles Syntax: LocationOfBackupFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path for backup files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\BACKUP as the directory where backup files are saved, the command is: LocationOfBackupFiles("C:\WP60\BACKUP") Tell Me More... LocationOfBackupFiles changes the directory where files created by Timed Backup are saved. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Backup Files, and entering a path for backup files. LocationOfDocFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfDocFiles Syntax: LocationOfDocFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path for document files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\DOCS as a directory where documents are saved, the command is: LocationOfDocFiles("C:\WP60\DOCS") Tell Me More... LocationOfDocFiles changes the default directory in Setup documents are saved. This is also the default directory used when you Open or Retrieve a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Documents, and entering a path for documents. LocationOfDRSFile Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfDRSFile Syntax: LocationOfDRSFile("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path of files named WP.DRS and *.WFW See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\OTHER as the directory where files WP.DRS and *.WFW files are located, the command is: LocationOfDRSFile("C:\WP60\OTHER") Tell Me More... LocationOfDRSFile changes the directory in Setup specified for the of files WP.DRS and *.WFW files. These files are used for Print Preview and to print WordPerfect characters graphically. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, WP.DRS File and *.WFW Files, and entering a path. LocationOfFilesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfFilesDlg Syntax: LocationofFilesDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... LocationOfFilesDlg displays the Location of Files dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files. LocationOfGraphicsFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfGraphFiles Syntax: LocationOfGraphicsFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path of Graphics files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\GRAPHICS as the graphics files (*.WPG) directory, the command is: LocationOfGraphicsFiles("C:\WP60\GRAPHICS") Tell Me More... LocationOfGraphicsFiles changes the Personal Path. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Graphics Files, Personal Path, and entering a path. LocationOfGraphicsFontsFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfGraphFntFiles Syntax: LocationOfGraphicsFontsFiles(Type;"Path") Parameters: Type Specifies a graphic font type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Speedo! 134 Bitstream Speedo fonts Bullet! 135 Bullet fonts Type1! 138 Type 1 fonts TrueType! 139 True Type fonts ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Path A character expression specifying the path of available screen fonts. ──── ──── For Example... To change the path for the available Bitstream Speedo screen fonts to C:\Print\Fonts, the command is: LocationOfGraphicsFontsFiles(Speedo!;"c:\print\fonts") Tell Me More... LocationOfGraphicsFontsFiles changes the path for the graphics font files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Graphics Fonts Data Files, Edit Path. LocationOfMacroKeyboardFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfMacKbdFiles Syntax: LocationOfMacroKeyboardFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path of macro, keyboard, and Button Bar files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\MACROS as the directory where macro, keyboard, and Button Bar files (*.WPM, *.WPK, and *.WPB) are located, the command is: LocationOfMacroKeyboardFiles("C:\WP60\MACROS") Tell Me More... LocationOfMacroKeyboardFiles changes the Personal directory of macro, keyboard, and Button Bar files in Setup. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Macros/Keyboard/Button Bar, Personal Path, and entering a path. LocationOfPrinterFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfPrinterFiles Syntax: LocationOfPrinterFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path of printer files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\PRINT as the directory where printer files (*.PRS, and *.ALL) are located, the command is: LocationOfPrinterFiles("C:\WP60\PRINT") Tell Me More... LocationOfPrinterFiles changes the Personal directory in Setup of printer files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Printer Files, Personal Path, and entering a path. LocationOfQuickFinderFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfQFinderFiles Syntax: LocationOfQuickFinderFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path of QuickFinder Index files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\WP60\INDEX as the directory where QuickFinder Index files are located, the command is: LocationOfQuickFinderFiles("C:\WP60\INDEX") Tell Me More... LocationOfQuickFinderFiles changes the Personal Path of QuickFinder indexes in Setup. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, QuickFinder Files, Personal Path, and entering a path. LocationOfSharedGraphicsFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSharedGraphFiles Syntax: LocationOfSharedGraphicsFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path (usually a network directory) of graphics files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify F:\WP60\GRAPHICS as the directory of graphics files (*.WPG), the command is: LocationOfSharedGraphicsFiles("F:\WP60\GRAPHICS") Tell Me More... LocationOfSharedGraphicsFiles changes the shared path in Setup of graphics files. The directory is usually a network drive. When not connected to a network, the directory provides additional personal graphics file directories. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Graphics Files, Shared Path, and entering a path. LocationOfSharedMacroKbdFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSharedMacKbdFiles Syntax: LocationOfSharedMacroKBFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path (usually a network path) of macro, keyboard, and Button Bar files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify F:\WP60\MACROS as the shared directory of macro, keyboard, and Button Bar files (*.WPM, *.WPK, and *.WPB), the command is: LocationOfMacroKeyboardFiles("F:\WP60\MACROS") Tell Me More... LocationOfMacroKeyboarddFiles specifies the Shared path in Setup specified for macro, keyboard, and Button Bar files. The macros/ keyboards/ Button Bar shared directory is usually a network drive. When not connected to a network, the directory provides additional personal macro file directories. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Macros/Keyboard/Button Bar, Shared Path, and entering a path. LocationOfSharedPrinterFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSharedPrinterFiles Syntax: LocationOfSharedPrinterFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path (usually a network path) of printer files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify F:\WP60\PRINT as the printer files (*.PRS and *.ALL) directory, the command is: LocationOfSharedPrinterFiles("F:\WP60\PRINT") Tell Me More... LocationOfSharedPrinterFiles specifies the Shared directory in Setup for printer files. The printer files shared directory is usually a network drive. When not connected to a network, the directory provides additional personal printer file directories. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Printer Files, Shared Path, and entering a path. LocationOfSharedQFinderFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSharedQFinderFiles Syntax: LocationOfSharedQFinderFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path (usually a network directory) of QuickFinder index files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify F:\WP60\INDEX as the QuickFinder Index files directory, the command is: LocationOfSharedQFinderFiles("F:\WP60\INDEX") Tell Me More... LocationOfSharedQFinderFiles changes the shared directory of QuickFinder index files. The index files shared directory is usually a network drive. When not connected to a network, the directory provides additional personal index file directories. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, QuickFinder Files, Shared Path, and entering a path. LocationOfSharedSprFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSharedSprFiles Syntax: LocationOfSharedSprFiles("Path") Parameters: Path A character expression specifying the full path (usually a network path) in which of spreadsheet files. See Also: QuickListUpdate SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To specify F:\WP60\SPR as a spreadsheet files directory, the command is: LocationOfSharedSprFiles("F:\WP60\SPR") Tell Me More... LocationOfSharedSprFiles specifies the Shared directory in Setup for spreadsheet files. The spreadsheet files shared directory is usually a network drive. When not connected to a network, the directory provides additional personal spreadsheet file directories. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Spreadsheet Files, Shared Path, and entering a path. LocationOfSharedStyleFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSharedStyFiles Syntax: LocationOfSharedStyleFiles(Directory) Parameters: Directory A character expression specifying the default directory for personal library files. See Also: StyleDefaultSharedLibrary StyleSharedLibrary ──── ──── For Example... To specify a directory named LIBS on the W: drive as the default shared library directory, the command is: LocationOfSharedStyleFiles("W:\LIBS") Tell Me More... LocationOfSharedStyleFiles specifies a default directory for shared library files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Style Files, Directory for Shared Libraries, and entering a directory name. LocationOfSprFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSprFiles Syntax: LocationOfSprFiles("Location") Parameters: Location A character expression specifying the location of spreadsheet files. ──── ──── For Example... To specify C:\SPREADSHEETS as the location for spreadsheet files, the command is: LocationOfSprFiles("C:\SPREADSHEETS") Tell Me More... LocationOfSprFiles specifies the location of spreadsheet files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location Of Files, Spreadsheet Files, Personal Path, specifying a directory. LocationOfStyleFiles Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfStyFiles Syntax: LocationOfStyleFiles(Directory) Parameters: Directory A character expression specifying the default directory for personal library files. See Also: StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary StylePersonalLibrary ──── ──── For Example... To specify a directory named LIBS on the C: drive as the default personal library directory, the command is: LocationOfStyleFiles("C:\LIBS") Tell Me More... LocationOfStyleFiles specifies a default directory for personal library files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Style Files, Directory for Personal Libraries, and entering a directory name. LocationOfSupWritingTools Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfSupWritingTools Syntax: LocationOfSupWritingTools("Location") Parameters: Location A character expression specifying the location of supplementary speller files. ──── ──── For Example... To specify the location C:\WP60\SPELL for supplementary speller files, the command is: LocationOfSupWritingTools("C:\WP60\SPELL") Tell Me More... LocationOfSupWritingTools specifies the location of supplementary speller files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Writing Tools, Supplementary, and entering a directory name. LocationOfWritingTools Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: LocOfWritingTools Syntax: LocationOfWritingTools("Location") Parameters: Location A character expression specifying the location of speller files. ──── ──── For Example... To specify the location C:\WP60\SPELL for speller files, the command is: LocationOfWritingTools("C:\WP60\SPELL") Tell Me More... LocationOfWritingTools specifies the location of speller files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Location of Files, Writing Tools, Main, and entering a directory name. MacroAssignVariableDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MacAssignVarDlg Syntax: MacroAssignVariableDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MacroAssignVariableDlg displays the Assign Variable dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Macro, Control, Assign Variable. MacroCommandsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MacCmndDlg Syntax: MacroCommandsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MacroCommandsDlg displays the Macro Commands dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Macro, Control, Macro Commands. MacroControlDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MacCtrlDlg Syntax: MacroControlDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MacroControlDlg displays the Macro Control dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Macro, Control. MacroPlayDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MacPlayDlg Syntax: MacroPlayDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MacroPlayDlg displays the Play Macro dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Macro, Play. MacroRecordDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MacRecDlg Syntax: MacroRecordDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MacroRecordDlg displays the Record Macro dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Macro, Record. MarginAdjustLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarAdjLft Syntax: MarginAdjustLeft(Adjustment) Parameters: Adjustment A measurement expression specifying the amount to adjust the left margin. See Also: MarginLeft ──── ──── For Example... To adjust the left margin .5" to the right, the command is: MarginAdjustLeft(.5") Tell Me More... MarginAdjustLeft adjusts the left margin relative to the current margin setting. The MarginAdjustLeft command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Left Margin Adjustment, and specifying a measurement. MarginAdjustRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarAdjRgt Syntax: MarginAdjustRight(Adjustment) Parameters: Adjustment A measurement expression specifying an amount to adjust the right margin. See Also: MarginRight ──── ──── For Example... To make the right margin .5" smaller, the command is: MarginAdjustRight(-.5") Tell Me More... MarginAdjustRight adjusts the right margin relative to the current margin setting. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Right Margin Adjustment, and specifying a measurement. MarginBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarBot Syntax: MarginBottom(Margin Setting) Parameters: Margin Setting A measurement expression specifying a bottom margin. ──── ──── For Example... To set the bottom margin 1" from the bottom edge of the page, the command is: MarginBottom(1") Tell Me More... MarginBottom sets the bottom margin. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Bottom Margin, and specifying a measurement. MarginLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarLft Syntax: MarginLeft(Margin Setting) Parameters: Margin Setting A measurement expression specifying a left margin. See Also: MarginAdjustLeft ──── ──── For Example... To set the left margin 1" from the left edge of the page, the command is: MarginLeft(1") Tell Me More... MarginLeft sets the left margin. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Left Margin, and specifying a measurement. MarginRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarRgt Syntax: MarginRight(Margin Setting) Parameters: Margin Setting A measurement expression specifying a right margin. See Also: MarginAdjustRight ──── ──── For Example... To set the right margin 1" from the right edge of the page, the command is: MarginRight(1") Tell Me More... MarginRight sets the right margin. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Right Margin, and specifying a measurement. MarginTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarTop Syntax: MarginTop(Margin Setting) Parameters: Margin Setting A measurement expression specifying a top margin. ──── ──── For Example... To set the top margin 1.5" from the top edge of the page, the command is: MarginTop(1.5") Tell Me More... MarginTop sets the top margin. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Top Margin, and specifying a measurement. MarkTextDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MarkTxtDlg Syntax: MarkTextDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MarkTextDlg displays the Mark dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Mark Text (Alt+F5). MasterDocCondense Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MastDocCond Syntax: MasterDocCondense("Subdoc"; Save File) Parameters: Subdoc (optional) A character expression specifying a subdocument to condense. Save File Determines whether to save changes to a subdocument when the subdocument is condensed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SkipSub! 0 Do not save changes SaveSub! 2 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: MasterDocCondenseDlg ──── ──── For Example... To condense and not save changes in a subdocument named C:\WP60\SUB1.DOC, the command is: MasterDocCondense("SUB1.DOC";SkipSub!) Tell Me More... MasterDocCondense specifies subdocuments to condense and whether to save changes. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Master Document, Condense, selecting a subdocument to condense, and selecting options. MasterDocCondenseDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MastDocCondDlg Syntax: MasterDocCondenseDlg Parameters: None See Also: MasterDocCondense ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MasterDocCondenseDlg displays the Condense Master Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Master Document, Condense. MasterDocExpand Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MastDocExp Syntax: MasterDocExpand("Subdoc") Parameters: Subdoc (optional) A character expression specifying a subdocument to expand. See Also: MasterDocExpandDlg ──── ──── For Example... To expand a subdocument named SUB1.DOC, the command is: MasterDocExpand("SUB1.DOC") Tell Me More... MasterDocExpand specifies a subdocument to expand. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Master Document, Expand, and selecting a subdocument. MasterDocExpandDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MastDocExpDlg Syntax: MasterDocExpandDlg Parameters: None See Also: MasterDocExpand ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MasterDocExpandDlg displays the Expand Master Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Master Document, Expand. Math Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Math Syntax: Math(State) Parameters: State Turns math on or off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Math off On! 1 Math on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn on math, the command is: Math(On!) Tell Me More... Math determines whether the Math feature is on. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Math, On or Off. MathCalculate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MathCalc Syntax: MathCalculate Parameters: None See Also: Math ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MathCalculate calculates the results of a Math document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Math, Calculate. MathColumn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MathCol Syntax: MathColumn(Column Number; Column Type; Negative Numbers; Digits; "Formula") Parameters: Column Number A numeric expression specifying the number of a column. Column Type (optional) Specifies a column type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ MathText! 1 Text MathNumeric! 2 Numeric Math\Total! 3 Total MathCalculate! 4 Calculate ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Negative Numbers (optional) Specifies how to display negative numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ MinusSign! 0 Minus sign Parentheses! 1 Parentheses ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Digits (optional) A numeric expression specifying the number of digits beyond the decimal point. Formula (optional) A character expression specifying a Math formula. See Also: MathDefinitionDlg ──── ──── For Example... The following command selects column 2, defines it as a calculating column, uses a minus sign for negative numbers, displays 2 digits beyond the decimal point, and contains a simple formula: MathColumn(2;MathCalculate!;MinusSign!;2;"2*3-A") Tell Me More... MathColumn defines a column in a Math document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Math, Define, and selecting options. MathDefinitionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MathDefDlg Syntax: MathDefinitionDlg Parameters: None See Also: MathColumn ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MathDefinitionDlg displays the Math dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Math, Define. MathDefinitionEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MathDefEnd Syntax: MathDefinitionEnd Parameters: None See Also: MathDefinitionStart ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MathDefinitionEnd is the closing command of a MathDefinitionStart-MathDefinitionEnd statement; this statement contains the math definition commands, and is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Math, Define, and selecting options. MathDefinitionStart Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MathDefStart Syntax: MathDefinitionStart Parameters: None See Also: MathDefinitionEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MathDefinitionStart is the opening command of a MathDefinitionStart-MathDefinitionEnd statement; this statement contains math definition commands, and is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Math, Define, and selecting options. MenuBarRemainsVisible Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MenuBarRmnVis Syntax: MenuBarRemainsVisible(State) Parameters: State Determines whether pull-down menus are displayed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not displayed Yes! 1 Displayed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display pull-down menus, the command is: MenuBarRemainsVisible(Yes!) Tell Me More... MenuBarRemainsVisible determines whether to display pull-down menus. With pull-down Menus displayed, this command is the equivalent of choosing View, Pull-Down Menus. MergeBlankField Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgBlankFld Syntax: MergeBlankField(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to remove a blank field. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Leave! 0 Leave field Remove! 1 Remove field ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To remove a blank field, the command is: MergeBlankField(Remove!) Tell Me More... MergeBlankField determines whether to remove a blank field. If blank fields are removed, this command shifts remaining fields up one line. MergeBlankField is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Blank Fields in Data File, and selecting options. MergeCode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCode Syntax: MergeCode(Code Name; "Code Parameters") Parameters: Code Name Specifies a merge code to insert. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Beep! 0 Break! 1 CancelOff! 2 CancelOn! 3 Continue 4 Date! 5 Default! 6 DisplayStop! 7 Else! 8 EndCase! 9 EndField! 10 EndFor! 11 EndIf! 12 EndRecord! 13 EndWhile! 14 Next! 15 NextRecord! 16 PageOff! 17 PageOn! 18 Print! 19 Quit! 20 ProcessOn! 21 Return! 22 ReturnCancel! 23 ReturnError! 24 Rewrite! 25 StepOff! 26 StepOn! 27 Stop! 28 ProcessOff! 29 Assign! 48 Call! 50 Caps! 52 Case! 54 CaseOf! 56 ChainMacro! 58 ChainData! 60 ChainForm! 62 Char! 64 Codes! 66 Comment! 68 CtoN! 70 Document! 72 EmbedMacro! 74 Field! 76 FieldNames! 78 FirstCap! 80 For! 82 ForEach! 84 GetString! 86 Go! 88 If! 90 IfBlank! 92 IfExists! 94 IfNotBlank! 96 Insert! 98 Keyboard! 100 Label! 102 AssignLocal! 104 Look! 106 MrgCmnd! 108 NestData! 110 NestForm! 112 NestMacro! 114 NtoC! 116 OnCancel! 118 OnError! 120 Prompt! 122 StatusPrompt! 124 StrLen! 126 StrPos! 128 SubstData! 130 SubstForm! 132 SubStr! 134 System! 136 ToLower! 138 ToUpper! 140 Variable! 142 Wait! 144 While! 146 PostNet! 148 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Code Parameters (optional) A character expression specifying necessary parameters. See Also: MergeCodesListDlg ──── ──── For Example... To insert a merge code named FieldNames! with name, address and telephone parameters, the command is: MergeCode(FieldNames!;"name;address;city/state/zip;phone") Tell Me More... MergeCode inserts a merge code into an active document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, selecting a merge document type, Merge Codes, and entering a merge code. MergeCodesDisplayEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCodesDisPlayEd Syntax: MergeCodesDisplayEdit(Type) Parameters: Type When defining a merge, determines whether to hide or show merge codes or display them as icons. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Hide! 0 Hide codes Show! 1 Show codes Icon! 2 Display as Icons ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: MergeCodesDisplayRun MergeCodesDisplaySetup ──── ──── For Example... To hide merge codes, the command is: MergeCodesDisplayEdit(Hide!) Tell Me More... When defining a merge, MergeCodesDisplayEdit hides or shows merge codes or displays them as icons. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, Display of Merge Codes, and selecting an option. MergeCodesDisplayRun Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCodesDisplayRun Syntax: MergeCodesDisplayRun(Type) Parameters: Type In a merged document, determines whether to hide or show merge codes or display them as icons. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Hide! 0 Hide codes Show! 1 Show codes Icon! 2 Display as Icons ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: MergeCodesDisplayEdit MergeCodesDisplaySetup ──── ──── For Example... To show merge codes, the command is: MergeCodesDisplayRun(Show!) Tell Me More... In a merged document, MergeCodesDisplayRun hides or shows merge codes or displays them as icons. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Display of Merge Codes, and selecting an option. MergeCodesDisplaySetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCodesDispSetup Syntax: MergeCodesDisplaySetup(Type) Parameters: Type Determines whether to hide or show merge codes or display them as icons. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Hide! 0 Hide codes Show! 1 Show codes Icon! 2 Display as Icons ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: MergeCodesDisplayEdit MergeCodesDisplayRun ──── ──── For Example... To display merge codes as icons, the command is: MergeCodesDisplaySetup(Icon!) Tell Me More... MergecodesDisplaySetup hides or shows merge codes or displays them as icons. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup. Display of Merge Codes, and selecting an option. MergeCodesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCodesDlg Syntax: MergeCodesDlg Parameters: None See Also: MergeFileType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MergeCodesDlg displays the Merge Codes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, Change File Type. MergeCodesListDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCodesListDlg Syntax: MergeCodesListDlg Parameters: None See Also: MergeCode ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MergeCodesListDlg displays the All Merge Codes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, selecting a merge document type, Merge Codes. MergeCondition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgCondition Syntax: MergeCondition("Field Names"; "Field Data") Parameters: Field Names (optional) A character expression specifying a field to search. Field Data (optional) A character expression defining a condition or condition set for record selection. ──── ──── For Example... The following command selects all records that match the following condition set: 1) COMPANY = WordPerfect; (2) TITLE = Regional Manager; and (3) STATE = CA. MergeCondition("COMPANY";"TITLE";"STATE";"WordPerfect";"Regional Manager";"CA") Tell Me More... MergeCondition defines a condition for selecting records from a data file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Data Record Selection, Define Conditions, and selecting the fields and condition sets. MergeDataFile Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgDataFile Syntax: MergeDataFile("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a data file from which to list fields when defining a form file. ──── ──── For Example... To specify a file named My List as the data file from which to list fields, the command is: MergeDataFile("My List") Tell Me More... MergeDataFile specifies which data file from which to list fields when defining a form file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, Form, Field, List Field Names, and entering the name of a data file. MergeEnvelope Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgEnv Syntax: MergeEnvelope(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to create an envelope for merged records. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 No envelope created On! 1 Create envelope ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To create a merge envelope, the command is: MergeEnvelope(On!) Tell Me More... MergeEnvelope determines whether to create an envelope for merged records. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Data File Options, Generate an Envelope for Each Data Record. MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgEnvDefBeg Syntax: MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin Parameters: None See Also: MergeEnvelope ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin is the opening command of the MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin-MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd statement; this statement contains address information. MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Data File Options, Generate an Envelope for Each Data Record. MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgEnvDefEnd Syntax: MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd Parameters: None See Also: MergeEnvelope ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd is the opening command of a MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin-MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd statement; this statement contains address information, and is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Data File Options, Generate an Envelope for Each Data Record. MergeFieldDelimiter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgFldDelim Syntax: MergeFieldDelimiter(State;"Delimiter") Parameters: State Toggles the Field Delimiter option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Off Yes! 1 On ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Delimiter A character expression specifying the characters or codes serving as a field delimiter. ──── ──── For Example... To specify the Tab code as the field delimiter, the command is: MergeFieldDelimiter(Yes!;"[TAB]") Tell Me More... MergeFieldDelimiter toggles the Field Delimiter option and specifies a Field Delimiter. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Delimited Text Options, Field Delimiter, and entering the characters or codes serving as a delimiter. MergeFieldEncapsulateCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgFldEncapChar Syntax: MergeFieldEncapsulateCharacter(State;"Encapsulate Character") Parameters: State Toggles the Field Encapsulate Character option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Off Yes! 1 On ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Encapsulate Character A character expression specifying field data protected during conversion in a delimited text merge. ──── ──── For Example... To use the pound sign (") Tell Me More... MergeFieldEncapsulateCharacter marks data protected in a delimited text merge. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Delimited Text Options, Field Encapsulate Character, and entering characters or codes. MergeFileAssociate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgFileAssoc Syntax: MergeFileAssociate("Primary File"; "Secondary File") Parameters: Primary File A character expression specifying a primary file. Secondary File A character expression specifying a secondary file. ──── ──── For Example... To associate DOC1 and DOC2, the command is: MergeFileAssociate("C:\WP60\DOC1";C:\WP60\DOC2") Tell Me More... MergeFileAssociate associates primary and secondary files. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Run ... MergeFileType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgFileType Syntax: MergeFileType(File Type) Parameters: File Type Specifies a merge document type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 No merge document Form! 1 Form TableData! 2 Table data TextData! 4 Text data ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: MergeCodesDlg ──── ──── For Example... To create a Form document, the command is: MergeFileType(Form!) Tell Me More... MergeFileType selects a Merge document type. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, and selecting a document type. If a document type is already selected, choose Tools, Merge, Define, Change File Type, and select a document type. MergePageBreak Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgPgBreak Syntax: MergePageBreak(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to create a page break between merged records. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 No page break On! 1 Page break ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To create a page break between merged records, the command is: MergePageBreak(On!) Tell Me More... MergePageBreak determines whether to create a page break between merged records. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Page Break Between Merged Records. MergePrintText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgPrintTxt Syntax: MergePrinttext Parameters: None See Also: MergeFileType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Sends a secondary merge file form to a printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Define, Change File Type, Data [Text]; and then choosing Tools, Merge, Define, Print. MergeRecordDelimiter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgRecDelim Syntax: MergeRecordDelimiter() Parameters: State Toggles the Record Delimiter option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Off Yes! 1 On ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Delimiter A character expression specifying the characters or codes serving as a record delimiter. ──── ──── For Example... To specify Carriage Return as the record delimiter, the command is: MergeRecordDelimiter(Yes!;"[CR]") Tell Me More... MergeRecordDelimiter toggles the Record Delimiter option and specifies a Record Delimiter. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Delimited Text Options, Record Delimiter, and entering the characters or codes serving as a delimiter. MergeRepeat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgRep Syntax: MergeRepeat(Repeat) Parameters: Repeat A numeric expression specifying how many times to merge each data record. ──── ──── For Example... To merge a data record 3 times, the command is: MergeRepeat(3) Tell Me More... MergeRepeat sets the number of times to merge each record. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Repeat Merge for Each Data Record, and entering a number. MergeRun Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgRun Syntax: MergeRun(Primary File; "Form File Name"; Secondary File; "Data File Name"; Output Location; "Output File") Parameters: Primary File Specifies the primary file type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document Clipboard! 1 Clipboard FormFile! 2 Form ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Form File Name (optional) A character expression specifying the name of a Form file. Secondary File Specifies a secondary file type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document Clipboard! 1 Clipboard FormFile! 2 Form ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Data File Name (optional) A character expression specifying the name of a data file. Output Location Specifies where to send the result of a merge. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ToCurrentDoc! 0 To current document ToNewDoc! 1 To new document ToFile! 2 To file ToPrinter! 3 To printer ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To merge a primary file named PRIMARY.DOC and a secondary file named SECOND.DOC to a current document, the command is: MergeRun(FormFile!;"PRIMARY.DOC";DataFile!; "SECOND.DOC";ToCurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... MergeRun identifies files to merge and where to send the result. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Form File, entering a filename, Data File, entering a filename, and Output. MergeRunDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgRunDlg Syntax: MergeRunDlg Parameters: None See Also: MergeRun ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MergeRunDlg displays the Run Merge dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run. MergeSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgSel Syntax: MergeSelect(Records; Low Range; High Range) Parameters: Records Specifies records to merge. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ All! 0 All records Marked! 1 Marked records Range! 2 Range of records ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Low Range (optional) A numeric expression specifying the low end of a range. High Range (optional) A numeric expression specifying the high end of a range. See Also: MergeMark ──── ──── For Example... To merge records 10 through 50, the command is: MergeSelect(Range!;10;50) Tell Me More... MergeSelect identifies records to merge. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Merge, Run, Data Record Selection, and selecting options. MergeSortDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgSortDlg Syntax: MergeSortDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MergeSortDlg displays the Merge/Sort dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Merge/Sort (Ctrl-F9). MergeStripCharacters Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MrgStripChar Syntax: MergeStripCharacters(State;Strip) Parameters: State Toggles the Strip Character option. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Off Yes! 1 On ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Strip A character expression specifying characters or codes marking characters to strip from a data file in a delimited text merge. ──── ──── For Example... To use an asterisk (*) to identify characters to strip from a data file, the command is: MergeStripCharacters(Yes!;"*") Tell Me More... MergeStripCharacters toggles the Strip Characters option and specifies characters or codes marking characters to strip from a data file. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Delimited Text Options, Strip Character, and entering characters or codes. MinusSign Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MinusSign Syntax: MinusSign Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MinusSign is the equivalent of pressing the minus sign. This command executes whatever that key is designed to do in the state the program is when the macro encounters this command. If the key has been remapped in Keyboard Layout, this command will execute the original function. MouseAccelerationFactor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseAccelFact Syntax: MouseAccelerationFactor(Acceleration Factor) Parameters: Acceleration Factor A numeric expression specifying how responsive the mouse pointer is to mouse movement. The value ranges from 0 to 100. ──── ──── For Example... To set the acceleration factor to fast, the command is: MouseAccelerationFactor(100) Tell Me More... MouseAccelerationFactor sets the response time between the mouse pointer and mouse movement. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Mouse, Acceleration Factor, and specifying an acceleration factor. MouseAutoselect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseAutoSel Syntax: MouseAutoSelect Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MouseAutoSelect automatically selects the mouse driver. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Mouse, Type, Auto Select. MouseDoubleClick Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseDblClick Syntax: MouseDoubleClick(Interval) Parameters: Interval A numeric expression that sets the double-click interval. ──── ──── For Example... To set the double-click interval to one-half second, the command is: MouseDoubleClick(50) Tell Me More... MouseDoubleClick sets the double-click interval. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Mouse, Double-click Interval, and specifying an interval. MouseInitialize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseInit Syntax: MouseInitialize Parameters: None See Also: MouseSelect SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To initialize a PS/2 Logitech mouse, the command is: MouseSelect("STANDARD.IRS";"Logitech Mouse (PS/2)") MouseInitialize SetupSave Tell Me More... MouseInitialize initializes a selected mouse. This command must be used between MouseSelect and SetupSave commands. This command is equivalent to the initialization which occurs when you choose Layout, Setup, Mouse, Type, highlight a mouse type, Select. MouseLeftHanded Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseLftHand Syntax: MouseLeftHanded(State) Parameters: State Determines whether mouse is set to left-handed. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not left-handed Yes! 1 Left handed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To set a mouse to left-handed, the command is: MouseLeftHanded(Yes!) Tell Me More... MouseLeftHanded turns on or off Left-handed Mouse. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Mouse, Left-handed Mouse. MousePort Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MousePort Syntax: MousePort Parameters: Port Specifies which mouse port to use. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ COM1 0 COM port 1 COM2 1 COM port 2 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To select COM port 1, the command is: MousePort(0) Tell Me More... MousePort selects a mouse port. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Mouse, Port, and selecting an option. MouseSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseSel Syntax: MouseSelect("Type"; "Name") Parameters: Type A character expression specifying the type of mouse selected. Name A character expression specifying the name of the selected mouse. See Also: MouseUnSelect MouseInitialize SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To select a standard Microsoft serial mouse, the command is: MouseSelect("STANDARD.IRS";"Microsoft Mouse (Serial)") MouseInitialize SetupSave Tell Me More... MouseSelect selects a mouse. This command must be followed by MouseInitialize and SetupSave. This series of commands is equivalent to choosing File, Setup, Mouse, Type, highlighting a mouse type, Select. MouseSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MouseSetupDlg Syntax: MouseSetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MouseSetupDlg displays the Mouse dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Mouse. MouseUnSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MseUnSel Syntax: MouseUnSelect Parameters: None See Also: MouseSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MouseUnSelect changes the current mouse selection to "None". This command is not recordable. To use this command, you must type it into the macro. MoveDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MoveDlg Syntax: MoveDlg Parameters: None See Also: MoveModeCancel ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... MoveDlg displays the Move Block dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Move (Ctrl+F4). MoveModeCancel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MoveModeCancel Syntax: MoveModeCancel Parameters: None See Also: MoveDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... If you decide not to retrieve text that has been moved or copied, MoveModeCancel eliminates the Move prompt. This command is the equivalent of pressing Cancel/Undelete (Esc). MoveModeEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: MoveModeEnd Syntax: MoveModeEnd Parameters: None See Also: MoveDlg MoveModeCancel ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... MoveModeEnd is the closing command for moving text. After displaying the Move dialog box (Ctrl+F4), choosing Cut and Paste, or Copy and Paste, and positioning the cursor, this command is the equivalent of pressing Enter. NotesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: NotesDlg Syntax: NotesDlg Parameters: None See Also: ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... NotesDlg displays the Notes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F7. ──── ──── OutlineBarSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlBarSetup Syntax: OutlineBarSetup(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display the outline bar. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. When no parameter is specified, the command acts as a toggle. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Outline bar not displayed On! 1 Outline bar displayed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineEditKey SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To display the outline bar, the command is: OutlineBarSetup(On!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineBarSetup turns Outline Bar on or off. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Outline Bar. To record the parameter, choose Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Display Outline Bar. ──── ──── OutlineBeginNew Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlBegNew Syntax: OutlineBeginNew(StyleName) Parameters: Style Name Specifies a style for a new outline. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a character expression specifying a user- created style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineBeginNewDlg OutlineEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a bullets style outline, the command is: OutlineBeginNew(BulletsOutlnStyle!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineBeginNew begins a new outline in a specified style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Begin New Outline, and selecting a style. ──── ──── OutlineBeginNewDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlBegNewDlg Syntax: OutlineBeginNewDlg Parameters: None See Also: OutlineBeginNew ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... OutlineBeginNewDlg displays the Outline Style List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Begin New Outline. ──── ──── OutlineBodyText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlBodyTxt Syntax: OutlineBodyText(State) Parameters: State (Optional) OutlineBodyText hides or shows outline body text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ShowBodyText! 0 Shows body text HideBodyText! 1 Hides body text ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineHideShowingBodyText ──── ──── For Example... To hide outline body text, the command is: OutlineBodyText(HideBodyText!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineBodyText hides or shows outline body text. When no parameter is specified, the command acts as a toggle. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Hide/Show, Hide (or Show) Body Text. ──── ── OutlineBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlBot Syntax: OutlineBottom Parameters: None See Also: OutlineTop OutlineEditKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineBottom positions the cursor at the beginning of the last family of an outline. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, and Edit in Outline Mode, this command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Down Arrow (). ──── ──── OutlineChangeToBodyText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlChangeToBodyTxt Syntax: OutlineChangeToBodyText Parameters: None See Also: OutlineNumberToggleKey OutlineBodyText OutlineParagraphNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineChangeToBodyText moves text or the cursor from an outline to body text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Change to Body Text. ──── ──── OutlineDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlDlg Syntax: OutlineDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... OutlineDlg displays the Outline dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F5 or choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options. ──── ──── OutlineDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlDn Syntax: OutlineDown Parameters: None See Also: OutlineUp OutlineRight OutlineEditKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineDown blocks the next outline family. When repeated, the command unblocks the family and, with each repetition, blocks successive outline paragraphs until reaching the next family. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, and Edit in Outline Mode, this command is the equivalent of pressing Down Arrow (). ──── ──── OutlineEditKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlEdKey Syntax: OutlineEditKey Parameters: None See Also: OutlineBarSetup ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineEditKey activates Edit in Outline Mode and displays the outline bar. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+O or choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode. ──── ──── OutlineEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlEnd Syntax: OutlineEnd Parameters: None See Also: OutlineBeginNew ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineEnd turns off the outline feature. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, End Outline. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamCopy Syntax: OutlineFamilyCopy Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyMove OutlineFamilyCut MoveModeEnd OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyCopy copies an outline family and adjusts the numbering in the outline when the family is retrieved. After positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline family, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Move/Copy, Copy Family. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyCut Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamCut Syntax: OutlineFamilyCut Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyMove OutlineFamilyCopy OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyCut deletes an outline family and adjusts the numbering in the outline. After positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline family, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Move/Copy, Delete Family. ──── ── OutlineFamilyDemote Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamDemote Syntax: OutlineFamilyDemote Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyPromote ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineFamilyDemote adjusts an outline family to the previous level. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode, and positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline family, this command is the equivalent of pressing Shift+Tab. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamDn Syntax: OutlineFamilyDown Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyUp OutlineEditKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyDown moves the cursor to the beginning of the next outline family. In Edit in Outline Mode, this command blocks the next outline family. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Down Arrow () while in an outline. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyDragDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamDragDn Syntax: OutlineFamilyDragDown Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyDragUp OutlineEditKey OutlineFamilyUp OutlineFamilyDown OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineFamilyDragDown positions a selected outline family below the next family and adjusts the numbering. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode, and blocking an outline family, this command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Down Arrow (). ──── ──── OutlineFamilyDragUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamDragUp Syntax: OutlineFamilyDragUp Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyDragDown OutlineFamilyUp OutlineFamilyDown OutlineEditKey OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineFamilyDragUp positions a selected outline family above the previous family and adjusts the numbering. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode, and blocking an outline family, this command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Up Arrow (). ──── ──── OutlineFamilyHide Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamHide Syntax: OutlineFamilyHide(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to hide or show an outline family. Select an enumerated type of its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ShowBodyText! 0 Shows outline family HideBodyText! 1 Hides outline family ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineFamilyShow OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... To hide an outline family, the command is: OutlineFamilyHide(HideBodyText!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyHide hides the current outline family. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Hide/Show, Hide Family. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamLft Syntax: OutlineFamilyLeft Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyRight ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyLeft moves the cursor from one outline paragraph to the previous outline paragraph. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Left Arrow () while in an outline. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamMove Syntax: OutlineFamilyMove Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyCopy OutlineFamilyCut OutlineFamilySelect MoveModeEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyMove moves an outline family. After positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline family, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Move/Copy, Move Family. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyPromote Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamPromote Syntax: OutlineFamilyPromote Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyDemote OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineFamilyPromote adjusts an outline family to the next level. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode, and positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline family, this command is the equivalent of pressing Tab. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamRgt Syntax: OutlineFamilyRight Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyLeft ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyRight moves the cursor from one outline paragraph to the next outline paragraph. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Right Arrow (■) while in an outline. ──── ──── OutlineFamilySelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamSel Syntax: OutlineFamilySelect Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineFamilySelect selects an outline family. This command is the equivalent of blocking an outline family (Alt+F4). This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyShow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamShow Syntax: OutlineFamilyShow(State) Parameters: State Shows a previously hidden outline family. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ShowBodyText! 0 Shows outline family HideBodyText! 1 Hides outline family ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineFamilyHide ──── ──── For Example... To show a previously hidden outline family, the command is: OutlineFamilyShow(ShowBodyText!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyShow displays a hidden outline family. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Hide/Show, Show Family. ──── ──── OutlineFamilyUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ──────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlFamUp Syntax: OutlineFamilyUp Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilyDown ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineFamilyUp moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous outline family. In Edit in Outline Mode, this command blocks the previous outline family. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Up Arrow () while in an outline. ──── ──── OutlineHideShowingBodyText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlHideShowingBodyTxt Syntax: OutlinehideShowingBodyText Parameters: None See Also: OutlineBodyText ──── ──── For Example... Tell Me More... OutlineHideShowingBodyText hides an outline but leaves body text showing. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Hide/Show, Hide Outline. ──── ──── OutlineNumberToggleKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlNumToggleKey Syntax: OutlineNumberToggleKey Parameters: None See Also: OutlineChangetoBodyText OutlineParagraphNumber ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. OutlineNumberToggleKey toggles an outline paragraph between an outline and the body text. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+T. This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParCopy Syntax: OutlineParagraphCopy Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphMove OutlineParagraphDelete MoveModeEnd OutlineParagraphSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. OutlineParagraphCopy copies an outline paragraph. After blocking an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Move/Copy, Copy Paragraph. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParDel Syntax: OutlineParagraphDelete Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphMove OutlineParagraphCopy MoveModeEnd OutlineParagraphSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphDelete deletes an outline paragraph. After blocking an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Move/Copy, Delete Paragraph. OutlineParagraphDemote Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParDemote Syntax: OutlineParagraphDemote Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphPromote OutlineParagraphSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphDemote adjusts an outline paragraph to the next level. After positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Adjust Levels, Next Level. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphDragDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParDragDn Syntax: OutlineParagraphDragDown Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphDragUp OutlineParagraphSelect OutlineFamilyDragDown ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineParagraphDragDown positions an outline paragraph below the next paragraph and adjusts the numbering. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode, and blocking an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Down Arrow (). This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphDragUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParDragUp Syntax: OutlineParagraphDragUp Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphDragDown OutlineParagraphSelect OutlineFamilyDragUp ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineParagraphDragUp positions an outline paragraph above the previous paragraph and adjusts the numbering. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Edit in Outline Mode, and blocking an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Up Arrow (). This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParMove Syntax: OutlineParagraphMove Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphCopy OutlineParagraphDelete MoveModeEnd OutlineParagraphSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphMove moves an outline paragraph. After blocking an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Move/Copy, Move Paragraph. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParNum Syntax: OutlineParagraphNumber(Level) Parameters: Level (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the level of an outline paragraph. Levels range from 1 to 8. ──── ──── For Example... To adjust an outline paragraph to level 3, the command is: OutlineParagraphNumber(3) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphNumber specifies an outline paragraph level. If the Level parameter is not specified, the current number is inserted. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Insert Outline Level (1-8), and specifying an outline level. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphNumberDrag Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutParNumDrag Syntax: OutlineParagraphNumberDrag Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphNumberDrag creates space for a new paragraph within an outline. After positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of pressing Enter. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphPromote Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParPromote Syntax: OutlineParagraphPromote Parameters: None See Also: OutlineParagraphDemote OutlineParagraphSelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphPromote adjusts an outline paragraph to the previous level. After positioning the cursor at the beginning of an outline paragraph, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Adjust Levels, Previous Level. ──── ──── OutlineParagraphSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlParSel Syntax: OutlineParagraphSelect Parameters: None See Also: OutlineFamilySelect ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineParagraphSelect selects an outline paragraph. This command is the equivalent of blocking an outline paragraph (Alt+F4). This command is not recordable. To use this command you must type it into the macro. ──── ──── OutlineRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlRgt Syntax: OutlineRight Parameters: None See Also: OutlineDown OutlineUp OutlineEditKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... In Edit in Outline Mode, OutlineRight blocks the next outline family. When repeated, the command unblocks the family and, with each repetition, blocks successive outline paragraphs until reaching the next family. After choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, and Edit in Outline Mode, this command is the equivalent of pressing Right Arrow (■). ──── ──── OutlineSetParagraphNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlSetParaNum Syntax: OutlineSetParagraphNumber("Number") Parameters: Number A character expression setting the number of an outline paragraph. ──── ──── For Example... To set an outline paragraph number as 5, the command is: OutlineSetParagraphNumber("5") ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineSetParagraphNumber sets the number for an outline paragraph. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Set Paragraph Number, and entering a number or character. ──── ──── OutlineShow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlShow Syntax: OutlineShow(Level;State) Parameters: Level A numeric expression specifying the lowest level of an outline to show. Levels range from 1 to 8. State Specifies whether to show or hide body text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ShowBodyText! 0 Shows body text HideBodyText! 1 Hides body text ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineBodyText OutlineHideShowingBodyText ──── ──── For Example... To show outline levels 1 through 3 and hide the body text, the command is: OutlineShow(3;HideBodyText!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineShow specifies the lowest outline level to show and whether to show body text. When specifying a level, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Hide/Show, Show Levels, and entering an outline level. When specifying whether to show body text, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Hide/Show, Show (or Hide) Body Text. ──── ──── OutlineStyleCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlnStyCopy Syntax: OutlineStyleCopy(Style Name [or "Style Name"];Current Location;Destination;"Rename") Parameters: Style Name Specifies the name of an outline style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a character expression specifying the name of a user-defined outline style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Current Location Specifies the location of an outline style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Destination Specifies the destination of the outline style to copy. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Rename (Optional) A character expression renaming an outline style when the current location is the same as the destination. ──── ──── For Example... To copy an outline style named Bullets from the current document to the current personal library, the command is: OutlineStyleCopy(BulletsOutlnStyle!;CurrentDoc!;PersonalLibrary!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleCopy copies an outline style and renames the copy or moves it into another library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Outline Style, Copy, and selecting options. ──── ──── OutlineStyleCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyCre Syntax: OutlineStyleCreate("Name";Location) Parameters: Name A character expression naming a new outline style. Location (Optional) Specifies the library of a new outline style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. If no location is specified, the style is created for the current document Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineBeginNew OutlineStyleEditEnd OutlineStyleDlg OutlineStyleDelete ──── ──── For Example... To create an outline style named My Style and save it in a shared library, the command is: OutlineStyleCreate("My Style";Shared Library!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleCreate creates, names, and saves an outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Create, and naming the new style. When specifying a library, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Options, selecting a library, Create, and naming the new style. ──── ──── OutlineStyleDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyDel Syntax: OutlineStyleDelete(Style Name [or "Style Name"];Location) Parameters: Style Name Specifies the name of an outline style to delete. WP system styles can only be deleted from a library, not from the current document. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a character expression specifying an outline style to delete. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location (Optional) Specifies the library of an outline style to delete. If no location is specified, the style is deleted from the current document. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineStyleCreate ──── ──── For Example... To delete an outline style named My Style from a shared library, the command is: OutlineStyleDelete("My Style";SharedLibrary!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleDelete deletes an outline style. WP System styles cannot be deleted from the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, selecting a style, Delete. When specifying a library, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Options, selecting a library, selecting a style, Delete. ──── ──── OutlineStyleDescription Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyDesc Syntax: OutlineStyleDescription("Description") Parameters: Description A character expression describing an outline style. See Also: OutlineStyleEditBegin OutlineStyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To describe an outline style as Table of Contents Format, the command is: OutlineStyleDescription("Table of Contents Format") ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleDescription describes an outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, highlighting an outline style, Edit, Description, and entering a description. ──── ──── OutlineStyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyDlg Syntax: OutlineStyleDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... OutlineStyleDlg displays the Outline Style List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style. ──── ──── OutlineStyleEditBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyEdBeg Syntax: OutlineStyleEditBegin(Style Name [or "Style Name"];Location) Parameters: Style Name Specifies an outline style to edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a character expression specifying the name of a user-created outline style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location (Optional) Specifies the library of an outline style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineStyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To edit an outline style named Bullets in the current document, the command is: OutlineStyleEditBegin(BulletsOutlnStyle!;CurrentDoc!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleEditBegin is the opening command of an OutlineStyleEditBegin-OutlineStyleEditEnd statement. This command. is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, highlighting a style, Edit. When specifying a library, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Options, selecting a library, highlighting a style, Edit. ──── ──── OutlineStyleEditEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyEdEnd Syntax: OutlineStyleEditEnd(State) Parameters: State OutlineStyleEditEnd saves or cancels outline style changes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancels style changes Save! 1 Saves style changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineStyleEditBegin ──── ──── For Example... To save outline style changes, the command is: OutlineStyleEditEnd(Save!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleEditEnd is the closing command of an OutlineStyleEditBegin-OutlineStyleEditEnd statement. After editing an outline style, this command is the equivalent of choosing OK or Cancel. ──── ──── OutlineStyleLevel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyLvl Syntax: OutlineStyleLevel(Level;Style Name) Parameters: Level A numeric expression selecting an outline level. Levels range from 1 to 8. Style Name Specifies an outline style for the selected level. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To apply a style named Heading 1 to outline level 3, the command is: OutlineStyleLevel(3;Heading1Style!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleLevel specifies an outline level and a style for that level. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, highlighting a style, Edit, Level Style, and selecting options. ──── ──── OutlineStyleNumberFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyNumFmt Syntax: OutlineStyleNumberFormat(Level;"Format") Parameters: Level A numeric expression selecting an outline level. Levels range from 1 to 8. Format Specifies the numbering format for each outline level. Select a system format or enter a character expression specifying the format. See Also: OutlineStyleNumbersOnly ──── ──── For Example... To specify paragraph numbering style for level 1, the command is: OutlineStyleNumberFormat(1,"1.") ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleNumberFormat specifies the numbering format for each level of a selected outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Outline Style, highlighting a style, Edit, Number Format, and highlighting a format or entering a user-defined format. ──── ──── OutlineStyleNumbersOnly Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyNumsOnly Syntax: OutlineStyleNumbersOnly(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to define level styles or use the numbers only format in an outline. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Numbers only format off Yes! 1 Numbers only format on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineStyleNumberFormat OutlineStyleEditBegin OutlineStyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify the numbers only format, the command is: OutlineStyleNumbersOnly(Yes!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleNumbersOnly specifies whether to apply the numbers only format to a selected outline. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Edit, Numbers Only. ──── ──── OutlineStyleRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyRen Syntax: ("New Name") Parameters: New Name A character expression renaming a user-created outline style. See Also: OutlineStyleEditBegin OutlineStyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... After selecting a user-created outline style, to rename the style My Style the command is: OutlineStyleRename("My Style") Tell Me More... OutlineStyleRename renames a user-created outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Options, Outline Style, highlighting a style, Edit, Name, and entering a new name. OutlineStyleRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStyRet Syntax: OutlineStyleRetrieve("Name";Type;Location) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying an outline style to retrieve. Type Determines whether to retrieve WP system outline styles, user-created outline styles, or both. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UserStyles! 1 Retrieves only user styles SystemStyles! 2 Retrieves only system styles AllStyles! 3 Retrieves all style types ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location(Optional) Specifies the library of a file to retrieve. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineStyleSave ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a user-created outline style named My Style from the current personal library, the command is: OutlineStyleRetrieve("My Style";UserStyles!;PersonalLibrary!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleRetrieve retrieves an outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Retrieve, entering a style name, and selecting options. When specifying a library, the command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Options, selecting a library, Retrieve, entering a style name, and selecting options. ──── ──── OutlineStyleSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStySave Syntax: OutlineStyleSave("Name";Type;Location) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying an outline style to save. Type Specifies whether to save WP system outline styles, user-created outline styles, or both. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UserStyles! 1 Retrieves only user styles SystemStyles! 2 Retrieves only system styles AllStyles! 3 Retrieves all style types ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location (Optional) Specifies the library of a file to save. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutlineStyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To save a WP system outline style named Numbers in the current shared library, the command is: OutlineStyleSave("Numbers";SystemStyles!;SharedLibrary!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleSave saves an outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Save, entering a style name, and selecting options. When specifying a library, this command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, Options, selecting a library, Save, entering a style name, and selecting options. ──── ──── OutlineStyleSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlStySel Syntax: OutlineStyleSelect(Name [or"Name"]) Parameters: Name Selects an outline style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter the name of a user-created outline style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To select the Bullets outline style, the command is: OutlineStyleSelect(BulletsOutlnStyle!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutlineStyleSelect selects an outline style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Outline, Outline Style, highlighting an outline style, Select. ──── ──── OutlineTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlTop Syntax: OutlineTop Parameters: None See Also: OutlineBottom OutlineEditKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineTop positions the cursor at the beginning of an outline. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Up Arrow () while in Edit in Outline Mode. ──── ──── OutlineUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutlUp Syntax: OutlineUp Parameters: None See Also: OutlineDown OutlineRight OutlineEditKey ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... OutlineUp blocks the previous outline paragraph. After blocking each paragraph of an outline family, OutlineUp blocks the entire family. This command is the equivalent of pressing Up Arrow () while in Edit in Outline Mode. ──── ──── OutputOption Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutOpt Syntax: OutputOption(Type;Bins) Parameters: Type Specifies the type of output from a printer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OutputToSort! 1 Sorting on OutputToPutGroup! 2 Grouping on OutputToBins! 16 Output to bins OutputPutNone! 64 No special options ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Bins (Optional) A numeric expression specifying output bins to mark. See Also: OutputOptionsOffsetJogger ──── ──── For Example... To sort output into bins 1 and 2, the command is: OutputOption(OutputToSort!;1;2) ──── ──── Tell Me More... OutputOption specifies a printer output type. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Output Options, and selecting options. ──── ──── OutputOptionsOffsetJogger Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OutOptOffSetJog Syntax: OutputOptionsOffsetJogger(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Offset Jogger is active. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ JoggerOn! 8 Offset Jogger ON JoggerOff! 10 Offset Jogger OFF ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: OutputOptions ──── ──── For Example... To activate the Offset Jogger option in the Output Options dialog box, the command is: OutputOptionsOffsetJogger(JoggerOn!) Tell Me More... OutputOptionsOffsetJogger determines whether the Offset Jogger option is selected in the Output Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Output Options, and selecting or unselecting Offset Jogger. OverstrikeCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OvstkCre Syntax: OverstrikeCreate("Characters") Parameters: Characters A character expression specifying two or more characters to create an overstrike character. See Also: OverstrikeCreateDlg OverstrikeEdit OverstrikeEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... To overstrike characters = and \, the command is: OverstrikeCreate("=\") Tell Me More... OverstrikeCreate creates an overstrike. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Create Overstrike, and specifying the characters to overstrike. OverstrikeCreateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OvstkCreDlg Syntax: OverstrikeCreateDlg Parameters: None See Also: OverstrikeCreate OverstrikeEdit OverstrikeEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... OverstrikeCreateDlg displays the Create Overstrike dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Create Overstrike. ──── ──── OverstrikeEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OvstkEd Syntax: OverstrikeEdit("Characters") Parameters: Characters A character expression specifying new overstrike characters. See Also: OverstrikeCreate OverstrikeCreateDlg OverstrikeEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... To replace an existing overstrike with characters x, y, and z, the command is: OverstrikeEdit("xyz") Tell Me More... OverstrikeEdit edits the first overstrike to the right of the cursor. The edited overstrike is replaced by the text in the Characters parameter. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Edit Overstrike, and entering overstrike characters. OverstrikeEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: OvstkEdDlg Syntax: OverstrikeEditDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... OverstrikeEditDlg displays the Edit Overstrike dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Edit Overstrike. PageDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgDn Syntax: PageDown Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PageDown is the equivalent of pressing the Page Down Key. PageNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNum Syntax: PageNumber(New Number) Parameters: New Number A numeric expression specifying a new number for the current page. ──── ──── For Example... To change the page number of a page to 5, the command is: PageNumber(5) Tell Me More... PageNumber specifies a new page number on the current page. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number, New Number, and specifying a page number. PageNumberDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumDec Syntax: PageNumberDecrement Parameters: None See Also: PageNumberIncrement ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PageNumberDecrement decrements the current page number by one. For example, if the current page number is 23, this command would make the page number 22. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number, Decrement Number. PageNumberDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumDisp Syntax: PageNumberDisplay Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PageNumberDisplay displays a page number in the current document window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number, Display in Document. PageNumberDisplayFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumDispFmt Syntax: PageNumberDisplayFormat Parameters: None See Also: PageNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PageNumberDisplayFormat displays a formatted page number in the current document window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Insert Formatted Page Number. PageNumberFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumFmt Syntax: PageNumberFormat("Format") Parameters: Format A character expression specifying a page number format. See Also: PageNumberDisplayFormat ──── ──── For Example... To format page numbers as Page n (n being the number), the command is: PageNumberFormat("Page [page #]") Tell Me More... PageNumberFormat specifies a page number format including text, volume or chapter numbers, or secondary page numbers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number Format, and entering a format. PageNumberIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumInc Syntax: PageNumberIncrement Parameters: None See Also: PageNumberDecrement ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PageNumberIncrement increases the current page number by one. For example, if the current page number is 24, this command would make the page number 25. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number, Increment Number. PageNumberMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumMeth Syntax: PageNumberMethod(Method) Parameters: Method Specifies a page numbering method. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Numbers LowerLetters! 1 Lower-case letters UpperLetters! 2 Upper-case letters LowerRoman! 3 Lower-case roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Upper-case roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify upper-case roman numerals as the page numbering method, the command is: PageNumberMethod(UpperRoman!) Tell Me More... PageNumberMethod specifies a page numbering method. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number, Numbering Method, and highlighting a numbering method. PageNumberPosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgNumPos Syntax: PageNumberPosition(Position;Values;"Font";Point Size; Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value;{Attributes}) Parameters: Position Specifies where a page number prints. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ None! 0 Each specifies a different location on the page to print page numbers. TopLeft! 1 TopCenter! 2 TopRight! 3 TopAlternating! 4 BottomLeft! 5 BottomCenter! 6 BottomRight! 7 BottomAlternating! 8 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Values (optional) Determines whether the page numbering font uses the initial document font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UseDefaultValues! 0 DontUseDefaultValues! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Font (optional) a character expression specifying a page numbering font. Use this parameter only if the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Point Size (optional) A measurement expression specifying the point size of the page numbering font. You may use this parameter if the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. You may use this parameter if the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of green in a color. See Red Value above. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the amount of blue in a color. See Red Value above. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression representing the shading percentage of a color. Value ranges from 0 to 100. You may use this parameter if the Values parameter is set to DontUseDefaultValues! or 1. Attributes Specifies attributes and relative size of a font. This parameter is placed in French brackets {} because you may choose more than one attribute. For instance, you can specify a large bold underlined shadowed font by placing the corresponding enumerated types with semicolons in between each in brackets. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 VeryLarge! 1 Large! 2 Small! 3 Fine! 4 Superscript! 5 Subscript! 6 Outline! 7 Italics! 8 Shadow! 9 Redline! 10 DoubleUnderline! 11 Bold! 12 Strikeout! 13 Underline! 14 SmallCaps! 15 Every! 16 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To position page numbers at the bottom center of each page using a small, italicized, bold font, the command is: PageNumberPosition(BottomCenter!;DontUseDefaultValues!;;;;;;; {Small!;Italics!;Bold!}) Tell Me More... PageNumberPosition specifies the position and appearance of page numbering. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Page Number Position, and selecting options. PageUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PgUp Syntax: PageUp Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PageUp increases the size of an equation in the View Equation window. While in the Equation Editor, this command is the equivalent of choosing, View, Zoom In or pressing Page Up. PaperSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PaperSz Syntax: PaperSize("Name";Type;Width;Height;Location;Prompt ;Orientation; Vertical Adjustment Direction;Vertical Adjustment Amount; Horizontal Adjustment Direction; Horizontal Adjustment Amount) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a paper size/type to create or edit. Type Specifies the type of the paper size/type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Standard! 1 Bond! 2 Letterhead! 3 Labels! 4 Envelope! 5 Transparency! 6 Cardstock! 7 Glossy! 8 Special! 9 Other! 255 Width A measurement expression specifying the width of a paper size/type. Height A measurement expression specifying the height of a paper size/type. Location Specifies where the paper size is fed in the printer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Continuous! 0 Bin1! 1 Bin2! 2 Bin3! 3 Bin4! 4 Bin5! 5 Bin6! 6 Bin7! 7 Bin8! 8 Bin9! 9 Bin10! 10 Bin11! 11 Bin12! 12 Bin13! 13 Bin14! 14 Bin15! 15 Bin16! 16 Bin17! 17 Bin18! 18 Bin19! 19 Bin20! 20 Bin21! 21 Bin22! 22 Bin23! 23 Bin24! 24 Bin25! 25 Bin26! 26 Bin27! 27 Bin28! 28 Bin29! 29 Bin30! 30 Bin31! 31 ManualFeed! 32 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Prompt Determines whether WordPerfect prompts user to load paper when printing. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Don't prompt to load Yes! 1 Prompt to load ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Orientation (optional) Specifies the direction of both paper feed and printing on the page. If not specified, the default is PortraitFont! The only exception is when the width is larger than the height, then the default is WideFormPortraitFont! Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PortraitFont! 0 WideFormLandscapeFont! 1 LandscapeFont! 2 WideFormPortraitFont! 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Vertical Adjustment Direction (optional) This parameter specifies that a vertical adjustment needs to be made in order for the text to print on the paper correctly. If you use this parameter, also use the Vertical Adjustment Amount parameter to specify the amount of vertical adjustment. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Down! 0 Up! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Vertical Adjustment Amount (optional) A measurement expression specifying an amount of vertical adjustment. See Vertical Adjustment Direction above. Horizontal Adjustment Direction (optional) This parameter specifies that a horizontal adjustment needs to be made in order for the text to print on the paper correctly. If you use this parameter, also use the Horizontal Adjustment Value parameter to specify the amount of horizontal adjustment. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Right! 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Horizontal Adjustment Amount (optional) A measurement expression specifying an amount of horizontal adjustment. See Horizontal Adjustment Direction above. ──── ──── For Example... To create or edit a paper size/type named Scratch Paper with standard settings, the command is: PaperSize("ScratchPaper";Standard;8.5";11";Continuous!;No!; PortraitFont!;Down!;0";Right!;0") Tell Me More... PaperSize creates or edits a paper size/type. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Paper Size/Type, Create, and specifying settings in the Create Paper Size/Type dialog box. PaperSizeDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PaperSzDel Syntax: PaperSizeDelete("Name") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a paper size/type to delete. ──── ──── For Example... To delete a paper size/type named "Scratch Paper", the command is: PaperSizeDelete("Scratch Paper") Tell Me More... PaperSizeDelete deletes a paper size/type. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Paper Size/Type, highlighting a paper name, Delete. PaperSizeSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PaperSzSel Syntax: PaperSizeSelect("Name";Width;Height;Type) Parameters: Name (optional) A character expression specifying the name of a paper size/type. You may want to use the rest of the parameters if you have more than one paper size/type with the same name. Width (optional) A measurement expression specifying the width of a paper size/type. Height (optional) A measurement expression specifying the height of a paper size/type. Type (optional) Specifies a type of paper size/type Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Standard! 1 Bond! 2 Letterhead! 3 Labels! 4 Envelope! 5 Transparency! 6 Cardstock! 7 Glossy! 8 Special! 9 Other! 255 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... To select a paper size/type named Envelope (Monarch), the command is: PaperSizeSelect("Envelope (Monarch)";7.5";3.88";Envelope!) Tell Me More... PaperSizeSelect selects a paper size/type. If the paper size/type does not exist, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Paper Size/Type, highlighting a paper name, Select. ParagraphDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ParDn Syntax: ParagraphDown Parameters: ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ParagraphDown moves the cursor down one paragraph (marked by a hard return [HRt], or hard page break [HPg]). This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Down Arrow. ParagraphSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ParSpac Syntax: ParagraphSpacing(Spacing) Parameters: Spacing A numeric expression specifying the spacing between paragraphs. The default is 1.0. ──── ──── For Example... To specify a spacing of 1.2 between paragraphs, the command is: ParagraphSpacing(1.2) Tell Me More... ParagraphSpacing specifies the spacing of a Hard Return [Hrt], thus specifying the spacing between paragraphs. The default spacing is 1.0, which is equal to the font point size plus 2 points. A point is 1/72". This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Margins, Paragraph Spacing, and specifying paragraph spacing. ParagraphUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ParUp Syntax: ParagraphUp Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ParagraphUp moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous paragraph. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Up Arrow. PasswordAddChange Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PwordAddChange Syntax: PasswordAddChange("Password") Parameters: Password A character expression specifying a password. For Example... To change or set the password on the current document to Confidential, the command is: PasswordAddChange("CONFIDENTIAL") Tell Me More... PasswordAddChange adds or changes the password of the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save As, Password, and setting a password. PasswordRemove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PwordRem Syntax: PasswordRemove Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PasswordRemove removes the password from the document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save As, Password, Remove. Paste Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Paste Syntax: Paste Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Paste copies the contents of the undelete buffer into the current document at the cursor position. If the buffer is empty, this command generates an error message and terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Paste. PosBlockBeg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosBlkBeg Syntax: PosBlockBeg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Moves the cursor to the position in the document where the block was activated. If there is no active block then the command functions the same as the PosGoPrevious command, moving the cursor to its last position. PosBlockBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosBlkBot Syntax: PosBlockBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosBlockBottom moves the cursor to the end of the block which is closest to the beginning of the document. PosBlockTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosBlkTop Syntax: PosBlockTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosBlockTop moves the cursor to the end of the block which is closest to the beginning of the document. PosCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosChar Syntax: PosCharacter("Character") Parameters: Character A character expression specifying a single search character. ──── ──── For Example... To position the cursor after the first C to the right of the cursor, the command is: PosCharacter("C") Tell Me More... PosCharacter searches forward and positions the cursor after a specified character. PosCharNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosCharNext Syntax: PosCharNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosCharNext moves the cursor one character to the right. This command is the equivalent of pressing Right Arrow. PosCharPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosCharPrev Syntax: PosCharPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosCharPrevious moves the cursor one character to the left. This command is the equivalent of pressing Left Arrow. PosColBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColBot Syntax: PosColBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColBottom positions the cursor at the beginning of the last line of a current column, or if not in Columns, at the beginning of the last line of the document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Go To, and pressing Down Arrow. PosColDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColDn Syntax: PosColDown Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColDown moves the cursor down one row in the current column. If the cursor is not in Parallel Columns, this command has no effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Down Arrow while the cursor is in Parallel Columns. PosColFirst Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColFirst Syntax: PosColFirst Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColFirst positions the cursor at the left margin. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home, Home, Left Arrow while the cursor is in Columns. PosColLast Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColLast Syntax: PosColLast Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColLast positions the cursor in the last column of a current row. If the cursor is not in Columns, this command has no effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home, Home, Right. PosColNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColNxt Syntax: PosColNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColNext moves the cursor one column to the right. If the cursor is not in Columns, this command has no effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Right Arrow. PosColNextWP51 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColNxtWP51 Syntax: PosColNxtWP51 Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColPrev Syntax: PosColPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColPrevious moves the cursor one column to the left. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Left Arrow. PosColPreviousWP51 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColPrevWP51 Syntax: PosColPreviousWP51 Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColTop Syntax: PosColTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColTop positions the cursor at the top of the current column. If the cursor is not in Columns, this command has no effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home, Up Arrow. PosColUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosColUp Syntax: PosColUp Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosColUp moves the cursor up one row in the current column. If not in Parallel Columns, this command has no effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Up Arrow. PosDocBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosDocBot Syntax: PosDocBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosDocBottom positions the cursor at the end of the current document. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Down Arrow. PosDocTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosDocTop Syntax: PosDocTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosDocTop positions the cursor at beginning of document text. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Up Arrow. PosDocVeryBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosDocVryBot Syntax: PosDocVeryBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosDocVeryBottom positions the cursor at the end of a document after codes. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Home, Down Arrow. PosDocVeryTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosDocVryTop Syntax: PosDocVeryTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosDocVeryTop positions the cursor at the beginning of a document before codes. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Home, Up Arrow. PosFunction Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosFunc Syntax: PosFunction(Code) Parameters: Code Specifies a code to search for. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ HardSpace! 129 Position cursor codes given in this table. HardHyphen! 132 CancelHyphenation!144 HardEndOfLine! 204 SoftEndOfLine! 207 Tab! 224 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To position the cursor to the right of a Hard Space, the command is: PosFunction(HardSpace!) Tell Me More... PosFunction positions the cursor to the right of a specified code. See also PosCharacter. PosGoPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosGoPrev Syntax: PosGoPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosGoPrevious positions the cursor at the previous cursor position. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home twice. PosLineBeg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosLnBeg Syntax: PosLineBeg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosLineBeg positions the cursor at the beginning of the current line of text. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Left Arrow (). PosLineDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosLnDn Syntax: PosLineDown Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosLineDown moves the cursor down one line. This command is the equivalent of pressing Down Arrow. PosLineEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosLnEnd Syntax: PosLineEnd Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosLineEnd positions the cursor at the end of the current line of text. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Right Arrow. PosLineUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosLnUp Syntax: PosLineUp Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosLineUp moves the cursor one line up. This command is the equivalent of pressing Up Arrow. PosLineVeryBeg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosLnVryBeg Syntax: PosLineVeryBeg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosLineVeryBeg positions the cursor at the beginning of a line before codes. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Home, Left Arrow. PosLineVeryEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosLnVryEnd Syntax: PosLineVeryEnd Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosLineVeryEnd positions the cursor at the end of a line after codes (with the exception of end of line codes). This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Home, Right Arrow. PosPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosPg Syntax: PosPage(Volume;Chapter;Page;Direction) Parameters: Volume A numeric expression specifying a volume number. Chapter A numeric expression specifying a chapter number. Page A numeric expression specifying a page number. Direction Specifies a direction. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Down! 0 Up! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To position the cursor at page 3 of chapter 2 in volume 1, the command is: PosPage(1;2;3;Up!). Tell Me More... PosPage is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home then typing the Volume number, Chapter number, Page number, then either pressing PageUp or PageDown to specify the direction. PosPageBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosPgBot Syntax: PosPageBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosPageBottom positions the cursor at the bottom of a current page. It is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home, Down. PosPageNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosPgNext Syntax: PosPageNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosPageNext positions the cursor at the beginning of the next page. If the cursor is on the last page of the document, this command positions the cursor at the end of the page. This command is the equivalent of pressing Page Down. PosPagePrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosPgPrev Syntax: PosPagePrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosPagePrevious positions the cursor at the beginning of the previous page. If the cursor is on the first page of the document, this command positions the cursor at the top of that page. This command is the equivalent of pressing Page Up. PosPageTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosPgTop Syntax: PosPageTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosPageTop positions the cursor at the top of a current page. It is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home, Up. PosScreenDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosScrDn Syntax: PosScreenDown Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosScreenDown positions the cursor at the bottom of the screen, then down one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Down Arrow or with num lock off, pressing the + on the numeric keypad. PosScreenLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosScrLft Syntax: PosScreenLeft Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosScreenLeft positions the cursor at the left edge of the screen, then left one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Left Arrow. PosScreenRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosScrRgt Syntax: PosScreenRight Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosScreenRight positions the cursor at the right edge of the screen, then right one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Right Arrow. PosScreenUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosScrUp Syntax: PosScreenUp Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosScreenUp positions the cursor at the top of the screen, then up one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Up Arrow or with the num lock off, pressing the - on the numeric keypad. PosSelectBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosSelBot Syntax: PosSelectBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosSelectBottom positions the cursor at the end (bottom) of the current block. PosSelectTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosSelTop Syntax: PosSelectTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosSelectTop positions the cursor at the top (beginning) of the current block. PosTableBeg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblBeg Syntax: PosTableBeg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableBeg positions the cursor in the first cell of a table. If the cursor is not in a table then this command terminates the macro or redirects its execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableBlockBeg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblBlkBeg Syntax: PosTableBlockBeg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableBlockBeg positions the cursor in the first cell of a table. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableCell Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCell Syntax: PosTableCell("Cell") Parameters: Cell A character expression specifying the table cell in which to position the cursor. ──── ──── For Example... To position the cursor in cell B3, the command is: PosTableCell("B3") Tell Me More... PosTableCell positions the cursor in the cell specified in the Cell parameter. PosTableCellBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCellBot Syntax: PosTableCellBottom Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableCellBottom positions the cursor at the beginning of the last line in a table cell. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableCellDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCellDn Syntax: PosTableCellDown Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableCellDown moves the cursor down one cell in a table. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableCellNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCellNext Syntax: PosTableCellNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableCellNext positions the cursor in the cell to the right. If the cursor is in the far-right cell, the cursor moves to the first cell in the next row. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Right arrow while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableCellPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCellPrev Syntax: PosTableCellPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableCellPrevious positions the cursor one cell to the left. If the cursor is in the left-most cell, the cursor moves to the last cell on the previous row. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Left arrow while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableCellTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCellTop Syntax: PosTableCellTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableCellTop positions the cursor at the top of a current table cell. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableCellUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblCellUp Syntax: PosTableCellUp Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableCellUp positions the cursor up one table cell. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+Up Arrow. PosTableColBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblColBot Syntax: PosTableColBottom Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableColBottom positions the cursor at the bottom of a current column. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableColTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblColTop Syntax: PosTableColTop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableColTop positions the cursor at the top of the current column. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblEnd Syntax: PosTableEnd Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableEnd positions the cursor in the last cell of a table. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. PosTableGoPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblGoPrev Syntax: PosTableGoPrevious Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableGoPrevious returns the cursor to its previous position in a table. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Home twice. PosTableRowBeg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblRowBeg Syntax: PosTableRowBeg Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableRowBeg positions the cursor in the first cell of a current row. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of Home, Home, Home, Left Arrow in Tables. PosTableRowEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblRowEnd Syntax: PosTableRowEnd Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableRowEnd positions the cursor in the last cell of a current row. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Home, Home, Right Arrow (■) in Tables. PosTableScreenDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblScrDn Syntax: PosTableScreenDown Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableScreenDown positions the cursor at the bottom of the screen in Tables, then down one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Down Arrow () while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableScreenLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblScrLft Syntax: PosTableScreenLeft Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableScreenLeft positions the cursor at the left edge of the screen in Tables, then left one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Left Arrow () while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableScreenRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblScrRgt Syntax: PosTableScreenRight Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableScreenRight positions the cursor at the right edge of the screen in Tables, then right one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Right Arrow (■) while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableScreenUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblScrUp Syntax: PosTableScreenUp Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableScreenUp positions the cursor at the top of the screen in Tables, then up one screen at a time with each repetition of the command. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home, Up Arrow () while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableTopCellNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblTopCellNext Syntax: PosTableTopCellNext Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableTopCellNext moves the cursor one cell to the right. If the cursor is in the last cell of a table, this command creates a new table row at the bottom of the table. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Tab while the cursor is in Tables. PosTableTopCellPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosTblTopCellPrev Syntax: PosTableTopCellPrevious Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosTableTopCellPrevious positions the cursor one cell to the left. If the cursor is not in Tables, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Shift+Tab while the cursor is in Tables. PosWordNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosWrdNext Syntax: PosWordNext Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosWordNext positions the cursor at the beginning of the next word. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Right Arrow. PosWordPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PosWrdPrev Syntax: PosWordPrevious Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PosWordPrevious positions the cursor at the beginning of the previous word. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+Left Arrow. PreviewGraphicsInBlackWhite Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PreviewGraphInBlackWhite Syntax: PreviewGraphicsInBlackWhite(State) Parameters: State Determines whether graphics are viewed only in black and white. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Graphics not viewed in black and white Yes! 1 Graphics are viewed in black and white ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PreviewTextInBlackWhite ──── ──── For Example... To view graphics in black and white, the command is: PreviewGraphicsInBlackWhite(Yes!) Tell Me More... PreviewGraphicsInBlackWhite determines whether graphics are viewed in black and white. PreviewTextInBlackWhite Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PreviewTxtInBlackWhite Syntax: PreviewTextInBlackWhite(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Print Preview text is viewed only in black and white. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Print Preview not in black and white. Yes! 1 Print Preview is in black and white ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewSetup PrintPreviewExit SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To view text in black and white, the command is: PreviewTextInBlackWhite(Yes!) Tell Me More... PreviewTextInBlackWhite determines whether Print Preview text is viewed only in black and white. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print Preview, File, Setup, View Text & Graphics in Black & White. PrintBlock Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintBlk Syntax: PrintBlock Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintBlock prints selected text. If no text is selected, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of blocking text, pressing Shift+F7, Print. PrintCopies Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintCopies Syntax: PrintCopies(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a number of copies to print. See Also: PrintCopiesBy PrintCopiesSetup ──── ──── For Example... To print 2 copies of a document, the command is: PrintCopies(2) Tell Me More... PrintCopies specifies a number of copies to print the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Number of Copies, and entering a number. PrintCopiesBy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintCopiesBy Syntax: PrintCopiesBy(Source) Parameters: Source Determines whether multiple copies are generated by WordPerfect or by a printer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect! 0 WordPerfect generates multiple copies Printer! 1 Printer generates multiple copies Network! 2 Network generates multiple copies ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintCopiesBySetup ──── ──── For Example... To specify WordPerfect as the generation source for multiple copies of a current document, the command is: PrintCopiesBy(WordPerfect!) Tell Me More... PrintCopiesBy determines whether multiple copies of the current document are generated by WordPerfect or by a printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Generated By, and highlighting an option. PrintCopiesBySetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintCopiesBySetup Syntax: PrintCopiesBySetup(Source) Parameters: Source Determines whether WordPerfect or a printer generates multiple copies to print. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WordPerfect! 0 WordPerfect generates multiple copies Printer! 1 Printer generates multiple copies Network! 2 Network generates multiple copies ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintCopiesBy SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To designate WordPerfect as the source of multiple copies, the command sequence is: PrintCopiesBySetup(WordPerfect!) SetupSave Tell Me More... PrintCopiesBySetup determines whether WordPerfect or a printer is the source of all multiple copies to print. This command must be used in conjunction with SetupSave. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Setup, Generated By, and selecting an option. PrintCopiesSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintCopiesSetup Syntax: PrintCopiesSetup(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a default number of copies to print. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintCopies SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... To print 2 copies of every document printed, the command sequence is: PrintCopiesSetup(2) SetupSave Tell Me More... PrintCopiesSetup specifies a number of times to print documents. This command must be used in conjunction with SetupSave. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Setup, Number of Copies, and specifying a number. PrintDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintDlg Syntax: PrintDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... PrintDlg displays the Print dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print. PrintDocOnDisk Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintDocOnDisk Syntax: PrintDocOnDisk("Filename";"Page Range";"Secondary Page Range";"Chapter Range";"Volume Range";Odd/Even Pages; DocSummary; Pamphlet; Order;"Output Filename")Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of a file to print. Page Range (optional) A character expression specifying a range of pages to print. Secondary Page Range (optional) A character expression specifying a secondary range of pages to print. Chapter Range (optional) A character expression specifying a range of chapters to print. Volume Range (optional) A character expression specifying a range of volumes to print. Odd/Even Pages (optional) Determines whether to print all, odd, or even pages. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PrintAll! 0 Print all pages PrintOdd! 2 Print odd pages PrintEven! 4 Print even pages DocSummary Determines whether to print a document summary if it exists. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoDocSummary! 0 Do not print document summary DocSummary! 1 Print document summary ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pamphlet Indicates whether the document is to be printed as a booklet. If the document is a booklet, WordPerfect numbers and prints logical pages in the correct sequence. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoBooklet! 0 Document is not a booklet Booklet! 1 Document is a booklet ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Order Determines whether pages print in ascending or descending order. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Forward! 0 Print document in ascending order Backward! 1 Print document in descending order ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Output Filename A character expression specifying the name of a file to print to disk. ──── ──── For Example... To print all pages of a document on disk named TEST with a document summary, the command is: PrintDocOnDisk("TEST";;;;;PrintAll!;DocSummary!;NoBooklet!; Forward!) Tell Me More... PrintDocOnDisk prints a document saved to disk. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Document on Disk, specifying a filename, and selecting options in the Print Multiple Pages dialog box. PrinterAdd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterAdd Syntax: PrinterAdd("Name";"Filename") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a printer to add to the Select Printer dialog box. Filename A character expression specifying the full path of the .PRS printer filename. See Also: PrinterSelect ──── ──── For Example... To add a HP LaserJet 4 to the Select Printer dialog box, the command is: PrinterAdd("HP LaserJet 4";"C:\WP60\HP4.PRS") Tell Me More... PrinterAdd adds a printer to the Select Printer dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Select, Add Printer, and highlighting a printer. PrinterColorConfigured Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterClrConfig Syntax: PrinterColorConfigured("Name";"Filename";State) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a printer name. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the name of a printer .PRS file. State Indicates whether a printer is configured for color. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ColorOff! 0 Not configured for color ColorOn! 1 Configured for color ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To indicate an HP DeskJet 500C is configured for color, the command is: PrinterColorConfigured("HP DeskJet 500C";"HP500C.PRS";ColorOn!) Tell Me More... PrinterColorConfigured indicates whether a printer is configured for color printing. The ability to print in color depends on the capabilities of the printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, Edit, and selecting Printer Configured for Color. PrinterCommand Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCmnd Syntax: PrinterCommand(Type;"Command") Parameters: Type Determines whether a second command is a printer command or the name of a file containing one or more printer commands. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ File! 0 Printer commands contained in a file. Command! 1 Command is a single printer command ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Command A character expression specifying either a printer command or the full path of a filename containing one or more printer commands. ──── ──── For Example... To insert printer commands into a current document using a filename PTRCMD, the command is: PrinterCommand(File!;"C:\WP60\PTRCMD") Tell Me More... PrinterCommand inserts a printer command [Ptr Cmnd] into the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Printer Functions, Printer Commands, and entering and selecting options in the Printer Commands dialog box. PrinterControlCancel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlCancel Syntax: PrinterControlCancel(Job) Parameters: Job Specifies a print job to cancel. Select either a numeric expression, or an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FirstJob! 0 Cancel first job in the print queue AllJobs! 1 Cancel all print jobs in print queue ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To cancel print job 3 on the Printer Control screen, the command is: PrinterControlCancel(3) Tell Me More... PrinterControlCancel cancels a print job on the Printer Control screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Control Printer, selecting a print job, Cancel Job. PrinterControlCancelImmediate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlCancelImm Syntax: PrinterControlCancelImmediate Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrinterControlCancelImmediate cancels a print job on the Control Printer screen. This command must be used in conjunction with PrinterControlCancel. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Control Printer, highlighting a job, Cancel Job, Yes, Cancel Immed. PrinterControlDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlDlg Syntax: PrinterControlDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... PrinterControlDlg displays the Control Printer dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Control Printer. PrinterControlGo Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlGo Syntax: PrinterControlGo Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrinterControlGo resumes printing when Prompt to Load is on. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Control Printer, Go. PrinterControlNetworkQueue Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlNetQueue Syntax: PrinterControlNetworkQueue("Queue") Parameters: Queue A character expression specifying a network queue. ──── ──── For Example... To specify PrintQ_0 as the network print queue, the command is: PrinterControlNetworkQueue("PrintQ_0") Tell Me More... PrinterControlNetworkQueue sets the network queue in Control Printer. PrinterControlRush Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlRush Syntax: PrinterControlRush(Job;Interfere) Parameters: Job Specifies a job to advance to the beginning of the print queue. To specify a job number, use a numeric expression; to specify the last job, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LastJob! 0 Advance last job to beginning of queue Interfere Determines whether to interrupt the current print job to print the rush job. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FinishJob! 0 Allow current job to finish printing. FinishPage! 1 Interrupt current print job ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To advance the print job 2 to the top of the print queue and interrupt the job currently printing, the command is: PrinterControlRush(2;FinishPage!) Tell Me More... PrinterControlRush advances a specified print job to the top of the print queue. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Control Printer, highlighting a print job, Rush Job, Yes, then selecting whether to interrupt the current job. PrinterControlRushImmediate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlRushImm Syntax: PrinterControlRushImmediate Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrinterControlRushImmediate advances the last job in the print queue to the top of the list and interrupts the job currently printing. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Control Printer, highlighting a print job, Rush Job, Yes, then selecting to interrupt the current job. PrinterControlStop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCtrlStop Syntax: PrinterControlStop Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrinterControlStop pauses the current print job. To resume printing, use PrinterControlGo. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Control Printer, Stop. PrinterCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterCopy Syntax: PrinterCopy("Name";"Source";"Target") Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a printer to copy. Source A character expression specifying the full path of a .PRS file containing information to copy. Target A character expression specifying the full path of a .PRS file to receive copied information. ──── ──── For Example... To copy HP LaserJet III .PRS file information to a .PRS file named OTHER.PRS, the command is: PrinterCopy("HP LaserJet III"; "C:\WP60\HP3.PRS"; "C:\WP60\OTHER.PRS") Tell Me More... PrinterCopy copies information from one .PRS file to another. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Select, highlighting a PRS filename, Copy, and entering a new printer filename. PrinterDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterDel Syntax: PrinterDelete("Name";"Filename";Delete PRS) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a printer to delete. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the full path of a printer .PRS file. Delete PRS Determines whether to delete a printer .PRS file from disk. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DontDeletePRS! 0 Don't delete .PRS file from disk DeletePRS! 1 Delete .PRS file from disk. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To delete a printer named HP LaserJet III and its .PRS file, the command is: PrinterDelete("HP LaserJet III";"C:\WP60\HP3.PRS";DeletePRS!) Tell Me More... PrinterDelete removes a printer from the Select Printer dialog box. This command also optionally deletes the printer .PRS file from disk. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Select, selecting a printer, Delete, and (optional) Delete .PRS file. PrinterDescription Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterDesc Syntax: PrinterDescription("Description";"Filename";"New Description") Parameters: Description A character expression specifying a current printer description. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the .PRS file of a printer. New Description A character expression specifying a new printer description. ──── ──── For Example... To rename the description of a printer currently described as "HP LaserJet III" to "Special Fonts", the command is: PrinterDescription("HP LaserJet III";"HP3.PRS";"Special Fonts") Tell Me More... PrinterDescription changes a printer description. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, Edit, and editing the description. PrinterFont Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterFnt Syntax: PrinterFont("Printer";"Filename";"New Font";Point Size;Family;Attributes;Weight;Width;Source;Font Type;Character Set) Parameters: Printer A character expression specifying a printer. Filename A character expression specifying the name of a printer .PRS file. New Font A character expression specifying the initial font. Point Size (optional) A measurement expression specifying a font point size. Font Family (optional) Specifies the typeface family of a selected font. Select an enumerated type or it numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FamilyITCBenguiat! 256 FamilyTimesRoman! 2304 FamilyITCGaramond! 4352 FamilyCenturySchoolbook! 6400 FamilyBodoni! 8448 FamilyITCLubalinGraph! 10496 FamilyAlbertus! 12544 FamilyCourier! 14592 FamilyHelvetica! 16640 FamilyITCRonda! 18688 FamilyMicrostyle! 20736 FamilyOptima! 22784 FamilyLetterGothic! 24832 FamilyBrush! 26880 FamilyParkAvenue! 28928 FamilySignetRoundhand! 30976 FamilyTekton! 33024 FamilyUncial! 35072 FamilyOldEnglish! 37120 FamilyITCZapfDingbats! 39168 FamilyBroadway! 41216 FamilyComputer! 43264 FamilyPTBarnum! 45312 FamilyPonderosa! 47360 FamilyMadrone! 49408 FamilyHobo! 51456 FamilyRevue! 53504 FamilyAestheticOrnamented! 55552 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Attributes (optional) Specifies one or more font attributes. If specifying two or more attributes, enclose them in braces {}; separate attributes with commas. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FontMatchNormal! 0 Normal font FontMatchItalic! 1 Italic font FontMatchOutline! 2 Outline font FontMatchShadow! 4 Shadow font FontMatchSmallCaps! 8 Small Caps font ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Weight (optional) Specifies the weight or intensity of a font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WeightUnknown! 0 WeightUltraThin! 1 WeightUltraLight! 8 WeightExtraThin! 16 WeightThin! 24 WeightExtraLight! 32 WeightLight! 48 WeightDemiLight! 64 WeightSemiLight! 80 WeightBook! 88 WeightRegular! 96 WeightRoman! 104 WeightMedium! 112 WeightDemiBold! 128 WeightSemiBold! 136 WeightBold! 144 WeightExtraBold! 160 WeightHeavy! 176 WeightExtraHeavy! 192 WeightBlack! 208 WeightExtraBlack! 224 WeightUltraHeavy! 240 WeightUltraBlack! 248 WeightMaximum! 254 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Width (optional) Specifies the width of a font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WidthUnknown! 0 WidthUltraCondensed! 16 WidthExtraCompressed! 32 WidthCompressed! 48 WidthExtraCondensed! 64 WidthCondensed! 80 WidthSemiCondensed! 96 WidthNormal! 112 WidthSemiExpanded! 128 WidthExpanded! 144 WidthExtraExpanded! 160 WidthUltraExpanded! 176 WidthDoubleWide! 192 WidthTripleWide! 224 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Source (optional) Specifies the source of the printer font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Expression ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PRSFile! 16 DRSFile! 20 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Font Type (optional) Specifies the printer font type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Speedo! 134 Intellifont! 135 Type1! 138 TrueType! 139 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Character Set (optional) Specifies the printer font character set. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FontMatchASCII! 0 FontMatchMultinational1! 1 FontMatchMultinational2! 2 FontMatchBoxDrawing! 3 FontMatchTypographicSymbols! 4 FontMatchIconicSymbols! 5 FontMatchMath! 6 FontMatchMathExtension! 7 FontMatchGreek! 8 FontMatchHebrew! 9 FontMatchCyrillic! 10 FontMatchJapaneseKana! 11 FontMatchUserDefined! 12 FontMatchArabic! 13 FontMatchArabicScript! 14 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To change the initial font of an HP LaserJet III to CG Times 12pt Bold, the command is: PrinterFont("HP LaserJet III";"HP3.PRS";"CG Times Bold";12p;;FontMatchNormal!) Tell Me More... PrinterFont changes the initial (default) font used with a printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, Edit, Font Setup, Select Initial Font, and selecting options in the Initial Font dialog box. PrinterFontDirectory Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterFntDir Syntax: PrinterFontDirectory("Printer";"Filename";"New Path") Parameters: Printer A character expression specifying a printer. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the .PRS file of a printer. New Path A character expression specifying a path where fonts are located. ──── ──── For Example... To change the path for fonts used with an HP LaserJet III to C:\WP60\FONTS, the command is: PrinterFontDirectory("HP LaserJet III";"HP3.PRS";"C:\WP60\FONTS") Tell Me More... PrinterFontDirectory specifies or changes a printer font path. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, Edit, Directory for Soft Fonts, and entering a path. PrinterInitialize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterInit Syntax: PrinterInitialize Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrinterInitialize downloads soft fonts to your printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Initialize Printer. PrinterOtherDirectory Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterOtherDirectory Syntax: PrinterOtherDirectory("Directory") Parameters: Directory A character expression specifying another directory in which to locate printer files. ──── ──── For Example... To specify another printer directory named Y:\NETWORK\PRINTERS, the command is: PrinterOtherDirectory("Y:\NETWORK\PRINTERS) Tell Me More... PrinterOtherDirectory directs the macro to look in the specified directory for printer files. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Select, Add Printer, Other Directory, specifying a directory containing printer files. PrinterPause Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterPause Syntax: PrinterPause Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrinterPause pauses the current print job. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Stop. PrinterPortCOM Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterPortCOM Syntax: PrinterPortCom("Name";".PRS Name";COM;Baud Rate;Parity;Stop Bits;Character Length;XONOFF;Status;Initialize;Network;Suppress) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a printer name. .PRS Name (Optional) A character expression specifying a .PRS filename. COM Specifies the COM port to which the printer is connected. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ COM1! 4 Port COM 1 COM2! 5 Port COM 2 COM3! 6 Port COM 3 COM4! 7 Port COM 4 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Baud110! 0 Baud rate 110 Baud150! 1 Baud rate 150 Baud300! 2 Baud rate 300 Baud600! 3 Baud rate 600 Baud1200! 4 Baud rate 1200 Baud2400! 5 Baud rate 2400 Baud4800! 6 Baud rate 4800 Baud9600! 7 Baud rate 9600 Baud19200! 8 Baud rate 19200 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Parity Specifies the parity. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ParityEven! 0 ParityOdd! 1 ParityNone! 2 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Stop Bits Specifies the stop bits. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ StopBit1! 0 StopBit2! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Character Length Specifies the character length. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CharacterLength7! 0 CharacterLength8! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ XONOFF (optional) Specifies whether the XON/XOFF option is active. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoXONOFF! 0 XON/OFF option disabled XONOFF! 1 XON/OFF option active ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Status (Optional) Specifies whether to activate Skip Status Check. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SkipStatusCheckOn! 0 SkipStatusCheckOff! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Initialize (optional) Specifies whether to initialize the serial port. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ InitializeSerialPortOff! 0 InitializeSerialPortOn! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Network (Optional) Specifies whether the printer is a network printer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NonNetwork! 0 Not a network printer NetworkPrinter! 1 Network printer ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Suppress (Optional) Specifies whether the top of the form is suppressed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SuppressTopOfFormOff! 0 Do not suppress the top of form SuppressTopOfFormOn! 1 Suppress the top of form ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrinterPortLPT ──── ──── For Example... To specify that the HP LaserJet III network printer is connected to port COM2, 2400 baud rate, no parity, two stop bits, character length of 8, and to suppress the top of form, the command is: PrinterPortCOM("HP Laserjet III";"HP3.PRS";COM2!;Baud2400!;ParityNone!;StopBit2!;CharacterLen gth8!;;;;NetworkPrinter!;SuppressTopOfFormOn!) Tell Me More... PrinterPortCOM specifies information about a serial printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Edit, Port, selecting a port and choosing options. PrinterPortFilename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterPortFilename Syntax: PrinterPortFilename("Printer Name";".PRS Name";"NewName"; Prompt) Parameters: Printer Name A character expression specifying a printer name. .PRS Name (Optional) A character expression specifying a .PRS filename. NewName (Optional) A character expression specifying a new filename. This parameter should be left blank if using PromptForFilename! in the Prompt parameter. Prompt (Optional) Specifies whether to prompt for a new filename. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoPrompt! 0 Do not prompt PromptForFilename! 1 Prompt ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To print to a new file each time, the command is: PrinterPortFilename("ORIGINAL";"HP3.PRS";;PromptForFilename!) Tell Me More... PrinterPortFilename prints a document to a file rather than to a printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, highlighting a printer, Edit, Port, Filename. PrinterPortHardware Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterPortHard Syntax: PrinterPortHardware("Name";".PRS Name";Type;IRQ; Address) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a printer name. .PRS Name (Optional) A character expression specifying a .PRS filename. Type Specifies a hardware type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ HardwareOff! 1 HardwareOn! 2 HardwareAdvance! 4 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IRQ (Optional) Specifies a printer IRQ address. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IRQ2! 4 IRQ number 2 IRQ3! 8 IRQ number 3 IRQ4! 16 IRQ number 4 IRQ5! 32 IRQ number 5 IRQ6! 64 IRQ number 6 IRQ7! 128 IRQ number 7 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Address (Optional) A numeric expression specifying a printer's base memory address. ──── ──── For Example... To indicate the HP III printer hardware port is located in IRQ4 at the address B800:000, the command is: PrinterPortHardware("HP Laser Jet III";"HP3.PRS";HardwareOn!; IRQ4;B800:0000) Tell Me More... PrinterPortHardware specifies the hardware setup for a printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, highlighting a printer, Edit, Port, Advanced Hardware Port. PrinterPortLPT Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterPortLPT Syntax: PrinterPortLPT("Name";".PRS Name";LPT;Status;Network; Suppress) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a filename. .PRS Name (Optional) A character expression specifying a .PRS filename. LPT Specifies the LPT port to which the printer is connected. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LPT1! 0 Port LPT 1 LPT2! 1 Port LPT 2 LPT3! 2 Port LPT 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Status (Optional) Specifies whether to activate Skip Status Check. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SkipStatusCheckOn! 0 SkipStatusCheckOff! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Network (Optional) Specifies whether the printer is a network printer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NonNetwork! 0 Not a network printer NetworkPrinter! 1 Network printer ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Suppress (Optional) Specifies whether the top of the form is suppressed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SuppressTopOfFormOff! 0 Do not suppress the top of form SuppressTopOfFormOn! 1 Suppress the top of form ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify the HP LaserJet III network printer is connected to port LPT1 and suppresses the top of the form, the command is: PrinterPortLPT("HP Laserjet III";"HP3.PRS";LPT1!;; NetworkPrinter!;SuppressTopOfFormOn!) Tell Me More... PrinterPortLPT specifies information about a parallel printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Edit, Port, selecting a port. PrinterPortNetworkQueue Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterPortNetQueue Syntax: PrinterPortNetworkQueue("Name";".PRS" Name";"NetQueue"; Suppress) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a filename. .PRS Name (Optional) A character expression specifying a .PRS filename. NetQueue A character expression specifying the name of a network queue. Suppress (Optional) Specifies whether the top of the form is suppressed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SuppressTopOfFormOff! 0 Do not suppress the top of form SuppressTopOfFormOn! 1 Suppress the top of form ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify the printer as a HP Laserjet III on the network queue WPSUPRT2 and suppress the top of form, the command is: PrinterPortNetworkQueue("HP Laserjet III";"HP3.PRS";"WPSUPRT2"; SuppressTopOfFormOn!) Tell Me More... PrinterPortNetworkQueue specifies information about the network printer and its queue. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, highlighting a printer, Edit, Network Port, Server/Queue Name, typing a name. PrinterSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterSel Syntax: PrinterSelect("Printer";"Filename") Parameters: Printer A character expression specifying a printer name. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying a .PRS file. ──── ──── For Example... To select an HP LaserJet 4, the command is: PrinterSelect("HP LaserJet 4";"HP4.PRS") Tell Me More... PrinterSelect selects a printer. The printer selected remains the default until another printer is selected. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, and selecting a printer. PrinterSelectPrs Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterSelPrs Syntax: PrinterSelectPrs("Filename") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying a .PRS file. ──── ──── For Example... To select a .PRS file named FONTS.PRS, the command is: PrinterSelectPrs("FONTS.PRS") Tell Me More... PrinterSelectPrs selects a printer based on its .PRS filename. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, List, *.PRS, highlight a .PRS file, Select. PrinterSheetFeeder Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterSheetFeed Syntax: PrinterSheetFeeder("Printer";"Filename";"Sheet Feeder") Parameters: Printer A character expression specifying a printer name. printer. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the name of a printer .PRS file. Sheet Feeder A character expression specifying a sheet feeder. To specify no sheet feeder, leave this parameter blank. ──── ──── For Example... To specify an HP LaserJet 4 sheet feeder for an HP LaserJet 4 printer, the command is: PrinterSheetFeeder("HP LaserJet 4";"HP4.PRS";"HP LaserJet 4 (SF)") Tell Me More... PrinterSheetFeeder specifies a sheet feeder for a printer. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, Edit, Sheet Feeder, and selecting a sheet feeder. PrinterUpdate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrinterUpdate Syntax: PrinterUpdate("Printer";"Filename") Parameters: Printer A character expression specifying a printer name. Filename (optional) A character expression specifying the .PRS file of a printer. ──── ──── For Example... To update the HP LaserJet III, the command is: PrinterUpdate("HP LaserJet III";"HP3.PRS") Tell Me More... PrinterUpdate updates a .PRS file with changes made to the corresponding .ALL file. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Select, Update. PrintFullDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintFullDoc Syntax: PrintFullDoc Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintFullDoc prints the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Full Document, Print. PrintGraphicsJob Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintGraphJob Syntax: PrintGraphicsJob(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to print a document graphically. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not print graphically On! 1 Print graphically ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To print a document graphically, the command is: PrintGraphicsJob(On!) Tell Me More... PrintGraphicsJob determines whether to print a document graphically. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, and selecting Print Job Graphically. PrintGraphicsQuality Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintGraphQual Syntax: PrintGraphicsQuality(Resolution) Parameters: Resolution Specifies the resolution with which to print graphics. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DoNotPrint! 0 Draft! 1 Medium! 2 High! 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintGraphicsQualitySetup ──── ──── For Example... To print graphics with high resolution, the command is: PrintGraphicsQuality(High!) Tell Me More... PrintGraphicsQuality specifies graphics print quality for the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Graphics Quality, and selecting an option. PrintGraphicsQualitySetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintGraphQualSetup Syntax: PrintGraphicsQualitySetup(Resolution) Parameters: Resolution Specifies print quality. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DoNotPrint! 0 Draft! 1 Medium! 2 High! 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintGraphicsQuality ──── ──── For Example... To change the default resolution of printing graphics to high resolution, the command is: PrintGraphicsQualitySetup(High!) Tell Me More... PrintGraphicsQualitySetup changes the default resolution of printing graphics. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Setup, Graphics Quality, and selecting an option. PrintInkColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintInkClr Syntax: PrintInkColor(Color) Parameters: Color Specifies a color to print. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Black! 0 FullColor! 1 SolidColor! 2 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintInkColorSetup ──── ──── For Example... To print a document with solid color, the command is: PrintInkColor(FullColor!) Tell Me More... PrintInkColor specifies a color to print the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Print Color, and selecting an option. PrintInkColorSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintInkClrSetup Syntax: PrintInkColorSetup(Color) Parameters: Color Specifies a color to print. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Black! 0 FullColor! 1 SolidColor! 2 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintInkColor ──── ──── For Example... To print documents with solid color, the command is: PrintInkColorSetup(FullColor!) Tell Me More... PrintInkColorSetup specifies the default color to print. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Setup, Print Color, and selecting an option. PrintMultiplePages Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintMultPg Syntax: PrintDocOnDisk("Page Range";"Secondary Page Range";"Chapter Range";"Volume Range";Odd/Even Pages; DocSummary; Pamphlet; Order;"Output Filename") Parameters: Page Range (optional) A character expression specifying a range of pages to print. Secondary Page Range (optional) A character expression specifying a secondary range of pages to print. Chapter Range (optional) A character expression specifying a range of chapters to print. Volume Range (optional) A character expression specifying a range of volumes to print. Odd/Even Pages (optional) Determines whether to print all, odd, or even pages. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PrintAll! 0 PrintOdd! 2 PrintEven! 4 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DocSummary Determines whether to print a document summary. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoDocSummary! 0 DocSummary! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pamphlet Indicates whether to print a document as a booklet, with logical pages numbered and printed in correct sequence. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoBooklet! 0 Booklet! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Order Determines whether to print pages in ascending or descending order. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Forward! 0 Backward! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To print all pages of the current document, including the document summary, the command is: PrintMultiplePages(PrintAll!;DocSummary!;NoBooklet!;Forward!) Tell Me More... PrintMultiplePages prints specified pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Multiple Pages, and selecting options in the Print Multiple Pages dialog box. PrintNetworkBanner Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintNetBan Syntax: PrintNetworkBanner(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to print a banner with a print job. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Yes! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To print a banner with a print job, the command is: PrintNetworkBanner(Yes!) Tell Me More... PrintNetworkBanner determines whether to print a banner (lead page), identifying the user, with the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Network Options, selecting (or deselecting) Banner. PrintNetworkBannerSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintNetBanSetup Syntax: PrintNetworkBannerSetup(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to print a banner with a print job. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Yes! 1 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To print a banner with all network print jobs, the command is: PrintNetworkBannerSetup(Yes!) Tell Me More... PrintNetworkBannerSetup changes the default of whether to print a banner (lead page) which identifies the user sending the job. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Setup, selecting (or deselecting) Banners. PrintNetworkForm Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintNetForm Syntax: PrintNetworkForm(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a form number. ──── ──── For Example... To specify form 0, the command is: PrintNetworkForm(0) Tell Me More... PrintNetworkForm specifies a form number. The form number refers to a NetWare setting for which you must consult NetWare documentation for more specific information. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Network Options, entering a Form Number. PrintNetworkFormSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintNetFormSetup Syntax: PrintNetworkFormSetup(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a form number. ──── ──── For Example... To specify form 0, the command is: PrintNetworkFormSetup(0) Tell Me More... PrintNetworkFormSetup specifies a default form number. The form number refers to a NetWare setting. Consult NetWare documentation for more specific information. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Setup, entering a Form Number. PrintPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPg Syntax: PrintPage Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPage prints the current page. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Page, Print. PrintPCL4PointSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPCL4PSz Syntax: PrintPCL4PointSize(Point Size) Parameters: Point Size A numeric expression specifying the point size at which WordPerfect 6.0 graphics fonts will be sent to an HP LaserJet printer as soft fonts. The default size is 24pt. ──── ──── For Example... To specify that graphics fonts 30 points or larger in size be sent to the printer as soft fonts, the command is: PrintPCL4PointSize(30) Tell Me More... PrintPCL4PointSize determines the minimum point size at which graphics fonts are sent to a printer as soft fonts. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Setup, Threshold Point Size, specifying a point size. PrintPreview Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrev Syntax: PrintPreview Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreview displays a current document in a WYSIWYG graphical format. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print Preview. PrintPreviewButtonBar Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevBBar Syntax: PrintPreviewButtonBar Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewButtonBar acts as a toggle in Print Preview to display or hide the Button Bar. This command has no effect unless the program is in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewButtonBarEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevBBarEd Syntax: PrintPreviewButtonBarEdit Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewButtonBarEdit displays the Edit Button Bar dialog box in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar Setup, and Edit while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewButtonBarOptions Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevBBarOpts Syntax: PrintPreviewButtonBarOptions Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewButtonBarOptions displays the Button Bar Options dialog box in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Button Bar Setup, and Options while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewCancel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevCancel Syntax: PrintPreviewCancel Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewCancel cancels changes made to Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of pressing Escape (Esc) while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewDownArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevDnArr Syntax: PrintPreviewDownArrow Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewDownArrow scrolls down the Print Preview window, bringing portions of the document into view areas not initially visible. This command is the equivalent of pressing the Down Arrow while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevEnd Syntax: PrintPreviewEnd Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewEnd displays the right side of a page if Zoom is at 200%. This command is the equivalent of pressing End while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewExit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevExit Syntax: PrintPreviewExit Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewExit exits Print Preview and returns to a document window. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Close while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewFacingPages Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevFacingPgs Syntax: PrintPreviewFacingPages Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewFacingPages displays two consecutive pages side by side in Print Preview, with even-numbered pages on the left and odd-numbered pages on the right. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Facing Pages while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewFileMenu Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevFileMenu Syntax: PrintPreviewFileMenu Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewFileMenu displays the File menu in Print Preview. The program must be in Print Preview for this command to have any effect. This command is the equivalent of choosing File while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewFullPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevFullPg Syntax: PrintPreviewFullPage Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewFullPage displays a full document page in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Full Page while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewGoToPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevGoToPg Syntax: PrintPreviewGoToPage Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewGoToPage displays the Go To Page dialog box in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing Pages, Go To Page while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewHelpMenu Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevHlpMenu Syntax: PrintPreviewHelpMenu Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewHelpMenu displays the Help menu in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing Help while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewHome Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevHome Syntax: PrintPreviewHome Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewHome is used in conjunction with other commands, such as PrintPreviewDownArrow and PrintPreviewLeftArrow, to view a document one screen at a time. This command is the equivalent of pressing Home while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewInvert Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevInv Syntax: PrintPreviewInvert Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewInvert inverts the screen display in Print Preview. The program must be in Print Preview for this command to have any effect. PrintPreviewLeftArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevLftArr Syntax: PrintPreviewLeftArrow Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewRightArrow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewLeftArrow scrolls left across a Print Preview window, bringing into view portions of the document not initially visible. The program must be in Print Preview for this command to have any effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing the Left Arrow while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewMenu Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevMenu Syntax: PrintPreviewMenu Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewMenu places the focus on the menu bar while in Print Preview. This command is equivalent of pressing Alt+= while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewNextPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevNextPg Syntax: PrintPreviewNextPage Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewNextPage displays the next page or pair of facing pages in the view window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Pages, Next Page while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewPageDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevPgDn Syntax: PrintPreviewPageDown Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewPageDown displays the next page in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent pressing Page Down while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewPagesMenu Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevPgMenu Syntax: PrintPreviewPagesMenu Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewPagesMenu displays the Pages menu in Print Preview. The program must be in Print Preview for this command to have any effect. This command is the equivalent of choosing Pages while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewPageUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevPgUp Syntax: PrintPreviewPageUp Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewPageUp displays the previous page in Print Preview. The program must be in Print Preview for this command to have any effect. This command is the equivalent of pressing Page Up while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewPreviousPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevPrevPg Syntax: PrintPreviewPreviousPage Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewNextPage ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewPreviousPage displays the previous page or previous pair of facing pages in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing Pages, Previous Page while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewReferencePage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevRefPg Syntax: PrintPreviewReferencePage Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewReferencePage displays a small page representation where an area may be selected to magnify in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Select Area while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewRightArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevRgtArr Syntax: PrintPreviewRightArrow Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewLeftArrow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewRightArrow scrolls right across a Print Preview window, bringing into view portions of the document not initially visible. This command is the equivalent of pressing the Right Arrow while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewScreenDown Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevScrDn Syntax: PrintPreviewScreenDown Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewScreenUp ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewScreenDown scrolls down a document one screen at a time in Print Preview. PrintPreviewScreenUp Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevScrUp Syntax: PrintPreviewScreenUp Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewScreenDown ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewScreenUp scrolls up a document one screen at a time in Print Preview. The program must be in Print Preview and in a Zoom mode for this command to have any effect. PrintPreviewSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevSetup Syntax: PrintPreviewSetup Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewSetup displays the PrintPreviewOptions dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewThumbnails1 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevThumb1 Syntax: PrintPreviewThumbnails1 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewThumbnails2 PrintPreviewThumbnails32 PrintPreviewThumbnails4 PrintPreviewThumbnails8 PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewThumbnails1 displays a small page representation in the left half of the Print Preview window. The program must be in Print Preview for this command to work. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Thumbnails, 1 Page while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewThumbnails2 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevThumb2 Syntax: PrintPreviewThumbnails2 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewThumbnails1 PrintPreviewThumbnails32 PrintPreviewThumbnails4 PrintPreviewThumbnails8 PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewThumbnails2 displays two small representations in the Print Preview window. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Thumbnails, 2 Page in Print Preview. PrintPreviewThumbnails32 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevThumb32 Syntax: PrintPreviewThumbnails32 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewThumbnails1 PrintPreviewThumbnails2 PrintPreviewThumbnails4 PrintPreviewThumbnails8 PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewThumbnails32 displays 32 small page representations in the Print PReview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Thumbnails, 32 Page in Print Preview. PrintPreviewThumbnails4 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevThumb4 Syntax: PrintPreviewThumbnails4 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewThumbnails1 PrintPreviewThumbnails2 PrintPreviewThumbnails32 PrintPreviewThumbnails8 PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewThumbnails4 displays 4 small page representations in the Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Thumbnails, 4 Page in Print Preview. PrintPreviewThumbnails8 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevThumb8 Syntax: PrintPreviewThumbnails8 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewThumbnails1 PrintPreviewThumbnails2 PrintPreviewThumbnails32 PrintPreviewThumbnails4 PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewThumbnails8 displays 8 small page representations in the Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Thumbnails, 8 Page in Print Preview. PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevThumbOth Syntax: PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewThumbnails1 PrintPreviewThumbnails2 PrintPreviewThumbnails32 PrintPreviewThumbnails4 PrintPreviewThumbnails8 ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewThumbnailsOther displays the Thumbnail Other dialog box in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Thumbnails, Other in Print Preview. PrintPreviewUpArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevUpArr Syntax: PrintPreviewUpArrow Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview PrintPreviewDownArrow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewUpArrow scrolls up a Print Preview window, bringing into view portions of a document not initially visible. This command is the equivalent of pressing Up Arrow () while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewViewMenu Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevViewMenu Syntax: PrintPreviewViewMenu Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewViewMenu displays the View menu in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewZoom100 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevZoom100 Syntax: PrintPreviewZoom100 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewZoom100 displays a document at its printed size in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, 100% View while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewZoom200 Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevZoom200 Syntax: PrintPreviewZoom200 Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewZoom200 displays a document at twice its printed size in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, 200% View while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewZoomArea Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevZoomArea Syntax: PrintPreviewZoomArea Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewZoomArea converts a pointer to a magnifying glass, enabling the user to zoom an area in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Zoom Area while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewZoomIn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevZoomIn Syntax: PrintPreviewZoomIn Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewZoomIn increases the display size of a document by 25% in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Zoom In while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewZoomOut Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevZoomOut Syntax: PrintPreviewZoomOut Parameters: None See Also: PrintPreview ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewZoomOut decreases the display size of a document by 25% in Print Preview. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Zoom Out while in Print Preview. PrintPreviewZoomReset Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintPrevZoomReset Syntax: PrintPreviewZoomReset Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintPreviewZoomReset resets the Print Preview window to the Zoom option selected at the time the window was opened. While in Print Preview, this command is the equivalent of choosing View, Resest. PrintSelection Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintSel Syntax: PrintSelection Parameters: None See Also: LABEL ONERROR ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... PrintSelection prints blocked text. If no text is selected, this command terminates the macro or redirects execution to the LABEL specified by an ONERROR command. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Blocked Text, Print while text is blocked. PrintSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintSetupDlg Syntax: PrintSetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... PrintSetupDlg displays the Print Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Print Setup. PrintTextQuality Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintTxtQual Syntax: PrintTextQuality(Resolution) Parameters: Resolution Specifies resolution of printed text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DoNotPrint! 0 Draft! 1 Medium! 2 High! 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: PrintTextQualitySetup ──── ──── For Example... To print the current document text with high resolution, the command is: PrintTextQuality(High!) Tell Me More... PrintTextQuality specifies print quality for current document text. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Text Quality, and selecting an option. PrintTextQualitySetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PrintTxtQualSetup Syntax: PrintTextQualitySetup(Resolution) Parameters: Resolution Specifies resolution for printed text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DoNotPrint! 0 Draft! 1 Medium! 2 High! 3 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To change the default resolution of printing text to high resolution, the command is: PrintTextQualitySetup(High!) Tell Me More... PrintTextQualitySetup changes the default resolution of printing text. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Setup, Text Quality, and selecting an option. PullDownDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: PullDnDlg Syntax: PullDownDlg Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... PullDownDlg displays the pull down menus. This command is not recordable. To use PullDownDlg, it must by typed into the macro. This command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+=. QuickFinderDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderDel Syntax: QuickFinderDelete(Type;"Description") Parameters: Type Specifies an index type to delete. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Description A character expression specifying the description of an index to delete. ──── ── For Example... To delete an index description named RECIPES, the command is: QuickFinderDelete(Personal!;"Recipes") Tell Me More... QuickFinderDelete deletes an index description. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use QuickFinder, Setup, selecting a description, Delete, Yes. QuickFinderDefine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderDef Syntax: QuickFinderDefine(Type;Description;Name) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type to define. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Specifies that WordPerfect should use personal indexes Shared! 2 Specifies that WordPerfect should use shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Description A character expression specifying the description of the indexed file. Name A character expression specifying the indexed (.IDX) filename. See Also: QuickFinderDirectoryPattern ──── ── For Example... To define an personal index with the description "personal documents" in the path c:\wp60 with the name docs, the command is: QuickFinderDefine(personal!;"Personal Documents";"c:\wp60\docs") Tell Me More... QuickFinderDefine defines, not creates, an index with the specified name and description. In order to create the actual index, you must enter the QuickFinder, highlight the defined index and choose Edit. QuickFinderDirectoryPattern Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderDirPattern Syntax: QuickFinderDirectoryPattern(Type;Description;Patte rn) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Description Specifies the description of the index to modify. Pattern Specifies a directory pattern such as *.pri, of the files contained in an index. See Also: QuickFinderDefine QuickFinderGenerate ──── ── For Example... To specify that a personal index with the description "My Primary Files" include all files ending with .pri, the command is: QuickFinderDirectoryPattern(Personal!;"My Primary Files";"*.PRI") Tell Me More... QuickFinderDirectoryPattern specifies files included in an index. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use QuickFinder, Setup, Edit, Directories and Files to Index, Add. QuickFinderDirPatternDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderDirPatternDel Syntax: QuickFinderDirPatternDelete(Type;Description;Patte rn) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Description Specifies the description of an index to delete. Pattern Specifies an index directory pattern to delete. ──── ── For Example... To delete the directory pattern *.pri in a personal index with the description "My Primary Files", the command is: QuickFinderDirPatternDelete(Personal!;"My Primary Files";"*.pri") Tell Me More... QuickFinderDirPatternDelete deletes files from an index. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use QuickFinder, Setup, Edit, Directories and Files to Index, selecting the files, Delete. QuickFinderDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderDlg Syntax: QuickFinderDlg Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... QuickFinderDlg displays the QuickFinder File Indexer dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder. QuickFinderGenerate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderGen Syntax: QuickFinderGenerate(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type to generate. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: QuickFinderMark ──── ── For Example... To generate marked indexes, the command is: QuickFinderGenerate(Personal!) Tell Me More... QuickFinderGenerate generates an index of a specified type for marked indexes. This command is used in conjunction with QuickFinderMark. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder, Setup, marking the indexes, Generate Marked Indexes. QuickFinderMark Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderMrk Syntax: QuickFinderMark(Type;Description;Method) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Description Specifies the description of an index to mark. Method Determines whether to mark or unmark an index. If an index is marked, this parameter specifies a mark, generate or update, to use. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoGen! 0 None GenerateIndex! 1 Full generation UpdateIndex! 2 Incremental update ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: QuickFinderMarkAll ──── ── For Example... To generate a personal index with the description "My Primary Files", the command is: QuickFinderMark(Personal!;"My Primary Files";GenerateIndex!) Tell Me More... QuickFinderMark marks indexes for full generations or incremental updates. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder, Setup, selecting a file, (Un)mark to Regenerate or (Un)mark to Update. QuickFinderMarkAll Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderMrkAll Syntax: QuickFinderMarkAll(Type;Method) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Method (optional) Specifies an index marking method. If this parameter is omitted, WordPerfect will default to UpdateIndex!. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoGen! 0 Unmarks all indexes of the type GenerateIndex! 1 Marks all for full generation UpdateIndex! 2 Marks all for incremental update UpdateAutoIndex! 3 Marks all for incremental update except those marked for manual update ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: QuickFinderMark ──── ── For Example... To generate all personal indexes, the command is: QuickFinderMarkAll(Personal!;GenerateIndex!) Tell Me More... QuickFinderMarkAll marks all indexes of a specified type for enumerate methods. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder, Setup, and marking all index descriptions. QuickFinderOptions Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderOpt Syntax: QuickFinderOptions(Type;Description;Numbers;Includ eFiles;Update;Document;Level;ExcludeFiles) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Personal indexes Shared! 2 Shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Description Specifies a description of an index to delete. Numbers (Optional) Determines whether an index includes numbers. If this parameter is omitted, the default is IncludeNumbers. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DontIncludeNumbers! 0 Numbers excluded IncludeNumbers! 1 Numbers included ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IncludeFiles (Optional) Specifies files to include in an index. If this parameter is omitted, WordPerfect's default is IndexAllFiles. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IndexAllFiles! 0 All files IndexWPDocOnly! 1 WordPerfect documents only ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Update (Optional) Specifies the update method. If this parameter is omitted, AutoUpdate is the default. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AutoUpdate! 0 Automatic update ManualUpdateOnly! 1 Manual update ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Document (Optional) Specifies a portion of a document to include in an index. If this parameter is omitted WordPerfect's default is IndexDocText. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IncludeDocText! 1 Text only IncludeDocSummary! 2 Summary only IncludeDocTextAndDocSum!3 Text and summary ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Level (Optional) Specifies how the files will be indexed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LevelLine! 1 Index lines LevelSentence! 2 Index sentences LevelPara! 3 Index paragraphs LevelPage! 4 Index pages LevelSection! 5 Index sections LevelField! 6 Index fields LevelRecord! 7 Index records LevelDocument! 8 Index documents ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExcludeFiles (Optional) A character expression specifying files in an index to exclude. ──── ── For Example... To define a personal index named "Recipes" that only includes the text of WordPerfect documents and indexes according to lines, the command is: QuickFinderOptions(Personal!;"Recipes";;IndexWPDocOnly!;;IncludeD ocText!;LevelLine!;"*.pri") Tell Me More... QuickFinderOptions specifies the options available to an index. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder, Setup, Edit, Options. QuickFinderRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderRen Syntax: QuickFinderRename(Type;OldDescription;NewDescripti on) Parameters: Type Specifies an index type to rename. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Personal! 1 Specifies that WordPerfect should use personal indexes Shared! 2 Specifies that WordPerfect should use shared indexes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OldDescription A character expression specifying the current description of an index to rename. NewDescription A character expression specifying a new index description. ──── ── For Example... To rename a personal index with a current description of "Personal Documents" to "My Primary Files", the command is: QuickFinderRename(Personal!;"Personal Documents";"My Primary Files") Tell Me More... QuickFinderRename renames an index description. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder, Setup, selecting an index description, Rename. QuickFinderSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QFinderSel Syntax: QuickFinderSelect(Description) Parameters: Description A character expression specifying the description of an index to select. ──── ── For Example... To select an index with description "My Primary Files", the command is: QuickFinderSelect("My Primary Files") Tell Me More... QuickFinderSelect selects an index. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, Use Quickfinder, Index and selecting an index. QuickListUpdate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QuickListUpdate Syntax: QuickListUpdate Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... QuickListUpdate updates the Quicklist. This command does not have an equivalent keystroke. QuickmarkBlock Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QMarkBlk Syntax: QuickmarkBlock Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... QuickMarkBlock finds and blocks text between QuickMark on and off codes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Bookmark, highlighting QuickMark, Find and Block. QuickmarkDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QmarkDel Syntax: QuickmarkDelete Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... QuickMarkDelete removes a QuickMark from a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Bookmark, highlighting Quickmark, Delete, Yes. QuickmarkFind Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QmarkFind Syntax: QuickmarkFind Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... QuickmarkFind positions the cursor on the first character after a Quickmark. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Bookmark, highlighting QuickMark, Find. QuickmarkMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QmarkMove Syntax: QuickmarkMove Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... QuickMarkMove moves a QuickMark to the current location of the cursor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Bookmark, highlighting QuickMark, Move. QuickmarkSet Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QmarkSet Syntax: QuickmarkSet Parameters: None See Also: QuickMarkSetOnSave ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... QuickmarkSet places a unique bookmark in a document. If "Set QuickMark in Document on Save" is active, any QuickMark added by the macro will automatically be moved to the current cursor position when the document is saved. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Bookmark, Set QuickMark. QuickmarkSetOnSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: QmarkSetOnSave Syntax: QuickmarkSetOnSave(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a Quickmark is saved with the file. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not add a Quickmark Yes! 1 Add a Quickmark at the current position of the cursor ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: QuickMarkSet ──── ── For Example... To specify not to create a Quickmark when a document is saved, the command is: QuickMarkSetOnSave(No!) Tell Me More... QuickMarkSetOnSave inserts the QuickMark at the cursor when the document is saved. A document contains only one Quickmark at a time. When QuickmarkSetOnSave is active, any other Quickmark code is removed when the document is saved. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Bookmark, Set QuickMark in Document on Save. RedlineCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RedlnCharacter Syntax: RedlineCharacter(Character) Parameters: Character A character expression specifying the redline character for a current document. See Also: RedlineCharacterSetup RedlineMethod ──── ── For Example... To specify the redline character as a greater than sign (>), the command is: RedlineCharacter(">") Tell Me More... RedlineCharacter specifies the character printed in the margin of redlined text. RedlineCharacter is available only when RedlineMethod is not defined as PrinterDependent. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Redline Character. RedlineCharacterSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RedlnCharSetup Syntax: RedlineCharacterSetup(Character) Parameters: Character A character expression specifying a default redline character. See Also: RedlineCharacter RedlineMethodSetup ──── ── For Example... To specify the default redline character as a pipe symbol (|), the command is: RedlineCharacterSetup("|") Tell Me More... RedlineCharacterSetup specifies a default character to print with redlined text. This command will not have any effect on previously created documents. RedlineCharacterSetup is available only when RedlineMethodSetup is not defined as PrinterDependent. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print/Fax, Setup, Redline Character. RedlineMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RedlnMeth Syntax: RedlineMethod(Method) Parameters: Method Specifies a redline method for the current document. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PrinterDependent! 0 Print the redline if the printer is able LeftMargin! 1 Place the redline marking in the left margin Alternating! 2 Alternate the redline marking between left and right margins RightMargin! 3 Place the redline marking in the right margin ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: RedlineMethodSetup RedlineCharacter ──── ── For Example... To specify redline markings on the right side of a printout, the command is: RedlineMethod(Right!) Tell Me More... RedlineMethod specifies a redline method for the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Document, Redline Method. RedlineMethodSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RedlnMethSetup Syntax: RedlineMethodSetup(Method) Parameters: Method Specifies a default redline method. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PrinterDependent! 0 Print the redline if the printer is able LeftMargin! 1 Place the redline marking in the left margin Alternating! 2 Alternate the redline marking between left and right margins RightMargin! 3 Place the redline marking in the right margin ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: RedlineMethod RedlineCharacterSetup ──── ── For Example... To specify default redline markings to appear alternately on the right and left hand sides of a printout, the command is: RedlineMethodSetup(Alternating!) Tell Me More... RedlineMethodSetup specifies a redline method for the current and all succeeding documents. It will not effect any created documents. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Print, Setup, Redline Method. RepeatDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RepDlg Syntax: RepeatDlg Parameters: None See Also: RepeatSet ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... RepeatDlg displays the Repeat dialog box and pauses the macro until Set or Cancel is clicked. This command does not specify how many times to repeat a command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Repeat. RepeatSet Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RepSet Syntax: RepeatSet(Value) Parameters: Value This parameter specifies a default number for the Repeat dialog box. Numbers can range from 1 to 65535. A variable containing a numeric expression within the same range is also valid. ──── ── For Example... To set a repeat value of 10, the command is: RepeatSet(10) Tell Me More... The RepeatSet sets a default repeat value. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Repeat, entering a number, Set. RepeatValue Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RepVal Syntax: RepeatValue(Value) Parameters: Value (Optional) This parameter must be either a number between 1 and 65535 or a variable containing a numeric expression within that range. If this parameter is omitted, the default value of 8, or a user- specified default, is used. See Also: RepeatSet ──── ── For Example... To set the repeat value at 10, the command is: RepeatValue(10) Tell Me More... The RepeatValue repeats the next macro command a specified number of times. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Repeat. ReplaceBackward Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ReplBack Syntax: ReplaceBackward(Method) Parameters: Method (Optional) Specifies the scope the replace feature will affect. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. If this parameter is omitted, Regular is the default. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Regular! 0 Do not search substructures Extended! 1 Search substructures ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ReplaceForward ──── ── For Example... To replace text from a current cursor position backward, the command is: ReplaceBackward(Extended!) Tell Me More... ReplaceBackward searches and replaces a specific word from the current location of the cursor backward throughout a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, Backward Search, Replace. ReplaceConfirm Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ReplConf Syntax: ReplaceConfirm(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to prompt for confirmation before replacing a text. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not prompt Yes! 1 Prompt before replacing ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ── For Example... To activate the replacement prompt, the command is: ReplaceConfirm(Yes!) Tell Me More... ReplaceConfirm specifies whether or not WordPerfect to prompt the user at every occurrence of a search string. If this command is omitted, the replace feature defaults to the confirmation mode of the previous replacement command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, Confirm Replacement, Replace. ReplaceDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ReplDlg Syntax: ReplaceDlg Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ReplaceDlg displays the Search and Replace dialog box. This is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace. ReplaceForward Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ReplFor Syntax: ReplaceForward(Method) Parameters: Method (Optional) Specifies the scope the replace feature will affect. If this parameter is omitted, the default is Regular. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Regular! 0 Do not search substructures Extended! 1 Search substructures ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ReplaceBackward ──── ── For Example... To start the replacement function forward from the current cursor position including substructures, the command is: ReplaceForward(Extended!) Tell Me More... ReplaceForward replaces specific text from the current cursor position forward. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, deselecting Backward Search if necessary, Replace. ReplaceLimitNumberOfMatches Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ReplLimNumOfMatches Syntax: ReplaceLimitNumberOfMatches(State;Number) Parameters: State Specifies whether the number of replaces will be limited. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not limit replaces Yes! 1 Limit number of replaces ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Number A numeric expression specifying a number of matches. ──── ──── For Example... ReplaceLimitNumberOfMatches(yes!;3) Tell Me More... ReplaceLimitNumberOfMatches limits the number of replacements. This command only toggles the Limit Number of Matches option; it does not execute the replace. This command is used in conjunction with ReplaceForward or ReplaceBackward. This command is the equivalent of choosing, Edit, Replace, Limit Number of Matches. ReplaceString Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ReplStr Syntax: ReplaceString(String) Parameters: String A character expression specifying text to replace. See Also: SearchString ──── ── For Example... To define the replacement string as "Jonathan," the command is: ReplaceString("Jonathan") Tell Me More... ReplaceString contains a character expression to replace each occurrence of the search string. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, Replace With. ReselectLastBlock Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Reselect Syntax: ReselectLastBlock Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... This is the equivalent of turning block on and pressing Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+Home (PosGoPrevious). This command is not recordable. ReselectLastSelection Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Reselect Syntax: ReselectLastSelection Parameters: None ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ReselectLastSelection selects the last block selected. This command is not recordable and has no keystroke equivalent. RevealCodes Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RevCodes Syntax: RevealCodes(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to activate Reveal Codes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Turn Reveal Codes off On! 1 Turn Reveal Codes on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: RevealCodesKey ──── ── For Example... To turn of Reveal Codes, the command is: RevealCodes(Off!) Tell Me More... RevealCodes turns Reveal Codes on or off. This is the equivalent of choosing View, Reveal Codes. RevealCodesDisplayDetail Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RevCodesDispDetail Syntax: RevealCodesDisplayDetail(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Reveal Codes displays details. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not display detail Yes! 1 Display detail ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ── For Example... To display details in Reveal Codes, the command is: RevealCodesDisplayDetail(Yes!) Tell Me More... This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Reveal Codes, Display Details. RevealCodesKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RevCodesKey Syntax: RevealCodesKey Parameters: None See Also: RevealCodes ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... RevealCodesKey turns Reveal Codes on or off. This command is used by the Keyboard Layout. On the Original keyboard, this command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F3 or F11. RevealCodesWindowSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RevCodesWinSz Syntax: RevealCodesWindowSize(Size) Parameters: Size Specifies a percentage of the document window the codes screen occupies. ──── ── For Example... To reserve half of the screen for the Reveal Codes window, the command is: RevealCodesWindowSize(50) Tell Me More... RevealCodesWindowSize resizes the Reveal Codes screen for the current document only. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Reveal Codes, Window Size, and entering a percentage. RevealCodesWindowSizeSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RevCodesWinSzSetup Syntax: RevealCodesWindowSizeSetup Parameters: None See Also: RevealCodesWindowSize ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... RevealCodesWindowSizeSetup resizes the default Reveal Codes screen. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Reveal Codes, Window Size. RewriteKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RewriteKey Syntax: RewriteKey Parameters: None See Also: DisplayRewrite ScreenDlg ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... RewriteKey either rewrites the screen, as in the Equation Editor, or displays the Screen dialog box. This command is used by the Keyboard Layout. On the Original keyboard, this command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F3. RibbonSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RibbonSetup Syntax: RibbonSetup(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to display the ribbon. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not display the ribbon On! 1 Display the ribbon ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ── For Example... To display the ribbon by default, the command is: RibbonSetup(On!) Tell Me More... RibbonSetup turns on the ribbon display default. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Screen Options, Ribbon. RibbonSetupGraphics Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RibbonSetupGraph Syntax: RibbonSetupGraphics(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the ribbon is displayed in graphics mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not display the ribbon On! 1 Display the ribbon ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: RibbonSetupText RibbonSetup ──── ── For Example... To display the ribbon while in Graphics Mode, the command is: RibbonSetupGraphics(On!) Tell Me More... RibbonSetupGraphics specifies whether the ribbon will display in Graphics Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Ribbon in Graphics Mode. RibbonSetupText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RibbonSetupTxt Syntax: RibbonSetupText(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the ribbon is displayed in text mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not display the ribbon On! 1 Display the ribbon ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: RibbonSetupGraphics RibbonSetup ──── ──── For Example... To display the ribbon while in Text Mode, the command is: RibbonSetupText(On!) Tell Me More... RibbonSetupText specifies whether the ribbon will display in Text Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Ribbon in Text Mode. RightArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: RgtArr Syntax: RightArrow Parameters: None See Also: LeftArrow ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... RightArrow positions the cursor one character or code to the right. This command is the equivalent of pressing the Right Arrow key. Save Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Save Syntax: Save Parameters: None See Also: SaveTempDoc ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Save saves a current document. If the document has not been named, the Save Document dialog box is displayed. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Save. SaveTempDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SaveTempDoc Syntax: SaveTempDoc Parameters: None See Also: ?TempDocName ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SaveTempDoc saves the current document in a temporary file with a .twp extension. This command is not recordable. ScreenDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ScrDlg Syntax: ScreenDlg Parameters: None See Also: RewriteKey DisplayRewrite ──── ── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ScreenDlg displays the Screen dialog box. This is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F3. ScreenMatchBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ScrnMatchBeg Syntax: ScreenMatchBegin Parameters: None See Also: ScreenMatchTable ScreenMatchEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ScreenMatchBegin must be used in connection with the ScreenMatchTable and ScreenMatchEnd commands. This command is not recordable. ScreenMatchEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ScrnMatchEnd Syntax: ScreenMatchEnd(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the screen font changes are saved to the printer file. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ScreenMatchBegin ScreenMatchTable ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ScreenMatchEnd must be used in connection with the ScreenMatchBegin and ScreenMatchTable commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing ScreenMatchTable Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ScrnMatchTbl Syntax: ScreenMatchTable("Typeface";"Attribute";"Group";"E xt";PtSize;CPISize;Location;Name;Remove) Parameters: Typeface A character expression specifying a font typeface. Attribute A character expression specifying a typeface attributes such as Bold. Group A character expression specifying a font group such as Speedo. Ext A character expression specifying a font extension such as ASCII or Landscape. PtSize (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the point size of a font. CPISize (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the CPI size of a font if the font is monospaced. Location Specifies the location of the font. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PRSFile 16 .PRS file DRSFile 20 .DRS file ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Name A character expression specifying the name of the font to which we're mapping. This must include the point size and/or width if applicable. Remove Specifies whether to remove the font mappings. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoveMapping! 1 Remove font mappings ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ScreenMatchBegin ScreenMatchEnd ──── ──── For Example... To map the Swiss 721 Roman (Speedo) font to display on the screen when the Helvetica printer font is used in Graphics or Page mode, the command is: ScreenMatchBegin ScreenMatchTable("Helvetica";"";"";"";;;DRSFile!;"Swiss 721 Roman (Speedo)") ScreenMatchEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... ScreenMatchTable maps screen fonts used in Graphics and Page mode when a printer font selected. This command must be used in conjunction with the ScreenMatchBegin and ScreenMatchEnd commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Setup, Edit Screen Font Mapping Table. ScreenSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ScreenSetupDlg Syntax: ScreenSetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ScreenSetupDlg displays the Screen Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup. SearchBackwardDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchBackDlg Syntax: SearchBackwardDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SearchBackwardDlg displays the Search dialog box with the Backward Search option selected. All other options that were selected by a previous search will also be selected. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, Backward Search. SearchCaseSensitive Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchCaseSens Syntax: SearchCaseSensitive(State) Parameters: State Determines whether searches are case sensitive. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not case sensitive Yes! 1 Case sensitive ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Case Sensitive Search, the command is: SearchCaseSensitive(Yes!) Tell Me More... SearchCaseSensitive selects the Case Sensitive Search option in the Search dialog box. Only the text that matches the search string exactly will be located. This command only marks or unmarks the option; it does not execute a search. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, Case Sensitive Search. SearchDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchDlg Syntax: SearchDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SearchDlg displays the Search dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search. SearchFindWholeWordsOnly Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchFindWholeWordsOnly Syntax: SearchFindWholeWordsOnly(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether to restrict a search to whole words only. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Locate all occurrences Yes! 1 Only whole words ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To restrict the search to whole words only, the command is: SearchFindWholeWordsOnly(Yes!) Tell Me More... SearchFindWholeWordsOnly selects Find Whole Words Only in the Search dialog box. This command only marks or unmarks the option; it does not execute a search. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, Find Whole Words Only. SearchInSelection Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchInSel Syntax: SearchInSelection(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a search is restricted to a block of text on the screen. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Search without respect to block Yes! 1 Search block only ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To restrict the search to a block of text, the command is: SearchInSelection(Yes!) Tell Me More... This is a windows specific command. SearchNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchNext Syntax: SearchNext(Type) Parameters: Type (Optional) Specifies a type of search. If this parameter is omitted, a regular search is executed because the default is Regular. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Regular! 0 Search text only Extended! 1 Search text, headers, footers, graphics... ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: SearchPrevious ──── ──── For Example... To execute a forward extended search, the command is: SearchNext(Extended!) Tell Me More... SearchNext executes a forward search. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, Search. SearchPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchPrev Syntax: SearchPrevious(Type) Parameters: Type (Optional) Specifies a search type. If this parameter is omitted, a regular search is executed because the default is Regular. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Regular! 0 Search text only Extended! 1 Search text, headers, footers, graphics... ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: SearchNext ──── ──── For Example... To search backward, the command is: SearchPrevious(Regular!) Tell Me More... SearchPrevious executes a backward search. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, Backward Search, Search. SearchString Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrchStr Syntax: SearchString("String") Parameters: String A character expression specifying search text and/or codes. If codes are specified, they must be recorded. ──── ──── For Example... To specify a search string of "NOTE", the command is: SearchString("NOTE") Tell Me More... SearchString specifies a string to search for. This command must be used in conjunction with either the SearchNext or SearchPrevious commands. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, and entering a search string. SecondaryPageNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SecPgNum Syntax: SecondaryPageNumber(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a new secondary page number. See Also: PageNumber ──── ──── For Example... To define a secondary page number as 10, the command is: SecondaryPageNumber(10) Tell Me More... SecondaryPageNumber specifies a secondary page number and inserts the code into a document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Secondary Page Number. SecondaryPageNumberDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SecPgNumDec Syntax: SecondaryPageNumberDecrement Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SecondaryPageNumberDecrement decrements the value of the current secondary page number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Secondary Page Number, Decrement Number. SecondaryPageNumberDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SecPgNumDisp Syntax: SecondaryPageNumberDisplay Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SecondaryPageNumberDisplay displays the current secondary page number in the document. The page number is entered as a code and will, therefore, update as the document is modified. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Secondary Page Number, Display in Document. SecondaryPageNumberIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SecPgNumInc Syntax: SecondaryPageNumberIncrement Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SecondaryPageNumberIncrement increments the value of the current secondary page number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Secondary Page Number, Increment Number. SecondaryPageNumberMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SecPgNumMeth Syntax: SecondaryPageNumberMethod(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a numbering method for secondary page numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Arabic numbers LowerLetters! 1 Lower case letters UpperLetters! 2 Upper case letters LowerRoman! 3 Lower case roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Upper case roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display secondary page numbers in Upper Roman numerals, the command is: SecondaryPageNumberMethod(UpperRoman!) Tell Me More... SecondaryPageNumberMethod specifies a secondary page number display. This is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Secondary Page Number, Numbering Method, and selecting an option. SelectDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SelDel Syntax: SelectDelete Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SelectDelete deletes a block of text. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Block, highlighting a block and pressing Delete. SelectOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SelOff Syntax: SelectOff Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SelectOff turns off Block. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit and Block, when Block is on. SelectOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SelOn Syntax: SelectOn(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a block mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CharMode! 1 Select characters WordMode! 2 Select words SentenceMode! 4 Select sentences ParagraphMode! 8 Select paragraphs PageMode! 16 Select pages RectangleMode! 32 Select rectangles TabularColumnsMode! 64 Select tabular columns DocMode! 128 Select entire documents ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify the character mode, the command is: SelectOn(CharMode!) Tell Me More... SelectOn specifies and turns on a block mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Select and selecting a choice. SelectRectangle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SelRect Syntax: SelectRectangle Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SelectRectangle selects a blocked rectangle. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Select, Rectangle. SelectTabularColumn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SelTabCol Syntax: SelectTabularColumn Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SelectTabularColumn selects a blocked tabular column(s). This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Select, Tabular Column. SetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SetupDlg Syntax: SetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SetupDlg displays the Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup. SetupKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SetupKey Syntax: SetupKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SetupKey executes the Setup key (Shift+F1). This command is used within dialog boxes that contain a Setup button. This command is not recordable and is usually used in conjunction with the DLGInput(On!) command. SetupSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SetupSave Syntax: SetupSave Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SetupSave saves Setup changes. This command is automatically executed when any Setup option is changed. This command is not recordable and has no equivalent keystroke. ShellDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ShellDlg Syntax: ShellDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ShellDlg displays the Shell dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Go To Shell. ShiftTabKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ShftTabKey Syntax: ShiftTabKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... ShiftTabKey executes the Shift+Tab keystroke within dialog boxes which positions the highlight on the previous option. This command is usually used with the DLGInput(On!) command. This command is the equivalent of pressing Shift+Tab within a dialog box. SoftHyphen Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SoftHyph Syntax: SoftHyphen Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SoftHyphen inserts a soft hyphen within a word. If the hyphen is needed to divide a word, it will appear. Otherwise, the hyphen will only appear in Reveal Codes. The soft hyphen will only print if the word is divided. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+- Sort Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Srt Syntax: Sort("Source";"Destination") Parameters: Source (Optional) A character expression specifying a file to sort. If this parameter is omitted, the current document is sorted. Destination (Optional) A character expression specifying a file to which the resulting sort writes. If this parameter is omitted, the sort updates the current document. ──── ──── For Example... To sort the current document and save in a file names RESULT, the command is: Sort(;"RESULT") Tell Me More... Sort specifies a file to sort and a file to which the changes are written. A current document is the default. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort. SortAction Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrtAct Syntax: SortAction(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a sort type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Sort! 0 Sort SelectOnly! 1 Select only ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To select only certain records without changing their order, the command is: SortAction(SelectOnly!) Tell Me More... SortAction specifies whether to sort a file or select only certain records. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort, OK, Select Records Only. SortCaseOrder Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrtCas Syntax: SortCaseOrder(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies which case has sort priority. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ LowercaseFirst! 0 Lowercase first UppercaseFirst! 1 Uppercase first ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To prioritize uppercase entries, the command is: SortCaseOrder(UppercaseFirst!) Tell Me More... SortCaseOrder specifies case priority. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort, OK, Sort Uppercase First. SortDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrtDlg Syntax: SortDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SortDlg displays the Sort (Source and Destination) dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort. SortKeys Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrtKeys Syntax: SortKeys(Field, Line, Word, Type, Order) Parameters: Field A numeric expression specifying a field to sort. Line A numeric expression specifying a line to sort within a specified field. This parameter is always one (1) if the sort type is Line. Word A numeric expression specifying a word to sort within a specified line and field. Type Determines whether to perform a numeric or alphanumeric sort. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Alphanumeric! 0 Numbers and letters, letters last Numeric! 1 Numbers only ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Order Determines whether to sort a-z and 0-9 or z-a and 9-0. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Ascending! 0 A-Z and 0-9 Descending! 1 Z-A and 9-0 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To sort ZIP Codes that are the only word on the only line in the sixth field of a secondary file, the command is: SortKeys(6;1;1;Numeric!;Ascending!) Tell Me More... SortKeys specifies sort key options. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort, OK, Sort Keys (Sort Priority), Edit. SortSelectString Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrtSelStr Syntax: SortSelectString("String") Parameters: String A character expression specifying text to select. ──── ──── For Example... To sort and select only records that contain the ZIP Code 84057 in the field defined by Key1, the command is: SortSelectString("Key1=84057") Tell Me More... SortSelectString inserts a character string into the Select Records option of the Sort dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort, OK, Select Records. SortType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SrtTyp Syntax: SortType(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a sort type reflecting a source file format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ParagraphSort! 0 Paragraph sort LineSort! 1 Line sort ColumnSort! 2 Columns sort TableSort! 3 Table sort MergeSort! 4 Secondary file sort ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify the source file is a secondary file, the command is: SortType(MergeSort!) Tell Me More... SortType specifies a source file format. ParagraphSort! sorts the file leaving paragraphs in tact; LineSort! sorts each line of the file individually; ColumnSort! sorts parallel columns; TableSort! sorts a table where rows act as lines and cells act as fields; and MergeSort! sorts a secondary file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sort, OK, Record Type. SoundAddDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndAddDlg Syntax: SoundAddDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundAddDlg displays the Add Sound Clip to Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Add. SoundClipAddInstance Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipAddInstance Syntax: SoundClipAddInstance("String") Parameters: String A character expression specifying the description of a sound clip to insert. ──── ──── For Example... To insert a sound clip with the description "Exit", the command is: SoundClipAddInstance("Exit") Tell Me More... SoundClipAddInstance inserts a sound clip from the Sound Clips in Document dialog box into a document. The SoundClipCreate command must be used before this command is available. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Add. SoundClipCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipCre Syntax: SoundClipCreate("Descript";"Name";Loc;Type;Lvol;Rv ol) Parameters: Descript A character expression specifying a sound clip description. Name A character expression specifying a sound clip path and filename. Loc Specifies the location of a sound clip. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OnDisk! 0 Disk InDoc! 1 Document ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Type Specifies a sound clip type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ MIDI! 0 MIDI DigitalAudio! 1 Digital audio ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Lvol A numeric expression specifying the volume of the left speaker. Rvol A numeric expression specifying the volume of the right speaker. ──── ──── For Example... To give a sound clip on disk the description "Duplicate of Exit" and insert it into the document, the command is: SoundClipCreate("Duplicate of Exit";"c:\wp60\exit.snd";OnDisk!;DigitalAudio!;10;10) Tell Me More... SoundClipCreate in conjunction with the SoundClipAddInstance inserts a sound clip from a file into Sound Clips in Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, Add Clip, and entering a filename and a description. SoundClipDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipDel Syntax: SoundClipDelete(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a sound clip description to delete. ──── ──── For Example... To delete a sound clip named OPEN.SND, the command is: SoundClipDelete("OPEN.SND") Tell Me More... SoundClipDelete deletes a sound clip. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, highlighting a sound clip, Delete. SoundClipEditDescription Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipEdDesc Syntax: SoundClipEditDescription("OldDescript";NewDescript ") Parameters: OldDescript A character expression specifying the current description of a sound clip. NewDescript A character expression specifying the new description of a sound clip. ──── ──── For Example... To change the description of a sound clip from "Exit" to "Close," the command is: SoundClipEditDescription("Exit";"Close") Tell Me More... SoundClipEditDescription changes the description of a sound clip. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, highlighting a sound clip, Edit Desc, and entering a new description. SoundClipPlay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipPlay Syntax: SoundClipPlay(Descript;Start;Lvol;Rvol) Parameters: Descript A character expression specifying the description of a sound clip to play. Start (Optional) A numeric expression specifying, in seconds, a starting point within a sound clip. Lvol (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the volume of the left speaker. Rvol (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the volume of the right speaker. ──── ──── For Example... To play a sound clip with the description "Close," the command is: SoundClipPlay("Close") Tell Me More... SoundClipPlay plays a sound clip with a specified description. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, highlighting a sound clip, Play. SoundClipPlayNextDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipPlayNxtDlg Syntax: SoundClipPlayNextDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundClipPlayNextDlg displays the Listen and Type dialog box. This command has no keystroke equivalent. SoundClipRecordDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipRecDlg Syntax: SoundClipRecordDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundClipRecordDlg displays the Record Sound Clip dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+D. SoundClipSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndClipSave Syntax: SoundClipSave("Description";"Name") Parameters: Description A character expression specifying the description of a sound clip. Name A character expression specifying the path and filename of a sound clip. ──── ──── For Example... To save a sound clip with the description "Close" in a file named "CLOSE.SND," the command is: SoundClipSave("Close";"CLOSE.SND") Tell Me More... SoundClipSave saves a sound clip path and filename. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, and highlighting a sound clip, Save. SoundFilePlay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndFilePlay Syntax: SoundFilePlay("Name";Start;LVol;RVol) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the path and filename of a sound clip to play. Start (Optional) A numeric expression specifying, in seconds, a starting point within a sound clip. Lvol (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the volume of the left speaker. Rvol (Optional) A numeric expression specifying the volume of the right speaker. ──── ──── For Example... To play a sound clip named "CLOSE.SND" without retrieving the sound clip into the current document, the command is: SoundFilePlay("CLOSE.SND") Tell Me More... SoundFilePlay plays a sound clip file. The sound clip does not need to appear in the Sound Clips In Document dialog box. This command has no equivalent. SoundPlayDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndPlayDlg Syntax: SoundPlayDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundPlayDlg displays the Sound Clips In Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play. SoundRecordDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndRecDlg Syntax: SoundRecordDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundRecordDlg displays the Record Sound Clip dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound, Record. SoundRecordingQuality Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndRecQual Syntax: SoundRecordingQuality(Quality;Rate;Bits;Mode) Parameters: Quality Specifies the quality of a sound clip to record. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OtherQuality! 0 User-defined rates and bits GoodQuality! 64 Voice clip quality BetterQuality! 192 Music clip quality ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Rate Specifies a Hz rate to record a sound clip. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ At5513Hz! 5513 5513 Hz At7350Hz! 7350 7350 Hz At8000Hz! 8000 8000 Hz At11025Hz! 11025 11025 Hz At16000Hz! 16000 16000 Hz At22050Hz! 22050 22050 Hz At32000Hz! 32000 32000 Hz At44100Hz! 44100 44100 Hz ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Bits Describes whether 8 or 16 bits are used. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ EightBit! 8 8 bits SixteenBit! 16 16 bits ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Mode Specifies a recording mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Mono! 0 Mono recording Stereo! 1 Stereo recording ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To record a 16 bit voice quality clip at 8000Hz in stereo, the command is: SoundRecordingQuality(GoodQuality!;8000Hz!;SixteenBit!;Stereo!) Tell Me More... SoundRecordingQuality specifies the technical setup of a sound clip. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, Setup, Recording Quality, Setup. SoundRecordingQualityDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndRecQualDlg Syntax: SoundRecordingQualityDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundRecordingQualityDlg displays the Recording Quality Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Sound Setup, Recording Quality Setup. SoundSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SoundSel Syntax: SoundSelect("Filename";"String") Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the filename of the sound driver. String A character expression specifying the name of the sound card as it appears in the Sound Setup Type dialog box. ──── ──── For Example... To select the Compaq Business Audio sound driver, the command is: SoundSelect("CMPQ.ARS";"Compaq Business Audio") SetupSave Tell Me More... SoundSelect specifies the sound driver installed in the machine. This command is used in conjunction with the SetupSave command. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clips, Play, Setup, Type, Select. SoundSetInterrupt Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndSetInt Syntax: SoundSetInterrupt(Interrupt) Parameters: Interrupt Specifies an interrupt for the selected sound card. For more information, see your users manual or dealer. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IRQ2! 4 Interrupt 2 IRQ3! 8 Interrupt 3 IRQ4! 16 Interrupt 4 IRQ5! 32 Interrupt 5 IRQ6! 64 Interrupt 6 IRQ7! 128 Interrupt 7 IRQ10! 1024 Interrupt 10 IRQ15! 32768 Interrupt 15 ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify sound card on interrupt 10, the command is: SoundSetInterrupt(IRQ10!) Tell Me More... SoundSetInterrupt assigns a specific interrupt value to be used by a sound card. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Sound Setup, Hardware Setup, Interrupt Request Level. SoundSetIOAddress Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndSetIOAddr Syntax: SoundSetIOAddress(Address) Parameters: Address A numeric expression specifying the hexadecimal base address of a sound card. ──── ──── For Example... To set the base address of the sound card at 534, the command is: SoundSetIOAddress(534) Tell Me More... SoundSetIOAddress specifies a hexadecimal number of a sound card address. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Sound Setup, Hardware Setup, Base Address. SoundSetMasterVolume Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndSetMastVol Syntax: SoundSetMasterVolume(Left;Right) Parameters: Left A numeric expression between 0-100 specifying a percentage for the left speaker volume. Right A numeric expression between 0-100 specifying a percentage for the right speaker volume. ──── ──── For Example... To set the volume at 50, the command is: SoundSetMasterVolume(50;50) Tell Me More... SoundSetMasterVolume specifies the volume of the sound emitted from the sound card. Although there are two parameters for this command, they currently function as one unit and are specified the same. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Play, Volume, and entering a volume percentage. SoundSetSynthesizerPort Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndSetSynthPort Syntax: SoundSetSynthesizerPort(Port) Parameters: Port Specifies a port a synthesizer can occupy on the sound card. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ MIDIOFF! 3 Turns MIDI off LPT1! 0 LPT 1 LPT2! 1 LPT 2 LPT3! 2 LPT 3 COM1! 4 COM 1 COM2! 5 COM 2 COM3! 6 COM 3 COM4! 7 COM 4 SoundCard! 8 Sound Card SoundCardMIDIPort!9 MIDI port ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To define the synthesizer is plugged in to the sound card MIDI port, the command is: SoundSetSynthesizerPort(SoundCardMIDIPort!) Tell Me More... SoundSetSynthesizerPort specifies the port a synthesizer is hooked up to. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Sound Setup, Hardware Port, External Synthesis (via MIDI Port). SoundSetupDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndSetupDlg Syntax: SoundSetupDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SoundSetupDlg displays the Sound Setup dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Sound Setup. SoundStopPlay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndStopPlay Syntax: SoundStopPlay(Time;Entire) Parameters: Time (optional) A numeric expression specifying, in seconds, the point to stop playing the sound clip. Entire (optional) Specifies to play the entire sound clip. Select the enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AllClip! 0 Play the entire clip ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To play an entire sound clip, the command is: SoundStopPlay(AllClip!) Tell Me More... SoundStopPlay stops playing after a specified time or after the entire clip plays. This command is the equivalent of choosing SoundUnSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SndUnSel Syntax: SoundUnSelect Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SoundUnSelect deselects the sound card. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Sound Clip, Sound Setup, Type, None. SpaceDisplayCharacter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpcDispChar Syntax: SpaceDisplayCharacter (Character) Parameters: Character A character expression specifying a character to display when the space bar is pressed. See Also: HardReturnDisplayCharacter ──── ──── For Example... To display a bullet when the space bar is pressed, the command is: SpaceDisplayCharacter ("∙") Tell Me More... SpaceDisplayCharacter specifies a character to display when the space bar is pressed. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Space Character, and entering a character. SpecialCodesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpecialCodesDlg Syntax: SpecialCodesDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SpecialCodesDlg displays the Special Codes dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Special Codes. SpecificDeleteStringBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpecDelStrBeg Syntax: SpecificDeleteStringBegin Parameters: None See Also: ReplaceBackward ReplaceForward SpecificReplaceStringBegin SpecificSearchStringBegin SpecificStringEnd ──── ──── For Example... To find and delete left margin codes of 2", the command sequence is: SpecificDeleteStringBegin MarginLeft(2") SpecificStringEnd ReplaceForward() Tell Me More... SpecificDeleteStringBegin deletes specific codes. SpecificDeleteStringBegin must be followed by a macro command corresponding to a specific code to delete. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as ReplaceBackward, ReplaceForward, and SpecificStringEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, Specific Codes, selecting a code type, specifying a specific code, Search and Delete. SpecificReplaceStringBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpecReplStrBeg Syntax: SpecificReplaceStringBegin Parameters: None See Also: ReplaceBackward ReplaceForward SpecificSearchStringBegin SpecificStringEnd ──── ──── For Example... To replace 2" left margin codes with 3" left margin codes, the command sequence is: SpecificSearchStringBegin LeftMargin(2") SpecificStringEnd SpecificReplaceStringBegin LeftMargin(3") SpecificStringEnd ReplaceForward() Tell Me More... SpecificReplaceStringBegin replaces a specific code with another specific code. A macro command corresponding to a specific replacement code must follow SpecificReplaceStringBegin. The code being replaced is specified using SpecificSearchStringBegin. SpecificReplaceStringBegin must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as ReplaceBackward, ReplaceForward, SpecificSearchStringBegin, and SpecificStringEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Replace, Specific Codes, selecting a specific code to search for, selecting a specific code to replace with, Replace. SpecificSearchStringBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpecSearchStrBeg Syntax: SpecificSearchStringBegin Parameters: None See Also: SearchNext SearchPrevious SpecificDeleteStringBegin SpecificReplaceStringBegin SpecificStringEnd ──── ──── For Example... To search for a right justification code, the command sequence is: SpecificSearchStringBegin Justification(Right!) SpecificStringEnd SearchNext() Tell Me More... SpecificSearchStringBegin finds a specific code. A macro command corresponding to a specific code to find must follow SpecificSearchStringBegin. This command must be used in conjunction with SpecificStringEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Search, Specific Codes, selecting a code type, specifying a specific code, Search. SpecificStringEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Syntax: SpecificStringEnd Parameters: None See Also: SpecificDeleteStringBegin SpecificReplaceStringBegin SpecificSearchStringBegin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpecificStringEnd marks the end of SpecificDeleteStringBegin, SpecificReplaceStringBegin, or SpecificSearchStringBegin. SpellerDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpellDlg Syntax: SpellerDlg Parameters: None See Also: Grammatik Thesaurus ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SpellerDlg opens the Speller dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Speller. SpellerDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SplDoc Syntax: SpellerDoc Parameters: None See Also: SpellerPage SpellerWord ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpellerDoc spell checks the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Speller, Document. SpellerEditSupDictionary Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SplEdSupDict Syntax: SpellerEditSupDictionary Parameters: None See Also: SpellerDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpellerEditSupDictionary opens the Edit Supplemental Dictionary dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Speller, Edit Supplemental Dictionary. SpellerPage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SplPg Syntax: SpellerPage Parameters: None See Also: SpellerDoc SpellerWord ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpellerPage spell checks the current page. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Speller, Page. SpellerWord Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SplWrd Syntax: SpellerWord Parameters: None See Also: SpellerDoc SpellerPage ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpellerWord spell checks the current word. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Speller, Word. SpellerGrammatikDisable Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SpGmkDsbl Syntax: SpellerGrammatikDisable Parameters: None See Also: Grammatik SpellerDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpellerGrammatikDisable specifies text not to be checked by Speller or Grammatik. If Block is on when this command is used, Speller and Grammatik are disabled for the blocked text. If Block is not on when the command is used, SpellerGrammatikDisable acts as a toggle. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Disable Speller/Grammatik. SpreadsheetCreateLink Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprCreLnk Syntax: SpreadsheetCreateLink Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetCreateLinkDlg SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetCreateLink establishes a link to a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range without importing it into WordPerfect. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetImportFilename, SpreadsheetImportRange, and SpreadsheetImportType. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Create Link, specifying a spreadsheet, range, and import type, Link. SpreadsheetCreateLinkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprCreLnkDlg Syntax: SpreadsheetCreateLinkDlg Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetCreateLink SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetCreateLinkDlg opens the Create Spreadsheet Link dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Create Link. SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprCreLnkPerf Syntax: SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetCreateLink SpreadsheetCreateLinkDlg SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform establishes a link to a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range and imports it into WordPerfect. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetImportFilename, SpreadsheetImportRange, and SpreadsheetImportType. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Create Link, specifying a spreadsheet, range, and import type, Link & Import. SpreadsheetEditLink Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprEdLnk Syntax: SpreadsheetEditLink Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetEditLinkDlg SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetEditLink modifies a link to a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range without importing it into WordPerfect. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetImportFilename, SpreadsheetImportRange, and SpreadsheetImportType. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Edit Link, specifying a spreadsheet, range, and import type, Link. SpreadsheetEditLinkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprEdLnkDlg Syntax: SpreadsheetEditLinkDlg Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetEditLink SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetEditLinkDlg opens the Edit Spreadsheet Link dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Edit Link. SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprEdLnkPerf Syntax: SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetEditLink SpreadsheetEditLinkDlg SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform modifies a link to a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range and imports it into WordPerfect. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetImportFilename, SpreadsheetImportRange, and SpreadsheetImportType. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Edit Link, specifying a spreadsheet, range, and import type, Link & Import. SpreadsheetImportDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprImpDlg Syntax: SpreadsheetImportDlg Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetImportPerform ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetImportDlg opens the Import Spreadsheet dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Import. SpreadsheetImportFilename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprImpFilename Syntax: SpreadsheetImportFilename(Filename) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the filename and path of a spreadsheet to import, or that includes a range you want to import. See Also: SpreadsheetCreateLink SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform SpreadsheetEditLink SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform SpreadsheetImportPerform SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... To create a link to a range named BOOKS in a spreadsheet named SALES.1Q, the command sequence is: SpreadsheetImportFilename("C:\PL\SALES.1Q") SpreadsheetImportRange("BOOKS") SpreadsheetImportType(Table!) SpreadsheetCreateLink Tell Me More... SpreadsheetImportFilename specifies the name of a spreadsheet to import, link, or import and link. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetCreateLink, SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform, SpreadsheetEditLink, SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform, SpreadsheetImportPerform, SpreadsheetImportRange, and SpreadsheetImportType. SpreadsheetImportPerform Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprImpPerf Syntax: SpreadsheetImportPerform Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetImportDlg SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportRange SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetImportPerform imports a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range into the active document. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetImportFilename, SpreadsheetImportRange, and SpreadsheetImportType. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Import, specifying a spreadsheet, range, and import type, Import. SpreadsheetImportRange Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprImpRange Syntax: SpreadsheetImportRange(Range) Parameters: Range A character expression specifying a spreadsheet range to import, link, or import and link. The range can be identified by name or by specifying the first and last cells (the format for specifying the range by the first and last cells depends on the cell naming conventions of the spreadsheet application). See Also: SpreadsheetCreateLink SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform SpreadsheetEditLink SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportPerform SpreadsheetImportType ──── ──── For Example... To create a link to a range named BOOKS in a spreadsheet named SALES.1Q, the command sequence is: SpreadsheetImportFilename("C:\PL\SALES.1Q") SpreadsheetImportRange("BOOKS") SpreadsheetImportType(Table!) SpreadsheetCreateLink Tell Me More... SpreadsheetImportRange specifies a spreadsheet range to import, link, or import and link. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetCreateLink, SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform, SpreadsheetEditLink, SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform, SpreadsheetImportPerform, SpreadsheetImportFilename, and SpreadsheetImportType. SpreadsheetImportType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprImpType Syntax: SpreadsheetImportType(Import Format) Parameters: Import Format Determines whether to import a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range as text or as a table. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Text! 1 Text format Table! 5 Table format ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: SpreadsheetCreateLink SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform SpreadsheetEditLink SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform SpreadsheetImportFilename SpreadsheetImportPerform SpreadsheetImportRange ──── ──── For Example... To import a spreadsheet range named BOOKS in a spreadsheet named SALES.1Q as a table, the command sequence is: SpreadsheetImportFilename("C:\SALES.1Q") SpreadsheetImportRange("BOOKS") SpreadsheetImportType(Table!) SpreadsheetImportPerform Tell Me More... SpreadsheetImportType determines whether to import a spreadsheet or spreadsheet range as text or as a table. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as SpreadsheetCreateLink, SpreadsheetCreateLinkPerform, SpreadsheetEditLink, SpreadsheetEditLinkPerform, SpreadsheetImportPerform, SpreadsheetImportFilename, and SpreadsheetImportRange. SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprLnkOptDlg Syntax: SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetShowLinkCode SpreadsheetUpdateLinks SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg opens the Spreadsheet Link Options dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Link Options. SpreadsheetShowLinkCode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprShowLnkCode Syntax: SpreadsheetShowLinkCode(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display spreadsheet link codes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Links not displayed Yes! 1 Link displayed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg ──── ──── For Example... To display spreadsheet link codes, the command is: SpreadsheetShowLinkCode(Yes!) Tell Me More... SpreadsheetShowLinkCode determines whether to display spreadsheet link codes. SpreadsheetUpdateLinks Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprUpdateLnks Syntax: SpreadsheetUpdateLinks Parameters: None See Also: SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SpreadsheetUpdateLinks updates all spreadsheet links in the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Link Options, Update All Links. SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SprUpdateOnRet Syntax: SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to update spreadsheet links when the document that contains them is retrieved. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Links not updated Yes! 1 Links updated ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: SpreadsheetLinkOptionsDlg SpreadsheetUpdateLinks ──── ──── For Example... To update all spreadsheet links when the document they are in is retrieved, the command is: SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve(Yes!) Tell Me More... SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve determines whether to update spreadsheet links every time the document containing them is retrieved. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Spreadsheet, Link Options, Update on Retrieve. StartProgram Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StartProgram Syntax: StartProgram(Program;Switches;Default Directory;Hot Key) Parameters: Program A character expression specifying the name and path of a program to run. Switches (optional) A character expression specifying startup switches. Default Directory (optional) A character expression specifying the directory from which to start a program. Hot Key (optional) A character expression specifying a Ctrl-Alt hot key used to switch to a program being started. Once in the other program, Ctrl-Alt-space bar switches back to WordPerfect. See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To start WordPerfect Presentations, the command is: StartProgram("C:\PR\PR.EXE";;"C:\DOCS";"P") Tell Me More... StartProgram starts another program. StatusLineUnits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StatLnUnits Syntax: StatusLineUnits(Units) Parameters: Units Specifies a measurement unit for the status line display. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Inches! 0 Inches (") InchesI! 1 Inches (i) Centimeters! 2 Centimeters Millimeters! 3 Millimeters Points! 4 Points WP1200ths! 5 WP Units (1200ths of an inch) WP42Units! 6 WP 4.2 Units (rows and columns) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: DisplayUnits ──── ──── For Example... To display status line measurements in points, the command is: StatusLineUnits(Points!) Tell Me More... StatusLineUnits specifies a measurement unit for the status line display. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, Units of Measure, Status Line Display, and selecting a unit of measure. StyleCodes Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyCodes Syntax: StyleCodes(Off Codes State) Parameters: Off Codes State Determines whether to include codes that take effect when the style is turned off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ WithoutOffCodes! 0 Do not include style off codes. WithOffCodes! 1 Include style off codes. ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd SubstructureExit ──── ──── For Example... To add a Times font code to a style named Heading, the command sequence is: StyleEditBegin("Heading") StyleCodes() Font("Times") SubstructureExit StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleCodes edits style codes. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd, and SubstructureExit. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Edit, Style Content. StyleCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyCopy Syntax: StyleCopy(Name;Source;Destination) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a style to copy. To specify a user-defined style, enter the corresponding character expression; to specify a system style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Source Specifies a style library source. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Destination Specifies a destination style library. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleCreate StyleDelete ──── ──── For Example... To copy a style named Heading from the current document to the personal library, the command is: StyleCopy("Heading";CurrentDoc!;PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... StyleCopy copies a style between the current document, the personal library, and the shared library. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Copy, and selecting a destination. StyleCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyCre Syntax: StyleCreate(Name;Type;Pattern;Location) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a style name. Type Specifies a style type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OpenStyle! 1 Open style CharacterStyle! 2 Character style ParagraphStyle! 3 Paragraph style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pattern Specifies a pattern on which to base a style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CreateFromCurrent! 1 Current paragraph style CreateBulletStyle! 2 Bullet style using the first letter of the style name as the bullet type CreateNumberStyle! 3 Incrementing number style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location Specifies where to save a style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a paragraph style named Heading and save it in the personal library, the command is: StyleCreate("Heading";ParagraphStyle!;;PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... StyleCreate creates a style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, Create, entering a style name, selecting a style type, and specifying whether to use the current paragraph as a pattern. StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyDefltPersLib Syntax: StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of the default personal library. See Also: StylePersonalLibrary LocationOfStyleFiles StyleDefaultSharedLibrary ──── ──── For Example... To specify a file named BOB.LIB as the default personal library, the command is: StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary("BOB.LIB") Tell Me More... StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary specifies the name of the default personal library. StyleDefaultSharedLibrary Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyDefltSharedLib Syntax: StyleDefaultSharedLibrary(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of the default shared library. See Also: StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary StyleSharedLibrary LocationOfSharedStyleFiles ──── ──── For Example... To specify a file named WORK.LIB as the default shared library, the command is: StyleDefaultSharedLibrary("WORK.LIB") Tell Me More... StyleDefaultSharedLibrary specifies the name of the default shared library. StyleDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyDel Syntax: StyleDelete(Name;Codes;Location) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a style to delete. To specify a user-defined style, enter the corresponding character expression; to specify a system style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Codes Determines whether to leave the codes that are part of the style in the document or delete them along with the style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ IncludingCodes! 4 Delete style and codes LeavingCodes! 5 Delete style, leave codes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location Specifies the library containing a style to delete. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleCopy StyleCreate ──── ──── For Example... To delete a style named Heading from the default personal library, leaving the codes that are part of the style in the document, the command is: StyleDelete("Heading";LeavingCodes!;PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... StyleDelete deletes a style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Delete, and selecting Including Codes or Leaving Codes. StyleDescription Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyDesc Syntax: StyleDescription(Description) Parameters: Description A character expression specifying a style description. See Also: StyleCreate StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To change the description of a style named Heading in the current document, the command sequence is: StyleEditBegin("Heading";CurrentDoc!) StyleDescription ("1st level heading style") StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleDescription changes a style description. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Style, selecting a style, Edit, Description, and entering a description. StyleDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyDlg Syntax: StyleDlg Parameters: None See Also: StyleCreate ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... StyleDlg opens the Style List dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles. StyleEditBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyEdBeg Syntax: StyleEditBegin(Name;Location) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a style to edit. To specify a user-defined style, enter the corresponding character expression; to specify a system style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location (optional) Specifies the library containing a style to edit. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To begin editing a style named Heading saved in the current document, the command is: StyleEditBegin("Heading";CurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... StyleEditBegin marks the start of changes to a style. Any changes must appear between StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Edit. StyleEditEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyEdEnd Syntax: StyleEditEnd(Save) Parameters: Save Determines whether to save changes made to a style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel Save! 1 Save ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditBegin ──── ──── For Example... To end style editing and save changes, the command is: StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleEditEnd marks the end of changes to a style and determines whether to save the changes. This command must be used in conjunction with StyleEditBegin. StyleEnterKeySetting Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyEnterKeySetting Syntax: StyleEnterKeySetting(Function) Parameters: Function Specifies the effect of pressing Enter. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ HardReturn! 0 Inserts a hard return StyleOff! 4 Turns off style StyleOffOn! 12 Turns style off and then on ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd StyleLinkTo ──── ──── For Example... To specify that Enter turns off a style named Heading, the command sequence is: StyleEditBegin("Heading") StyleEnterKeySetting(StyleOff!) StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleEnterKeySetting specifies the effect of pressing Enter when a style is on. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Edit, Enter Key Action, and selecting an option. StyleLinkTo Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyLinkTo Syntax: StyleLinkTo(Name) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a style to link to another style. To specify a user-defined style, enter the corresponding character expression; to specify a system style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd StyleEnterKeySetting ──── ──── For Example... To link a style named Body Text to a style named Heading, the command sequence is: StyleEditBegin("Heading") StyleLinkTo("Body Text") StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleLinkTo specifies a style to turn on when Enter is pressed. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Edit, Enter Key Action, Turn Style Off and Link to:, and specifying a style. StyleOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyOff Syntax: StyleOff(Name) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a style to turn off. To specify a user-defined style, enter the corresponding character expression; to specify a system style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleOn ──── ──── For Example... To turn off a style named Description, the command is: StyleOff("Description") Tell Me More... StyleOff turns off a character style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as StyleOn. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Off. StyleOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyOn Syntax: StyleOn(Name) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a style to turn on. To specify a user-defined style, enter the corresponding character expression; to specify a system style, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleOff ──── ──── For Example... To turn on a style named Heading, the command is: StyleOn("Heading") Tell Me More... StyleOn turns on a style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, highlighting a style, Select. StylePersonalLibrary Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyPersLib Syntax: StylePersonalLibrary(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a personal library file for a document. See Also: StyleDefaultPersonalLibrary LocationOfStyleFiles ──── ──── For Example... To specify a file named WORK.LIB as the personal library for the current document, the command is: StylePersonalLibrary("WORK.LIB") Tell Me More... StylePersonalLibrary specifies the personal library file for the current document. StyleRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyRename Syntax: StyleRename(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a new name for a style. See Also: StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To rename a style from Heading to Level1, the command sequence is: StyleEditBegin("Heading") StyleRename("Level1") StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleRename renames a style. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Edit, Name, and entering a name. StyleRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyRet Syntax: StyleRetrieve(Name;Type;Location) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a style file to retrieve. Type Specifies whether to retrieve only user styles, only system styles, or user and system styles. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UserStyles! 1 User styles only SystemStyles! 2 System styles only AllStyles! 3 User and system styles ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location Specifies a destination library for the retrieved styles. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleSave ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a style file named SCRIPT.STY into the current document, the command is: StyleRetrieve("SCRIPT.STY";AllStyles!;CurrentDoc!) Tell Me More... StyleRetrieve retrieves the styles in a specified style file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Style, Retrieve, and entering the name of a style file. StyleSave Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StySav Syntax: StyleSave(Name;Type;Location) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a style file to save. Type Determines whether to save only user styles, only system styles, or user and system styles. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ UserStyles! 1 User styles only SystemStyles! 2 System styles only AllStyles! 3 User and system styles ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Location Specifies the source library of styles to save. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ CurrentDoc! 0 Current document PersonalLibrary! 1 Personal library SharedLibrary! 2 Shared library ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleRetrieve ──── ──── For Example... To save the styles in the personal library in a style file named SCRIPT.STY, the command is: StyleSave("SCRIPT.STY";UserStyles!;PersonalLibrary!) Tell Me More... StyleSave saves styles from a library into a style file. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, Save, and entering a style file name. StyleSharedLibrary Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StySharedLib Syntax: StyleSharedLibrary(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a shared library file for a document. See Also: StyleDefaultSharedLibrary LocationOfSharedStyleFiles ──── ──── For Example... To specify a file named SHARED.LIB as the shared library for the current document, the command is: StyleSharedLibrary("SHARED.LIB") Tell Me More... StyleSharedLibrary specifies the shared library file for the current document. StyleSystemOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StySysOn Syntax: StyleSystemOn(Name) Parameters: Name Specifies the name of a system style to turn on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 FtninDoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleOn ──── ──── For Example... To turn on the Heading 1 system style, the command is: StyleSystemOn(Heading1Style!) Tell Me More... StyleSystemOn turns on a system style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, highlighting a system style, Select. StyleType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: StyType Syntax: StyleType(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a style type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OpenStyle! 1 Open style CharacterStyle! 2 Character style ParagraphStyle! 3 Paragraph style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: StyleEditBegin StyleEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify a paragraph style type for a style named Heading, the command sequence is: StyleEditBegin("Heading") StyleType(ParagraphStyle!) StyleEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... StyleType specifies a style type. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Styles, selecting a style, Edit, Style Type, and selecting a type. SubdividePage Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubdividePg Syntax: SubdividePage(Columns;Rows) Parameters: Columns A numeric expression specifying the number of logical page columns on a physical page. Rows A numeric expression specifying the number of logical page rows on a physical page. See Also: SubdividePageOff ──── ──── For Example... To subdivide a physical page into four logical pages (two columns and two rows), the command is: SubdividePage(2;2) Tell Me More... SubdividePage divides a physical page into two or more logical pages. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Subdivide Page, and entering the number of columns and rows. SubdividePageOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubdividePgOff Syntax: SubdividePageOff Parameters: None See Also: SubdividePage ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SubdividePageOff ends the division of a physical page into logical pages. This command must be used in conjunction with SubdividePage. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Subdivide Page, Off. SubdocDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubdocDlg Syntax: SubdocDlg Parameters: None See Also: SubdocInclude ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SubdocDlg displays the Include Subdocument dialog box. SubdocInclude Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubdocInc Syntax: SubdocInclude(Filename) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of a file to insert as a subdocument. See Also: SubdocDlg ──── ──── For Example... To insert a document named CHAPTER3 as a subdocument, the command is: SubdocInclude("CHAPTER3") Tell Me More... SubdocInclude inserts a document into the current document as a subdocument. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Master Document, Subdocument, and entering a filename. SubdocRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubdocRen Syntax: SubdocRename(Name;New Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying the name of a subdocument to rename. New Name A character expression specifying the new name for a subdocument. See Also: SubdocInclude ──── ──── For Example... To rename a subdocument from CHAPTER3 to CHAPTER4, the command is: SubdocRename("CHAPTER3";"CHAPTER4") Tell Me More... SubdocRename renames a subdocument and adjusts the subdocument link. SubjectSearchText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubjSrchTxt Syntax: SubjectSearchText(Text) Parameters: Text A character expression specifying text to precede the document summary subject field when the document is saved. See Also: DocSummarySetupDlg ──── ──── For Example... To specify "Subject:" as the subject search text, the command is: SubjectSearchText("Subject:") Tell Me More... SubjectSearchText specifies text that precedes the document summary subject field when the document is saved. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Summary, Setup, Subject Search Text, and entering the text. SubstructureCancel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubCancel Syntax: SubstructureCancel Parameters: None See Also: BoxCaptionEdit BoxContentEdit CommentCreate CommentEdit DelayCodes EndnoteCreate EndnoteEdit FooterA FooterB FootnoteCreate FootnoteEdit HeaderA HeaderB InitialCodesDoc InitialCodesSetup StyleCodes SubstructureExit ToAEditFullForm WatermarkA WatermarkB ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SubstructureCancel closes a substructure without saving changes. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCaptionEdit, BoxContentEdit, CommentCreate, CommentEdit, DelayCodes, EndnoteCreate, EndnoteEdit, FooterA, FooterB, FootnoteCreate, FootnoteEdit, HeaderA, HeaderB, InitialCodesDoc, InitialCodesSetup, StyleCodes, ToAEditFullForm, WatermarkA, and WatermarkB. SubstructureExit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SubExit Syntax: SubstructureExit(Substructure) Parameters: Substructure (optional) Determines whether to edit the next or previous substructure of the same type. If a next or previous substructure of the same type is not found, a NOT FOUND error is returned. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Previous! 1 Edit the previous substructure Next! 15 Edit the next substructure ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: BoxCaptionEdit BoxContentEdit CommentCreate CommentEdit DelayCodes EndnoteCreate EndnoteEdit FooterA FooterB FootnoteCreate FootnoteEdit HeaderA HeaderB InitialCodesDoc InitialCodesSetup ONNOTFOUND SubstructureCancel StyleCodes ToAEditFullForm WatermarkA WatermarkB ──── ──── For Example... To exit a substructure and edit the previous substructure, the command is: SubstructureExit(Previous!) Tell Me More... SubstructureExit closes a substructure, saves changes, and exits to the document (if no Substructure parameter is specified) or to the next or previous substructure of the same type. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as BoxCaptionEdit, BoxContentEdit, CommentCreate, CommentEdit, DelayCodes, EndnoteCreate, EndnoteEdit, FooterA, FooterB, FootnoteCreate, FootnoteEdit, HeaderA, HeaderB, InitialCodesDoc, InitialCodesSetup, StyleCodes, ToAEditFullForm, WatermarkA, and WatermarkB. Suppress Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Suppress Syntax: Suppress(Item1;Item2...) Parameters: Item Specifies page format items to suppress. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PageNumbering! 0 Turn off page numbering PageNumberBottomCenter! 1 Page number at bottom center this page only HeaderA! 2 Turn off Header A HeaderB! 3 Turn off Header B FooterA! 4 Turn off Footer A FooterB! 5 Turn off Footer B WatermarkA! 6 Turn off Watermark A WatermarkB! 7 Turn off Watermark B ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To turn off page numbering and Header A on the current page, the command is: Suppress(PageNumbering!;HeaderA!) Tell Me More... Suppress turns off specified page formatting items for the current page. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Suppress, and selecting items. SwitchDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SwitchDlg Syntax: SwitchDlg Parameters: None See Also: SwitchDoc ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... SwitchDlg opens the Switch to Document dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Switch To. SwitchDoc Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SwitchDoc Syntax: SwitchDoc(Document) Parameters: Document (optional) A numeric expression specifying a document window to switch to. If no document window is specified, the command toggles between the last two windows used. See Also: SwitchDlg ──── ──── For Example... To switch to document window 2, the command is: SwitchDoc(2) Tell Me More... SwitchDoc switches the active document window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Switch, and selecting a window to switch to. SwitchKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: SwitchKey Syntax: SwitchKey Parameters: None See Also: SwitchDoc ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... SwitchKey switches between the last two document windows used. If Block is on, SwitchKey opens the Case Convert dialog box. Tab Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Tab Syntax: Tab Parameters: None See Also: TabKey TabSet ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Tab inserts a tab. TabAdd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabAdd Syntax: TabAdd(Position1;Type1;Position2;Type2;...) Parameters: Position A measurement expression specifying a tab position. Type Specifies a tab type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ TabLeft! 0 Left TabCenter! 1 Center TabRight! 2 Right TabDecimal! 3 Decimal align TabLeftDot! 16 Left with dot leader TabCenterDot! 17 Center with dot leader TabRightDot! 18 Right with dot leader TabDecimalDot! 19 Decimal align with dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Tab TabDelete TabSet ──── ──── For Example... To add a center tab at 3.2", the command is: TabAdd(3.2";TabCenter!) Tell Me More... TabAdd adds one or more tab sets to the current setting without changing any other tab settings. TabCenter Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabCntr Syntax: TabCenter(Leader) Parameters: Leader (optional) Determines whether to include a dot leader. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 No dot leader DotLeader! 1 Dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TabDecimal TabLeft TabRight ──── ──── For Example... To insert a center tab with a dot leader, the command is: TabCenter(DotLeader!) Tell Me More... TabCenter inserts a center aligned tab. TabDecimal Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabDec Syntax: TabDecimal(Leader) Parameters: Leader (optional) Specifies whether to include a dot leader. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 No dot leader DotLeader! 1 Dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TabCenter TabLeft TabRight ──── ──── For Example... To insert a decimal tab with a dot leader, the command is: TabDecimal(DotLeader!) Tell Me More... TabDecimal inserts a decimal align tab. TabDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabDel Syntax: TabDelete(Position) Parameters: Position A measurement expression specifying the position of a tab setting to remove. See Also: Tab TabAdd TabSet ──── ──── For Example... To remove a tab setting at 3", the command is: TabDelete(3") Tell Me More... TabDelete deletes one tab setting without affecting any other tab settings. TabDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabDlg Syntax: TabDlg Parameters: None See Also: Tab TabSet ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TabDlg displays the Tab Set dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Tab Set. TabKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabKey Syntax: TabKey Parameters: None See Also: Tab ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TabKey inserts a tab. When Outline is on, TabKey moves to the next outline level. This command is the equivalent of pressing Tab. TableAttributeOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblAttrOff Syntax: TableAttributeOff(Attribute1;Attribute2;...) Parameters: Attribute Specifies an attribute to turn off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Extra large VeryLarge! 1 Very large Large! 2 Large Small! 3 Small Fine! 4 Fine Superscript! 5 Superscript Subscript! 6 Subscript Outline! 7 Outline Italics! 8 Italics Shadow! 9 Shadow Redline! 10 Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Double underline Bold! 12 Bold Strikeout! 13 Strikeout Underline! 14 Underline SmallCaps! 15 Small caps Every! 16 All attributes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableAttributeOn ──── ──── For Example... To turn off Bold in a table, the command is: TableAttributeOff(Bold!) Tell Me More... TableAttributeOff turns off one or more character attributes in a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Appearance or Size, and deselecting attributes to turn off. TableAttributeOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblAttrOn Syntax: TableAttributeOn(Attribute1;Attribute2;...) Parameters: Attribute Specifies an attribute to turn on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Extra large VeryLarge! 1 Very large Large! 2 Large Small! 3 Small Fine! 4 Fine Superscript! 5 Superscript Subscript! 6 Subscript Outline! 7 Outline Italics! 8 Italics Shadow! 9 Shadow Redline! 10 Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Double underline Bold! 12 Bold Strikeout! 13 Strikeout Underline! 14 Underline SmallCaps! 15 Small caps Every! 16 All attributes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableAttributeOff ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Bold and Underline in a table, the command is: TableAttributeOn(Bold!;Underline!) Tell Me More... TableAttributeOn turns on one or more character attributes in a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Appearance or Size, selecting any attributes to turn on. TableAutoFormulaEntry Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblAutoFormEntry Syntax: TableAutoFormulaEntry(State) Parameters: State Determines whether formula entry at the document level is on or off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ On! 1 Formulas can be entered at the document level Off! 0 Formulas can only be entered at the table editing level ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableFormula TableTextToFormula ──── ──── For Example... To allow formula entry at the document level, the command is: TableAutoFormulaEntry(On!) Tell Me More... TableAutoFormulaEntry determines whether formulas can be entered in tables at the document level or only in table editing mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Formula, Formula Recognition at Document Level. TableBlockOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblBlkOff Syntax: TableBlockOff Parameters: None See Also: TableBlockOn ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableBlockOff turns off Block in the table editing mode. With Block on while in the table editing mode, this command is the equivalent of pressing Alt+F4. TableBlockOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblBlkOn Syntax: TableBlockOn Parameters: None See Also: ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableBlockOn turns on Block in the table editing mode. TableBorder Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblBdr Syntax: TableBorder(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a border type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SpacingOnly! 0 No border SingleBorder! 1 Single border DoubleBorder! 2 Double border DashedBorder! 3 Dashed border DottedBorder! 4 Dotted border ThickBorder! 5 Thick border ExtraThickBorder! 6 Extra thick border ThinThickBorder! 7 Thin border outside, thick border inside ThickThinBorder! 8 Thick border outside, thin border inside ThickTopBottomBorder! 9 Thick top and bottom borders (no side borders) ButtonBorder! 10 Button border NoBorder! 127 Use default lines ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableBorderEditBegin TableBorderEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... To specify an extra thick table border, the command sequence is: TableBorderEditBegin TableBorder(ExtraThickBorder!) TableBorderEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TableBorder specifies a border type for a table. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TableBorderEditBegin and TableBorderEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill, Border/Fill, Border Style, highlighting a border style, Select. TableBorderEditBegin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblBdrEdBeg Syntax: TableBorderEditBegin Parameters: None See Also: TableBorderEditEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableBorderEditBegin initiates table border editing. Any border change commands must appear between this command and TableBorderEditEnd. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TableBorderEditEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill, Border/Fill, Border Style. TableBorderEditEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblBdrEdEnd Syntax: TableBorderEditEnd(Save) Parameters: Save Determines whether to save changes. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Cancel changes Save! 1 Save changes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableBorderEditBegin ──── ──── For Example... To specify no table border, the command sequence is: TableBorderEditBegin TableBorder(NoBorder!) TableBorderEditEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TableBorderEditEnd marks the end of table border editing. This command must be used in conjunction with TableBorderEditBegin. TableCalculate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCalc Syntax: TableCalculate Parameters: None See Also: TableCalculateAll TableFormula ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableCalculate calculates formula values in the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Calc. TableCalculateAll Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCalcAll Syntax: TableCalculateAll Parameters: None See Also: TableCalculate ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableCalculateAll calculates formula values for all tables and floating cells in the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Calculate All. TableCellAttributeOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellAttrOff Syntax: TableCellAttributeOff(Attribute1;Attribute2;...) Parameters: Attribute Specifies an attribute to turn off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Extra large VeryLarge! 1 Very large Large! 2 Large Small! 3 Small Fine! 4 Fine Superscript! 5 Superscript Subscript! 6 Subscript Outline! 7 Outline Italics! 8 Italics Shadow! 9 Shadow Redline! 10 Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Double underline Bold! 12 Bold Strikeout! 13 Strikeout Underline! 14 Underline SmallCaps! 15 Small caps Every! 16 All attributes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellAttributeOn ──── ──── For Example... To turn off Underline in a table cell, the command is: TableCellAttributeOff(Underline!) Tell Me More... TableCellAttributeOff turns off one or more character attributes in a table cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Cell, Appearance or Size, and deselecting any attributes to turn off. TableCellAttributeOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellAttrOn Syntax: TableCellAttributeOn(Attribute1;Attribute2;...) Parameters: Attribute Specifies an attribute to turn on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Extra large VeryLarge! 1 Very large Large! 2 Large Small! 3 Small Fine! 4 Fine Superscript! 5 Superscript Subscript! 6 Subscript Outline! 7 Outline Italics! 8 Italics Shadow! 9 Shadow Redline! 10 Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Double underline Bold! 12 Bold Strikeout! 13 Strikeout Underline! 14 Underline SmallCaps! 15 Small caps Every! 16 All attributes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellAttributeOff ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Italics and Large in a table cell, the command is: TableCellAttribute(Italics!;Large!) Tell Me More... TableCellAttributeOn turns on one or more character attributes in a table cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Cell, Appearance or Size, and selecting any attributes to turn on. TableCellCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellCopy Syntax: TableCellCopy(Destination;Number) Parameters: Destination Determines whether to copy the contents of the current cell down, to the right, or to a specific cell. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Down! 0 Down Right! 3 To the right Cell! 4 To a particular cell ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Number (optional) A numeric expression specifying the number of cells down or to the right to copy. This parameter is used only when Down! or Right! is selected as the destination parameter. See Also: TableCellCopyDlg ──── ──── For Example... To copy the contents of a cell four times to the right, the command is: TableCellCopy(Right!;4) Tell Me More... TableCellCopy copies the contents of a cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell, Move/Copy, Copy, and selecting a destination. TableCellCopyDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellCopyDlg Syntax: TableCellCopyDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableCellCopy ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableCellCopyDlg displays the Copy Cell dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell, Move/Copy, Copy. TableCellFillColors Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellFillClrs Syntax: TableCellFillColors(Foreground Color Name;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value;Background Color Name;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Color Name (Foreground/Background) (optional) A character expression specifying a predefined color name. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of red (0-255) in a custom color. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of green (0-255) in a custom color. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of blue (0-255) in a custom color. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the shading percentage in a custom color. See Also: TableCellFillStyle ──── ──── For Example... To specify a cyan foreground and a magenta background, the command is: TableCellFillColors("Cyan";0;255;255;100;"Magenta";255;0;255;100) Tell Me More... TableCellFillColors specifies foreground and background colors for a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Lines/Fill, Fill, Fill Style, highlighting a fill style, Select, Foreground Color, highlighting a foreground color, Select, Background Color, highlighting a background color, Select. TableCellFillStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellFillSty Syntax: TableCellFillStyle(Fill Style) Parameters: Fill Style Specifies a fill style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 10% shade fill Fill20! 1 20% shade fill Fill30! 2 30% shade fill Fill40! 3 40% shade fill Fill50! 4 50% shade fill Fill60! 5 60% shade fill Fill70! 6 70% shade fill Fill80! 7 80% shade fill Fill90! 8 90% shade fill Fill100! 9 100% shade fill FillButton! 10 Button style fill NoFill! 127 No fill ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellFillColors ──── ──── For Example... To fill a table cell with 20% shading, the command is: TableCellFillStyle(Fill20!) Tell Me More... TableCellFillStyle specifies a shading style for a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Lines/Fill, Fill, Fill Style, highlighting a fill style, Select. TableCellFormatDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellFmtDlg Syntax: TableCellFormatDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableFormatDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableCellFormatDlg displays the Cell Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Cell. TableCellIgnoreCalculation Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellIgnCalc Syntax: TableCellIgnoreCalculation(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to ignore the current cell or blocked cells when calculating formulas. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not ignore Yes! 1 Ignore ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCalculate ──── ──── For Example... To ignore the current cell when calculating, the command is: TableCellIgnoreCalculation(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellIgnoreCalculation specifies a cell or blocked cells to ignore when table calculations are performed. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Ignore When Calculating. TableCellJustification Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellJust Syntax: TableCellJustification(Justification) Parameters: Justification Specifies the justification for a cell or blocked cells. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left justified Full! 1 Full justified Center! 2 Center justified Right! 3 Right justified FullAll! 4 Full justified (including last line) DecAlign! 5 Decimal aligned ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellFormatDlg TableColumnJustification TableFormatJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify right justification for a cell, the command is: TableCellJustification(Right!) Tell Me More... TableCellJustification specifies the justification for a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Justification, selecting a justification option. TableCellLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellLn Syntax: TableCellLine(Lines;Line Style) Parameters: Lines Specifies a line or lines to change. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left line Top! 1 Top line Inside! 2 Inside lines of a block of cells Right! 3 Right line Bottom! 4 Bottom line Outside! 5 Outside lines of a block of cells ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Line Style Specifies a line style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single line DoubleLine! 1 Double line DashedLine! 2 Dashed line DottedLine! 3 Dotted line ThickLine! 4 Thick line ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick line ThinThickLine! 6 Thin line outside, thick line inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thick line outside, thin line inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Button with shadow top and left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Button with shadow bottom and right TableDefaultLine! 126 Default table line NoLine! 127 No line ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellLineColor ──── ──── For Example... To create a thick line around a blocked cells, the command is: TableCellLine(Outside!;ThickLine!) Tell Me More... TableCellLine changes specified lines around a cell or blocked cells, or in between blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Lines/Fill, selecting the line(s) to change, highlighting a style, Select. TableCellLineColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellLineClr Syntax: TableCellLineColor(Color Name;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Color Name (optional) A character expression specifying a predefined color name. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of red (0-255) in a custom color. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of green (0-255) in a custom color. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of blue (0-255) in a custom color. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the shading percentage in a custom color. See Also: TableCellLine ──── ──── For Example... To specify magenta cell lines, the command is: TableCellLineColor("Magenta";255;0;255;100) Tell Me More... TableCellLineColor specifies the line color of a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Lines/Fill, Line Color, Choose Color, highlighting a color, Select. TableCellLock Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellLock Syntax: TableCellLock(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to lock a cell or blocked cells. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not lock Yes! 1 Lock ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To lock a cell, the command is: TableCellLock(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellLock prevents a cell or blocked cells from being changed or unlocks locked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Lock. TableCellNumberAlignCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumAlignCur Syntax: TableCellNumberAlignCurrency(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to align currency symbols. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not align Yes! 1 Align ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberSelectCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To align currency symbols, the command is: TableCellNumberAlignCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberAlignCurrency aligns currency symbols in a block of cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Currency, Align Currency Symbol. TableCellNumberDateFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumDateFmt Syntax: TableCellNumberDateFormat(Format Number) Parameters: Format Number A numeric expression specifying a date format. Number Example ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ 1 July 5, 1959 2 7/5/59 3 Jul 5, 1959 4 5 July 1959 5 Sunday, July 5, 1959 6 12:00 pm 7 05Jul59 8 July 5, 1959 (12:00pm) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display the date in the format Sunday, July 5, 1959, the command is: TableCellNumberDateFormat(5) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberDateFormat specifies a date format for a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Date, Select Date Format, selecting a format. TableCellNumberDecimalDigits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumDecDgt Syntax: TableCellNumberDecimalDigits(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many digits appear after the decimal point. See Also: TableCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To specify that three digits appear after the decimal point, the command sequence is: TableCellNumberFormat(Fixed2!) TableCellNumberDecimalDigits(3) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberDecimalDigits specifies how many digits appear after the decimal point. Use with the Fixed2! option of TableCellNumberFormat. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Fixed, Digits After Decimal, and specifying the number of digits. TableCellNumberFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumFmt Syntax: TableCellNumberFormat(Number Format) Parameters: Number Format Specifies a number format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Example Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ General! 0 1234.5 Integer! 1 1234 Fixed2! 2 1234.50 Percent! 3 75.2% Currency! 4 $1234.50 Accounting! 5 $ 1234.50 Commas! 6 1,234.5 Scientific! 7 1.2345e+03 DateFormat! 8 July 5, 1959 TextOnly! 9 1234.5 (treated as text) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberAlignCurrency TableCellNumberDateFormat TableCellNumberDecimalDigits TableCellNumberRound TableCellNumberSelectCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To specify currency as the number type, the command is: TableCellNumberFormat(Currency!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberFormat specifies a number format for a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, and selecting a number type. TableCellNumberNegativeNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumNegNum Syntax: TableCellNumberNegativeNumber(Style) Parameters: Style Specifies a display style for negative numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Minus! 0 Minus sign Parentheses! 1 Parentheses CRDR! 2 Credit (CR) or Debit (DR) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display numbers using the Credit/Debit method, the command is: TableCellNumberNegativeNumber(CRDR!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberNegativeNumber specifies how to display negative numbers in the current cell or block of cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, and selecting a Negative Numbers option. TableCellNumberRound Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumRound Syntax: TableCellNumberRound(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to round off numbers or truncate them when converting to integers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Truncate Yes! 1 Round off ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To round off numbers after the decimal point when converting them to integers, the command is: TableCellNumberRound(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberRound specifies a method for converting numbers entered as decimals to integers. Use with the Integer! option of TableCellNumberFormat. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Integer, Round for Calculation. TableCellNumberSelectCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumSelCur Syntax: TableCellNumberSelectCurrency(Currency Type) Parameters: Currency Type Specifies a currency type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Dollar! 1 Dollar Peso! 2 Peso FrenchCanada! 3 French Canada Canada! 4 Canada Brazil! 5 Brazil Denmark! 6 Denmark Peseta! 7 Peseta Croatia! 8 Croatia CzechRepublic! 9 Czeck Republic SlovakRepublic! 10 Slovak Republic Finland! 11 Finland FinlandIntl! 12 Finland (international) France! 13 France Germany! 14 Germany Greece! 15 Greece Hungary! 16 Hungary Iceland! 17 Iceland Italy! 18 Italy Japan! 19 Japan Netherlands! 20 Netherlands Norway! 21 Norway NorwayIntl! 22 Norway (international) Ruble! 23 Ruble RussianRuble! 24 Russian ruble SouthAfrica! 25 South Africa Sweden! 26 Sweden Turkey! 27 Turkey UnitedKingdom! 28 United Kingdom Switzerland! 29 Switzerland Austria! 30 Austria Belgium! 31 Belgium Ecuador! 32 Ecuador ElSalvador! 33 El Salvador Guatemala! 34 Guatemala Honduras! 35 Honduras Paraguay! 36 Paraguay ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberAlignCurrency TableCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To specify pesos as the currency type, the command is: TableCellNumberSelectCurrency(Peso!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberSelectCurrency specifies a currency type for the current cell or block of cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Currency, Currency Symbol Select, highlighting a currency type, Select. TableCellNumberUseCommas Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumUseCommas Syntax: TableCellNumberUseCommas(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal point. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No commas Yes! 1 Commas ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display commas in numbers, the command is: TableCellNumberUseCommas(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberUseCommas displays commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal point. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Use Commas. TableCellNumberUseCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellNumUseCur Syntax: TableCellNumberUseCurrency(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display numbers with a currency symbol. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No currency symbol Yes! 1 Currency symbol ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display a currency symbol with numbers, the command is: TableCellNumberUseCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellNumberUseCurrency displays a currency symbol with numbers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Number Type, Currency Symbol On. TableCellsJoin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellsJoin Syntax: TableCellsJoin Parameters: None See Also: TableSplitColumn TableSplitRow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableCellsJoin combines blocked cells into one cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, blocking cells, Join. TableCellUseColumnAttribute Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellUseColAttr Syntax: TableCellUseColumnAttribute(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to use the specified column attribute in the current cell(s). Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use column attribute Yes! 1 Use column attribute ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellUseColumnJust TableCellUseColumnNumberType ──── ──── For Example... To use the specified column attribute in the current cell, the command is: TableCellUseColumnAttribute(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellUseColumnAttribute determines whether to use the specified column attribute in the current cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Use Column Attributes. TableCellUseColumnJust Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellUseColJust Syntax: TableCellUseColumnJust(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to use the current column justification in the current cell(s). Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use column justification Yes! 1 Use column justification ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellUseColumnAttribute TableCellUseColumnNumberType ──── ──── For Example... To use the current column justification in the current cell, the command is: TableCellUseColumnJustification(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellUseColumnJustification determines whether to use the current column justification in the current cell. This command is the equivalent of Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Use Column Justification. TableCellUseColumnNumberType Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellUseColNumType Syntax: TableCellUseColumnNumberType(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to use the current column number type in the current cell(s). Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use column number type Yes! 1 Use column number type ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellUseColumnAttribute TableCellUseColumnJust ──── ──── For Example... To use the current column number type in the current cell, the command is: TableCellUseColumnNumberType(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableCellUseColumnNumberType determines whether to use the current column number type in a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, Use Column Number Type. TableCellUseLineColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellUseLnClr Syntax: TableCellUseLineColor Parameters: None See Also: LineStyleEdit TableCellLineColor ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableCellUseLineColor specifies a default line color for lines around a cell or block of cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Lines/Fill, Line Color, Use Current Color. TableCellVerticalAlignment Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCellVertAlign Syntax: TableCellVerticalAlignment(Alignment) Parameters: Alignment Specifies vertical alignment for a cell or blocked cells. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Top! 1 Top Center! 2 Center Bottom! 4 Bottom ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellJustification ──── ──── For Example... To align text at the bottom, the command is: TableCellVerticalAlignment(Bottom!) Tell Me More... TableCellVerticalAlignment specifies vertical alignment for a cell or blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or blocking cells, Cell, selecting a Vertical Alignment option. TableColumnAttributeOff Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColAttrOff Syntax: TableColumnAttributeOff(Attribute) Parameters: Attribute Specifies an attribute to turn off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Extra large VeryLarge! 1 Very large Large! 2 Large Small! 3 Small Fine! 4 Fine Superscript! 5 Superscript Subscript! 6 Subscript Outline! 7 Outline Italics! 8 Italics Shadow! 9 Shadow Redline! 10 Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Double underline Bold! 12 Bold Strikeout! 13 Strikeout Underline! 14 Underline SmallCaps! 15 Small caps Every! 16 All attributes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnAttributeOn ──── ──── For Example... To turn off Bold in a table column, the command is: TableColumnAttributeOff(Bold!) Tell Me More... TableColumnAttributeOff turns off one or more character attributes in a table column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Column, Appearance or Size, and deselecting attributes to turn off. TableColumnAttributeOn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColAttrOn Syntax: TableColumnAttributeOn(Attribute) Parameters: Attribute Specifies an attribute to turn on. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ExtraLarge! 0 Extra large VeryLarge! 1 Very large Large! 2 Large Small! 3 Small Fine! 4 Fine Superscript! 5 Superscript Subscript! 6 Subscript Outline! 7 Outline Italics! 8 Italics Shadow! 9 Shadow Redline! 10 Redline DoubleUnderline! 11 Double underline Bold! 12 Bold Strikeout! 13 Strikeout Underline! 14 Underline SmallCaps! 15 Small caps Every! 16 All attributes ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnAttributeOff ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Bold in a table column, the command is: TableColumnAttributeOn(Bold!) Tell Me More... TableColumnAttributeOn turns on one or more character attributes in a table column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Column, Appearance or Size, and selecting attributes to turn on. TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColDecAlignDgt Syntax: TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying the number of digit places that appear between the decimal point and the right edge of the cells in the current column. See Also: TableCellJustification TableColumnDecimalAlignDist TableColumnJustification TableFormatJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify three digit places between the decimal point and the right edge of the cells in the current column, the command is: TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits(3) Tell Me More... TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits specifies the number of digit places that appear between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current column. This command applies only to cells with decimal align justification. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Decimal Align Position, Digits, and specifying the number of digits. TableColumnDecimalAlignDist Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColDecAlignDist Syntax: TableColumnDecimalAlignDist(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying the distance between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current column. See Also: TableCellJustification TableColumnDecimalAlignDist TableColumnJustification TableFormatJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify 0.2" between the decimal point and the right edge of the cells in the current column, the command is: TableColumnDecimalAlignDist(0.2") Tell Me More... TableColumnDecimalAlignDist specifies the distance between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current column. This command applies only to cells with decimal align justification. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Decimal Align Position, Distance, and specifying a distance. TableColumnFixedWidth Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColFixWid Syntax: TableColumnFixedWidth(State) Parameters: State Determines whether a column has a fixed width. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Variable width Yes! 1 Fixed width See Also: TableColumnsFixedWidth TableColumnWidth ──── ──── For Example... To designate a column width as fixed, the command is: TableColumnFixedWidth(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableColumnFixedWidth designates a column width as fixed. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Fixed Width. TableColumnFormatDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColFmtDlg Syntax: TableColumnFormatDlg Parameters: None See Also: ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableColumnFormatDlg displays the Column Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Column. TableColumnJustification Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColJust Syntax: TableColumnJustification(Justification) Parameters: Justification Specifies column justification. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left justified Full! 1 Full justified Center! 2 Center justified Right! 3 Right justified FullAll! 4 Full justified (including last line) DecAlign! 5 Decimal aligned ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellJustification TableFormatJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify right justification for a column, the command is: TableColumnJustification(Right!) Tell Me More... TableColumnJustification specifies the justification for a column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Justification, selecting a Justification option. TableColumnMarginLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColMarLft Syntax: TableColumnMarginLeft(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying the amount of space between the left edge of a table column and the text in the column. See Also: TableColumnMarginRight TableMarginLeft TableMarginRight ──── ──── For Example... To specify a left column margin of 0.2", the command is: TableColumnMarginLeft(0.2") Tell Me More... TableColumnMarginLeft specifies the amount of space between the left edge of a column and the text in the column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Column Margin, Left, and specifying an amount of space. TableColumnMarginRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColMarRgt Syntax: TableColumnMarginRight(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying the amount of space between the right edge of a table column and the text in the column. See Also: TableColumnMarginLeft ──── ──── For Example... To specify a right column margin of 0.5", the command is: TableColumnMarginRight(0.5") Tell Me More... TableColumnMarginRight specifies the amount of space between the right edge of a column and the text in the column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Column Margin, Right, and specifying an amount of space. TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumAlignCur Syntax: TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to align currency symbols in the current column. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not align Yes! 1 Align ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberSelCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To align currency symbols in the current column, the command is: TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency aligns currency symbols in a column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Currency, Align Currency Symbol. TableColumnNumberDateFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumDateFmt Syntax: TableColumnNumberDateFormat(Format Number) Parameters: Format Number A numeric expression specifying a date format. Number Example ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ 1 July 5, 1959 2 7/5/59 3 Jul 5, 1959 4 5 July 1959 5 Sunday, July 5, 1959 6 12:00 pm 7 05Jul59 8 July 5, 1959 (12:00pm) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display the date in the format Sunday, July 5, 1959, the command is: TableColumnNumberDateFormat(5) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberDateFormat specifies a date format for displaying dates in the current column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Date, Select Date Format, and selecting a format. TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumDecDgt Syntax: TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many digits appear after the decimal point. See Also: TableColumnNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To specify that three digits appear after the decimal point, the command sequence is: TableColumnNumberFormat(Fixed2!) TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits(3) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits specifies how many digits appear after the decimal point. It is used with the Fixed2! option of TableColumnNumberFormat. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TableColumnNumberFormat. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Fixed, Digits After Decimal, and specifying the number of digits. TableColumnNumberFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumFmt Syntax: TableColumnNumberFormat(Number Format) Parameters: Number Format Specifies a number format. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Example Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ General! 0 1234.5 Integer! 1 1234 Fixed2! 2 1234.50 Percent! 3 75.2% Currency! 4 $1234.50 Accounting! 5 $ 1234.50 Commas! 6 1,234.5 Scientific! 7 1.2345e+03 DateFormat! 8 July 5, 1959 TextOnly! 9 1234.5 (treated as text) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency TableColumnNumberDateFormat TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits TableColumnNumberRound TableColumnNumberSelCurrency ThousandsSeparator ──── ──── For Example... To specify currency as the number type, the command is: TableColumnNumberFormat(Currency!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberFormat specifies a number format for the current column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, and selecting a number type. TableColumnNumberNegNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumNegNum Syntax: TableColumnNumberNegNumber(Style) Parameters: Style Specifies a negative numbers display style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Minus! 0 Minus sign Parentheses! 1 Parentheses CRDR! 2 Credit (CR) or Debit (DR) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display numbers in the Credit/Debit style, the command is: TableColumnNumberNegNumber(CRDR!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberNegNumber specifies how to display negative numbers in the current column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, and selecting a Negative Numbers option. TableColumnNumberRound Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumRound Syntax: TableColumnNumberRound(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to round off numbers or truncate them when converting to integers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Truncate Yes! 1 Round off ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To round off numbers after the decimal point when converting them to integers, the command is: TableColumnNumberRound(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberRound specifies how to convert numbers entered as decimals to integers in the current column. Use with the Integer! option of TableColumnNumberFormat. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Integer, Round for Calculation. TableColumnNumberSelCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumSelCur Syntax: TableColumnNumberSelCurrency(Currency Type) Parameters: Currency Type Specifies a currency type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Dollar! 1 Dollar Peso! 2 Peso FrenchCanada! 3 French Canada Canada! 4 Canada Brazil! 5 Brazil Denmark! 6 Denmark Peseta! 7 Peseta Croatia! 8 Croatia CzechRepublic! 9 Czeck Republic SlovakRepublic! 10 Slovak Republic Finland! 11 Finland FinlandIntl! 12 Finland (international) France! 13 France Germany! 14 Germany Greece! 15 Greece Hungary! 16 Hungary Iceland! 17 Iceland Italy! 18 Italy Japan! 19 Japan Netherlands! 20 Netherlands Norway! 21 Norway NorwayIntl! 22 Norway (international) Ruble! 23 Ruble RussianRuble! 24 Russian ruble SouthAfrica! 25 South Africa Sweden! 26 Sweden Turkey! 27 Turkey UnitedKingdom! 28 United Kingdom Switzerland! 29 Switzerland Austria! 30 Austria Belgium! 31 Belgium Ecuador! 32 Ecuador ElSalvador! 33 El Salvador Guatemala! 34 Guatemala Honduras! 35 Honduras Paraguay! 36 Paraguay ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency TableColumnNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To specify pesos as the currency type, the command is: TableColumnNumberSelCurrency(Peso!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberSelCurrency specifies a currency type for the current column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Currency, Currency Symbol Select, highlighting a currency type, Select. TableColumnNumberUseCommas Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumUseCommas Syntax: TableColumnNumberUseCommas(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal point. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No commas Yes! 1 Commas ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberFormat ThousandsSeparator ──── ──── For Example... To display commas in numbers, the command is: TableColumnNumberUseCommas(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberUseCommas displays commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal point. Use ThousandsSeparator to display a character other than a comma as the separator. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Use Commas. TableColumnNumberUseCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColNumUseCur Syntax: TableColumnNumberUseCurrency(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display numbers with a currency symbol. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No currency symbol Yes! 1 Currency symbol ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display a currency symbol with numbers, the command is: TableColumnNumberUseCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableColumnNumberUseCurrency displays a currency symbol with numbers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Number Type, Currency Symbol On. TableColumnsFixedWidth Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColsFixWid Syntax: TableColumnsFixedWidth(State) Parameters: State Determines whether the width of columns in a table is fixed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Variable width Yes! 1 Fixed width ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnFixedWidth ──── ──── For Example... To designate the width of columns in a table as fixed, the command is: TableColumnsFixedWidth(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableColumnsFixedWidth designates the width of columns in a table as fixed. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Fixed Width. TableColumnWidth Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColWid Syntax: TableColumnWidth(Width) Parameters: Width A measurement expression specifying column width. See Also: TableColumnFixedWidth TableColumnWidthGrow TableColumnWidthShrink TableFormatWidths ──── ──── For Example... To specify a column width of 1.5", the command is: TableColumnWidth(1.5") Tell Me More... TableColumnWidth specifies the width of the current column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Column, Width, and specifying a width. TableColumnWidthGrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColWidGrow Syntax: TableColumnWidthGrow Parameters: None See Also: TableColumnWidth TableColumnWidthShrink ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableColumnWidthGrow increases the width of a column by a small amount (the amount depends on the unit of measure in use). This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, and pressing Ctrl-Right Arrow. TableColumnWidthShrink Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblColWidShrink Syntax: TableColumnWidthShrink Parameters: None See Also: TableColumnWidth TableColumnWidthGrow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableColumnWidthShrink decreases the width of a column by a small amount (the amount depends on the unit of measure in use). This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, and pressing Ctrl-Left Arrow. TableConvertFrom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCvtFrom Syntax: TableConvertFrom(Source Format) Parameters: Source Format Specifies whether text to convert is in tabular columns (the text in each column is separated by tabs or indents) or parallel columns. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ TabularColumns! 0 Tabular columns ParallelColumns! 1 Parallel columns ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCreate ──── ──── For Example... To convert text from tabular columns to a table, the command is: TableConvertFrom(TabularColumns!) Tell Me More... TableConvertFrom converts blocked text in tabular or parallel columns to a table. This command is the equivalent of blocking text and choosing Layout, Tables, Create, and selecting an option. TableCopy Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCopy Syntax: TableCopy(Source) Parameters: Source Determines whether to copy blocked cells, the current row, or the current column. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Block! 1 Blocked cells Row! 2 Current row Column! 3 Current column ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableMove TableMoveModeEnd ──── ──── For Example... To copy the contents of the current column, the command is: TableCopy(Column!) Tell Me More... TableCopy copies the contents of blocked cells, the current column, or the current row. Once copied, the contents of the cells can be inserted into the table using the TableMoveModeEnd command. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TableMoveModeCancel and TableMoveModeEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column or row or blocking cells, Move/Copy, and selecting an option. TableCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCre Syntax: TableCreate(Columns;Rows) Parameters: Columns A numeric expression specifying the number of columns to create. Rows A numeric expression specifying the number of rows to create. See Also: TableConvertFrom TableJoin TableSplit ──── ──── For Example... To create a table with three columns and five rows, the command is: TableCreate(3;5) Tell Me More... TableCreate creates a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create, and specifying the number of columns and rows. TableCreateDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblCreDlg Syntax: TableCreateDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableCreate ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableCreateDlg displays the Create Table dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Create. TableDecimalAlignmentDigits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDecAlignDgt Syntax: TableDecimalAlignmentDigits(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying the number of digit places between the decimal point and the right edge of cells. See Also: TableDecimalAlignmentDistance TableFormatJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify 3 digit places between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current table, the command is: TableDecimalAlignmentDigits(3) Tell Me More... TableDecimalAlignmentDigits specifies the number of digit places between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current table. This command applies only to cells with decimal align justification. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Decimal Align Position, Digits, and specifying the number of digits. TableDecimalAlignmentDistance Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDecAlignDist Syntax: TableDecimalAlignmentDistance(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying the distance between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current table. See Also: TableDecimalAlignmentDigits TableFormatJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify 0.2" between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current table, the command is: TableDecimalAlignmentDistance(0.2") Tell Me More... TableDecimalAlignmentDistance specifies the distance between the decimal point and the right edge of cells in the current table. This command applies only to cells with decimal align justification. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Decimal Align Position, Distance, and specifying a distance. TableDefaultLine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDefLtln Syntax: TableDefaultLine(Line Style) Parameters: Line Style Specifies the line style. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SingleLine! 0 Single line DoubleLine! 1 Double line DashedLine! 2 Dashed line DottedLine! 3 Dotted line ThickLine! 4 Thick line ExtraThickLine! 5 Extra thick line ThinThickLine! 6 Thin line outside, thick line inside ThickThinLine! 7 Thick line outside, thin line inside ButtonTopLeftLine! 8 Sculptured button look with shadow at top and left ButtonBottomRightLine! 9 Sculptured button look with shadow at bottom and right TableDefaultLine! 126 Use the default table line NoLine! 127 No line ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellLine ──── ──── For Example... To specify a dotted line as the default table line style, the command is: TableDefaultLine(DottedLine!) Tell Me More... TableDefaultLine changes the default line style for a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill, Default Line, Line Style, highlighting a line style, Select. TableDefaultLineColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDefLnClr Syntax: TableDefaultLineColor(Color Name;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value;Shading Value) Parameters: Color Name (optional) A character expression specifying a predefined color name. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of red (0-255) in a custom color. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of green (0-255) in a custom color. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of blue (0-255) in a custom color. Shading Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the shading percentage in a custom color. See Also: TableCellLineColor ──── ──── For Example... To specify magenta default table lines, the command is: TableDefaultLineColor("Magenta";255;0;255;100) Tell Me More... TableDefaultLineColor specifies the default line color for a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill, Default Line, Color, Choose Color, highlighting a color, Select. TableDeleteBlock Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDelBlk Syntax: TableDeleteBlock Parameters: None See Also: TableDeleteColumn TableDeleteRow TableUndelete ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableDeleteBlock deletes the contents of blocked cells. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, blocking cells, Del, Block. TableDeleteColumn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDelCol Syntax: TableDeleteColumn(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many columns to delete. See Also: TableDeleteBlock TableDeleteRow TableUndelete ──── ──── For Example... To delete one column, the command is: TableDeleteColumn(1) Tell Me More... TableDeleteColumn deletes one or more table columns. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Del, Columns, How Many, and entering the number of columns to delete. TableDeleteRow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDelRow Syntax: TableDeleteRow(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many columns to delete. See Also: TableDeleteBlock TableDeleteColumn TableUndelete ──── ──── For Example... To delete two rows, the command is: TableDeleteRow(2) Tell Me More... TableDeleteRow deletes one or more table rows. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row, Del, Rows, How Many, and entering the number of rows to delete. TableDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblDlg Syntax: TableDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableEdit TableEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableDlg displays the Table Edit dialog box and puts the current table in editing mode. If the cursor is not in a table, an error is returned. TableEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblEd Syntax: TableEdit Parameters: None See Also: TableCreate TableDlg TableEditDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableEdit initiates editing changes to a table. If the cursor is not in a table, this command searches backward for a table to edit. If no table is found, it then searches forward for a table to edit. If no table is found, a NOT FOUND error is returned. TableEditDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblEdDlg Syntax: TableEditDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableDlg TableEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableEditDlg displays the Table Edit dialog box and puts the current table in editing mode. If the cursor is not in a table, this command searches backward for a table to edit. If no table is found, it then searches forward for a table to edit. If no table is found, a NOT FOUND error is returned. TableFill Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblFill Syntax: TableFill(Fill Style) Parameters: Fill Style Specifies a fill style for a table. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 10% shade fill Fill20! 1 20% shade fill Fill30! 2 30% shade fill Fill40! 3 40% shade fill Fill50! 4 50% shade fill Fill60! 5 60% shade fill Fill70! 6 70% shade fill Fill80! 7 80% shade fill Fill90! 8 90% shade fill Fill100! 9 100% shade fill FillButton! 10 Button style fill NoFill! 127 No fill ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellFillStyle ──── ──── For Example... To specify 20% shading as the fill style for a table, the command is: TableFill(Fill20!) Tell Me More... TableFill fills a table with the specified fill style. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill, Border/Fill, Fill Style, highlighting a fill style, Select. TableFormatDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblFmtDlg Syntax: TableFormatDlg Parameters: None See Also: ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableFormatDlg displays the Table Format dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table. TableFormatJustification Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblFmtJust Syntax: TableFormatJustification(Justification) Parameters: Justification Specifies justification for a table. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Left! 0 Left justified Full! 1 Full justified Center! 2 Center justified Right! 3 Right justified FullAll! 4 Full justified (including last line) DecAlign! 5 Decimal aligned ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCellJustification TableColumnJustification ──── ──── For Example... To specify center justification for a table, the command is: TableColumnJustification(Center!) Tell Me More... TableFormatJustification specifies justification for a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Justification, and selecting a Justification option. TableFormatWidths Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblFmtWids Syntax: TableFormatWidths(Width) Parameters: Width A measurement expression specifying the width of columns in the current table. See Also: TableColumnWidth ──── ──── For Example... To specify a column width of 1.5", the command is: TableFormatWidths(1.5") Tell Me More... TableFormatWidths specifies the width of the columns in the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Width, and specifying a width. TableFormula Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblForm Syntax: TableFormula(Formula) Parameters: Formula A character expression specifying a table formula. See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... To calculate the average of a group of cells named Sales, the command is: TableFormula("AVE(Sales)") Tell Me More... TableFormula specifies a formula to insert in the current cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, select a cell, Formula, and entering a formula. TabLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabLft Syntax: TabLft(Leader) Parameters: Leader (optional) Determines whether to include a dot leader. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 No dot leader DotLeader! 1 Dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TabCenter TabDecimal TabRight ──── ──── For Example... To insert a left tab with a dot leader, the command is: TabLeft(DotLeader!) Tell Me More... TabLeft inserts a left aligned tab. TableHardColumnBreak Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblHrdCol Syntax: TableHardColumnBreak Parameters: None See Also: PosTableRowBeg TableHardRow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableHardColumnBreak inserts a column break and continues the table in the next column when the cursor is at the beginning of a row. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl-Enter while the cursor is in a table located in a text column. TableHardRow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblHrdRow Syntax: TableHardRow Parameters: None See Also: PosTableRowBeg TableHardColumnBreak ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableHardRow inserts a page break and continues the table on the next page when the cursor is at the beginning of a row. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl-Enter while the cursor is in a table. TableHeader Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblHdr Syntax: TableHeader(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to use the current row as a header row. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Not a header row Yes! 1 Header row ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To make the current row a header row, the command is: TableHeader(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableHeader designates the current row as a header row. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row, Row, Header Row. TableInsertColumn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblInsCol Syntax: TableInsertColumn(Number;Location) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many columns to insert. Location Determines whether to insert columns before or after the cursor position. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Before! 0 Before cursor After! 1 After cursor ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableInsertRow ──── ──── For Example... To insert two columns after the current column, the command is: TableInsertColumn(2;After!) Tell Me More... TableInsertColumn inserts a table column. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Table, Edit, positioning the cursor where you want the new column to appear, Ins, Column, How Many, entering the number of columns to insert, and selecting Before Cursor Position or After Cursor Position. TableInsertRow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblInsRow Syntax: TableInsertRow(Number;Location) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many rows to insert. Location Determines whether to insert rows before or after the cursor position. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Before! 0 Before cursor After! 1 After cursor ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableInsertColumn ──── ──── For Example... To insert one row before the current row, the command is: TableInsertRow(1;Before!) Tell Me More... TableInsertRow inserts a table row. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Table, Edit, positioning the cursor where you want the new row to appear, Ins, Row, How Many, enter the number of rows to insert, and selecting Before Cursor Position or After Cursor Position. TableJoin Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblJoin Syntax: TableJoin Parameters: None See Also: TableSplit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableJoin joins the current table and the table immediately following it into one table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Join. TableLinesDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TbLlnDlg Syntax: TableLinesDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableDefaultLine ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableLinesDlg displays the Table Lines dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill. TableMarginLeft Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblMarLft Syntax: TableMarginLeft(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying an amount of space between the left edge of each cell and the text in the cell. See Also: TableColumnMarginLeft TableColumnMarginRight TableMarginRight ──── ──── For Example... To specify a left margin of 0.1" for the current table, the command is: TableMarginLeft(0.1") Tell Me More... TableMarginLeft specifies an amount of space between the left edge of each cell and the text in the cell for the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Column Margin, Left, and specifying an amount of space. TableMarginRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblMarRgt Syntax: TableMarginRight(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying an amount of space between the right edge of each cell and the text in the cell. See Also: TableColumnMarginLeft TableColumnMarginRight TableMarginLeft ──── ──── For Example... To specify a right cell margin of 0.1" for the current table, the command is: TableMarginRight(0.1") Tell Me More... TableMarginRight specifies an amount of space between the right edge of each cell and the text in the cell for the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Column Margin, Right, and specifying an amount of space. TableMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblMove Syntax: TableMove(Source) Parameters: Source Determines whether to move a cell, blocked cells, the current row, or the current column. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Block! 1 Blocked cells Row! 2 Current row Column! 3 Current column Cell! 4 Current cell ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCopy TableMoveModeEnd ──── ──── For Example... To move the contents of the current column, the command is: TableMove(Column!) Tell Me More... TableMove moves the contents of a cell, blocked cells, the current column, or the current row. After TableMove is executed, the contents of the cell(s) can be inserted into the table with TableMoveModeEnd. TableMove must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TableMoveModeCancel and TableMoveModeEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout; Tables; Edit; selecting a cell, column, or row or blocking cells; Move/Copy; and selecting an option. TableMoveCopyDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblMoveCopyDlg Syntax: TableMoveCopyDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableCopy TableMove ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableMoveCopyDlg displays the Move dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Move/Copy. TableMoveModeCancel Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblMoveModeCancel Syntax: TableMoveModeCancel Parameters: None See Also: TableCopy TableMove TableMoveModeEnd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableMoveModeCancel cancels a TableMove or TableCopy. TableMoveModeEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblMoveModEend Syntax: TableMoveModeEnd Parameters: None See Also: TableCopy TableMove TableMoveModeCancel ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableMoveModeEnd completes a TableCopy or TableMove by inserting the data being copied or moved into the table at the cursor position. TableNameAdd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameAdd Syntax: TableNameAdd(Cells;Name) Parameters: Cells Specifies cells to name. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Block! 1 Blocked cells Row! 2 Current row Column! 3 Current column Cell! 4 Current cell Table! 5 Entire table FloatingCell! 6 Floating cell CellsDown! 7 Cells below blocked cells CellsRight! 8 Cells to right of blocked cells ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNameChange TableNameDelete ──── ──── For Example... To name a block of cells Sales Figures, the command is: TableNameAdd(Block!;"Sales Figures") Tell Me More... TableNameAdd names a cell, block of cells, row, column, or table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell or cells to name, Names, specifying which cells to name, and entering a name. TableNameBlockDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameBlkDlg Syntax: TableNameBlockDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableBlockOn TableEdit TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameBlockDlg displays the Create Block Name dialog box. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TableBlockOn and TableEdit. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, blocking cells, Names, Block. TableNameCellDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameCellDlg Syntax: TableNameCellDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameCellDlg displays the Create Cell Name dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell, Names, Cell. TableNameCellsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameCellsDlg Syntax: TableNameCellsDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameCellsDlg displays the Name Cells dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, blocking cells, Names. TableNameChange Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameChg Syntax: TableNameChange(Old Name;New Name;Reference) Parameters: Old Name A character expression specifying a name to change. The name can be preceded by a table name and a period. New Name (optional) A character expression specifying a new name. Reference (optional) A character expression specifying a new cell reference for the name. See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... To change the name Sales Figures in a table named Table_C to 1Q Sales, the command is: TableNameChange("Table_C.Sales Figures";"1Q Sales";"B1:B7") Tell Me More... TableNameChange changes a table name. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Names, List, selecting a name, Edit, and entering a new name. TableNameColumnDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameColDlg Syntax: TableNameColumnDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameColumnDlg displays the Create Column Name dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a column, Names, Column. TableNameDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameDel Syntax: TableNameDelete(Name) Parameters: Name A character expression specifying a table name to delete. The name can be preceded by the name of a table and a period. See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... To delete the table name Sales in a table named Table_C, the command is: TableNameDelete("Table_C.Sales") Tell Me More... TableNameDelete deletes a table name. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Names, List, selecting a name, Delete. TableNameDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameDlg Syntax: TableNameDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameDlg displays the Names dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell, row, or column, Names. TableNameListDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameListDlg Syntax: TableNameListDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameListDlg displays the List Table Names dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Names, List. TableNameRowDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameRowDlg Syntax: TableNameRowDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameRowDlg displays the Create Row Name dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row, Names, Row. TableNameTableDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNameTblDlg Syntax: TableNameTableDlg Parameters: None See Also: TableNameAdd ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TableNameTableDlg displays the Create Table Name dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Names, Table. TableNumberAlignCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumAlignCur Syntax: TableNumberAlignCurrency(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to align currency symbols in the current table. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not align Yes! 1 Align ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNumberSelectCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To align currency symbols in the current table, the command is: TableNumberAlignCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableNumberAlignCurrency aligns currency symbols in a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Currency, Align Currency Symbol. TableNumberDateFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumDateFmt Syntax: TableNumberDateFormat(Format Number) Parameters: Format Number A numeric expression specifying a date format. Number Example ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ 1 July 5, 1959 2 7/5/59 3 Jul 5, 1959 4 5 July 1959 5 Sunday, July 5, 1959 6 12:00 pm 7 05Jul59 8 July 5, 1959 (12:00pm) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display the date in the format Sunday, July 5, 1959, the command is: TableNumberDateFormat(5) Tell Me More... TableNumberDateFormat specifies a date format for displaying dates in the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Date, Select Date Format, and selecting a format. TableNumberDecimalDigits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumDecDgt Syntax: TableNumberDecimalDigits(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying how many digits appear after the decimal point. See Also: TableNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To specify that three digits appear after the decimal point, the command sequence is: TableNumberFormat(Fixed2!) TableNumberDecimalDigits(3) Tell Me More... TableNumberDecimalDigits specifies how many digits appear after the decimal point. Use with the Fixed2! option of TableNumberFormat. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Fixed, Digits After Decimal, and specifying a number of digits. TableNumberFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumFmt Syntax: TableNumberFormat(Number Format) Parameters: Number Format Specifies a number format for the current table. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Example Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ General! 0 1234.5 Integer! 1 1234 Fixed2! 2 1234.50 Percent! 3 75.2% Currency! 4 $1234.50 Accounting! 5 $ 1234.50 Commas! 6 1,234.5 Scientific! 7 1.2345e+03 DateFormat! 8 July 5, 1959 TextOnly! 9 1234.5 (treated as text) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency TableColumnNumberDateFormat TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits TableColumnNumberRound TableColumnNumberSelCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To specify currency as the number type, the command is: TableNumberFormat(Currency!) Tell Me More... TableNumberFormat specifies a number format for the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, and selecting a number type. TableNumberNegativeNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumNegNum Syntax: TableNumberNegativeNumber(Style) Parameters: Style Specifies a display style for negative numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Minus! 0 Minus sign Parentheses! 1 Parentheses CRDR! 2 Credit (CR) or Debit (DR) ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display numbers using the Credit/Debit method, the command is: TableNumberNegativeNumber(CRDR!) Tell Me More... TableNumberNegativeNumber specifies how to display negative numbers in the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, and selecting a Negative Numbers option. TableNumberRound Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumRound Syntax: TableNumberRound(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to round off numbers or truncate them when converting to integers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Truncate Yes! 1 Round off ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To round off numbers after the decimal point when converting them to integers, the command is: TableNumberRound(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableNumberRound specifies how to convert numbers entered as decimals to integers. Use with the Integer! option of TableNumberFormat. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Integer, Round for Calculation. TableNumberSelectCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumSelCur Syntax: TableNumberSelectCurrency(Currency Type) Parameters: Currency Type Specifies a currency type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Dollar! 1 Dollar Peso! 2 Peso FrenchCanada! 3 French Canada Canada! 4 Canada Brazil! 5 Brazil Denmark! 6 Denmark Peseta! 7 Peseta Croatia! 8 Croatia CzechRepublic! 9 Czeck Republic SlovakRepublic! 10 Slovak Republic Finland! 11 Finland FinlandIntl! 12 Finland (international) France! 13 France Germany! 14 Germany Greece! 15 Greece Hungary! 16 Hungary Iceland! 17 Iceland Italy! 18 Italy Japan! 19 Japan Netherlands! 20 Netherlands Norway! 21 Norway NorwayIntl! 22 Norway (international) Ruble! 23 Ruble RussianRuble! 24 Russian ruble SouthAfrica! 25 South Africa Sweden! 26 Sweden Turkey! 27 Turkey UnitedKingdom! 28 United Kingdom Switzerland! 29 Switzerland Austria! 30 Austria Belgium! 31 Belgium Ecuador! 32 Ecuador ElSalvador! 33 El Salvador Guatemala! 34 Guatemala Honduras! 35 Honduras Paraguay! 36 Paraguay ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNumberAlignCurrency ──── ──── For Example... To specify pesos as the currency type, the command is: TableNumberSelectCurrency(Peso!) Tell Me More... TableNumberSelectCurrency specifies a currency type for the current table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Currency, Currency Symbol Select, highlighting a currency type, Select. TableNumberUseCommas Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumUseCommas Syntax: TableNumberUseCommas(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal point. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No commas Yes! 1 Commas ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display commas in numbers, the command is: TableNumberUseCommas(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableNumberUseCommas displays commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal point. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Use Commas. TableNumberUseCurrency Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblNumUseCur Syntax: TableNumberUseCurrency(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to display numbers with a currency symbol. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No currency symbol Yes! 1 Currency symbol ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableNumberFormat ──── ──── For Example... To display a currency symbol with numbers, the command is: TableNumberUseCurrency(Yes!) Tell Me More... TableNumberUseCurrency displays a currency symbol with numbers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Table, Number Type, Currency Symbol On. TablePosition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblPos Syntax: TablePosition(Position;Absolute Position) Parameters: Position Specifies the position of the current table on the page. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ AlignLeft! 0 Align left AlignRight! 1 Align right AlignCenter! 2 Align center AlignFull! 3 Align full AlignAbsolute! 4 Specify absolute position ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Absolute Position (optional) A measurement expression specifying an absolute position for a table from the left edge of the paper when AlignAbsolute is specified as the Position parameter. See Also: ──── ──── For Example... To position a table 1.4" from the left edge of the paper, the command is: TablePosition(AlignAbsolute!;1.4") Tell Me More... TablePosition specifies the position of a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Table, Edit, Table, Position, and specifying a position. TableRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblRet Syntax: TableRetrieve(Item) Parameters: Item Determines whether to retrieve a cell, block, row, or column and specifies how to insert it. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Block! 1 Retrieve block to current position Row! 2 Add row and retrieve Column! 3 Add column and retrieve Cell! 4 Retrieve to current position ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TableCopy TableMove ──── ──── For Example... To add a row and retrieve into it a row that was copied, the command is: TableRetrieve(Row!) Tell Me More... TableRetrieve retrieves the last item moved or copied. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, positioning the cursor, Move/Copy, selecting an item to retrieve, Retrieve. TableRowHeight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblRowHgt Syntax: TableRowHeight(Type;Fixed Height) Parameters: Type Determines whether row height is automatic (based on font size) or fixed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Auto! 0 Automatic Fixed! 1 Fixed ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fixed Height (optional) A measurement expression specifying the row height when Fixed! is specified as the Type parameter. See Also: TableColumnWidth ──── ──── For Example... To specify a fixed row height of 0.25", the command is: TableRowHeight(Fixed!;0.25") Tell Me More... TableRowHeight determines whether row height is automatic or fixed, and if fixed, specifies the height. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row or blocking rows, Row, Row Height, Auto or Fixed, and (if Fixed) entering height. TableRowMarginBottom Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblRowMarBot Syntax: TableRowMarginBottom(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying an amount of space between the bottom of each cell and text in the cell. See Also: TableRowMarginTop ──── ──── For Example... To specify a bottom margin of 0.05", the command is: TableRowMarginBottom(0.05") Tell Me More... TableRowMarginBottom specifies the amount of space between the bottom of each cell and text in the cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row or blocking rows, Row, Row Margins, Bottom, and specifying an amount of space. TableRowMarginTop Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblRowMarTop Syntax: TableRowMarginTop(Distance) Parameters: Distance A measurement expression specifying an amount of space between the top of each cell and text in the cell. See Also: TableRowMarginBottom ──── ──── For Example... To specify a top margin of 0.05", the command is: TableRowMarginTop(0.05") Tell Me More... TableRowMarginTop specifies an amount of space between the top of each cell and text in the cell. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row or blocking rows, Row, Row Margins, Top, and specifying an amount of space. TableRowNumberOfLines Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblRowNumOfLns Syntax: TableRowNumberOfLines(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to allow multiple lines or only one line. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Multiple! 0 Allow multiple lines Single! 1 Allow one line ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To allow multiple lines in a cell, the command is: TableRowNumberOfLines(Multiple!) Tell Me More... TableRowNumberOfLines determines whether multiple lines are allowed in the cells in a row. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a row or blocking rows, Row, Single or Multiple. TableSplit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblSpl Syntax: TableSplit Parameters: None See Also: TableJoin ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableSplit splits a table into two tables, the second table beginning with the current row. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Split. TableSplitColumn Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblSplCol Syntax: TableSplitColumn(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a number of columns to split a cell into. See Also: TableSplitRow ──── ──── For Example... To split a cell into two columns, the command is: TableSplitColumn(2) Tell Me More... TableSplitColumn splits the current cell into multiple columns. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell, Split, Columns, How Many, and specifying a number of columns. TableSplitRow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblSplRow Syntax: TableSplitRow(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a number of rows to split a cell into. See Also: TableSplitColumn ──── ──── For Example... To split a cell into two rows, the command is: TableSplitRow(2) Tell Me More... TableSplitRow splits the current cell into multiple rows. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, selecting a cell, Split, Rows, How Many, and specifying a number of rows. TableTextToFormula Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblTxTtoForm Syntax: TableTextToFormula Parameters: None See Also: TableFormula ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableTextToFormula converts the contents of the current cell into a formula. TableUndelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblUnd Syntax: TableUndelete Parameters: None See Also: TableDeleteBlock TableDeleteColumn TableDeleteRow ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableUndelete undeletes the last deleted item while in table editing mode. TableUseDefaultLinesColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TblUseDefLnsClr Syntax: TableUseDefaultLinesColor Parameters: None See Also: TableDefaultLineColor ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TableUseDefaultLinesColor specifies the Line Style line color as the default line color for a table. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Tables, Edit, Lines/Fill, Default Line, Color, Use Line Style Color. TabRight Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabRgt Syntax: TabRight(Leader) Parameters: Leader (optional) Determines whether to include a dot leader. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 No dot leader DotLeader! 1 Dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TabCenter TabDecimal TabLeft ──── ──── For Example... To insert a right tab with a dot leader, the command is: TabRight(DotLeader!) Tell Me More... TabRight inserts a right aligned tab. TabSet Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TabSet Syntax: TabSet(Origin;{Position1;Type1;Position2;Type2;... }) Parameters: Origin Determines whether set tabs relative to the left edge of the paper (absolute) or the left margin setting (relative). Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Absolute! 0 Measure from left edge of paper Relative! 1 Relative to left margin ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position A measurement expression specifying the position of a tab to set. Type Specifies a tab type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ TabLeft! 0 Left TabCenter! 1 Center TabRight! 2 Right TabDecimal! 3 Decimal align TabLeftDot! 16 Left with dot leader TabCenterDot! 17 Center with dot leader TabRightDot! 18 Right with dot leader TabDecimalDot! 19 Decimal align with dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TabAdd ──── ──── For Example... To set two absolute left tabs at 3" and 4" and a right tab with dot leader at 6", the command is: TabSet(Absolute!;{3";TabLeft!;4";TabLeft!;6";TabRightDot!}) Tell Me More... TabSet specifies tab settings. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Line, Tab Set, Absolute or Relative, and specifying tab settings. TextBorderCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrCre Syntax: TextBorderCreate(Border Style;Fill Style;Border Type) Parameters: Border Style Specifies a border style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SpacingOnly! 0 No border SingleBorder! 1 Single DoubleBorder! 2 Double DashedBorder! 3 Dashed DottedBorder! 4 Dotted ThickBorder! 5 Thick ExtraThickBorder! 6 Extra thick ThinThickBorder! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ThickThinBorder! 8 Thick outside, thin inside ThickTopBottomBorder! 9 Thick top and bottom, no side border ButtonBorder! 10 Button style ColumnBorderBetween! 11 Between columns ColumnBorderAll! 12 Around columns NoBorder! 127 Use default ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill Type Specifies a fill type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 10% Fill20! 1 20% Fill30! 2 30% Fill40! 3 40% Fill50! 4 50% Fill60! 5 60% Fill70! 6 70% Fill80! 7 80% Fill90! 8 90% Fill100! 9 100% FillButton! 10 Button style NoFill! 127 No fill ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Border Type Specifies a border type. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PageBorder! 0 Page ParagraphBorder! 1 Paragraph ColumnBorder! 2 Column ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To create a paragraph border with a single line and a 10% fill, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleBorder!;Fill10!;ParagraphBorder!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TextBorderCreate creates a text border. This command must be used in conjunction with TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics; Borders; Paragraph, Page, or Column. TextBorderCustomizeDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrCustomDlg Syntax: TextBorderCustomizeDlg Parameters: None See Also: TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TextBorderCustomizeDlg displays the Customize Border dialog box. This command must be used in conjunction with TextBorderCreate. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics; Borders; Paragraph, Page, or Column; Customize. TextBorderDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrDlg Syntax: TextBorderDlg Parameters: None See Also: TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TextBorderDlg displays the Edit Border dialog box. This command must be used in conjunction with TextBorderCreate. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics; Borders; Paragraph, Page, or Column. TextBorderEdit Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrEd Syntax: TextBorderEdit(Border Type) Parameters: Border Type Specifies a border type to edit. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ PageBorder! 0 Page ParagraphBorder! 1 Paragraph ColumnBorder! 2 Column ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TextBorderCreate TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To change the fill style of the current page border to 10%, the command sequence is: TextBorderEdit(PageBorder!) TextBorderFillStyle(Fill10!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TextBorderEdit initiates editing changes to the current border. If the cursor is not in text that has the specified border, an error is returned. This command must be used in conjunction with TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics; Borders; Paragraph, Page, or Column. TextBorderEnd Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrEnd Syntax: TextBorderEnd(Save) Parameters: Save Determines whether to save changes to a border. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Cancel! 0 Do not save Save! 1 Save ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TextBorderCreate TextBorderEdit ──── ──── For Example... To create a paragraph border with a single line and a 10% fill, the command sequence is: TextBorderCreate(SingleBorder!;Fill10!;ParagraphBorder!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TextBorderEnd ends border creation or editing and determines whether to save changes. This command must be used in conjunction with other commands, such as TextBorderCreate and TextBorderEdit. TextBorderFillStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrFillSty Syntax: TextBorderFillStyle(Fill Style) Parameters: Fill Style Specifies a fill style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Fill10! 0 10% Fill20! 1 20% Fill30! 2 30% Fill40! 3 40% Fill50! 4 50% Fill60! 5 60% Fill70! 6 70% Fill80! 7 80% Fill90! 8 90% Fill100! 9 100% FillButton! 10 Button style NoFill! 127 No fill ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TextBorderEdit ──── ──── For Example... To change the fill style of the current page border to 10%, the command sequence is: TextBorderEdit(PageBorder!) TextBorderFillStyle(Fill10!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TextBorderFillStyle specifies a fill style for the current border. If the cursor is not in text with a border, an error is returned. This command must be used in conjunction with TextBorderEdit and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics; Borders; Paragraph, Page, or Column; Fill Style; highlighting a style; Select. TextBorderStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtBdrSty Syntax: TextBorderStyle(Border Style) Parameters: Border Style Specifies a border style. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ SpacingOnly! 0 No border SingleBorder! 1 Single DoubleBorder! 2 Double DashedBorder! 3 Dashed DottedBorder! 4 Dotted ThickBorder! 5 Thick ExtraThickBorder! 6 Extra thick ThinThickBorder! 7 Thin outside, thick inside ThickThinBorder! 8 Thick outside, thin inside ThickTopBottomBorder! 9 Thick top and bottom, no side border ButtonBorder! 10 Button style ColumnBorderBetween! 11 Between columns ColumnBorderAll! 12 Around columns NoBorder! 127 Use default ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TextBorderEdit TextBorderEnd ──── ──── For Example... To change the border style of the current page border to thick, the command sequence is: TextBorderEdit(PageBorder!) TextBorderStyle(Thick!) TextBorderEnd(Save!) Tell Me More... TextBorderStyle specifies a border style for the current border. If the cursor is not in text with a border, an error is returned. This command must be used in conjunction with TextBorderEdit and TextBorderEnd. This command is the equivalent of choosing Graphics; Borders; Paragraph, Page, or Column; Border Style; highlighting a style; Select. TextColor Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtClr Syntax: TextColor(Name;Red Value;Green Value;Blue Value) Parameters: Name (optional) A character expression specifying a predefined color name. Red Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of red in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Green Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of green in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Blue Value (optional) A numeric expression specifying the amount of blue in a color. Value ranges from 0 to 255. See Also: TextShade ──── ──── For Example... To specify red text, the command is: TextColor("Red";255;0;0) Tell Me More... TextColor specifies a text color. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Print Color, highlighting a color, Select. TextScreenAutoSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtScrAutoSel Syntax: TextScreenAutoSelect Parameters: None See Also: TextScreenSelect SetupSave ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TextScreenAutoSelect makes a "best guess" selection of a screen type for text mode display. This command must be used in conjunction with SetupSave. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors, Screen Type, Auto Select. TextScreenOptionsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtScrOptDlg Syntax: TextScreenOptionsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... TextScreenOptionsDlg displays the Text Mode Screen Type/Colors dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors. TextScreenSelect Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtScrSel Syntax: TextScreenSelect(Filename;General Type;Specific Type) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying the name of a graphics driver. General Type A character expression specifying the name of a general screen type. Specific Type A character expression specifying the name of a specific screen type. See Also: TextScreenAutoSelect ──── ──── For Example... To select an IBM VGA 80x25 16 color screen type, the command is: TextScreenSelect("TIBM.VRS";"IBM VGA (& compatibles)";"IBM 80x25 16 Color") Tell Me More... TextScreenSelect selects a screen type for text mode display. This command must be used in conjunction with SetupSave. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Display, Text Mode Screen Type/Colors, Screen Type, highlighting a general screen type, Select, highlighting a specific screen type, Select. TextShade Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TxtShade Syntax: TextShade(Percentage) Parameters: Percentage A numeric expression specifying a shading percentage for a text color. See Also: TextColor ──── ──── For Example... To specify blue text of half intensity, the command sequence is: TextColor("Blue";0;0;255) TextShade(50) Tell Me More... TextShade specifies the intensity of a text color, where 100% is full intensity. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Print Color, Shade, and specifying a percentage. Thesaurus Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Thesaur Syntax: Thesaurus Parameters: None See Also: Grammatik SpellerDlg ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Thesaurus displays the Thesaurus dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools, Thesaurus. ThousandsSeparator Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Thousep Syntax: Thousands Separator(Character) Parameters: Character A character expression specifying a character that appears between every three digits as a separator. See Also: TableCellNumberFormat TableCellNumberUseCommas TableColumnNumberFormat TableColumnNumberUseCommas TableNumberFormat TableNumberUseCommas ──── ──── For Example... To specify a period (.) as the thousands separator, the command is: Thousands Separator(".") Tell Me More... Thousands Separator specifies a character that appears in numbers greater than or equal to 1000 to separate each three digits. Use with the Comma! number type specified in TableCellNumberFormat, TableColumnNumberFormat, or TableNumberFormat, or with TableCellNumberUseCommas, TableColumnNumberUseCommas, or TableNumberUseCommas. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Character, Thousands Separator, and typing a character. ToACombinePageNumbers Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToACombPgNum Syntax: ToACombinePageNumbers(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to combine sequential page numbers as a default. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not combine Yes! 1 Combine ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToADefinitionCombine ──── ──── For Example... To combine sequential page numbers in all new tables of authorities, the command is: ToACombinePageNumbers(Yes!) Tell Me More... ToACombinePageNumbers determines whether to combine sequential page numbers in all new tables of authorities. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit, Setup, Combine Sequential Page Numbers. ToADefinition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADef Syntax: ToADefinition(Section Name) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To specify a section named SWITCHS and insert a definition, the command is: ToADefinition("SWITCHS") Tell Me More... ToADefinition specifies a section and inserts a table of authorities definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Select. ToADefinitionCombine Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefComb Syntax: ToADefinitionCombine(Section Name;State) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. State Determines whether to combine sequential page numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoCombine! 0 Do not combine Combine! 1 Combine ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToACombinePageNumbers ──── ──── For Example... To combine sequential page numbers in a section named SWITCHS, the command is: ToADefinitionCombine("SWITCHS";Combine!) Tell Me More... ToADefinitionCombine determines whether to combine sequential page numbers in a section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit, Combine Sequential Page Numbers. ToADefinitionCreate Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefCre Syntax: ToADefinitionCreate(Section Name;Style;Numbering Mode;Underlining;Sequential Pages;Page Number Format) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. Style Specifies a style for the current section. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbering Mode Specifies how to display page references. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefNone! 0 No numbers DefFollows! 1 Number follows entry DefParentheses! 2 Number in parentheses follows entry DefFlushRight! 3 Number flush right DefLeader! 4 Number flush right with dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Underlining Determines whether to allow underlining. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoToAUnderline! 0 No underlining ToAUnderline! 1 Underlining ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Sequential Pages Determines whether to combine sequential page numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoCombine! 0 Do not combine Combine! 1 Combine ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Page Number Format (optional) Specifies how page numbers appear in references. See Also: ToADefinitionDelete ──── ──── For Example... To create a definition for a section named SWITCHS with flush right page numbers and dot leaders, the command is: ToADefinitionCreate("SWITCHS";ToAStyle!;DefLeader!;ToAUnderline!; Combine!) ──── ──── Tell Me More... ToADefinitionCreate creates a table of authorities definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Create, entering a name, selecting a Numbering Mode option, and entering, selecting, and specifying options. ──── ──── ToADefinitionDelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefDel Syntax: ToADefinitionDelete(Section Name) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To delete a section definition named SWITCHS, the command is: ToADefinitionDelete("SWITCHS") Tell Me More... ToADefinitionDelete deletes a table of authorities section definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Delete. ToADefinitionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefDlg Syntax: ToADefinitionDlg Parameters: None See Also: ToADefinition ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ToADefinitionDlg displays the Define Table of Authorities dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define. ToADefinitionMode Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefMode Syntax: ToADefinitionMode(Section Name;Numbering Mode)Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. Numbering Mode Specifies how page references are displayed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefNone! 0 No numbers DefFollows! 1 Number follows entry DefParentheses! 2 Number in parentheses follows entry DefFlushRight! 3 Number flush right DefLeader! 4 Number flush right with dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To change the display of page references in a section called SWITCHS to flush right with no dot leader, the command is: ToADefinitionMode("SWITCHS";DefFlushRight!) Tell Me More... ToADefinitionMode changes the display of page references in a section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Edit, and selecting a Numbering Mode option. ToADefinitionRename Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefRen Syntax: ToADefinitionRename(Current Name;New Name) Parameters: Current Name A character expression specifying a section name. New Name A character expression specifying a new name for a section. See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To rename a section from SWITCHS to UTAH SWITCHS, the command is: ToADefinitionRename("SWITCHS";"UTAH SWITCHS") Tell Me More... ToADefinitionRename renames a section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Edit, Name, and entering a name. ToADefinitionRetrieve Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefRet Syntax: ToADefinitionRetrieve(Filename;Section Name) Parameters: Filename A character expression specifying a filename. Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To retrieve a section named SWITCHS in a file named PROBATE, the command is: ToADefinitionRetrieve("PROBATE";"SWITCHS") Tell Me More... ToADefinitionRetrieve retrieves a section from another document into the current document. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Retrieve, entering a filename, and marking sections to retrieve. ToADefinitionStyle Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefSty Syntax: ToADefinitionStyle(Section Name;Style) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. Style Specifies a style for the current section. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To specify the TableofCont1 style for a section named SWITCHS, the command is: ToADefinitionStyle("SWITCHS";ToC1Style!) Tell Me More... ToADefinitionStyle changes the style for a section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Edit, Style, Select, and highlighting a style. ToADefinitionUnderline Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToADefUnd Syntax: ToADefinitionUnderline(Section Name;Underlining) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. Underlining Determines whether underlining is allowed. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoToAUnderline! 0 No underlining ToAUnderline! 1 Underlining ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To allow underlining in a section named SWITCHS, the command is: ToADefinitionUnderline("SWITCHS";ToAUnderline!) Tell Me More... ToADefinitionUnderline determines whether underlining is allowed in a section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Edit, Allow Underlining. ToAEditFullForm Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAEdFullForm Syntax: ToAEditFullForm(Short Form) Parameters: Short Form A character expression specifying the short form of a full form to edit. See Also: SubstructureCancel SubstructureExit ToAMark ──── ──── For Example... To edit a full form with the short form Brown v. Board of Education, the command sequence is: ToAEditFullForm("Brown v. Board of Education") Type("385 U.S.") SubstructureExit Tell Me More... ToAEditFullForm initiates editing changes to a full form. Use SubstructureExit to end editing and save changes. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Edit Full, selecting a form, Full Form. ToAEditFullFormDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAEdFullFormDlg Syntax: ToAEditFullFormDlg Parameters: None See Also: ToAEditFullForm ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ToAEditFullFormDlg displays the Edit Table of Authorities Marks dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Edit Full. ToAEditPageFormat Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAEdPgFmt Syntax: ToAEditPageFormat(Section Name;Page Format) Parameters: Section Name A character expression specifying a section name. Page Format Specifies a page format. To specify a custom format, use a character expression. To use the current document format, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DocFormat! 0 Current document format ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To include a chapter number and a period in front of the page number for a section named SWITCHS, the command is: ToAEditPageFormat("SWITCHS";"[chpt ]") Tell Me More... ToAEditPageFormat changes the page format for a section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, highlighting a section, Edit, Page Format, Different from Document, and entering a custom page format. ToAEditSection Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAEdSection Syntax: ToAEditSection(Short Form;Section) Parameters: Short Form A character expression specifying a short form. Section A character expression specifying a new section to assign the full form to. See Also: ToAEditFullForm ──── ──── For Example... To reassign a reference with the short form Brown v. Board of Education to a section named SWITCHS, the command is: ToAEditSection("Brown v. Board of Education";"SWITCHS") Tell Me More... ToAEditSection reassigns a reference to a different section. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Edit Full, highlighting a reference, Section, highlighting a section, Select. ToAEditShortForm Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAEdShortForm Syntax: ToAEditShortForm(Current;New) Parameters: Current A character expression specifying a short form. New A character expression specifying a new short form. See Also: ToAMark ──── ──── For Example... To rename a short form Brown v. Board of Education to Brown v. United States, the command is: ToAEditShortForm("Brown v. Board of Education";"Brown v. United States") Tell Me More... ToAEditShortForm renames a short form. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Edit Full, Short Form, and entering a short form. ToAMark Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAMark Syntax: ToAMark(Short Form;Section Name) Parameters: Short Form (optional) A character expression specifying a short form. Section Name (optional) A character expression specifying a section name. See Also: ToADefinitionCreate ──── ──── For Example... To mark a reference with the short form Brown v. Board of Education and include it in a section named SWITCHS, the command is: ToAMark("Brown v. Board of Education";"SWITCHS") Tell Me More... ToAMark marks blocked text as a table of authorities reference. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Mark Full, Section Name, entering a name, Short Form, and entering a short form. ToAMarkFullFormDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAMarkFullFormDlg Syntax: ToAMarkFullFormDlg Parameters: None See Also: ToAMark ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ToAMarkFullFormDlg displays the ToA Full Form dialog box. This command is the equivalent of blocking text and choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Mark Full. ToAMarkShortForm Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAMarkShortForm Syntax: ToAMarkShortForm(Short Form) Parameters: Short Form A character expression specifying a short form. See Also: ToAMark ──── ──── For Example... To mark the short form Brown v. Board of Education, the command is: ToAMarkShortForm("Brown v. Board of Education") Tell Me More... ToAMarkShortForm marks a short form. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Mark Short, and entering a short form. ToAMarkShortFormDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAMarkShortFormDlg Syntax: ToAMarkShortFormDlg Parameters: None See Also: ToAMarkShortForm ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ToAMarkShortFormDlg displays the Mark ToA Short Form dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Mark Short. ToAUnderlining Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToAUnderlining Syntax: ToAUnderlining(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to allow underlining in a table of authorities as a default. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 No underlining Yes! 1 Underlining ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToADefinitionUnderline ──── ──── For Example... To allow underlining in tables of authorities as a default, the command is: ToAUnderlining(Yes!) Tell Me More... ToAUnderlining determines whether underlining is allowed in tables of authorities as a default. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Edit, Setup, Allow Underlining. ToCDefinition Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToCDef Syntax: ToCDefinition({Style1;Format1;Style2;Format2...};W rap;Page Format) Parameters: Style Specifies a style for each table of contents level. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NormalStyle! 0 Normal style FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! 16 Ftnindoc style FigureNumberStyle! 18 FigureNum style TableBoxNumberStyle! 19 TblBoxNum style TextBoxNumberStyle! 20 TextBoxNum style UserBoxNumberStyle! 21 UserBoxNum style EquationNumberStyle! 22 EquationNum style HypertextStyle! 23 Hypertext style ToC1Style! 24 TableofCont1 style ToC2Style! 25 TableofCont2 style ToC3Style! 26 TableofCont3 style ToC4Style! 27 TableofCont4 style ToC5Style! 28 TableofCont5 style Index1Style! 29 Index1 style Index2Style! 30 Index2 style ListStyle! 31 List style ToAStyle! 32 TableofAuth style InitialCodesStyle! 33 InitialCodes style BoxTextStyle! 34 BoxText style CaptionStyle! 35 Caption style FootnoteStyle! 36 Footnote style EndnoteStyle! 37 Endnote style CommentStyle! 38 Comment style HeaderAStyle! 39 HeaderA style HeaderBStyle! 40 HeaderB style FooterAStyle! 41 FooterA style FooterBStyle! 42 FooterB style WatermarkAStyle! 43 WatermarkA style WatermarkBStyle! 44 WatermarkB style ParagraphOutlnStyle! 45 Paragraph outline style OutlineStyle! 46 Outline style LegalOutlnStyle! 47 Legal outline style BulletsOutlnStyle! 48 Bullets outline style HeadingsOutlnStyle! 49 Headings outline style Legal_2OutlnStyle! 50 Legal 2 outline style NumbersOutlnStyle! 51 Numbers outline style Level1Style! 52 Level 1 style Level2Style! 53 Level 2 style Level3Style! 54 Level 3 style Level4Style! 55 Level 4 style Level5Style! 56 Level 5 style Level6Style! 57 Level 6 style Level7Style! 58 Level 7 style Level8Style! 59 Level 8 style Legal1Style! 60 Legal 1 style Legal2Style! 61 Legal 2 style Legal3Style! 62 Legal 3 style Legal4Style! 63 Legal 4 style Legal5Style! 64 Legal 5 style Legal6Style! 65 Legal 6 style Legal7Style! 66 Legal 7 style Legal8Style! 67 Legal 8 style Heading1Style! 68 Heading 1 style Heading2Style! 69 Heading 2 style Heading3Style! 70 Heading 3 style Heading4Style! 71 Heading 4 style Heading5Style! 72 Heading 5 style Heading6Style! 73 Heading 6 style Heading7Style! 74 Heading 7 style Heading8Style! 75 Heading 8 style ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Format Specifies the format for references. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DefNone! 0 No numbers DefFollows! 1 Number follows entry DefParentheses! 2 Number in parentheses follows entry DefFlushRight! 3 Number flush right DefLeader! 4 Number flush right with dot leader ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Wrap Determines whether to wrap the last level. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ NoLevelWrap! 0 Do not wrap LevelWrap! 1 Wrap ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Page Format (optional) Specifies a page format. To specify a custom format, use a character expression. To use the current document format, select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ DocFormat! 0 Current document format ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: ToCMark ──── ──── For Example... To create a single-level table of contents with flush right dot leader page numbers, the command is: ToCDefinition({ToC1Style!;DefLeader!};LevelWrap!) Tell Me More... ToCDefinition defines a table of contents and inserts the definition. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Contents, Define, specifying a number of levels, and specifying and selecting options. ToCDefinitionDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToCDefDlg Syntax: TocDefinitionDlg Parameters: None See Also: ToCDefinition ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ToCDefinitionDlg displays the Define Table of Contents dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Contents, Define. ToCMark Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToCMark Syntax: ToCMark(Level) Parameters: Level A numeric expression specifying a table of contents level. See Also: ToCDefinition ──── ──── For Example... To mark text for level 1 of a table of contents, the command is: ToCMark(1) Tell Me More... ToCMark marks blocked text for inclusion in a table of contents. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Contents, Mark, and specifying a level. ToCMarkDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: ToCMarkDlg Syntax: ToCMarkDlg Parameters: None See Also: ToCMark ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... ToCMarkDlg displays the Mark Table of Contents dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Table of Contents, Mark. Type Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Type Syntax: Type(Text) Parameters: Text A character expression specifying the text to insert. See Also: TypeChar ──── ──── For Example... To insert the word "bourgeoisie" in a document, the command is: Type("bourgeoisie") Tell Me More... Type inserts text at the cursor position. This command is the equivalent of typing in a document window. TypeChar Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TypeChar Syntax: TypeChar(Set Number;Character Number) Parameters: Set Number A numeric expression specifying a WP character set. Character Number A numeric expression specifying a character in a WP character set. See Also: Type ──── ──── For Example... To insert the section symbol (), which is character 6 of set 4, the command is: TypeChar(4;6) Tell Me More... TypeChar inserts a character from the WordPerfect character sets. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl-W, selecting a character, Insert. Typeover Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Typeover Syntax: Typeover(State) Parameters: State Determines whether Typeover mode is on or off. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Off On! 1 On ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: TypeoverKey ──── ──── For Example... To turn on Typeover mode, the command is: Typeover(On!) Tell Me More... Typeover determines whether Typeover mode is on or off. TypeoverKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: TypeoverKey Syntax: TypeoverKey Parameters: None See Also: Typeover ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... TypeoverKey toggles the current Typeover mode state. This command is the equivalent of pressing Insert or Ins. Undelete Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Undel Syntax: Undelete(Level) Parameters: Level A numeric expression specifying a level to undelete. See Also: Undo ──── ──── For Example... To cancel the last deletion, the command is: Undelete(1) Tell Me More... Undelete restores up to the last three deletions. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Undelete, Restore. UndeleteDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: UndelDlg Syntax: UndeleteDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... UndeleteDlg displays the Undelete dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Undelete. UnderlineKey Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: UndKey Syntax: UnderlineKey Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... UnderlineKey is used by the Keyboard Layout to map the underline keystroke. On the Original keyboard this command is the equivalent of pressing F8. UnderlineSpaces Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: UndSpaces Syntax: UnderlineSpaces(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to underline spaces. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not underline spaces Yes! 1 Underline spaces ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: UnderlineTabs ──── ──── For Example... To underline spaces in a document, the command is: UnderlineSpaces(Yes!) Tell Me More... UnderlineSpaces toggles the Underline Spaces option on and off. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Underline, Spaces. UnderlineTabs Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: UndTabs Syntax: UnderlineTabs(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to underline tabs. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not underline tabs Yes! 1 Underline tabs ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: Underline Spaces ──── ──── For Example... To underline tabs, the command is: UnderlineTabs(Yes!) Tell Me More... UnderlineTabs toggles the Underline Tabs option on and of. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, Font, Underline, Tabs. Undo Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: Undo Syntax: Undo Parameters: None See Also: Undelete ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... Undo restores the last document change. Choosing Undo a second restores the last undo. This command is the equivalent of choosing Edit, Undo. UpArrow Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: UpArr Syntax: UpArrow Parameters: None See Also: PosLineUp ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... UpArrow is the equivalent of pressing the up arrow key (). VerticalBarSetup Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VertBarSetup Syntax: VerticalBarSetup(State) Parameters: State Determines whether to activate the vertical scroll bar when WordPerfect starts. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Turns off vertical scroll bar On! 1 Turns on vertical scroll bar ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To automatically display the vertical scroll bar, the command is: VerticalBarSetup(On!) Tell Me More... VerticalBarSetup toggles the Vertical Scroll Bar on and off in the current display mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Screen Setup, Window Options, Vert. Scroll Bar (either Graphics or Text depending on the current display mode). VerticalBarSetupGraphics Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VertBarSetupGraph Syntax: VerticalBarSetupGraphics(State) Parameters: (State) Specifies whether the vertical bar is displayed in graphics mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not display the vertical scroll bar On! 1 Display the vertical scroll bar ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: VerticalBarSetupText VerticalBarSetup ──── ──── For Example... To display the vertical scroll bar while in Graphics Mode, the command is: VerticalBarSetupGraphics(On!) Tell Me More... VerticalBarSetupGraphics specifies whether the vertical scroll bar will display in Graphics Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Vertical Scroll Bar in Graphics Mode. VerticalBarSetupText Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VertBarSetupTxt Syntax: VerticalBarSetupText(State) Parameters: State Specifies whether the vertical bar is displayed in text mode. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Do not display the vertical scroll bar On! 1 Display the vertical scroll bar ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: VerticalBarSetupGraphics VerticalBarSetup ──── ──── For Example... To display the vertical scroll bar while in Text Mode, the command is: VerticalBarSetupText(On!) Tell Me More... VerticalBarSetupText specifies whether the vertical scroll bar will display in Text Mode. This command is the equivalent of choosing View, Vertical Scroll Bar in Text Mode. VolumeNumber Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VolNum Syntax: VolumeNumber(Number) Parameters: Number A numeric expression specifying a volume number. ──── ──── For Example... To specify a current page as volume 5, the command is: VolumeNumber(5) Tell Me More... VolumeNumber specifies a current volume number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Volume, New Number, and entering a number. VolumeNumberDecrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VolNumDec Syntax: VolumeNumberDecrement Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... VolumeNumberDecrement decreases the current volume number by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Volume, Decrement Number. VolumeNumberDisplay Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VolNumDisp Syntax: VolumeNumberDisplay Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... VolumeNumberDisplay displays a current volume number. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Volume, Display in Document. VolumeNumberIncrement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VolNumInc Syntax: VolumeNumberIncrement Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... VolumeNumberIncrement increases a current volume number by one. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Volume, Increment Number. VolumeNumberMethod Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: VolNumMeth Syntax: VolumeNumberMethod(Type) Parameters: Type Specifies a numbering type to display volume numbers. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Numbers! 0 Arabic numbers LowerLetters! 1 Lowercase letters UpperLetters! 2 Uppercase letters LowerRoman! 3 Lowercase roman numerals UpperRoman! 4 Uppercase roman numerals ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display volume numbers as uppercase roman numerals, the command is: VolumeNumberMethod(UpperRoman!) Tell Me More... VolumeNumberMethod specifies a numbering type to display volume numbers. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Page, Page Numbering, Volume, Numbering Method and selecting a type. WatermarkA Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WmarkA Syntax: WatermarkA(State;Pages) Parameters: State A numeric expression specifying the state of Watermark A. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Turns off Watermark A Create! 1 Creates Watermark A Edit! 2 Edits Watermark A ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pages (Optional) A numeric expression specifying Watermark pages. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OddPages! 1 Watermark on odd pages EvenPages! 2 Watermark on even pages AllPages! 3 Watermark on all pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: WatermarkB ──── ──── For Example... To create Watermark A on all pages, the command is: WatermarkA(Create!;AllPages!) Tell Me More... WatermarkA either creates, edits or turns off Watermark A. Create and Edit opens the Watermark Editor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Watermarks, Watermark A, and selecting Create, Edit, or Off. WatermarkB Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WmarkB Syntax: WatermarkB Parameters: State A numeric expression specifying the state of Watermark B. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Turns off Watermark B Create! 1 Creates Watermark B Edit! 2 Edits Watermark B ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Pages (Optional) A numeric expression specifying Watermark pages. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ OddPages! 1 Watermark on odd pages EvenPages! 2 Watermark on even pages AllPages! 3 Watermark on all pages ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ See Also: WatermarkA ──── ──── For Example... To edit the Watermark B and force it to appear on odd pages regardless of the old definition, the command is: WatermarkB(Edit!;OddPages!) Tell Me More... WatermarkB either creates, edits or turns off Watermark B. Create and Edit opens the Watermark Editor. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Header/Footer/Watermark, Watermarks, Watermark B, and selecting Create, Edit, or Off. WidowOrphan Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WidOrph Syntax: WidowOrphan(State) Parameters: State A numeric expression determining whether Widow/Orphan is active. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Deactivates Widow/Orphan On! 1 Activates Widow/Orphan ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To activate Widow/Orphan, the command is: WidowOrphan(On!) Tell Me More... WidowOrphan toggles Widow/Orphan on and off. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Widow/Orphan Protect. WindowCascade Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinCasc Syntax: WindowCascade Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowCascade overlaps document windows so the title bar of each window displays. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Cascade. WindowDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinDlg Syntax: WindowDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... WindowDlg displays the Window dialog box. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl+F3, and choosing Window. WindowFrame Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinFrame Syntax: WindowFrame Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowFrame frames a current document window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Frame. WindowMaximize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinMax Syntax: WindowMaximize Parameters: None See Also: WindowMinimize ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowMaximize expands a framed or minimized window to a full- sized window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Maximize. WindowMinimize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinMin Syntax: WindowMinimize Parameters: None See Also: WindowMaximize ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowMinimize reduces a framed or maximized window to a smaller window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Minimize. WindowMove Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinMove Syntax: WindowMove(Col;Row) Parameters: Col A numeric expression specifying the X coordinate. Row A numeric expression specifying the Y coordinate. ──── ──── For Example... To move a framed and sized window to coordinates 100, 100, the command is: WindowMove(100;100) Tell Me More... WindowMove moves the top left corner of a current document window to a specified position on a screen grid that is relative to the currently selected screen driver. This command is only available if the current window is framed or re-sized. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl-F3, Window, Move, and positioning the window with the arrow keys. WindowNext Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinNext Syntax: WindowNext Parameters: None See Also: WindowPrevious ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowNext activates the last accessed document window. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Next. WindowPrevious Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinPrev Syntax: WindowPrevious Parameters: None See Also: WindowNext ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowPrevious activates the previous document window in the order the windows were last accessed. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Previous. WindowSize Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinSize Syntax: WindowSize(Col;Row;Width;Height) Parameters: Col A numeric expression specifying the column position of the left edge of a window. This parameter in conjunction with the Row parameter defines the top left corner of a window. Row A numeric expression specifying how far below the top of the screen to begin a window. Width A numeric expression specifying window width beginning at the specified Column parameter. Height A numeric expression specifying window height beginning at the specified Row parameter. ──── ──── For Example... To define a window that begins at 50 pixels from the left edge of the screen and 100 pixels from the top and extends to 200 and 350 pixels respectively, the command is: WindowSize(50;100;200;350) Tell Me More... WindowSize specifies the height and width of a window. A current window must be framed for this command to function. This command is the equivalent of pressing Ctrl-F3, Window, Size and sizing the window with the mouse. WindowTile Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WinTile Syntax: WindowTile Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. Tell Me More... WindowTile reduces open document windows and displays them side by side with no overlapping. This command is the equivalent of choosing Window, Tile. WordLetterSpacing Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WordLetSpac Syntax: WordLetterSpacing(Word;Letter) Parameters: Word Specifies spacing between words. Either select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a numeric expression. The numeric expression specifies a percentage of the WordPerfect default Optimal. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 Spacing recommended by the font manufacturer Optimal! 100 Spacing recommended by WordPerfect Corporation ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Letter Specifies spacing between letters. Either select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent, or enter a numeric expression. The numeric expression specifies a percentage of Optimal. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Normal! 0 Spacing recommended by the font manufacturer Optimal! 100 Spacing recommended by WordPerfect Corporation ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To specify normal word spacing with letter spacing 80 percent of Optimal, the command is: WordLetterSpacing(Normal!;80) Tell Me More... WordLetterSpacing specifies the display spacing between words and letters. Normal is the specification suggested by the font manufacturer; Optimal is the specification suggested by WordPerfect Corporation. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Printer Functions, Letterspacing. WordSpacingJustificationLimits Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WordSpacJustLim Syntax: WordSpacingJustificationLimits(Min;Max) Parameters: Min A numeric expression specifying a minimum percentage. Max A numeric expression specifying a maximum percentage. ──── ──── For Example... To specify minimum and maximum justification limits of 40% and 300% respectively, the command is: WordSpacingJustificationLimits(40;300) Tell Me More... WordSpacingJustificationLimits applies when full justification is active, adjusting spaces between words to justify text on a line. When a word spacing limit is reached, character spacing begins. This command is the equivalent of choosing Layout, Other, Printer Functions, Word Spacing Justification Limits. WP51CursorMovement Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WP51CursMovement Syntax: WP51CursorMovement(State) Parameters: State Activates or deactivates the WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS cursor movement. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ Off! 0 Deactivate WP51 cursor movement On! 1 Activate WP51 cursor movement ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To deactivate WP51 Cursor Movement, the command is: WP51CursorMovement(Off!) Tell Me More... WP51CursorMovement activates or deactivates the WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS cursor movement. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, WordPerfect 5.1 Cursor Movement, OK. WP51Keyboard Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WP51Kbd Syntax: WP51Keyboard(State) Parameters: State Selects or deselects the WordPerfect 5.1 keyboard equivalent. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 Do not use WP51 keyboard Yes! 1 Use WP51 keyboard ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To deselect the WP51 Keyboard, the command is: WP51Keyboard(No!) Tell Me More... WP51Keyboard changes Esc from Cancel to the Repeat dialog box, F1 from Help to Cancel, and F3 from the Switch dialog box to Help. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, Setup, Environment, WordPerfect 5.1 Keyboard (F1 = Cancel). WPCharDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WPCharDlg Syntax: WPCharDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... WPCharDlg displays the WordPerfect Characters dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Font, WP Characters. WPDocsOnly Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WPDocsOnly Syntax: WPDocsOnly(State) Parameters: State Determines whether only WordPerfect documents are displayed in File Manager. Select an enumerated type or its numeric equivalent. Enumerated Numeric Description Type Equivalent ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ No! 0 All documents Yes! 1 Only WordPerfect documents ═════════════════════════════════════════════════ ──── ──── For Example... To display only WordPerfect documents in File Manager, the command is: WPDocsOnly(Yes!) Tell Me More... WPDocsOnly either displays all documents or only WordPerfect documents in the File Manager. This command is the equivalent of choosing File, File Manager, OK, Sort By, WP Documents Only. WPHelpDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WPHelpDlg Syntax: WPHelpDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... WPHelpDlg displays the WP Info dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Help, WP Info. WritingToolsDlg Show Me An Example... Tell Me More... ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Abbreviation: WritingToolsDlg Syntax: WritingToolsDlg Parameters: None ──── ──── For Example... Since this command doesn't require parameters, the command name is all that is needed to perform the task. To include this command in a macro you are recording, display the dialog box with the steps described in Tell Me More..., then select the check box located in the upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box will only be visible while you are recording a macro. After selecting the check box, choose Cancel to close the dialog box. Tell Me More... WritingToolsDlg displays the Writing Tools dialog box. This command is the equivalent of choosing Tools, Writing Tools.